4 Tech Spec Work 1 and 3 Part El Annex

Tender Documents – Volume 3
Velipoje Sewerage Collection System and Waste Water Treatment Plant
REPUBLIC OF ALBANIA
MINISTRY OF PUBLIC WORKS TRANSPORT & TELECOMMUNICATION
GENERAL DIRECTORY OF WATER SUPPLY AND SEWERAGE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS

ANNEXES
Particular Specifications Rev. 01 2010

Annexes
Derby-E
1. IMPORTANT NOTE
The present document reports the technical features of contractual work item and
equipments.
These technical features are used in the definition of price of works item as listed in
the BoQ “Work item list” chapter.
In particular the chapter 1.7. GENERAL AND PRELIMINARY of Particular
Specifications (Drawing n°3.4.3) page 14 state a general criterion that will allow the
Contractor to chose any equipment or material present in the market that satisfy the
contractual requests. It is important to notice that in the case of employment of
specific products in the definition of the prices (so named PA items of Price
Analysis list) the diction “or equivalent” was always used.
Particular Specifications for Electrical Works

Rev. 01 2010
Derby-E
PRETREATMENT UNIT
Technical specification

Annexes
Derby-E
Sewage fine screening
The equipment will be installed in channel with the following minimum technical features:
- All made in stainless steel AISI 304;
- Frame made in stainless steel and spiral in carbon steel
- Spacing (circular hole) 3 mm;
- Maximum inclination 45°;
- Channel width 600 mm;
- Channel depth 1200 mm;
- Discharge height from channel edge 1200 mm;
- Axial total length 5600 mm;
- Compaction rate 35% SS;
- Maximum flowrate 317 m3/h (with ppm < 500 mg/l);
- Screw conveyor diameter 200 mm;
- Installed power 1.1 kW; international protection class IP55; insulation class F (Tmax=100°C+ 15°C);
- Power supply 400V three-phase – 50 Hz
- Rubberized canvas side straps for holding the side walls of the channel;
- Plates sliding screw conveyor in stainless steel Aisi 304;
- Compaction zone consists of a cylinder, "Johnson profile with polyethylene pipe for the return of the liquid in the
channel;
- Dry pipe transport;
- Dry pipe transport;
- Dry compacted material;
- bags in continued length 70 mt;
- N° 01 support foot telescopic;
- Eyebolts for lifting.
Sand collector
- Basin Diameter 2000 mm;

- Diameter of dryers 100 DN;
- Diameter turbine blades 1900 mm;
- Rotational Speed 12 rpm;
- Diameter Water connections 1" ¼ gas;
- Diameter Water connections 1" ¼ gas;
- Engine power 0,75 kW;
- Utilization of carbon steel galvanized hot;
- Bolting galvanized steel;
- Gearmotor gear in oil bath;
- Containment gear box
- Plank thick;
- Mixing paddles applied to the axis bearing;
- Dryers tire "air lift" Aspiration sands decanted.
Sand selector
- Stainless steel execution Aisi 304;
- Helix carbon micro-alloyed steel;
- Without central shaft propeller type;
- Hopper capacity 0,7 mc;
- Maximum Input Capacity 35 mc/h;
- Screw length 4500 mm;
- Tilting operating 25°;
- Nominal diameter auger 280 mm;
- Thickness helix 20 mm;
- Trough type Ad U;
- Trough Diameter 325 mm;
- Sliding Plates (n° 04) 40 x 10 mm Stainless steel Aisi 304;
- Overall length 4,7 m;
- Overall Width max 1,85 m;
- Cover lids bolted;
- Inlet pipe DN 125 PN 10;
- Water outlet pipe DN 200 PN 10;
- Outfall N° 01;
- Outfall Vertical type;
- Parallel shaft gearmotor type;
- Gearmotor position side exhaust;
- Gearmotor Model Nord Getreibe;
- Installed power 0,25 kW - 400 V. - 50 Hz - IP55;
- Screw rotation speed 5 rpm;
- Coating wear plates bolted;
- Rolling bolts A2;
- Surface treatment with fiberglass;
- Vent valve on the hopper;
- n°2 supporting foot carbon steel hot dip galvanized;
- Lifting eyebolts;
- Weirs internal profile thomson.
EQUALIZATION TANK EQUIPMENT

Annexes
Derby-E
Multi‐microprocessor control unit

Multi‐microprocessor control unit for the determination of free chlorine, pH, ORP potential and
temperature, housed in a single container, IP55 printed polystyrene flame retardant, complete with 4
digital displays for displaying instantaneous measure; 1 display alphanumeric (2x16) for programming.
With the following main features:
‐ Switchboard:
RS322 serial output;
Measuring cell with flow regulator (60lt. / h).
Supply pressure + ‐ 1 bar (constant);
Supply 0‐220V 50Hz.;
‐ Measurement of Chlorine (DPD photometric method):
Measurement range 0.00‐2.00 ppm of Cl2;
Resolution 0.01 ppm of Cl2;
Display 3 digit LED;
nr. 2 set‐POINTS configurable load max 3A 220V;
Current output 0 / 4 ¸ 20 mA programmable by keyboard;
Frequency analysis min. 3'max. 60'programmable by keyboard;
Cumulative alarm, by relay, repeating on display, for: bulb, measuring cell dirty, exhausted reagents, lack of
water, exceeding the delay time programmed for each of the SET‐POINTS.
‐ Measurement of pH (glass electrode combined monotube):
Measuring range pH 00.0‐14.0;
Resolution 0.1 pH;
nr. 2 Set‐points configured with max 3A 220V;
Current output 0 / 4 ¸ 20mA programmable by keyboard;
Frequency analysis continues;
Cumulative alarm, by relay, repeating on display, lack of water, exceeding the delay time programmed for
each of the Set‐Points.
‐ Measurement of Redox (combination electrode monotube Gold):
Measurement range ± 999 mV;
Resolution ± 1 mV;
Current output 0/4‐20mA programmable by keyboard;
Frequency analysis continues;
‐ Temperature (NTC):
Measuring range 0‐50 ° C;
Resolution 0.1 ° C.;
Current output 0/4‐20mA programmable by keyboard;
Frequency analysis continues.
Including probes, electrodes, mounting, electrical wiring and plumbing and everything else needed to make
the work complete and working to perfect rule book.

Conductivity analyzer microprocessor

Conductivity analyzer microprocessor with the following characteristics:
‐ Range configurable: 00:00 to 20:00 mS, 000 to 200 mS, 0000 to 2000 mS, 00 ‐ 20 ms, 000 ‐ 200 ms;
‐ Accuracy + ‐ 0.2% of f.s.;
‐ Numeric LCD Display with instantaneous measurement;
‐ Alphanumeric Backlit LCD Programming Display;
‐ Automatic calibration;
‐ Automatic or manual temperature compensation (‐30 ... +130 ° C);
‐ Planning by keyboard: two set‐points with hysteresis, cycle washing of the electrode, Delay time, limits of
the output current, communication parameters;
‐ Digital outputs: two of the SET‐POINTS, one for activation washing, one for alarm;
‐ Analog output, galvanically separated, 0/4‐20mA (max 750ohm);
‐ Power supply 0‐220V 50Hz;
‐ Container Aluminum;
‐ Box Full containment IP65 transparent cover, fastening pins, perforated panel and covered with lexan
gray;
‐ Cell for conductivity Thermocompensated body PP 1 "and graphite electrodes;
‐ Constant K = 1;
‐ Cable S332 (5 meters) shielded 4 poles;
‐ Range 0‐50000 mS;
‐ Temperature <= 90 ° C;
‐ Pressure <= 6 bar at 90 ° C (4 bar at 25 ° C);
‐ PVC electrode holder, Immersion, (L = 800mm ‐ Ø 63mm) and system cleaning electrodes.
Including probes, electrodes, mounting, electrical wiring and plumbing and any other charges and mastery
for giving the complete work and working to perfect rule of art.

Technical Information
Ultrasonic Level Measurement

Compact transmitters for non-contact level measurement of fluids,
pastes and coarse bulk materials
FMU40 FMU41 FMU42 FMU43 FMU44
Application Features and benefits

• Continuous, non-contact level measurement in fluids, • Quick and simple commissioning via menu-guided
pastes, sullages and coarse bulk materials local operation with four-line plain text display
• Flow measurement in open channels and measuring • Envelope curves on the local display for simple
weirs diagnosis
• System integration via: • Easy remote operation, diagnosis and measuring point
– HART® (standard), 4 to 20mA documentation with the supplied FieldCare operating
– PROFIBUS® PA program.
– FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus • Suitable for explosion hazardous areas
• Maximum measuring range: (Gas-Ex, Dust-Ex)
– FMU 40: • Linearization function (up to 32 points) for conversion
16 ft (5 m) in fluids / 6 ft (2 m) in bulk materials of the measured value into any unit of length, volume
– FMU 41: or flow rate
26 ft (8 m) in fluids / 12 ft (3.5 m) in bulk • Non-contact measurement method minimizes service
materials requirements
– FMU 42: • Optional remote display and operation (up to 65 ft /
33 ft (10 m) in fluids / 16 ft (5 m) in bulk 20 m) from transmitter)
materials • Installation possible from thread G 1½“, 1½" NPT, 2"
– FMU 43: NPT or universal slip-on flange
50 ft (15 m) in fluids / 23 ft (7 m) in bulk • Integrated temperature sensor for automatic
materials correction of the temperature dependent sound
– FMU44: velocity
65 ft (20 m) in fluids / 33 ft (10 m) in bulk
materials
Prosonic M
Table of Contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Design; dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operating frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Housing design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Process connection, sealing material, sensor material . . . . . . . . . 23
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Load HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Output damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Certificates and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Auxiliary energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Terminal compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hazardous area approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 External standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fieldbus plug connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Product structure FMU 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Current consumption (2-wire-instruments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
HART ripple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Max. noise HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reaction time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation bracket for FMU 40/41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adapter flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Pulse frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Measuring error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Influence of the vapor pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Commubox FXA191 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Commubox FXA195 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Service Interface FXA193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation variants FMU 40, FMU 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation variants FMU42, FMU44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation variants FMU 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation conditions for level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation in narrow shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation conditions for flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Description of device functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Blocking distance, nozzle installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Safety Instructions ATEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Safety Instructions NEPSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Control drawings Installation drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Resistance to alternating temperature cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Ingress protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2
Prosonic M
Function and system design

Measuring principle
BD
20 mA
100%
E F
4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-de-001
E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking
distance
Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials
FMU40 9.8" (0.25 m) 16 ft (5 m) 6.5 ft (2 m)
FMU41 13.8" (0.35 m) 26 ft (8 m) 11.5 ft (3.5 m)
FMU42 15.7" (0.4 m) 33 ft (10 m) 16 ft (5 m)
FMU43 23.6" (0.6 m) 50 ft (15 m) 23 ft (7 m)
FMU44 19.7" (0.5 m) 65 ft (20 m) 33 ft (10 m)
Time-of-flight method
The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface. The pulses are
reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t between pulse transmission and
reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound c) to calculate the distance D between the
sensor membrane and the product surface:
D = c ⋅ t/2
As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows:
L=E-D
An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by temperature
changes.
Interference echo suppression

The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g. from edges,
welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.
Calibration
Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.
Blocking distance
Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos from the blocking distance cannot be
evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.
3
Prosonic M
Equipment architecture 4 to 20 mA output with HART protocol

The complete measuring system consists of:
PLC
FieldCare FieldCare
Commubox Power supply service adapter

FXA191/195 (for 4-wire) - FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291
- FXA193
transmitter power
supply unit
RMA422 operating and ENDRESS + HAUSER
or RN221N display module %
(communication resistor VU331

– + E
included) DELTABAR: * * * * * * * *
ONLINE
1 QUICK SETUP
2 OPERATING MENU
3 PV 352 mbar
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
4 SV 0 °C
HELP SAVE
6
ENDRESS + HAUSER
9 Page
Up
RMA 422 Bksp Delete
Page
On
#%& ABC DEF

1 2 3
Copy Paste Hot Key
GHI JKL MNO

4 5 6
Insert + Hot Key
HART handheld
PQRS TUV WXYZ
7 8 9
,()‘ _<> +*/
. 0 -
FXA191/195 375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
DXR375
Field Communicator
375
L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-en-007
If the HART communication resistor is not built into the supply unit, it is necessary to insert a communication
resistor of 250 Ω into the 2-wire line.
Local operation
• with display and operating module VU 331
• with a Personal Computer, FXA 193 and the operating software FieldCare
Remote operation
• with HART handheld terminal DXR 375
• with a Personal Computer, Commubox FXA 191 and the operating software COMMUWIN II respectively
FieldCare.
4
Prosonic M
System integration using PROFIBUS PA

A maximum of 32 transmitters (8 if mounted in an explosion hazardous location EEx ia IIC according to
FISCO-model) can be connected to the bus.The segment coupler provides the operating voltage to the bus.
Both on-site as well as remote operation are possible.
personal computer e.g. with

FieldCare and
Profibard resp. Proficard PLC
segment coupler
PROFIBUS DP
ENDRESS + HAUSER
PROFIBUS PA
T
More
operating and Functions
display module (valves etc)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER
service adapter
- FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291
%
– + E
- FXA193
Micropilot M Prosonic M
FieldCare
Levelflex M
L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-001
System integration using Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

A maximum of 32 transmitters (standard or EEx d) can be connected to the bus. For protection class EEx ia:
the maximum number of transmitters depends on the established rules and standards for intrinsically safe
circuits (EN 60070-14) and proof of instrinsic safety. Both local and remote operation are possible.
personal computer
e.g. with
NI-FBUS configurator
power supply
FF link
power conditioner T T
Additional
operating and functions
display module (valves etc.)
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER service adapter
- FXA291/ToF Adapter FXA291
%
– + E
- FXA193
Micropilot M Prosonic M FieldCare
Levelflex M
L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-003
5
Prosonic M
System integration using Rackbus

You can interconnect a maximum of 64 2-wire devices with HART protocol to a Rackbus. Use an FXN 672
interface module for each device. You can integrate this bus into a higher-level bus by using a ZA gateway.
Gateways are available for MODBUS, FIP, PROFIBUS, INTERBUS etc. Both on-site and remote operation are
possible.
personal computer PLC

with Commuwin II
RS 232C Bus
FXN672
FXN 671 FXN 671 FXN 671
Gateway to
MODBUS, FIP,
ZA 672 ZA 672
PROFIBUS,
INTERBUS etc.
+ + +
mA1 mA1 mA1
4…20 mA with HART
operating and
display module
VU331 ENDRESS + HAUSER
– + E
Micropilot M Prosonic M
FXA193
Levelflex M
FieldCare Package
L00-FMxxXXXX-14-00-06-en-006
! Hinweis!
The FXN672 can be used with all 2-wire devices of the Prosonic M family.
6
Prosonic M
System integration via Fieldgate
Vendor Managed Inventory

By using Fieldgate to interrogate tank or silo levels remotely, suppliers of raw materials can provide their regular
customers with information about the current supplies at any time and, for example, account for them in their
own production planning. For their part, the Fieldgate monitors the configured level limits and, if required,
automatically activates the next supply. The spectrum of options here ranges from a simple purchasing
requisition via e-mail through to fully automatic order administration by coupling XML data into the planning
systems on both sides.
Remote maintenance of measuring equipment

Fieldgates not only transfer the current measured values, they also alert the responsible standby personnel, if
required, via e-mail or SMS. In the event of an alarm or also when performing routine checks, service
technicians can diagnose and configure connected HART devices remotely. All that is required for this is the
corresponding HART operating software (e.g. FieldCare, ...) for the connected device. Fieldgate passes on the
information transparently, so that all options for the respective operating software are available remotely. Some
local service operations can be avoided by using remote diagnosis and remote configuration and all others can
at least be better planned and prepared.
Remote configuration/diagnostics Remote monitoring

HTTP script
via HART Client: Web browser
- FieldCare …
...
Multidrop-Connector
e.g. 2 x RN221N-B … FXN520
ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER
Analog
Ethernet
RN 221N RN 221N
GSM
Fieldgate
FXA520
FXN 520
Fieldgate 20...45 VDC
Channel 1 Channel 2 FXA520
-
.
L00-FXA520xx-14-00-06-en-009
7
Prosonic M
Input
Measured variable The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured.
Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate:
• level L in any units
• volume V in any units
• flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units
Measuring range The measuring range is limited by the range of a sensor. The sensor range is, in turn, dependent on the
operating conditions. To estimate the actual range, proceed as follows (see also the calculation example in the
diagram):
1. Determine which of the influences shown in the following table are appropriate for your process.
2. Add the corresponding attenuation values.
3. From the total attenuation, use the diagram to calculate the range.
Fluid surface Attenuation
Calm 0 dB
Waves 5 to 10 dB
Strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers) 10 to 20 dB
Bulk material surface Attenuation
Hard, rough (e.g. rubble) 40 dB
Soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker) 40 to 60 dB
Dust Attenuation
No dust formation 0 dB
Little dust formation 5 dB
Heavy dust formation 5 to 20 dB
Filling curtain in detection range Attenuation
None 0 dB
Small quantities 5 to 10 dB
Large quantities 10 to 40 dB
Temperature difference between Attenuation

sensor and product surface
to 68°F (20°C) 0 dB
to 104°F (40°C) 5 to 10 dB
to 176°F (80°C) 10 to 20 dB
8
Prosonic M
65 (20)
FMU 44
62 (19)
59 (18)
55 (17)
52 (16)
49 (15)
FMU 43
46 (14)
range in feet (m)

43 (13)
39 (12)
36 (11)
33 (10)
FMU 42
30 (9)
26 (8)
FMU 41
23 (7)
20 (6)
16 (5)
13 (4) FMU 40
10 (3)
6 (2)
3 (1)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Attenuation / dB
L00-FMU4xxxx-05-00-00-en-002
Example (for FMU 43)

For typical solid applications, a certain amount of dust coverage is normally present. Therefore, the following
range results from the table and the diagram
• Dust-covered rubble approx. 50 dB

• no dust formation 0 dB
• No filling curtain in
detection range 0 dB
• Temperature diff. < 68°F (20°C) 0 dB
approx. 50 dB => range approx. 23 ft (7 m)
These measuring conditions have been taken into account during the calculation of the maximum measuring
range in solid applications.
Operating frequency Sensor Operating frequency
FMU40 approx. 70 kHz
9
Prosonic M
Output
Output signal according to the instrument version ordered:
• 4 to 20 mA with HART protocol
• PROFIBUS PA
• Foundation Fieldbus (FF)
Signal on alarm Error information can be accessed via the following interfaces:
• Local display (error symbol, error code and plain text description)
• Current output (error current configurable)
• Digital interface
Load HART Minimum load for HART communication: 250 Ω
Output damping Freely selectable, 0 to 255 s
Linearization The linearization function of the Prosonic M allows conversion of the measured value into any unit of length
or volume. In open channels or measuring weirs, also a flow linearization is possible (calculation of the flow
from the measured level). The linearization table for calculating the volume in an horizontal cylindrical tank is
preprogrammed. You can also enter any number of other tables containing up to 32 value pairs either manually
or semi-automatically (by filling the vessel under controlled conditions).
The supplied FieldCare operating program can automatically calculate the table for any tank, weir or flume and
upload it into the device.
Flow curves for open channels can be calculated and entered into the instrument by FieldCare as well.
Auxiliary energy
Terminal compartment In the F12 housing, the terminals are located underneath the housing cover. In the T12 housing, they are under
the cover of the separate terminal compartment.
F12 housing T12 housing
sealed terminal
compartment
L00-FMR2xxxx-04-00-00-en-001
10
Prosonic M
Terminal assignment 4 to 20 mA with HART, 2-wire 4 to 20 mA active with HART, 4-wire
DC AC / DC
power display unit, power

alternatively recorder, PCS
Commubox
FXA191/195 alternatively
communication
DXR375
resistor Commubox
(> 250 W) communication FXA191/195
resistor DXR375
(> 250 W)
4...20 mA
4...20mA
test sockets for testing

of the signal current
plant
1 2 3 4 ground
L- L+ I+ I- plant
5 6 1 2 ground
I+ I- L1/L+ N/L-
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-015 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-011
• Connect the connecting line to the screw terminals (line cross-sections of 20 to 14 AWG / 0.5 to 2.5mm)
in the terminal compartment.
• Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with shield for the connection.
• Protective circuitry against reverse polarity, RFI and over-voltage peaks is built into the device (see also
Technical Information TI 241F/00/en "EMC Test Procedures")
PROFIBUS PA FOUNDATION Fieldbus
PROFIBUS PA
T-Box
plant
plant 1 2 3 4 ground
1 2 3 4 ground – +
– +
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-012 L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-en-013
The digital communication signal is transmitted to the bus via a 2-wire connection. The bus also provides the
auxiliary energy. Use 2-wire twisted pair cable with shield.
Refer to the following operating manuals for information on cable types, and how to set up and ground the
network:
• BA 198F/00/de „PROFIBIS -DP/-PA, Guidelines for planning and commissioning“
• BA 013S/04/en „Foundation Fieldbus, Installation and Commissioning Guidelines“
Fieldbus plug connectors For the versions with fieldbus plug connector (M12 or 7/8"), the signal line can be connected without opening
the housing.
11
Prosonic M
Pin assignment of the M12 plug connector (PROFIBUS PA plug)
Pin Meaning
1 Ground
1 3 –
2 Signal +
2 + 4 nc 3 Signal -
4 not connected
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-016
Pin assignment of the 7/8" plug connector (FOUNDATION Fieldbus plug)
Pin Meaning
1 Signal -
1 – 3 nc
2 Signal +
2 + 4 3 not connected
4 ground
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-yy-017
Supply voltage HART, 2-wire

The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument:
Current Terminal voltage Terminal voltage

Version
consumption minimum maximum
2-wire HART 4 mA 14 V 36 V
Standard
20 mA 8V 36 V
4 mA 14 V 30 V
IS (EEx ia)
20 mA 8V 30 V
4 mA 14 V 30 V
XP (EEx d)
20 mA 11 V 30 V
Fixed current,
adjustable, e.g. for Standard 11 mA 10 V 36 V
solar power
operation
(measured value via IS (EEx ia) 11 mA 10 V 30 V
HART)
Fixed current for Standard 4 mA1) 14 V 36 V

HART multidrop
mode IS (EEx ia) 4 mA1 14 V 30 V
1) Start-up current 11 mA
HART, 4-wire, active
Version Voltage max. load
DC 10.5 to 32 V 600 Ω
AC 50/60 Hz 90 to 253 V 600 Ω
Terminals Cable cross-section: 0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)
12
Prosonic M
Cable entry • Cable gland: M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 to 10 mm)

• Cable entry G ½ or ½" NPT
• PROFIBUS-PA M12 plug
• Fieldbus Foundation 7/8" plug
Power consumption Version Power consumption
2-wire 51 mW to 800 mW
4-wire AC max. 4VA
4-wire DC; FMU 40/41 330 mW to 830 mW
4-wire DC; FMU 42/43 600 mW to 1 W
Current consumption Communication Current consumption

(2-wire-instruments)
HART 3.6 to 22 mA
PROFIBUS PA max. 13 mA
Foundation Fieldbus max. 15 mA
HART ripple 47 to 125 Hz: Vpp = 200 mV (measured at 500 Ω)
Max. noise HART 500 Hz tob 10 kHz: Vrms = 2.2 mV (measured at 500 Ω)
Galvanic isolation With 4-wire devices, the evaluation electronics and power voltage are galvanically isolated from each other.
Performance characteristics
Reaction time The reaction time depends on the parameter settings. The minimum values are:
• 2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): min. 2 s
• 2-wire diveces (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): min. 2 s
• 2-wire devices (FMU44): min. 3 s
• 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): 0.5 s
Reference operating • Temperature = +68°F (20°C)

conditions • Pressure = 14.7 psia (1013 mbar abs.)
• Humidity = 50 %
• Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface)
• No interference reflections within signal beam
• Set application parameters:
– Tank shape = flat ceiling
– Medium property = liquid
– process conditions = calm surface
Measured value resolution Sensor Measured value resolution
FMU40 0.04" (1 mm)
FMU41 0.04" (1 mm)
FMU42 0.08" (2 mm)
FMU43 0.08" (2 mm)
FMU44 0.08" (2 mm)
13
Prosonic M
Pulse frequency • 2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): max. 0.5Hz

• 2-wire devices (FMU43 - PROFIBUS PA or FOUNDATION Fieldbus): max. 0.5 Hz
• 2-wire devices (FMU44): max. 0.3 Hz
• 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): max. 2Hz
The exact values are dependent on the type of device and the parameter settings.
Measuring error Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis):
Sensor Measuring error
FMU40 ±0.08" (2mm) or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1
FMU41 ± 0.08" (2 mm) or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1
1
whichever is greater
Influence of the vapor The vapor pressure at 20°C (68°F) gives a hint on the accuracy of the ultrasonic level measurement. If the vapor
pressure pressure at 20°C (68°F) is below 50 mbar (0.7 psi), ultrasonic level measurement is possible with very high
accuracy. This is valid for water, aqueous solutions, water-solid-solutions, dilute acids (hydrochloric acid,
sulfuric acid, ...), dilute bases (caustic soda, ...), oils, greases, slurries, pastes, ...
High vapor pressures or outgassing media (ethanol, acetone, ammonia, ...) can influence the accuracy. If
conditions like these are present, please contact procucer support.
Installation conditions
Installation variants FMU 40,
Installation with counter nut Installation with sleeve
FMU 41
Sealing ring
(EPDM)
supplied
Counter nut (PC)

supplied
for G 1½” and
G 2” instruments
Installation with installation bracket Installation with adapter flange
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
Sealing ring
(EPDM)
Adapter flange supplied
Sensor Nozzle
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-002
For installation bracket or adapter flange s. chapter "Accessories".
14
Prosonic M
Installation variants FMU42,

FMU44 Installation with universal flange Installation with mounting bracket
HA USER
ESS+
ENDR ic M
Proson
-
e.g. Zone 20
.
Zone 20
L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-en-001
Installation variants FMU 43

Installation with Installation with
universal slip-on flange (option) mounting bracket
AU SER
ESS+H
ENDR ic M
Proson
slip-on flange
nozzle -
e.g.Zone 20
sensor .
Zone 20
L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-en-001
Installation conditions for

2 3 4
level measurements
7
1
5
1/6D
D
6 L
a
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-de-005
• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between the sensor
and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
• Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2).
• Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4).
15
Prosonic M
• Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located within the
emitting angle α. In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles etc. can influence
measurement.
• Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7).
• Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other.
• To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle α.
Sensor α Lmax rmax
FMU40 11° 16 ft (5 m) 18.9" (0.48 m)
FMU41 11° 26 ft (8 m) 30.3 " (0.77 m)
FMU42 9° 33 ft (10 m) 31.1" (0.79 m)
FMU43 6° 50 ft (15 m) 31.1" (0.79 m)
FMU44 11 ° 65 ft (20 m) 76" (1.93 m)
Installation in narrow shafts In narrow shafts with strong interference echoes, we ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
recommend using an ultrasound guide pipe (e.g. PE

or PVC wastewater pipe) with a minimum diameter
venting
of 4" (100 mm). hole
Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumulated
dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular intervals.
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-010
Installation conditions for flow • Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible (take into
measurements account the blocking distance BD).
• Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir.
• Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface.
• Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir.
• You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using FieldCare or manually via the local
display.
Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume
Inflow Outflow
BD
Empty
Khafagi - Venturi - flume calibr.
Hmax Direction of flow
1 x b0
b0
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-003
16
Prosonic M
Example: Triangular weir
min. 2 H max
a
H max (= full calibr.)
min. 2 H max
min. 3 H max
BD
Empty calibr.
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-012
17
Prosonic M
Blocking distance, Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at maximum fill level.
nozzle installation Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way. The interior of the nozzle
must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In particular, there should be no burr on the
inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits for nozzle diameter and length. To minimize
disturbing factors, we recommend an angled nozzle edge (ideally 45°).
FMU 43
FMU 40/41 FMU 42/44
BD
SD
E F
L
L
L
D D
D
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-en-004
BD: blocking distance; SD: safety distance; E: empty calibration; F: full calibration (span); D: nozzle diameter; L: nozzle
length
Maximum nozzle length
Nozzle diameter FMU40 FMU41 FMU42 FMU43 FMU44
DN50/2" 3.15" (80 mm)
DN80/3" 9.45" (240 mm) 9.45" (240 mm) 9.80" (250 mm)
DN100/4" 11.8" (300 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 11.8" (300 mm)
DN150/6" 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 15.7" (400 mm)
DN200/8" 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 15.7" (400 mm)
DN250/10" 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 15.7" (400 mm)
DN300/12" 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 15.7" (400 mm) 11.8" (300 mm) 15.7" (400 mm)
Emitting angle α 11° 11° 9° 6° 11°
Blocking distance 9.8" (0.25 m) 13.8" (0.35 m) 15.7" (0.4 m) 23.6" (0.6 m) 19.7" (0.5 m)
Max. range 16 ft (5 m) 26 ft (8 m) 33 ft (10 m) 50 ft (15 m) 65 ft (20 m)

in liquids
Max. range 6.5 ft (2 m) 11.5 ft (3.5 m) 16 ft (5 m) 23 ft (7 m) 33 ft (10 m)

in solids
" Caution!
If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.
! Note!
In order to notice if the level approaches the blocking distance, you can specify a safety distance (SD). If the
level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M outputs a warning or alarm message.
18
Prosonic M
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature -40 to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu< -4°F (-20°C) and Tu> +140°F (+60°C).
If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.
Storage temperature -40 to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
Resistance to alternating to DIN EN 60068-2-14; Nb test : +80°C/-40°C, 1K/min, 100cycles

temperature cycles
Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db
Ingress protection • With closed housing, tested according to

– IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83m under water surface)
– IP 66, NEMA 4x
• With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)
" Caution!
Degree of protection IP 68 NEMA 6P applies for M12 PROFIBUS-PA plugs only when the PROFIBUS cable is
plugged in.
Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20 to 2000 Hz, 1 (m/s2)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min
Electromagnetic compatibility • Interference emission to EN 61326, Equipment Class B

(EMC) • Interference immunity to EN 61326, Appendix A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
• A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a shielded cable when
working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).
Process conditions
Process temperature -40 to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C)
A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-of-flight.
Process pressure • FMU 40/41: 10 to 44 psia (0.7 bar to 3bar abs.)

• FMU 42/43/44: 10 to 36 psia (0.7 bar to 2.5bar abs.)
19
Prosonic M
Mechanical construction
Design; dimensions FMU40, FMU41
F12 T12 2.6” 3.1”

(65) (78)
~3.4” 2.6” 3.1” 2.7” 3.7” 1.3”
(~86) (65) (78) (68) (94) (32)
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
Ø 5.1” ENDRESS+HAUSER
Ø 5.1”
Prosonic M
(129) (129)
5.9” 6.4”
(150) (162)
3.3” 3.3”
(85) (85)
FMU 40 FMU 41
0.9” 0.9”
AF 60 (22) AF 60 (22)
1-½ NPT ~5.8” ~5.8”
(148) 2” NPT (148)
(G1½”)
~3.4” G2”
(~87) ~3.3”
(83)
Ø 1.5”
(39) Ø 1.9”
(50)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-006
Dimensions in inches (mm)
FMU42, FMU44 with slip-on flange
F12 T12 2.6” 3.1”

(65) (78)
~3.4” 2.6” 3.1” 2.7” 3.7” 1.3”
(~86) (65) (78) (68) (94) (32)
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
Ø 5.1” ENDRESS+HAUSER
Ø 5.1”
Prosonic M
(129) (129)
5.9” 6.4”
(150) (162)
3.3” 3.3”
(85) (85)
FMU 42 FMU 44
~ 4.3” ~ 5.7”
3.3” ~ 4.2”
(110) (145)
(85) (107)
Ø 2.8”
(70) Ø 3.9”
(98)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-007
20
Prosonic M
FMU42, FMU44 with mounting bracket
FMU 42 FMU 44
ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M Prosonic M
F12/ F12/
T12 T12
M8 M8
4.1” 4.9”
(105) 1.2” 1.2”
(125)
(30) (30)
3.0” 4.7”
(75) (119) 4.7”
3.0” (119)
(75)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-008
FMU43
A B
~3.4” 2.6” 3.1”

(86) (65) (78)
F12
HA USER
ESS+
ENDR ic M
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
Ø 5.1” Proson
(129)
5.9”
(150)
~9.8”
2 x M8 3.0”
(248)
(75)
3.3”
(85)
3.5”
(89)
6.2”
Ø 9.1”
ANSI 4” (DN 100) (158)
(230)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-009
Dimensions in inches (mm);

A: with slip-on flange; B: with mounting bracket
Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43 and FMU44
4.68" 0.98"
(119) (25)
4.84"
4.72"
(123)
(120)
0.08"
(2) 0.98"
(25)
1.57" 1.57"
(40) (40)
0.43"
(11)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-010
21
Prosonic M
Flanges for FMU42 and FMU44
A
B
0.79”
(20) G2”
ISO228
C
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-011
suitable for A B C D E number of

boreholes
3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80 150 mm 160 mm 200 mm 19 mm 45° 8

(5.91") (6.30") (7.87") (0.75")
4" 150 lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K 100 175 mm 190.5 mm 228.6 mm 19 mm 45° 8
(6.90") (7.50") (9.00") (0.75")
6" 150 lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10 K 150 240 mm 241.3 mm 285 mm 23 mm 45° 8
(9.45") (9.50") (11.22") (0.91")
8" 150 lbs 298.5 mm 298.5 mm 342.9 mm 22.5 mm 45° 8

(11.75") (11.75") (13.50") (0.89")
DN200 PN16 / 10 K 200 290 mm 295 mm 340 mm 23 mm 30° 12

(11.42") (11.61") (13.39") (0.91")
Weight Sensor Weight
FMU40 approx. 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
FMU41 approx. 6 lb (2.6 kg)
FMU42 approx. 6.6 lb (3 kg)
FMU43 approx. 8 lb (3.5 kg)
FMU44 approx. 9 lb (4 kg)
22
Prosonic M
Housing design Types of housings

• F12 housing with sealed terminal compartment for standard or EEx ia (intrinsically safe) applications
• T12 housing with separate terminal compartment and explosion proof encapsulation
Material
Aluminum, seawater resistant, powder-coated
Cover
• Aluminum, for version without local display
• Inspection glass for version with local display. This version cannot be supplied together with the ATEX II 1/
2 D certificate.
Process connection, Sensor Process connection Material in contact with process

sealing material,
sensor material FMU40 • Thread G 1½“ Sensor: PVDF
• Thread NPT 1½“ - 11.5 Seal: EPDM
FMU41 • Thread 2" Sensor: PVDF

• Thread NPT 2" - 11.5 Seal: EPDM
FMU42 • Universal flange

Sensor: PVDF
DN 80 PN16 / ANSI 3" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 80
Seal: VITON or EPDM
• Universal flange
Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L (1.4435
DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100
or 1.4404)1)
• Mounting bracket
FMU43 • Universal flange Sensor: UP and SS 316Ti

DN 100 / ANSI 4" / JIS16K100 Seal: EPDM
• Mounting bracket Flange: PP or SS 316Ti
FMU44 • Universal flange Sensor PVDF

DN 100 PN16 / ANSI 4" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 100 Seal: VITON or EPDM
• Universal flange Flange: PP, PVDF or SS 316L (1.4435
DN 150 PN16 / ANSI 6" 150 lbs / JIS 10K 150 or 1.4404)1
• Universal flange
DN200 PN16 / JIS 10K 200
• Flange ANSI 8" 150 lbs
• Mounting bracket
1) Producer supplies DIN/EN flanges made of stainless steel AISI 316L with the material number 1.4435 or
1.4404. With regard to their temperature stability properties, the materials 1.4435 and 1.4404 are grouped under
13E0 in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
23
Prosonic M
Human interface
Display and operating The LCD module VU 331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The measured value
elements is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device.
LCD
Order
Messber
ENDR
MICR ESS+
Code:
Ser.-No.
:
Measurin
OPILOHAUS
eich
g range
U 16...36
4...20
T II ER
max.
20
(liquid crystal display)
Maulburg
mA V DC m
IP
65
T
A >70°C
Made in Germany
: t
>85°C
Symbols
– + E
3 keys
snap-fit
L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-001
Symbol in display
continuous flashing
Meaning Alarm Warning Communication Security Locking
Function of the keys
Key(s) Meaning
O or V Navigate upwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function
S or W Navigate downwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function
X or Z Navigate to the left within a function group
F Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.
O and F
or Contrast settings of the LCD
S and F
Hardware lock / unlock
After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or
O and S and F communication is not possible!
The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must
be entered to do so.
24
Prosonic M
Local operation Operation with VU 331

The LC-Display VU 331 allows configuration via 3 keys directly at the instrument. All device functions can be
set through a menu system. The menu consists of function groups and functions. Within a function, application
parameters can be read or adjusted. The user is guided through a complete configuration procedure.
Headline Position indicator
Symbol Main value Unit

– + E
Selection list
Function groups -> Functions
HOME X F
F FG00 X F000 F001 F002 F003 F004 ...
X
FG01
O FG02 F F
FG03
O Help text
FG04 S
S
FG05
FG06
X
FG07 Envelope
... curve
L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-004
Operation with the handheld terminal DXR 375

On devices with HART communication, you can also access the menu using the handheld terminal DXR 375.
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
FMU43: LIC0001
FMU42: LIC0001 ONLINE
ONLINE
1 GROUP SELECTION
1 GROUP SELECT
2 PV 8.7 m 2 PV 8.7 m Delete
HELP SAVE
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
6
9
HELP SAVE FMU43: LIC0001
Page GROUP SELECTION
Up
1 BASIC SETUP
Bksp Delete 2 SAFETY SETTINGS Delete
3 TEMPERATURE
Page 4 LINEARIZATION
On Bksp 5 EXTENDED CALIBR.
#%& ABC DEF
1 2 3
Copy
GHI
Paste
JKL
Hot Key
MNO
H dsdmdm
df das.
asdas fa
asas la.
4 5 6 SAVE HOME FMRU43: LIC0001

Insert + Hot Key
BASIC SETUP
PQRS TUV WXYZ Page
7 8 9 1 MEASURED VALUE
2 TANK SHAPE Up
,()‘ _<> +*/ 3 MEDIUM PROPERTY
. 0 - 4 PROCESS COND.
Bksp 5 EMPTY CALIBR. Page
On
375
FIELD COMMUNICATOR
SAVE HOME
L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-de-005
25
Prosonic M
Remote operation Operation with FieldCare

FieldCare is producer's FDT based Plant Asset Management Tool. It can configure all intelligent field
devices in your plant and supports you in managing them. By using status information, it also provides a simple
but effective means of checking their health.
• Supports Ethernet, HART, PROFIBUS, FOUNDATION Fieldbus etc.
• Operates all Endress+Hauser devices
• Operates all third-party actuators, I/O systems and sensors supporting the FDT standard
• Ensures full functionality for all devices with DTMs
• Offers generic profile operation for any third-party fieldbus device that does not have a vendor DTM
Operation with Commuwin II (for communication variants HART or PROFIBUS-PA)

Commuwin II is an operating software with graphical support (MS Windows) for intelligent transmitters with
the communication protocols Rackbus, Rackbus RS-485, HART and PROFIBUS-PA.
Commuwin II supports the following functions:
• Online configuration of transmitters
• Loading and saving of instrument data (Upload/Download)
• Orderly visualisation of measured values and limit values
• Display and recording of measured values with a line recorder
It is not possible to display envelope curves with Commuwin II. To display them, please use the ToF Tool
program supplied.
Connections:
• HART with Commubox FXA 191 (available as accessory)
• PROFIBUS PA
Operation with NI-FBUS Configurator (only Foundation Fieldbus)

The NI-FBUS Configurator is an easy-to-use graphical environment for creating linkages, loops, and a schedule
based on the fieldbus concepts.
You can use the NI-FBUS Configurator to configure a fieldbus network as follows:
• Set block and device tags
• Set device addresses
• Create and edit function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Configure vendor-defined function and transducer blocks
• Create and edit schedules
• Read and write to function block control strategies (function block applications)
• Invoke Device Description (DD) methods
• Display DD menus
• Download a configuration
• Verify a configuration and compare it to a saved configuration
• Monitor a downloaded configuration
• Replace devices
• Save and print a configuration
Certificates and Approvals

CE mark The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the EC-guidelines. Endress+Hauser confirms the
instrument passing the required tests by attaching the CE-mark.
Ex approval The available certificates are listed in the ordering information. Note the associated safety instructions (XA) and
control or installation drawings (ZD).
External standards and EN 60529

guidelines
Protection class of housing (IP-code)
EN 61326
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
NAMUR
Standards committee for measurement and control in the chemical industry
26
Prosonic M
Ordering information
Product structure FMU 40 Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
G ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6
I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
N CSA General Purpose
Q NEPSI DIP
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
5 ATEX II 1/3D
Y Special certificate
Process connection
R G 1½“ threadISO 228
N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version
Power supply/communication
B 2 wire, 4...20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90...253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, Foundation Fieldbus
Y Special version
Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU 331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version
Housing
A Aluminum F12 housing coated to IP 68
C Aluminum T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminum T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version
Screw union/entry
2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
FMU 40 - Product designation
27
Prosonic M

E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
J NEPSI Ex d(Ia) IIC T6
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6
Q NEPSI DIP
1 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX ia IIC T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
4 ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G; EEX d [ia] IIC T6
5 ATEX II 1/3D
Process connection
R G 2“ threadISO 228
N NPT 2“ - 11.5 thread
Y Special version
H 4 wire, 10.5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
Y Special version

9 Special version
Housing
C Aluminum T12 housing coated to IP 68 with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminum T12 housing coated to IP 68; with separate terminal compartment;
with overvoltage protection
9 Special version
Screw union/entry
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
28
Prosonic M

E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
J NEPSI Ex d (Ia) IIC T6
K TIIS Ex ia II C T6 (in preparation)
Q NEPSI DIP
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX ia IIC T6
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu bond cover
4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEX d [ia] IIC T6
5 ATEX II 1/3D
Process connection
M Mounting bracket FAU20
P UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80
Q UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
S UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100
U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
Y Special version
H 4 wire, 10.5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
Y Special version

9 Special version
Housing
C Aluminum T12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminum T 12 housing coated to IP 68, with separate terminal compartment; with
overvoltage protection
Y Special version
Gland/Entry
2 M20x1.5 gland
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
Sealing Sensor/Flange
2 VITON flat sealing
29
Prosonic M
Sealing Sensor/Flange
3 EPDM flat sealing
9 special version
Additional options
A Additional options not selected
30
Prosonic M

M FM DIP Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
P CSA DIP, Class II, III, Div. 1, Gr. E,F,G NI
Q NEPSI DIP
2 ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D, Aluminium Deckel
5 ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D, Sichtdeckel
Y Special version
Process connection/material
P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included)
S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included)
K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment)
M With mounting bracket
Y Special version
H 4 wire, 10.5...32VDC / 4-20mA HART
Y Special version

9 Special version
Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68
9 Special version
Screw union/entry
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
31
Prosonic M
Product structure FMU 44 Approval

A Non-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
4 ATEX II 1/2G EEx d (ia) IIC T6 (in preparation)
G ATEX II 3 G EEx nA II T6 (in preparation)
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover (in preparation)
5 ATEX II 1/3 D
S FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2 (in preparation)
T FM XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G (in preparation)
U CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2
V CSA XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G
K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 (in preparation)
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 (in preparation)
Q NEPSI DIP (in preparation)
Y Special version, to be specified
Process connection
A 8" 150lbs FF, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./36psia
E UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
F UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./36psia,
suitable for 6" 150lbs /DN150 PN16 / 10K 150
G UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L, max 2.5bar abs. 36psia,
H UNI flange DN200/200, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia,
suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200
J UNI flange DN200/200, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
K UNI flange DN200/200, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
L 8" 150lbs FF, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
M Mounting bracket FAU20
N 8" 150lbs FF, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia,
V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
Power supply; Output

B 2-wire; 4-20mA HART
D 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA
F 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus
G 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART
H 4-wire 10.5-32VDC; 4-20mA HART
Operation
1 w/o display, via communication
2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site
3 Prepared for FHX40, Remote display (accessory)
9 Special version, to be specified
FMU 44 - product designation, part 1
32
Prosonic M
Housing
A F12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P
C T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P, Separate conn. compartment
D T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P + OVP, Sep. conn. compartment, OVP = overvoltage
protection
CAble entry
2 Gland M20 (EEx d > thread M20)
3 Thread G1/2
4 Thread NPT 1/2
5 Plug M12
6 Plug 7/8“
Process Sealing Sensor/ Flange

2 Viton
3 EPDM
Additional option
A Basic version
FMU 44 - complete product designation
Scope of delivery • Instrument according to the version ordered

• FieldCare software
• Operating manual according to the communication version
• for certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions, Control- or Installation drawings
• for FMU 40 *R**** and FMU 41 *R****: counter nut (PC)
• for FMU 40/41: sealing ring (EPDM)
• for gland M20x1.5:
– 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments
– 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments
The cable glands are mounted on delivery.
33
Prosonic M
Accessories
Weather protection cover A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order code:
543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp.
F12 / F23 / T12 housing
EN
DR
Orde MIC ES
Se r Code
RO S+H
r.-N PIL AU
o.: : OT SE
II R
Me
Messbe
asurireich
ng
ran
U 16 ge
ma
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg
mA V DC m
IP
65
T
A >7
0°C Made in Germany
: t >8
5°C
L00-FMR2xxxx-00-00-06-en-001
Installation bracket for 15.7"

FMU 40/41 (400) 4.72"
(120)
Æ 0.63"
(16)
9.84"
(250) 4.72"
(120)
0.12"
(3) 1.18"
(30)
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001
• for FMU 40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000

• for FMU 41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001
suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well
34
Prosonic M
Adapter flange
sealing ring
EPDM adapter flange
(supplied)
sensor nozzle
L00-FMUX3XXX-00-00-00-en-001
Version with metrical thread (FAU 70 E)

Process Connection
12 DN 50 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
14 DN 80 PN 16 A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
15 DN 100 PN 16, A, flange EN1092-1 (DIN2527 B)
Sensor Connection
3 Thread ISO228 G1-1/2
4 Thread ISO228 G2
Flange Material
2 316L
7 Polypropylene
FAU 70 E Product designation
Version with conical thread(FAU 70 A)

Process Connection
22 2" 150lbs FF, flange ANSI B16.5
Sensor Connection
5 Thread NPT1-1/2
6 Thread NPT2
Flange Material
2 316L
7 Polypropylene
FAU 70 A Product designation
35
Prosonic M
Cantilever A
C
0.98” 1.97” 3.94”

0.79”
1.38” (25) (50) (100)
(20) 0.79”
(35)
(20)
D M8
1.38”
2.95” 2.95” 3.94” (35)
B
(75) (75) (100)
C
4.13”
(105)
0.87” 0.26”
1.97” / 2.44” (22) 0.59”
(6.5)
(50 / 62) (15)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005
A B C D for Sensor Material Order Code
23" 9.83" 0.08" 7.87" FMU 40 316Ti/1.4571 52014132

585 mm 250 mm 2 mm 200 mm
galv. steel 52014131
FMU 41 316Ti/1.4571 52014136
42.7" 29.5" 0.12" 11.8" FMU 40 316Ti/1.4571 52014134

1085 mm 750 mm 3 mm 300 mm
FMU 41 316Ti/1.4571 52014138
• The 1.97" (50 mm) or 2.44" (62 mm) orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU 40 or FMU 41 sensor,
respecitvely.
• The 0.87" (22 mm) orifice may be used for an additional sensor.
36
Prosonic M
Mounting Frame
0.51” 3.94”
(13) (100)
2.17”
(55) 0.98”
(25)
0.13”
Ø 1.33” (3.2)
2.36”
(33.7) (60)
0.79” 0.16”
28” / 55”
(20) (4)
(700 / 1400)
1.77”
(45) 2.99”
(76)
0.26” 7.97”
(6.5) (200)
3.94”
(100)
3.94”
(100)
5.12”
(130) 5.91”
(150)
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-005
Height Material Order Code
28" (700 mm) galv. steel 919791-0000
28" (700 mm) 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0001
55" (1400 mm) galv. steel 919791-0002
55" (1400 mm) 1.4301 (AISI 304) 919791-0003
Wall Bracket
0.20” 0.13”
(5) (3.2)
ø 1.33”
0.26” (33.7)
7.09” (6.5)
(180) ~ 8.39”
(213)
4.33”
0.98” 5.91”
(110) 0.51”
(25) (150)
(13)
~ 3.46” 4.33”
(88) (110)
5.91”
(150)
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006
Material Order Code
galv. steel 919792-0000
316Ti/1.4571 919792-0001
Commubox FXA191 HART For intrinsically safe communication with FieldCare via the RS232C interface. For details refer to TI237F/00/
en.
Commubox FXA195 HART For intrinsically safe communication with FieldCare via the USB interface. For details refer to TI404F/00/en.
37
Prosonic M
Service Interface FXA193 The Service-Interface connects the Service plug of Proline and ToF instruments with the 9 pin RS 232C
interface of a PC. (USB connectors must be equipped with a usual commercial USB/Serial adapter.)
Product structure
Approvals
A For use in non-hazardous areas
B ATEX II (1) GD
C CSA/FM Class I Div. 1
D ATEX, CSA, FM
9 other
Connection cable
B Connection cable for ToF devices
E Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices
H Connection cable for Proline and ToF devices and Connection cable for Ex two-wire devices
X without connection cable
9 others
FXA193- Complete product designation
Associated documentation
• Technical Information: TI063D
• Safety Instructions for ATEX II (1) GD: XA077D
• Supplementary information for the cable adapters: SD092D
Commubox FXA291
The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface (= Endress+Hauser
Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a notebook. For details refer to
TI405C/07/en.
! Note!
For the following producerinst ruments you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory:
• Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x
• Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x
• Deltapilot S FMB70
• Gammapilot M FMG60
• Levelflex M FMP4x
• Micropilot FMR130/FMR131
• Micropilot M FMR2xx
• Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540
• Prosonic FMU860/861/862
• Prosonic M FMU4x
• Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable)
• Prosonic S FMU9x
ToF Adapter FXA291

The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal computer or
a notebook to the following Endress+Hauser instruments:
• Cerabar S PMC71, PMP7x
• Deltabar S PMD7x, FMD7x
• Deltapilot S FMB70
• Gammapilot M FMG60
• Levelflex M FMP4x
• Micropilot FMR130/FMR131
• Micropilot M FMR2xx
• Micropilot S FMR53x, FMR540
• Prosonic FMU860/861/862
• Prosonic M FMU4x
• Tank Side Monitor NRF590 (with additional adapter cable)
• Prosonic S FMU9x
For details refer to KA271F/00/a2.
38
Prosonic M
Remote display FHX40
Pipe-mounting
Wall-mounting (mounting bracket and plate
Prosonic M (without mounting bracket)
Micropilot M supplied optionally,
Levelflex M see product structure)
0.33”
4.72” (8.5)
Separate housing
(120)
FHX 40, NEMA 4
(IP 65)
EN
DR
Orde ES
S+
Se r Code HAU
r.-N
o.: : SE
Me
Messbere
asuri ich
ng
ran
R
7.09”
ge
U 16
4...20...36
ma
x. 20
4.80” (180)
Maulburg
mA V DC m
IP
65
T
A >7
(122) 6.30”
Made in Germany
0°C
: t
>85
°C
(160)
3.15”
(80)
Cable
3.46”
(88)
4.72”
4.65”
(120)
(118)
3.23”
3.78”
(82)
(96)
max. 3.15”
(80)
0.25” min. 1.18”
4.80”
(6.3) (30)
(122)
4.17”
(106)
pipe
L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-en-003
Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure:
Max. cable length 20 m (65 ft)
Temperature range -30 to +70°C (-22 to 158°F)
Degree of protection IP65/67 (housing); IP68 (cable) acc. to IEC 60529
Materials Housing: AlSi12; cable glands: nickle plated brass
Dimensions 122x150x80 mm (HxWxD) / 4.8" x 5.9" x 3.2"
Approval:
A Nn-hazardous area
1 ATEX II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6, ATEX II 3D
S FM IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
U CSA IS Cl.I Div.1 Gr.A-D
K TIIS ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
Cable:
1 20m/65ft; for HART
5 20m/65ft; for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Additional option:
A Basic version
B Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"
FHX40 - Complete product designation
For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of the
respective instrument.
39
Prosonic M
Supplementary documentation
System Information SI 005F
Ultrasonic level measurement
Operating manual Depending on the communication variant ordered, the following operating manuals are supplied with the
device:
Communication Operating manual
4 to 20mA, HART BA 237F
Profibus PA BA 238F
Foundation Fieldbus BA 239F
These instructions describe the installation and first commissioning of the Prosonic M. From the operating
menu, all functions are included, which are required for standard measurement tasks. Additional functions are
not contained in the manual.
Description of device BA 240F

functions
This contains a detailed description of all the functions of the Prosonic M and is valid for all communication
variants.
A pdf file of this document can be found
• in the supplied "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package" at "Help/ToF Tool Help/ Online Manual/ Operating
Manual/Ultrasonic/Prosonic M FMU4x Functions"1).
• in the internet at "www.endress.com". Click "Download" and enter the product code "FMU4*" into the
search form.
Short instructions KA 183F

Can be found under the device housing cover.
The most important menu functions are summarised on this sheet. It is intended primarily as a memory jogger
for users who are familiar with the operating concept of Endress+Hauser time-of-flight instruments.
Safety Instructions ATEX The following safety instructions are supplied with ATEX-certified device versions. If the devices are used in
explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.
Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Safety Instructions
• FMU40 - 1*B*A*
ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G
• FMU41 - 1*B*A* HART (2-wire) F12 XA 174F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*A***
• FMU40 - 1*B*D*
• FMU41 - 1*B*D* HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection XA 224F
EEx ia II C T6
• FMU42 - 1*B*D***
• FMU40 - 1*D*A*
- 1*F*A*
• FMU41 - 1*D*A* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 175F
- 1*F*A* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*A***
- 1*F*A***
• FMU40 - 1*D*D*
- 1*F*D*
• FMU41 - 1*D*D* ATEX II 1/2 G or II 2 G • Profibus-PA
T12 with overvoltage protection XA 225F
- 1*F*D* EEx ia II C T6 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 1*D*D***
- 1*F*D***
1) If the Operating Instructions have not been installed together with the "ToF Tool - FieldTool Package", they can be added to the installation subsequently.
40
Prosonic M
• FMU40 - 4*B*C*
- 4*D*C*
- 4*F*C*
• FMU41 - 4*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- 4*D*C* • Profibus-PA T12 XA 176F
EEx d [ia] II C T6
- 4*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - 4*B*C***
- 4*D*C***
- 4*F*C***
• HART (2-wire)
• FMU40 - G***** • HART (4-wire, DC) • F12
• FMU41 - G***** ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6 • HART (4-wire, AC) • T12 XA 179F
• FMU42 - G******* • Profibus-PA • T12 with overvoltage protection
• Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU40 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A*
- 5*B*A*
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU41 - 2*B*A*
- 2*D*A*
• HART (2-wire)
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2D
• Profibus-PA F12 XA 180F
- 5*B*A* • ATEX II 1/3D
- 5*D*A*
- 5*F*A*
• FMU42 - 2*B*A***
- 2*D*A***
- 2*F*A***
- 5*B*A***
- 5*D*A***
- 5*F*A***
• FMU40 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A*
- 5*G*A*
- 5*H*A*
• FMU41 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 259
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*
• FMU42 - 2*G*A***
- 2*H*A***
- 5*G*A***
- 5*H*A***
• FMU43 - 2*G*A*
- 2*H*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 177F
- 5*G*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • HART (4-wire, AC)
- 5*H*A*
• FMU43 - 2*D*A*
- 2*F*A* • ATEX II 1/2 D or II 2 D • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 178F
- 5*D*A* • ATEX II 1/3 D or II 3 D • Foundation Fieldbus
- 5*F*A*
41
Prosonic M
Safety Instructions NEPSI The following safety instructions are supplied with NEPSI-certified device versions. If the devices are used in
explosive areas, comply with all the specifications in these safety instructions.
• FMU40 - I*B*A*
Ex ia II C T1 ... T6
• FMU41 - I*B*A* HART (2-wire) F12 XA 436F
NEPSI GYJ071468
• FMU42 - I*B*A***
• FMU40 - I*B*D*
Ex ia II C T1 ... T6
• FMU41 - I*B*D* HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection XA 442F
NEPSI GYJ071468
• FMU42 - I*B*D***
• FMU40 - I*D*A*
- I*F*A*
• FMU41 - I*D*A* Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 • Profibus-PA
F12 XA 437F
- I*F*A* NEPSI GYK071468 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - I*D*A***
- I*F*A***
• FMU40 - I*D*D*
- I*F*D*
• FMU41 - I*D*D* Ex ia II C T1 ... T6 • Profibus-PA
T12 with overvoltage protection XA 443F
- I*F*D* NEPSI GYJ071468 • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - I*D*D***
- I*F*D***
• FMU40 - J*B*C*
- J*D*C*
- J*F*C*
• FMU41 - J*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
Ex d [ia] II C T1 ... T6
- J*D*C* • Profibus-PA T12 XA 438F
NEPSI GYJ071468
- J*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - J*B*C***
- J*D*C***
- J*F*C***
• FMU40 - Q*B*A*
- Q*D*A*
- Q*F*A*
• FMU41 - Q*B*A* • HART (2-wire)
DIP A21/A22 TA, T*
- Q*D*A* • Profibus-PA F12 XA 441F
NEPSI GYJ071468
- Q*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - Q*B*A***
- Q*D*A***
- Q*F*A***
• FMU40 - Q*G*A*
- Q*H*A*
• FMU41 - Q*G*A* DIP A21/A22 TA, T* • HART (4-wire, DC)
F12 XA 444F
- Q*H*A* NEPSI GYJ071468 • HART (4-wire, AC)
• FMU42 - Q*G*A***
- Q*H*A***
• FMU43 - Q*G*A* • HART (4-wire, DC)

DIP A21/A22 TA, T* F12 XA 439F
- Q*H*A* • HART (4-wire, AC)
• FMU43 - Q*D*A* • Profibus-PA

DIP A21/A22 TA, T* F12 XA 440F
- Q*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU40 - E***** • HART

• F12
• FMU41 - E***** NEPSI Ex nA IIC T6 • Profibus PA XA 403F
• T12
• FMU42 - E******* • Foundation Fieldbus
42
Prosonic M
Control drawings Installation The following control or installation drawings are supplied with the FM, CSA and TIIS-certified device
drawings versions:
Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Control or Installation

Drawing
• FMU40 - S*B*A*
• FMU41 - S*B*A* FM IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 096F
• FMU42 - S*B*A***
• FMU40 - S*D*A*
- S*F*A*
• FMU41 - S*D*A* • Profibus-PA
FM IS F12 ZD 097F
- S*F*A* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D*A***
- S*F*A***
• FMU40 - S*B*D*
• FMU41 - S*B*D* FM IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 139F
• FMU42 - S*B*D***
• FMU40 - S*D* D*
- S*F*D*
• FMU41 - S*D* D* • Profibus-PA
FM IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 140F
- S*F*D* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - S*D* D***
- S*F*D***
• FMU40 - T*B*C*
- T*D*C*
- T*F*C*
• FMU41 - T*B*C* • HART (2-wire)
- T*D*C* FM XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 098F
- T*F*C* • Foundation Fieldbus
• FMU42 - T*B*C***
- T*D*C***
- T*F*C***
• FMU40 - U*B*A*
• FMU41 - U*B*A*
CSA IS HART (2-wire) F12 ZD 088F
• FMU42 - U*B*A***
• FMU44 - U*B*A***
• FMU40 - U*D*A*
- U*F*A*
• FMU41 - U*D*A*
- U*F*A* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS F12 ZD 099F
• FMU42 - U*D*A*** • Foundation Fieldbus
- U*F*A***
• FMU44 - U*D*A***
- U*F*A***
• FMU40 - U*B* D*
• FMU41 - U*B* D*
CSA IS HART (2-wire) T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 101F
• FMU42 - U*B* D***
• FMU44 - U*B* D***
• FMU40 - U*D*D*
- U*F*D*
• FMU41 - U*D*D*
- U*F*D* • Profibus-PA
CSA IS T12 with overvoltage protection ZD 102F
• FMU42 - U*D*D*** • Foundation Fieldbus
- U*F*D***
• FMU44 - U*D*D***
- U*F*D***
43
Prosonic M
Instrument version Certificate Communication Housing Control or Installation

Drawing
• FMU40 - V*B*C*
- V*D*C*
- V*F*C*
• FMU41 - V*B*C*
- V*D*C*
• HART (2-wire)
- V*F*C*
CSA XP • Profibus PA T12 ZD 100F
• FMU42 - V*B*C***
- V*D*C***
- V*F*C***
• FMU44 - V*B*C***
- V*D*C***
- V*F*C***
• FMU 40 - K***** TIIS

HART F12 ZD 138F
• FMU 41 - K***** Ex ia IIC T6
Pump N 3127, 60 Hz
Y/D start
SUBCAB® 7G2,5 mm2
7G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
7G4+2x1,5 mm2
VFD Application
Screened SUBCAB® S3x2,5+3x2,5/3+4x1,5
Monitoring equipment
Thermal contacts opening temp. 125° C
Material
Impeller (.181) Cast iron
Impeller (185) Hard Iron™
Pump housing Cast iron
Stator housing Cast iron
Shaft Stainless steel
O-rings Nitrile rubber
Mechanical face seals
N 3127 Alternative
1
Inner seal
Corrosion resistant
Outer seal
Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide/ cemented carbide/
Aluminium oxide Corrosion resistant
Product cemented carbide
Submersible pump for pumping clean water, surface water and waste 2 Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
water containing solids or long-fibred material. cemented carbide/ cemented carbide/
Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide cemented carbide
Denomination
3 Corrosion resistant Silicone carbide/
Product code 3127.181 cemented carbide/ Silicone carbide
Corrosion resistant
(Hard Iron™) 3127.185
cemented carbide
Installation P, S, T, Z, L1
Impeller characteristics LT, MT, HT, SH Surface Treatment
1For information about L-installation, see Technical Specification 894919 All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
is a high-solid two pack paint.
Process data Weight
Liquid temperature-standard max +40 °C
See dimensional drawing.
Depth of immersion max 20 m
The pH of the pumped liquid pH 5,5-14
Option
Liquid density max. 1100 kg/m3
3127.090 Ex. proof design
Motor data 3127.095 (High chromium) Ex. proof design
Warm liquid version on request
Frequency 60 Hz
Leakage sensor in stator housing FLS
Insulation class H (+180° C)
Leakage sensor in oil housing CLS
Voltage variation
Surface treatment Epoxy treatment
- continuously running max ± 5%
Other cables
- intermittent running max ± 10%
Zinc anodes
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2%
No. of starts/hour max 30
Accessories
Cable Discharge connections, adapters, hose connections and other
mechanical accessories.
Direct-on-line start
Electrical accessories such as pump controller, control panels, starters,
SUBCAB® 4G2,5 mm2
monitoring relays, cables.
4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
4G4 mm2
4G4+2x1,5 mm2
2 N 3127
LT-Motor rating and performance
P2 [kW] / [hp]
curve 12
Installation
Ex proof version available

8
10
7
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
421
8 6
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
5
422
6
H [m] / [ft]
LT
P S T Z 60 18
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
16
422 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • 50
422 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • • • • 14
421 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 40 12
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min
422 7,5 30 67 0,95 • • 10
30
422 7,5 30 67 0,95 • 8
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current. 20 6
4
10
421
2 422
0 0
MT-Motor rating and performance 0 20 40 60 80 100
curve 0 200 400 600 800 10001200140016001800
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
Installation
P2 [kW] / [hp]
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
10
7
438
8 6
439
5
6
P S T Z 4
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
439 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • H [m] / [ft]
439 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • •
439 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 70
MT
438 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 20
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min 60
439 7,5 32,0 66,0 0,97 • • • 16
50
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current.
40 12
30
8
20
4 439
438
10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
N 3127 3
HT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW] / [hp]
16
curve
10
Installation
Ex proof version available 12
8 487 488
8 6
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
489
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
4
4
H [m] / [ft]
HT
P S T Z 100 30
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
489 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • 80 25
487
489 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • •
487 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 20
488 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 60
489 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 15
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min 40
489 7,5 32,0 66,0 0,97 • • • 10 488
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current. 20

5 489
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
SH-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW] / [hp]

curve 12 9
Installation
8
10 248
7
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
8 6
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
249
5
6
H [m] / [ft]
160
SH
45
P S T Z 140
40
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 3395 r/min
120
248 11 13 113 0,91 • • • 35
249 11 13 113 0,91 • • • 100 30
80 25
20
60
15
40 248
10 249
20 5
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0 100 200 300 400 500
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
4 N 3127
Dimensional drawing
All dimensions are in mm.
LT, P-installation LT, P-installation hydroejector
N 3127 5
LT, P-installation LT, S-installation
LT, S-installation LT, T-installation
6 N 3127
LT, Z-installation LT, L-installation
MT, P-installation MT, P-installation
N 3127 7
MT, P-installation MT, P-installation JA 117
MT, S-installation MT, S-installation
8 N 3127
MT, S-installation JA 117 MT, T-installation
MT, T-installation MT, Z-installation
N 3127 9
MT, Z-installation HT, P-installation
HT, S-installation HT, T-installation
10 N 3127
HT, Z-installation
SH, P-installation SH, P-installation
N 3127 11
SH, S-installation
12 N 3127
Submersible mixers S 4650, 50 Hz
S 4650
Thermal contacts opening temp. 125 °C
Material
Stator housing Stainless steel
Oil casing Vinyl ester based SMC
Part ASTM 304 ASTM 316 L

Jet ring • •
Fixing plate • •
Lifting device •
ASTM 304: general purpose stainless steel
ASTM 316 L: high grade stainless steel
Propeller
Angle ASTM 316 L Alloyed white

iron
S 4650
Two blade propeller
5° •
9° •
Product Three blade propeller

5° • •
Direct drive mixer with two or three blade propeller intended for mixing
7° • •
liquid and sludge containing fibres and solids. The mixer is designed to
9° • •
be operated completely immersed in the liquid.
10° • •
Denomination 11° • •
Alloyed white iron (extremely abrasion-resistant alloy)
Product code 4650.410
Installation Guide bar system
Flange mounted
O-rings
Process data Alternative Material
1 Nitrile rubber
Liquid temperature max +40 °C
2 Fluorinated rubber
The pH of the mixed liquid pH 1 - 12
Liquid viscosity max 5000 cp
Motor data Alternative Inner seal Outer seal
1 Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
Frequency 50 Hz
Insulation class H (+180 °C) Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
Voltage variation cemented carbide cemented carbide
- continuously running max ± 5% 2 Corrosion resistant Silicon carbide/ Silicon
cemented carbide/ carbide
Corrosion resistant
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2% cemented carbide
No. of starts/hour max 30 3 Carbon/ Corrosion Corrosion resistant
resistant cemented carbide cemented carbide/
Cable Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide
SUBCAB® 4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
Surface Treatment
2
Stainless steel parts are blasted to a dull grey surface.
4G4+2x1,5 mm
4G6+2x1,5 mm2
3
S 4650
Weight Accessories
See dimensional drawing. Stand and Single guide bar system, lifting equipment and other
Mixer data chart Electrical accessories such as starters, alarm units.
See separate booklet or int.flygt.com, for further information
Propeller material ASTM 316 L
Propeller Fthrust N Pin kW Fthrust N Pin kW
code With jet ring (J) Without jet ring (F)
125803SX 860 3,6 1040 4,4
125805SX 1100 4,1 1290 5,4
125807SX 1350 4,8 1530 6,5
125809SX 1620 5,6
125811SX 1890 6,5
Propeller material Alloyed white iron (High-Chrome)

125805HX 560 3,00 650 3,20
125807HX 790 3,40 890 3,75
125809HX 1010 3,95 1120 4,45
125811HX 1240 4,65 1340 5,30
125813HX 1450 5,55 1540 6,20
Key to the 8-digit Propeller Code:
1:st and 2:nd digit - Motor pole No (16=16-pole)
3:rd and 4:th digit - Propeller diameter (77=766 mm)
5:th and 6:th digit - Propeller blade angle
7:th digit - Propeller material (S=ASTM 304, ASTM 316 L, H=High-Chrome)
8:th digit - Hydraulic end (J=with jet ring, F=without jet ring)
Motor rating
Rated output power, kW
Power factor cos ϕ

Starting current, A
Rated current, A
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 480 r/min

5,5 17 48 0,65 •
Option
4650.490 Ex. proof version
Seal flushing
Seal protection
Cutting rings
Cable protection
Two blade propeller
4
S 4650
Dimensional drawing
All drawings are available as Acrobat documents (.pdf) and With jet ring
AutoCad drawings (.dwg). Download the drawings from
int.flygt.com or contact your ITT Flygt representative for
more information.
Without jet ring Flange mounted
5
S 4650
Vortex shield
6
SEQUENTIAL BATCH REACTOR

Annexes
Derby-E
Oxymax W COS61
Dissolved oxygen measurement
Optical sensor according to the fluorescence quenching principle
Application
The continuous measurement of the dissolved oxygen
concentration is very important in many areas of water
management:
• Sewage treatment plants:
Oxygen measurement and regulation in the activated sludge
basin for a highly efficient biological cleaning process
• Water monitoring:
Oxygen measurement in rivers, lakes or seas as an indicator of
the water quality
• Water treatment:
Oxygen measurement for status monitoring of drinking water
for example (oxygen enrichment, corrosion protection etc.)
• Fish farming:
Oxygen measurement and regulation for optimum living and
growth conditions
Your benefits
• Optical technology:
– Minimum maintenance
– Maximum availability
• Compatible with tried-and-tested COS31 with COM2x3W:
– Easy measuring point changeover to optical technology
• Compatible with COS41 with COM2x3D with conversion kit
• Sensor with digital data transmission:
– Storage of calibration data in sensor
– Insensitive to electromagnetic interferences thanks to
digital communication to the transmitter
• Maximum measurement accuracy:
– Longterm-stable measurement
– Long maintenance intervals
– Intelligent sensor self monitoring
• No flow needed - measurement possible in still water
TI387C/24/ae/07.07
Oxymax W COS61

Measuring principle • Sensor design:
– Oxygen-sensitive molecules (markers) are integrated in an optically active layer (fluorescence layer).
– The surface of the fluorescence layer is in contact with the medium.
– The sensor optics are directed at the underside of the fluorescence layer.
• There is an equilibrium between the oxygen partial pressure in the medium and that in the fluorescence
layer:
– If the sensor is immersed in the medium, the equilibrium is established very quickly.
• Measuring process:
– The sensor optics send green light pulses to the fluorescence layer.
– The markers "answer" (fluoresce) with red light pulses.
– The duration and intensity of the response signals is directly dependent on the oxygen contents and the
partial pressure.
– If the medium is free from oxygen, the response signals are long and very intense.
– Oxygen molecules "quench" the marker molecules. As a result, the response signals are shorter and less
intense.
• Measurement result:
– The sensor returns a signal that is in proportion to the oxygen concentration in the medium.
– The fluid temperature and air pressure are already calculated in the sensor.
Sensor monitoring The optical signals are continuously monitored and analysed for plausibility.
If inconsistencies occur, an error message is output via the transmitter.
Aging of the sensor cap is detected. The transmitter first displays a warning for predictive maintenance and later
generates an error message.
In addition, the following fault conditions are detected in conjunction with the sensor check system of Liquisys
M COM2x3:
• Implausibly high or low measured values
• Disturbed regulation due to incorrect measured values
Measuring system The complete measuring system consists of the following at least:
• Oxygen sensor
• Transmitter, e.g. Liquisys M COM223/253
• Special measuring cable if extension is necessary
• Assembly, e.g. COA250 flow assembly, CYA611 immersion assembly or COA451 retractable assembly
Optional:
• CYH101 universal immersion assembly holder for immersion operation
• VS junction box (for cable extension)
• Chemoclean automatic spray cleaning system
1 2
4 3
a0007362
Fig. 1: Measuring system (example)

1 CYA611 immersion assembly
2 VS junction box (optional)
3 Liquisys M COM253 transmitter
4 COS61 oxygen sensor
2
Oxymax W COS61
Input
Measured variable Dissolved oxygen [mg/l, ppm, % SAT or hPa]
Temperature [°C, °F)
Measuring range With Liquisys M COM 223/253:

0 to 20 mg/l (0 to 20 ppm)
0 to 200 % SAT
0 to 400 hPa
Wiring
Electrical connection Direct connection to the transmitter
Connect the sensor directly to the transmitter (COM253-WX/WS) by using the special measuring cable with
SXP plug.
a0004118
SXP plug
Direct connection to the transmitter (panel mounting device)

• Remove the SXP connector (transmitter side!) from the cable.
• Refer to the following table for the cable assignment and the assigned terminals for
Liquisys M COM223-WX/WS.
• Please note that the cable assignment changes depending on the sensor version (fixed cable or TOP68
connection).
Terminal Sensor with fixed cable (OMK) Sensor with TOP68 connection
COM223 (CYK71)
Core Assignment Core Assignment
87 YE +UB YE +UB
0 GY 0V WH 0V
96 PK Com. (digital) GN Communication (digital)
97 BU Com. (digital) BN Communication (digital)
88 BN –UB Koax innen –UB
3
Oxymax W COS61
Connection with cable extension

To lengthen the sensor connection beyond the length of the fixed cable, a junction box VS is required.
Always connect the sensor cable with the SXP plug to the junction box.
The cable extension to the transmitter then depends from the transmitter version, i.e. field device or panel
mounted device.
1
82
(3.23) 4
80
(3.15)
YE 87
GY 0
PK 96
BU
97
BN 88
GN 19
2 2 3
WH 18
mm (inch) a0004130
a0004129-en Junction box VS to a panel mounted device

Junction box VS to a field device 2 SXP plug from sensor
1 SXP plug to field device 3 Measuring cable (OMK) to the transmitter
2 SXP plug from sensor 4 Connection department of the transmitter
Response time t90: 60 s
Reference operating Reference temperature: 25°C (77°F)

conditions Reference pressure: 1013 hPa (15 psi)
Reference application: Municipal wastewater treatment
Maximum measured error ±2 % of measuring range end
Repeatability ±0.5 % of measuring range end
Life time of the sensor cap >2 years (under reference operating conditions, protect against direct sun light)
4
Oxymax W COS61
Installation
Angle of installation The sensor can be installed up to the horizontal in an assembly, support or a suitable process connection.
Other angles and overhead installation are not recommended. Reason: possible sediment formation and
resulting falsification of measured value.
! Note!
The optimum installation angle is 45° (e.g. with assembly CYA611-0E).
a0004087
Angle of installation
A Permissible installation positions: 0 to 180 °
! Note!
Make sure you comply with the instructions for installing sensors. You will find them in the Operating
Instructions for the assembly used.
Environment
Ambient temperature range –20 to +60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Storage temperature –20 to +70°C (-4 to 160°F)

at 95% relative humidity, non condensing
Ingress protection • Fixed cable versions:

IP 68 (10 m / 33 ft) water column at 25°C / 77°F, for 30 days (similar to NEMA 6P)
• Top 68 plug-in head versions:
IP 68 (1 m / 3.3 ft) water column at 50°C / 122°F for 7 days (similar to NEMA 6P)
Process
Process temperature –5 to 50°C (23 to 120°F)
Process pressure max. 10 bar (145 psi)
5
Oxymax W COS61
Design, dimensions
220
(8.66)
220
186 (8.66)
(7.32) 186
(7.32)
Ø40 mm (inch)
(1.57) Ø40 mm (inch)
(1.57)
a0004083-en a0004084-en
Fixed cable version TOP68 version
Weight with cable length 7 m (23 ft): 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs.)

with cable length 15 m (49 ft): 1.1 kg (2.4 lbs.)
with TOP68 plug-in connection: 0.3 kg (0.66 lbs.)
Material Sensor shaft: stainless steel 1.4571 (AISI 316Ti)

Cap with fluorescence layer: POM
Fluorescence layer: Silicone
Process connection G1
Maximum cable length max. 100 m / 328 ft (including cable extension)
Temperature compensation internal
6
Oxymax W COS61
Product structure Certificate
A Ex free version
Cable length
0 Cable length: 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
1 Cable length: 7 m (23 ft)
2 Cable length: 15 m (49 ft)
8 Without cable (for TOP 68 version)
9 Special version acc. to customers specification
Sensor head
F G1, fixed cable with SXP plug
S G1, TOP68 plug
Accessories
0 without accessories
COS61- complete order code
Scope of delivery The following items are included in the delivery:

• Oxygen sensor with transport protection cap for membrane protection
• Operating Instructions (on CD only)
• Brief Operating Instructions (paper version)
Certificates and approvals

Electromagnetic compatibilty Interference emission and interference immunity complies with EN 61326: 1997 / A1: 1998
Accessories
! Note!
In the following sections, you find the accessories available at the time of issue of this documentation.
For information on accessories that are not listed here, please contact your responsible service.
Assemblies (selection) Retractable assembly Cleanfit COA451

• Manually driven retractable assembly, stainless steel, with ball valve, for oxygen sensors;
• Ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI368C/24/ae)
Immersion assembly Dipfit W CYA611
• For sensor immersion in basins, open channels and tanks, PVC
• Ordering acc. to product structure, see Technical Information TI166C/24/ae
Flow assembly COA250
• For sensor installation in pipe lines, PVC
• Ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI111C/24/ae)
Zero solution • 3 units to produce 3 x 1 liter oxygen-free solution

• order no. 50001041
Measuring cable COK31 special measuring cable

• For sensors COS31, COS61 and COS71 with TOP68 plug-in head
• Order numbers:
– Cable length 1.5 m (4.9 ft): 51506820
– Cable length 7 m (23 ft): 51506821
– Cable length 15 m (49 ft): 51506822
7
Measuring cable OMK
• For use as extension cable between junction box VS and transmitter, not terminated
• Sold by the meter - order no. 50004124
CYK71 measuring cable
• Non-terminated cable for the connection of sensors (e.g. conductivity sensors) or the extension of
sensor cables
• Sold by the meter, order numbers:
– non-Ex version, black: 50085333
– Ex version, blue: 51506616
Junction box VS junction box

• With plug-in socket and 7-pole plug
• For cable extension from sensor (COS71, COS61, COS31, COS3 with SXP connector) to transmitter,
IP 65 (similar to NEMA 4);
• Order no. 50001054
Transmitter Liquisys M COM 223/253

• Transmitter for oxygen measurement
• Field or panel-mounted housing
• HART® or Profibus available
• Ordering acc. to product structure, see Technical Information (TI 199C/24/ae)
Turbimax W CUS65
Turbidity and solids content sensor
Installation and immersion sensor for low, medium and high
concentrations using the four-beam pulsed light method
Application Your benefits

The Turbimax W CUS65 sensor is used for optical turbidity and • Four-beam pulsed light method for compensation of sensor
solids content measurement. Due to various sensor heads the soiling and wearing of optical components
sensor is suitable for use from low to high concentration ranges. • Sensor body made of stainless steel
• No mechanically moving parts, therefore no sensor blocking
• Wastewater clarification / sludge treatment
• Measured value processing in sensor resulting in low signal
• Boiler feedwater monitoring
transmission sensitivity
• Condensate monitoring
• Aeration systems do not affect measurement
• Service water monitoring
• Plug system for quick commissioning
TI370C/07/en/01.08
71067562
Turbimax W CUS65

Measuring principle Turbidity measurement
For turbidity measurement a light beam is sent through the medium and is diverted from its original direction
by optically denser particles, e.g. solid matter particles.
Four-beam pulsed light method
The method is based on two light sources and two photo receivers. Long-life LEDs are used as monochromatic
light sources. To eliminate interference from extraneous light sources, these LEDs are pulsed at a rate of several
kHz.
Two measuring signals are detected at the two photo receivers. The four measuring signals are processed in
the sensor and are converted into proportional frequencies. The transmitter assigns the frequencies to the
appropriate turbidity units and solids concentrations.
The four-beam pulsed light method compensates the sensor soiling as well as the wearing of the optical
components.
S = Light source
E = Light receiver
S1 E1
S2 E2
a0008973
Four-beam pulsed light method
Measuring methods Depending on the version, the sensor uses the absorption light method (CUS65-A, -B, -C) or the scattered light
method (CUS65-D, -E).
Absorption light method
The measuring principle is based on the Lambert-Beer law. The turbidity of the medium is determined by the
weakening of the light beam.
The sensor LEDs send a directed light beam to the light receivers. The light beam intensity is weakened by the
solid matter particles in the medium.
I0 = Intensity of transmitted light

I
® lg –0 = ECD
–ECD
IT = I0 · e IA = Intensity of absorbed light
IT
IT = Intensity of light transmitted
IS = Intensity of scattered light
E = Extinction coefficient
IA
C = Concentration
D = Optical path length
I0 IT
IS
D
a0008974
Absorption light method

90° NIR scattered light method
The measurement uses the 90° scattered light method acc. to ISO 7027 / EN 27027.
The turbidity of the medium is determined by the amount of scattered light. The transmitted light beam with
a wavelength in the near-infrared range is scattered by the solid matter particles in the medium. The scattered
beams are detected by scattered light receivers which are arranged at an angle of 90 ° to the infrared light
sources.
2
Turbimax W CUS65

Is = I0 · C · A · f(a)
E1 E2 A = Geometrical factor
C = Concentration
P = Particle
IS f(α) = Angle correlation
IS a
P a I0
I0
S1 S2
a0008975
90° scattered light method

Backscattered light method
The measurement uses the backscattered light method.
The turbidity of the medium is determined by the amount of backscattered light. The transmitted light beam
is scattered by the solid matter particles in the medium. The backscattered beams are detected by scattered
light receivers, which are arranged next to the light sources.

Is = I0 · C · A · f(a)
A = Geometrical factor
C = Concentration
P = Particle
IS
f(α) = Angle correlation
E1 a P
I0
IS
S1 I0 a
a0008976
Backscattered light method
I = Intensity of transmitted light

I C = Concentration
P = Reversal point
P Cal = Calibration range
C
0.8% Cal 10%
a0008980
! Note!
CUS65-E has a reversal point at approx. 0.8% of solid matter (as dry substance) and can thus not be calibrated
with water. Therefore only use the sensor starting from a concentration >10 g/l.
3
Turbimax W CUS65
Maximum measured error < 1% of measuring range end
(system measured error related to the primary formazine standard / tracing according to ISO 5725 and ISO
7027 / EN 27027)
Wave length 880 nm
Reference measurement by four-beam pulsed light method
Factory calibration CUS65-A, -B, -C, -E: SiO2

CUS65-D: Formazine acc. to ISO 7027 / EN 27027
Installation
Installation instructions Installation options:
• with retractable assembly CUA451
• with immersion pipe CYY105
! Note!
• Observe the required mounting clearance for the installation mode selected. Installing the sensor in pipes or
close to a wall can lead to backscattering resulting in signal increase, mainly with measurements in low
turbidity ranges (<100 FNU).
• Make sure the sensor is completey immersed at changing water levels.
Installation angle α dependent on sensor version:

• CUS65-A: 80°
• CUS65-B: 90°
• CUS65-C, E: 100°
• CUS65-D: 110°
a0008990
Installation with retractable assembly

Arrow = flow direction of the medium
5
Turbimax W CUS65
min. 200 (8)

90°
45°
a0008991
Immersion pipe angles

Arrow = flow direction of the medium
min. 100 (4)

mm (inch)
• CUS65-A: 45 °
a0008992 • CUS65-D: 90 °
Wall distance with immersion pipe • CUS65-B, -C, -E: 180 ° (straight)
Environment
Ambient temperature range -20 to 60 °C (0 to 140 °F)
Storage temperature -20 to 60 °C (0 to 140 °F)
Humidity 5 to 95 %
Ingress protection IP 68
Process
Temperature pressure
diagram °F
40 50 60 70 90 110 130
77 104 122
6 87
80
5
70
4 60
bar 50 psi
3
40
2 30
20
1 15
10 20 25 30 40 50 60
°C
a0008127
Temperature pressure diagram
6
Turbimax W CUS65
Product structure TurbiMax W Measuring range, application
CUS 65 A 0 to 12 g/l, activated sludge, centrate
B 0 to 40 g/l, return sludge
C 0 to 50 g/l, primary sludge, digested sludge
D 1 to 1000 FNU, wastewater effluent, service water, condensate, boiler feedwater
E 10 to 150 g/l, centrifuge inlet, press inlet
Certificates
1 Factory calibration certificate
Process connection
A G1 + NPT 3/4 thread
Y Special version acc. to customer specification
Connecting cable
1 7 m (23 ft), SXP plug
2 15 m (49 ft), SXP plug
3 1 m (3.3 ft) + extension cable 10 m (32 ft), both with SXP plug
Seal
A Viton
Y Special version acc. to customer specification
CUS65- complete order code
Scope of delivery The scope of delivery comprises:

• 1 CUS65 sensor, cable length depending on version
• 1 extension cable (only version CUS65-xxx3)
• 1 Quality certificate
• 1 Operating Instructions BA370C/07/en
8
Turbimax W CUS65
Accessories
Assemblies Retractable assembly Cleanfit CUA451
• retractable assembly with ball valve; for turbidity sensors; material: stainless steel
• ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI369C/07/en)
Immersion assembly CYY105
• for sensor immersion in basins, SS 1.4404 (AISI 316L) pipe, SS 1.4571 (AISI 316Ti) fitting
• Ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI092C/07/en)
Wall mounting Wall attachment for immersion pipes

• Material: stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
• order no. 51503581
Counter plate
• Material: stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304)
• order no. 51512992
mm (inch) 160 (6.3)
R1 .59
130 (5.1)
(0
5 )
4 (0.16)
Æ11
)
130 (5.1) (0.43
300 (11.8)
130 (5.1)
160 (6.3)
11 (0.43)
130 (5.1)
mm (inch)
a0008997 a0008998
Wall mounting Counter plate
Transmitters CUM740
• Transmitter for turbidity and solids content measurement
• see Technical Information (TI232C/07/en)
Connection accessories Extension cable

• Extension cable length 10m (32 ft)
• Shielded, with SXP plug and SXK coupling
• Ingress protection IP 67
• Order No.: 51503633
Plugs
• SXP plug
– 7-pole
– Order No.: 51504027
• SXK coupling
– 7-pole
– Order No.: 51504025
Junction box
• Junction box for extension of cable connection between sensor and instrument
• Sensor cable input SXB socket, cable output Pg 11 cable gland
• Material: Makrolon®
• Ingress protection IP 67
• Order No.: 51503632
9
TI 232C/07/en CUM 740
51504297
Transmitter for Turbidity

and Solids Content
The CUM 740 transmitter is used for

optical solid matter content measure-
ment in clear and turbid water and in
sludge.
Since the transmitter can connect a
large range of sensors, it covers a wide
range of solid matter concentration also
at high temperature and in hazardous
areas.
Applications
• Closed sewage treatment plant areas,
such as inflow, preclarifier, sludge
removal
• Process monitoring in high-tempera-
ture and hazardous areas in the
chemical industry, waste incinerators
and steam generation plants
Features and benefits

• Large selection of sensors for
four-beam pulsed light systems
• Large two line LC display for set-up
and measured value display
• Large additional LED display for
separate measured value display
• Large concentration range
from 2 FNU to 150g/l
• Measuring units: g/l, mg/l, TEF, ppm,
%
• Menu-controlled set-up and
calibration in plain text
• Measured value processing in sensor,
giving low signal transmission
sensitivity
• Five relay outputs (sensor cleaning,
error message, two freely
configurable limit contacts, Hold)
• Battery-powered measured value
storage
• One or two channel versions
The complete measuring system for the
Measuring equipment high temperature range consists of:
• Turbidity transmitter CUM 740
• Turbidity sensor, e.g. TurbiMax P
CUS 61/61H with the components:
– Sensor head
– Zener barrier
– Optical fibre and sensor electronics
(for high temperature applications)
– Installation or immersion assembly.
CUM 740
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Optical fibre Sensor cable
Measuring system
CUM 740 Sensor head Electronics
with CUS 61H-A2 US61-11.CDR
CUM 740
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Sensor cable Ex Sensor cable
Measuring system
Sensor head Zener barrier
CUM 740
US62-10.CDR
with CUS 62-G1
CUM 740
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Optical fibre Sensor cable Ex Sensor cable
Measuring system Sensor head Electronics EEx-i Zener barrier

CUM 740
with CUS 63H-G2 US63-09.CDR
CUM 740
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Flow assembly
Optical fibre Sensor cable Ex Sensor cable
Measuring system Electronics EEx-i Zener barrier

CUM 740
US61-12.CDR
with CUS 61H-G3
2
Measuring principle Signal processing The sensor generates a turbidity or
Measured value preprocessing takes solids-dependent signal which is
place in the sensor. The connectable converted into a frequency signal.
sensors operate using the four-beam The frequency signals are assigned to
pulsed light method. corresponding turbidity units and solid
matter contents, and are shown in the
Turbidity is determined using different transmitter display.
optical measuring methods depending
on the sensor connected:
• Absorption light method

• Backscatter light method
• 90° scattered light method.
The CUM 740 is fully set up and Programming levels which go beyond
Operation calibrated in a menu-assisted software everyday operation processes are only
using a dirt-proof membrane keypad. accessible by entering a password.
The operator is guided interactively
through the operating menu. The All the calibration data and parameters
interface is a two-line plaintext display. are retained if there is a power failure
or when the device is shut down (non-
volatile RAM).
1 2 3
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Operating panel
1 LED display
(Measured value display)
2 LC display
(Plaintext display)
3 Mains switch 4
UM740-03.CDR
4 Membrane keypad
3
The 16-bit processor offers the following
Functions possibilities for signal evaluation:
• Measured value detection, display
and evaluation
• Menu control with alpha-numeric LC
display
• Measuring system monitoring incl.
sensor
• User parameter storage and
management
All instrument control functions are

arranged in a logical menu structure.
Operating panel Function
MEASUREMENT Detection, evaluation and display of

sensor signal, analogue current and
sensor frequency
PARAMETER ENTRY Measuring range selection, limit

setting, measured value damping
setting, cleaning interval setting
CALIBRATION Sensors calibrated using stored

calibration curves or using application-
specific customer standards
ASSIGN Calibration value assignment to

appropriate sensor signals
FREQUENCY Retrieval and option for manually

editing measuring frequencies
determined during calibration
CONFIGURATION Sensor type selection, measuring unit

selection, calibration factor setting,
analogue output configuration, alarm
relay configuration
LANGUAGE User interface in your own language
ERROR DISPLAY Error message display
4
Dimensions
241 10
212 114,5
19
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
185
152
60
Pg 11 Pg 11 Pg 11 Pg 13.5 69
Sensor connection box
Dimensions
Measuring transmitter
UM740-02.CDR
CUM 740
Installation
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
ENDRESS+HAUSER
CUM 740
Installation examples
left:
Tank mounting
with CUS 61-G1
right:
Channel installation
US61-04.CDR US63-06.CDR
with CUS 63H-G1
5
Electrical connection
Sensor
Connection Terminals voltage
X2 to ground even
CUM 740 when the unit is
OUT
23 TxD
24 V DC / 100 mA
switched off !!!
27 0V 22 RxD Load max. 250V~/2A, 30V=/1A
26 +24 V NO
- 33 21 CTS 18 15 12 9 6 3
NC F1
+ 32 25 +24 V 20 GND 17 14 11 8 5 2 N
COM
Shield 31 24 0V 19 Shield 16 13 10 7 4 1 L
T 500 mA
I1 IN RS232 Cleaning Error Hold Alarm A Alarm B
4-20 mA Supply 230/115 V~
Electrical connection
CUM 740
UM740-11.CDR
Pin assignment
❏ Weather protection cover for wall ❏ Upright post for weather protection
Accessories mounting cover
Order no.: 50061258 Order no.: 50064291
300 60 x 60 x 2
320
270
1495
950
550
∅ 12
Accessories
left:
150
Weather protection
cover
right:
Upright post 120
for weather protection UM740-18.CDR UM740-19.CDR
cover
6
Technical data
General data
Instrument designation Transmitter CUM 740 for turbidity and solids content
Mechanical data Dimensions (l x w x d) 185 × 241 × 114.5 mm

Weight 1.6 kg
Display LED display (12mm) for displaying measured values,
2-line LC display (5mm) for set-up
Materials Housing Polycarbonate

Sight glass Plexiglas®
Input Parameters Turbidity and solids content measurement

Measuring principle Four-beam pulsed light method
Measuring light Infrared light
Wavelength 880nm (absorption maximum)
Measuring range Dependent on connected sensor
Accuracy ≤ 1% from measuring range end value
Reproducibility 0.5%
Output Signal output 0/4 ... 20mA

Number of signal outputs max. 2
Load max. 500Ω
Switching outputs 1 relay contact for sensor cleaning, 1 relay contact for Hold
function, 1 relay contact for error messages,
2 limit contact freely configurable
Switching power 3A at 115V/230VAC, 1A at 24VAC/VDC
Interfaces RS 232, port for bus extension
Electrical connection Power supply 230/115VAC, 50/60Hz +6 ... –10%, 24VAC/VDC

Power consumption max. 15VA
Ambient conditions Ambient temperature –20 ... +60°C

Ingress protection IP 65
Supplementary documentation Technical Information CUS 61 /CUS 61 H Order No.: 51504289

Technical Information CUS 62 Order No.: 51504291
Technical Information CUS 63 /CUS 63 H Order No.: 51504293
Technical Information CUS 64 Order No.: 51504295
Subject to modifications.
7
Product structure Transmitter CUM 740 for turbidity and solids content
Power supply
0 Power supply 230 V AC
1 Power supply 115 V AC
8 Power supply 24 V AC / DC
9 Special version
Communications
A RS 232 and 0/4 ... 20 mA
Y Special version
Version
1 One channel version
2 Two channel version
9 Special version
Additional equipment
A Standard version
Y Special version
CUM 740- Complete order code

Liquisys M COM223/253
Dissolved Oxygen Measurement
Transmitter for oxygen sensors
Application
The modular design of the transmitter allows easy adaption to a
variety of customer requirements. Starting with the basic version
for "measurement and alarm generation", the transmitter can be
equipped with additional software and hardware modules for
special applications. These modules can also be retrofitted as
required.
Areas of Application
• Sewage treatment plants
• Wastewater treatment
• Water treatment
• Drinking water
• Surface water: rivers, lakes, sea
• Fish farming
• Boiler feed water (trace measurement)
Your benefits
• Field or panel-mounted housing
• Universal application
• For analog and digital sensors
• Simple handling
– Logically arranged menu structure
– Simple single-point calibration in air, air-saturated water or
in the medium is possible
• Safe operation
– Excellent interference immunity
– Direct access for manual contact control
– User-defined alarm configuration
The basic unit can be extended with:
• 2 or 4 additional contacts for use as:
– Limit contacts (also for temperature)
– P(ID) controller
– Timer for simple rinse processes
– Complete cleaning with Chemoclean
• Plus package:
– User-defined current output characteristics
– Automatic cleaning trigger on alarm or limit violation
– Process monitoring
– Sensor live check
• HART® or PROFIBUS-PA/-DP
• 2nd current output for temperature, main measured value or
actuating variable
• Current input for flow rate monitoring with controller shut off
or for feedforward control
TI199C/24/ae/06.08

Features of the basic version Measurement of oxygen content and of partial oxygen pressure
The oxygen content is displayed in ppm (mg/l) or in %SAT, the partial oxygen pressure is displayed in hPa.
This is selected via the menu. The temperature is displayed at the same time or, if desired, not shown at all.
Calibration
The amperometric sensors are zero-current-free and only require a single-point calibration. This takes place
in air, air-saturated water or by reference calibration in the medium.
The optical sensor will be calibrated before shipment. If necessary it can be calibrated in air and for zero point.
Configuration
Different alarms are required depending on application and operator. Therefore the transmitter permits
independent configuration of the alarm contact and error current for each individual error. Unnecessary
or undesirable alarms can be suppressed in this manner. Up to four contacts can be used as limit contacts
(also for temperature), to implement a P(ID) controller or for cleaning functions.
Direct manual operation of the contacts (bypassing the menu) provides quick access to limit, control or
cleaning contacts, permitting speedy correction of deviations.
The serial numbers of the instrument and modules and the order code can be called up on the display.
Additional functions of version Automatic pressure compensation

WX/WS/DS
Oxygen concentration is not only dependent on altitude but also on weather conditions (pressure). Automatic
pressure compensation takes these fluctuations into account.
Additional functions of the Current output configuration

Plus package
In order to output wide measuring ranges while still achieving a high resolution in specific ranges, the current
output can be configured as required via a table. This permits bilinear or quasi-logarithmic curves, etc.
Process Check System (PCS)

It comprises two independent safety functions:
• Errors in applications without control are detected by monitoring the limit beween plausible and implausible
measured values, i.e. the alarm theshold.
• Errors in applications with control are detected by the controller monitor which monitors freely
adjustable, maximum permissible time intervals and reference value overshoot or undershoot.
Live check
The live check issues an alarm when the sensor signal does not change over a defined period of time. This may
be caused by blocking, passivation, separation from the process, etc.
Second current output The second current output can be configured for temperature, main measured value (oxygen content, partial
oxygen pressure) or actuating variable.
Current input The current input of the transmitter allows two different applications: controller shut-down in case of lower
flow rate violation or total failure in the main flow as well as feedforward control. Both functions are also
combinable.
Explosion proof versions for Field housing COM253 with power supply 24 V Application of transmitter and sensor in hazardous area
zone 2 zone 2
Field housing COM253 with power supply 230 V Application of transmitter as related electrical equipment in
non-hazardous area or in simple pressurized apparatus;
application of sensor in hazardous area zone 2
Panel mounted housing COM223 with Application of transmitter as related electrical equipment in
power supply 230 V or 24 V non-hazardous area or in simple pressurised apparatus;
application of sensor in hazardous area zone 2
2
Measuring system A complete measuring system comprises:

Variant 1 (DX/DS with COS41)
• The transmitter Liquisys M COM223 or COM253 in version DX or DS
• An oxygen sensor COS41
• An immersion, flow or retractable assembly
Options: extension cable CMK, junction box VBM
Variant 2 (WX/WS with COS31, COS61 or COS71)
• The transmitter Liquisys M COM223 or COM253 in version WX or WS
• An oxygen sensor COS31, COS61 or COS71
• An immersion, flow or retractable assembly
Options: extension cable OMK, junction box VS
3 5
REL 1
ALARM
REL 2
CAL REL
REL 1
E REL 2
7 6
REL 1
ALARM
REL 2
CAL REL
REL 1
E REL 2
C07-COM2x3xx-14-06-00-xx-002.eps
Complete measuring system Liquisys M COM223/253

1 Oxygen sensor 5 Liquisys M COM253
2 Immersion assembly CYA611 6 Liquisys M COM223
3 Universal hanging assembly holder CYH101 7 Retractable assembly COA451
4 Weather protection cover CYY101
3
Input
Measured variables Oxygen
Temperature
Measuring range COS31:

Oxygen concentration 0 to 20 / 0 to 60 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index 0 to 200 / 0 to 600 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure 0 to 400 / 0 to 1200 hPa
COS41, COS61:
Oxygen concentration 0 to 20 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index 0 to 200 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure 0 to 400 hPa
COS71:
Oxygen concentration 0 to 20 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index 0 to 200 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure 0 to 400 hPa
Temperature: -10 to 60°C (14 to 140°F)
Cable specification Cable length:

COS31, COS61, COS71 max. 100 m (328 ft)
COS41 max. 50 m (164 ft)
O2 signal input Version DX/DS: 0 to 3000 nA

Version WX/WS: digital communication or 0 to -7500 mV
Binary inputs Voltage: 10 to 50 V

Power consumption: max. 10 mA
Current input 4 to 20 mA, galvanically separated

Load: 260 Ω at 20 mA (voltage drop 5.2 V)
Output
Current range 0/4 to 20 mA, galvanically separated, active
Error current 2.4 or 22 mA in case of an error
Load maximum 500 Ω
Transmission range COS31:

Oxygen concentration Δ 0.2 to Δ 20 / Δ 0.6 to Δ 60 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index Δ 2 to Δ 200 / Δ 6 to Δ 600 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure Δ 4 to Δ 400 / Δ 12 to Δ 1200 hPa
COS41, COS61:
Oxygen concentration Δ 0.2 to Δ 20 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index Δ 2 to Δ 200 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure Δ 4 to Δ 400 hPa
COS71:
Oxygen concentration Δ 0.02 to Δ 20 mg/l (ppm)
Oxygen saturation index Δ 0.2 to Δ 200 % SAT
Oxygen partial pressure Δ 0.4 to Δ 400 hPa
Temperature: Δ 7 to Δ 70°C (Δ 45 to Δ 160°F)
Resolution max. 700 digits/mA
4
Isolation voltage max. 350 VRMS/500 V DC
Overvoltage protection according to EN 61000-4-5
Auxiliary voltage output Output voltage: 15 V ± 0.6

Output current: max. 10 mA
Contact outputs Switching current with ohmic load (cos ϕ = 1): max. 2 A
Switching current with inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.4): max. 2 A
Switching voltage: max. 250 V AC, 30 V DC
Switching power with ohmic load (cos ϕ = 1): max. 500 VA AC, 60 W DC
Switching power with inductive load (cos ϕ = 0.4): max. 500 VA AC, 60 W DC
Limit contactor Pickup/dropout delay: 0 ... 2000 s
Controller Function (adjustable): pulse length/pulse frequency controller

Controller response: PID
Control gain Kp: 0.01 to 20.00
Integral action time Tn: 0.0 to 999.9 min
Derivative action time Tv: 0.0 to 999.9 min
Period for pulse length controller: 0.5 to 999.9 s
Frequency for pulse frequency controller: 60 to 180 min-1
Basic load: 0 to 40% of max. set value
Alarm Function (switchable): latching/momentary contact

Alarm threshold adjustment range: O2 / temperature: entire measuring range, depending
on sensor type
Alarm delay: 0 to 2000 s (min)
Monitoring time lower limit violation: 0 to 2000 min
Monitoring time upper limit violation: 0 to 2000 min
5
Power supply
Electrical connection variant 1
(DX/DS) A S
41
BN 11
42
NTC G
RD 12 43
K 47
90
K O2
WH 48
H
A 91 49
A
GN
57
31
mA
58
I
B 32
O2 59
51
33
mA 52
J
C 34 53
* 81 54
55
D 10-50 V K
82 56
* 93 23 +
24 -
10-50 V L
E 94 mA
~ =
85 L1 L+
15 V
F 86 N L–
M
C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-001.eps
Electrical connection version DX or DS

A Sensor COS41 G Alarm (current-free contact position)
B Signal output 1 oxygen H Relay 1 (current-free contact position)
C Signal output 2 temperature I Relay 2 (current-free contact position)
D Binary input 1 (Hold) J Relay 3 (current-free contact position)
E Binary input 2 (Chemoclean) K Relay 4 (current-free contact position)
F Aux. voltage output L Current input 4 to 20 mA
M Power supply
* Aux. voltage output terminal 85/86 applicable
The device is approved for protection class II and is generally operated without a protective ground connection.
6

(WX/WS) COS31/71 or A B C
S
COS61 with serial number YE 1 YE 87 +
79xxxx or later 8.5 V DC
GY 2 GY 0 0
BN 5 BN 88 - 8.5 V DC
41
BU 4 BU 97 B
RS 485 42
I
PK 3 PK 96 A 43
47
WH 7 WH 18
O2 48
J
GN 6 GN 19 49
57
31
mA 58
D K
32 59
O2
51
33
mA
52
L
E 34 53
* 81 54
55
F 10-50 V M
82 56
* 93 23 +
24 -
G 10-50 V N
94
mA
~ =
85 L1 L+
15 V
H N L–
86 O
C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-003.eps
Electrical connection version WX/WS

A Oxygen sensor COS31/61/71 I Alarm (current-free contact position)
B Junction box VS with extension J Relay 1 (current-free contact position)
C COM253: Plug connection for oxygen sensor K Relay 2 (current-free contact position)
COM223: The sensor cable plug must be removed or L Relay 3 (current-free contact position)
junction box VS used M Relay 4 (current-free contact position)
D Signal output 1 oxygen N Current input 4 to 20 mA
E Signal output 2 temperature O Power supply
F Binary input 1 (Hold)
G Binary input 2 (Chemoclean)
H Aux. voltage output
! Note!
The signals "Sensor signal" and "Alarm" are not used by COS61 and the TOP68-versions.
7

(WX/WS) COS61 up to serial A B C
S
number 78xxxx
YE 1 YE 85 15 V
H 86
GY
41
87 +
GY 2 GY 0 8.5 V DC 42
0
I
BN 5 BN 88 - 8.5 V DC 43
47
BU 4 BU 97 B
RS 485 48
96
J
PK 3 PK A 49
57
WH 7 WH 18
O2
58
K
GN 6 GN 19 59
51
31
mA 52
D L
32 53
O2
54
33
mA mA
55
P E 34 M
mA 56
* 81 23 +
F 10-50 V 24 -
N
82
mA
*
~ =
93 L1 L+
N L–
G 10-50 V O
94
C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-006.eps
Electrical connection version WX/WS for COS61

A Oxygen sensor H Aux. voltage output
B Junction box VS with extension I Alarm (current-free contact position)
C COM253: Plug connection for oxygen sensor J Relay 1 (current-free contact position)
COM223: The sensor cable plug must be removed or K Relay 2 (current-free contact position)
junction box VS used L Relay 3 (current-free contact position)
D Signal output 1 oxygen M Relay 4 (current-free contact position)
E Signal output 2 temperature N Current input 4 to 20 mA
F Binary input 1 (Hold) O Power supply
G Binary input 2 (Chemoclean) P Isolation converter
! Note!
The signals "Sensor signal" and "Alarm" are not used by COS61 and the TOP68-versions.
Sensor COS61 uses the aux. voltage 15 V. This eliminates the galvanic isolation to the signal output 2.
To connect both signal outputs to a process control system, the inputs of the process control system must be
galvanically isolated. If the inputs are not galvanically isolated, you can connect "signal output 2" via an isolation
converter (0/4 - 20 ma / 0/4 - 20 mA) to the input of the process control system.
8
Connection of sensor The oxygen sensors are supplied with the measuring cable. To extend this cable, you have to use a junction
box and an extension cable (see "Accessories").
O2
S
11 12 90 91
BN RD WH GN
Shield
K A
CYK71
C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-002.eps
COS41 to transmitter (DX/DS ) with CYK71 cable
8.5 V DC
8.5 V DC
8.5 V DC
8.5 V DC
O2
RS 485
RS 485
15 V
S _ S
+ 0 _
87 0 88 97 96 18 19 + 0 + 0
85 86 0 88 97 96 18 19
YE GY BN PK WH GN
Shield
BU YE GY BN BU PK WH GN
Shield
GY
OMK OMK
C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-005.eps C07-COM2x3xx-04-06-00-xx-007.eps
COS31/71 to transmitter (WX/WS) with OMK cable COS61 to transmitter (WX/WS) with OMK cable
Power supply Depending on ordered version:

100/115/230 V AC +10/-15 %, 48 to 62 Hz
24 V AC/DC +20/-15 %
Power consumption max. 7.5 VA
Power supply protection Fine-wire fuse, medium-slow blow 250 V/3.15 A
9
Performance characteristic
Resolution Oxygen:
COS31, COS41, COS61: 0.01 mg/l / 0.1 % SAT / 1 hPa
COS71: 0.001 mg/l / 0.1 % SAT / 1 hPa
Temperature: 0.1°C (32°F)
Deviation of indicationa Display

Oxygen: max. 0.5 % of measuring range
Temperature: max. 1.0 % of measuring range
Signal output
Oxygen: max. 0.75 % of measuring range
Temperature: max. 1.25 % of measuring range
Repeatabilitya max. 0.2 % of measuring range
Temperature compensation 0 to 50°C (32 to 104°F)

range
Pressure compensation range 500 to 1100 hPa
Altitude adjustment range 0 to 4000 m (0 to 13124 ft)
Salinity adjustment range 0 to 4 %
Slope adjustment range COS31: 75 to 140 % (nominal 290 nA, in air, 20°C (68°F), 1013 hPa)
COS41: 75 to 140 % (nominal 290 nA, in air, 20°C (68°F), 1013 hPa)
a) acc. to IEC 746-1, for nominal operating conditions
10
Installation conditions
Installation instructions
Pg 13.5
Pg 7
Pg 16
11
(0.43)
M5
157
REL 1
CAL REL
REL 2
ALARM
(6.18)
REL 1
E REL 2
70 247
(2.76) (9.72)
Ø6
(0.24)
70
115 (2.76)
(4.53)
154
(6.06)
170
(6.69)
mm (inch)
C07-CxM253xx-06-06-00-en-001.EPS
Field instrument
Ø max. 60
(2.36”)
1
C07-CxM253xx-11-06-00-en-003.EPS
Mounting on pipes
11
1 Removable electronics box

2 Partition plate
3 Terminal blocks
4 Fuse
1 4
C07-CxM253xx-11-06-00-xx-001.EPS
Inside of field instrument

1
2
Ø6
(Ø 0.24)
154
(6.06)
mm (inch)
C07-CxM253xx-11-06-00-en-002.EPS
Wall mounting of the field instrument

1 Mounting holes
2 Protecting cap
3
2
1
3
C07-CxM253xx-11-06-00-xx-004.EPS
Mounting of the field instrument with mounting post and weather protection cover
1 -3 Mounting holes
12
6
(0.24)
96
(3.78)
92
(3.62)
90
(3.54)
139 149.5
(5.47) (5.89)
mm (inch)
C07-CxM223xx-06-06-00-en-001.EPS
Dimensions panel-mounted instrument
92+0.5
+0.02
(3.62 )
92+0.5
+0.02
(3.62 )
1
2
3
92
90
(3.62)
(3.54) 96 3
3
(3.78)
57
(2.24) 33
(1.30)
max. 45
approx. 25 139 (1.77) 6
(0.98) (5.47) (0.24)
approx. 165 mm (inch)
(6.50) *
C07-CxM223xx-11-06-00-en-001.EPS
Installation of the panel mounted instrument

1 Wall of control cabinet
2 Gasket
3 Tensioning screws
* Required installation depth
13
Environment
Ambient temperature -10 to +55°C (+14 to +131°F)
Ambient temperature limit –20 to +60°C (-4 to +140°F)
Storage and transport –25 to +65°C (-13 to +149°F)

temperature
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission and interference immunity acc. to EN 61326: 1997 / A1: 1998
Ingress protection Panel mounted instrument: IP 54 / NEMA 3S (front), IP 30 / NEMA 1 (housing)

Field instrument: IP 65 (NEMA 4X)
Relative humidity 10 to 95%, non-condensing
Dimensions Panel mounted instrument: 96 x 96 x 145 mm (3.78 x 3.78 x 5.71 inches)
Installation depth: approx. 165 mm (6.50")
Field instrument: 247 x 170 x 115 mm (9.72 x 6.69 x 4.53 inches)
Weight Panel mounted instrument: max. 0.7 kg (1.5 lb)

Field instrument: max. 2.3 kg (5.1 lb)
Materials Housing of panel mounted instrument: Polycarbonate

Field housing: ABS PC Fr
Front membrane: Polyester, UV-resistant
Terminals Cross section max. 2.5 mm2 (0.004 in2)
14
Human interface
Display elements
1 7
mg/l
R232
2 6
3 5
4
C07-COM2x3xx-19-06-00-en-001.eps
Operating elements
1 LC display for displaying the measured values and configuration data
2 Field for user labelling
3 4 main operating keys for calibration and device configuration
4 Changeover switch for automatic/manual mode of the relays
5 LEDs for limit contactor relay (switch status)
6 LED for alarm function
7 Display of the active contact and key for relay changeover in manual mode
The display simultaneously shows the current measured value and the temperature - the essential process data.
Brief information texts in the configuration menu provide assistance with parameter configuration.
Instrument control functions All instrument control functions are arranged in a logical menu structure. Following access code entry, the
individual parameters can be easily selected and modified as needed.

4 symbol Declaration of conformity
The product meets the legal requirements of the harmonized European standards.
The manufacturer confirms compliance with the standards by affixing the 4 symbol.
Ex approval for zone 2 Explosion protection for Zone 2
Version Approval
COM253-..6... ATEX II 3G EEx nA[L] IIC T4
COM253-..4...
COM223-..4... ATEX II 3G [EEx nAL] IIC
COM223-..6...
15
Product structure Version
DX Sensor COS41 / 4 / 4HD, basic functions
DS Sensor COS41 / 4 / 4HD, with additional functions (Plus package)
WX Sensor COS31 / 61 / 71 / 3 / 3HD, basic functions
WS Sensor COS31 / 61 / 71 / 3 / 3HD, with additional functions (Plus package)
Power supply; approval

0 230 V AC
1 115 V AC
2 230 V AC; CSA Gen. Purp.
3 115 V AC; CSA Gen. Purp.
4 230 V AC; ATEX II 3G [EEx nAL] IIC
5 100 V AC
6 24 V AC/DC; ATEX II 3G [EEx nAL] IIC for COM223, EEx nA[L] IIC T4 for COM253
7 24 V AC/DC; CSA Gen. Purp.
8 24 V AC/DC
Output
0 1 x 20 mA, dissolved oxygen
1 2 x 20 mA, dissolved oxygen and temperature/actuating variable
3 PROFIBUS PA
4 PROFIBUS DP
5 1 x 20 mA, dissolved oxygen with HART®
6 2 x 20 mA, dissolved oxygen with HART® and temperature/actuating variable
Additional contacts; analogue input

05 Not selected
10 2 x relay (limit/controller/timer)
15 4 x relay (limit/controller/Chemoclean)
16 4 x relay (limit/controller/timer)
20 2 x relay (limit/controller/timer); current input
25 4 x relay with cleaning (limit/controller/timer/Chemoclean); current input
26 4 x relay with timer (limit/controller/timer); current input
COM253-
complete order code
COM223-
Additional functions of the • Current output table to cover large areas with varying resolution, fields O23x
Plus package • Process Check System (PCS): live check of the sensor, function group P
• Automatic cleaning function start, field F8
• At version DS: air pressure measurement
Scope of delivery The delivery of the field instrument includes:

• 1 transmitter COM253
• 1 plug-in screw terminal
• 1 cable gland Pg 7
• 1 cable gland Pg 16 reduced
• 2 cable glands Pg 13.5
• 1 operating instructions BA 199C/07/en
• versions with HART communication:
1 operating instructions Field Communication with HART, BA 208C/07/en
• versions with PROFIBUS communication:
1 operating instructions Field Communication with PROFIBUS PA/DP, BA 209C/07/en
• versions with explosion protection for hazardous area zone 2 (ATEX II 3G):
Safety instructions for use in explosion-hazardous areas, XA 194C/07/a3
16
The delivery of the panel mounted instrument includes:

• 1 transmitter COM223
• 1 set of plug-in screw terminals
• 2 tensioning screws
• 1 BNC-plug (solder-free)
• 1 operating instructions BA 199C/07/en
• versions with HART communication:
1 operating instructions Field Communication with HART, BA 208C/07/en
• versions with PROFIBUS communication:
1 operating instructions Field Communication with PROFIBUS PA/DP, BA 209C/07/en
• versions with explosion protection for hazardous area zone 2 (ATEX II 3G):
Safety instructions for use in explosion-hazardous areas, XA 194C/07/a3
Accessories
Sensors • Oxymax W COS31
oxygen sensor for drinking water and wastewater measurements, SS 1.4571 , potentiostatic
amperometric principle
ordering acc. to product structure, see Technical Information (TI285C/24/ae)
• Oxymax W COS41
oxygen sensor for drinking water and wastewater measurements, POM, amperometric principle
• Oxymax W COS61
optical oxygen sensor for drinking water and wastewater measurements, SS 1.4571, fluorescence
quenching principle
• Oxymax W COS71
oxygen sensor for trace measurement, SS 1.4571, potentiostatic amperometric principle
Assemblies • Flow assembly COA250

for sensor installation in pipe lines, PVC;
ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI111C/24/ae)
• Flow assembly COA260
for plate or wall mounting, for oxygen trace measurements;
• Retractable assembly Cleanfit COA451
manually driven retractable assembly, stainless steel, with ball valve, for oxygen sensors;
• Immersion assembly COA110
for sensor immersion in the basin, PVC pipe resp. PUR floating body with SS 1.4571 (AISI 316Ti) immersion
tube;
Ordering acc. to product structure (see Technical Information TI035C/24/ae)
• Immersion assembly Dipfit W CYA611
for sensor immersion in basins, open channels and tanks, PVC;
Ordering acc. to product structure (Technical Information TI166C/24/ae)
• Immersion assembly CYY105
for sensor immersion in basins, SS 1.4404 (AISI 316L) pipe, SS 1.4571 (AISI 316Ti) fitting;
• Basin rim holder CYY106
for sensor immersion in basins, SS 1.4301 (AISI 304);
Order no. CYY106-A
• Immersion assembly holder CYH101
for pH, ORP, oxygen, conductivity assemblies and for oxygen and turbidity sensors;
17
Connection accessories • Measuring cable OMK for oxygen sensors COS31, COS61 and COS71
for use as extension cable between junction box VS and transmitter, not terminated
sold by the metre - order no. 50004124
• Measuring cable CMK for oxygen sensor COS41
for use as extension cable between junction box VBM and transmitter, not terminated
sold by the metre - order no. 50005374
• VS junction box
with plug-in socket and 7-pole plug,
for cable extension from sensor (COS71, COS61, COS31, COS3 with SXP connector) to transmitter, IP 65;
order no. 50001054
• Junction box VBM
for cable extension for sensors COS41, COS4 (fixed cable versions),
with 10 terminals, IP 65 / NEMA 4X
Cable entry Pg 13.5 Order no. 50003987

Cable entry NPT ½" Order no. 51500177
Mounting accessories • Weather protection cover CYY101 for mounting of field housing, for outdoor installation
material: stainless steel 1.4031;
order no. CYY101-A
270
(10.63)
320
(12.60)
300
(11.81)
mm (inch)
C07-CYY101xx-00-06-00-en-001.eps
Weather protection cover for field instrument
18
• Kit for mounting of field housing on horizontal or vertical pipes (Ø max. 60 mm (2.36"))
order no. 50086842
90
(3.54) Ø max. 60
70 (2.36)
(2.76)
30
(1.18)
Ø8
(0.31)
M6
70 90
(2.76) (3.54)
Ø8 60
(0.31) (2.36)
Ø6
(0.24)
70
(2.76)
90 mm (inch)
(3.54)
C07-CxM2x3xx-00-06-00-en-001.eps
Pipe mounting kit
• Universal upright post CYY102

Square post for mounting of field housing, material: stainless steel 1.4301;
order no. CYY102-A
1495
(58.86)
150
(5.91)
60 x 60
120 (2.36 x 2.36)
(4.72)
mm (inch)
C07-CYY102xx-00-06-00-en-002.eps
Square post CYY102
Optoscope • Optoscope
Interface between transmitter and PC / laptop for service purposes.
The Windows software "Scopeware" required for the PC or laptop is supplied with the Optoscope. The
Optoscope is supplied in a sturdy plastic case with all the accessories required.
Order no. 51500650
19
Electric submersible pump for scum removal

Electric submersible pumps for sewage: body pump, motor case, foot support and Shaft in AISI 304; Dry
motor insulation class F, Impeller in AISI 304.
Single‐phase version already accompanied by level switch.
Power 1.5 kW;
Voltage 380 V;
Flow 50‐200‐350‐500 liters/min;
Prevalence 10,9‐9,6‐7,6‐4,5 m;
Discharge pipeline diameter 2".

Technical
Information CUC 101
TI 160C/07/en
50084213 Optoelectronical Measuring System
for Separation Zone and
Sludge Level Detection
In many instances in process

engineering, suspensions are separated
into their solid and liquid components
by sedimentation.
To operate this process economically
and efficiently in practice, it is
indispensable to monitor the separation
and transition zones of the clarification
and settling phases continuously.
For this task, Endress+Hauser offers the
CUC 101 measuring system.
Applications
• Wastewater treatment:
sludge thickener, secondary clarifier
• Water purification:
settling basin after flocculant dosage,
sludge height in contact sludge
process
• Mining:
thickening during coal washing
process
• Chemical industry:
static separation process
Benefits at a glance
• Reliable concentration measurement
using optical measuring process
• Direct, continuous measurement of
concentration levels using
zone-tracking immersion sensor
• Parallel concentration measurement
and height measurement for sludge
profile evaluation
• Simple configuration, calibration and
adjustment via menu-assisted user
interface
• Backlit display
• Sensor with 4-beam pulsed light
technology
• Safe position of sensor with Hold
function for measured values during
scraper passage
• Measured value pre-processing in
sensor reduces susceptibility to
interference during signal transfer
• Sensor replaceable without
recalibration in most cases
Measuring instrument The complete measuring system is
1
installed in a closed plastic housing.
2 The main system components include:

9 • turbidity measuring transmitter
3 • turbidity sensor
• stepper motor controller
4 • tracking unit (motor, cable drum,
10 signal transfer)
System design
11
5 The instrument is specially designed as
1 Cable entries
2 Terminal chamber a field housing for use outdoors and in
3 Electronics housing industrial plants. Most of the mechanical
6
4 User interface
5 Slipring 12 parts are made of stainless steel or
6 Cable drum plastic.
7
7 Cable guide
8 Turbidity sensor with
sensor weight and
protection guard
8
9 Stepper motor
controller
10 Stepper motor
11 Toothed belt ratio
12 Heater with
thermostat UC-T01.EPS
Measuring principle Multi-beam pulsed light process The signals of the two photodetectors
The CUC 101 measuring system was are separately converted into
specially designed to detect separation logarithmic functions and set into
zones and sludge levels in relation. This compensates for both
sedimentation processes. sensor fouling and component ageing.
Separation zones are detected by
measuring turbidity. This process is
based on the conventional multi-beam
pulsed light principle.
Turbidity is measured by light

absorption. The monochromatic light
sources are two long-life LEDs
(≥ 20,000 operating hours).
To eliminate interference from

extraneous light sources, the LEDs are
pulsed at a rate of several kHz.
S1 E1
Light source 1 Photodetector 1
S2 E2
Light source 2 Photodetector 2

Principle of measuring
light emission
2
Function The sensor generates a turbidity or A synchronisation input allows the
solids-dependent absorption signal sensor to run up quickly.
which is converted into a frequency
signal. The frequency signal is This is required for the following
transferred without interference via situations:
sliprings made of stainless steel. • scraper passage
• sensor cleaning
The measured signal is compared with • safety shut-down
a preselected reference value for
sludge concentration in the measuring The analogue signal is held during this
transmitter. If there is a deviation, the time at the value last measured. When
sensor moves either up or down until it the synchronisation contact opens, the
obtains the reference concentration sensor moves to its original position and
(separation zone). sends the current measured value again.
An additional alarm contact signals
In order to save time, the tracking when the measuring range is exceeded
speed is controlled. This means that or when the sensor is soiled.
the greater the difference between the
actual and reference concentration,
the faster the sensor approaches the
separation zone. The plastic cable drum
used for this purpose is driven by a
low-maintenance stepper motor.
An electronic device determines the

sludge level height from the number of
steps carried out by the stepper motor
and supplies the result as an analogue
signal. To avoid incorrect signals
caused by stepper losses, e.g. power
failure or maintenance work, an
automatic zero point compensation of
the height measurement takes place.
For this the sensor moves to a specific
reference point.
1
4
2
User interface
1 Large 14 mm display
4 1/2-digit for current
sludge level depth
2 LC display for menu
guidance
3 Membrane keypad
UC-T03.EPS
4 Mains switch
Operation The CUC 101 can be completely set up Programming levels which go beyond
and calibrated via the dirt-proof everyday operation processes are only
membrane keypad. The operator is accessible by entering a password.
guided interactively through the
operating menu. The interface is a All the calibration data and parameters
two-line plaintext display. are retained if there is a power failure or
when the device is shut down
A language selection menu permits the (non-volatile RAM).
device to be operated in various
languages.
3
Dimensions
465
436
660
647
555
min. 90°
250
34
108 208
Dimensions of
UC-T08.EPS
measuring transmitter
Pg 7
260
∅ 38
Dimensions of
sensor UC-T06.EPS
4
Installation
1/3 r
Continuous sludge level

measurement in
secondary clarifier.
Installation on
UC-T05.EPS
scraper bridge
Continuous
separation zone
measurement
UC-T04.EPS
in sludge thickener
5
Technical data
General data
Instrument designation Sludge level measuring system CUC 101
Measuring transmitter
Mechanical data Dimensions (L x W x D) 647 × 436 × 250 mm

Total weight including sensor and tracking unit approx. 30 kg
Display LED display (14 mm) for current measured value,
2-line LC display (5 mm) for programming
Materials Housing Polyester

Connector between electronics and tracking unit
Sight glass Polycarbonate
Protection class IP 30
Input Signal input 1 Measuring input

Measured variable Turbidity measurement, height measurement
Principle of turbidity measurement Multi-beam pulsed light process
Measuring light Infrared light at 880 nm
Measuring range 0 ... 12 g/l
Accuracy ±1 % of measured value
Reproducibility 0.5 %
Height measurement Stepper motor control
Measuring range 0 ... 11 m, free parameter entry
Signal input 2 (24 V DC) Synchronisation, e.g. to run up sensor during
scraper passage
Signal input 2 (24 V DC) Profile run
Output Signal output 1 0/4 ... 20 mA for sludge level measurement (height)
Signal output 2 0/4 ... 20 mA for solids measurement (concentration)
Load Max. 500 Ω
Switching outputs 2 limit contacts, freely configurable
1 relay contact for sensor cleaning,
1 relay contact for alarm signal
1 relay contact each for messages 1 and 2
Switching power 2 A at 115/230 V AC, 1 A at 30 V DC
Electrical connection Power supply 230/115 V AC, 50/60 Hz +6 ... –10%

Power consumption Max. 105 VA (electronics + heater)
Heater Heating capacity Thermostatically controlled, 55 VA
Ambient conditions Ambient temperature –20 ... +60 °C
Reeling unit
Components Cable drum (w x ∅ ) 210 x ∅ 160 mm

Cable length 13 m
Drive Stepper motor with worm gear and toothed belt
Stepping rate 200 steps per revolution
Signal transfer Noble metal sliprings
Zone-tracking speed Max. 10 cm /s
Sensor
Physical data Dimensions 260 x ∅ 38 mm
Material Sensor Stainless steel SS 316 Ti and polyoxymethylene (POM)

Sensor cable Polyurethane jacket
Sensor weight Stainless steel SS 316 Ti and polyamide 6.6 GFRP
Protection guard Stainless steel SS 316 Ti
Height measurement Max. sensor stroke 11,4 m
Operating conditions Max. temperature 50°C

Pressure Max. 6 bar
Subject to modifications.
6
Accessories ❏ Railing-mounting bracket with
weather protection cover
Order No.: 51503584
❏ Cleaning brush for cable

Order No.: 51503585
❏ Sensor rinsing device

stainless steel VA, DN 200
incl. solenoid valve
Order No.: 51503586
❏ Sensor rinsing device

plastic PP, DN 300
incl. solenoid valve
Order No.: 51503587
❏ Sensor protection guard with

90° angle bracket
Order No.: 51503783
Product structure Sludge level measuring system CUC 101
Version
A Standard
Y Special version
Power supply
0 Power supply 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
1 Power supply 115 V AC, 50/60 Hz
9 Special version
CUC 101- complete order code
7
Vibration Limit Switch

Level limit switch for all liquids.
Suitable for use in hazardous areas, food and pharmaceuticals
The function is not affected by flow, turbulence, bubbles,

foam, vibration, bulk solids content or build-up.
The Liquiphant is thus the ideal substitute for float
switches.
FTL50:
Compact design, ideal for mounting in pipes and for
installation in areas difficult to access
FTL51:
With extension pipe up to 3 m
(6 m on request)
FTL50H, FTL51H:
With polished tuning fork and easy-to-clean process
connections and housings for food and pharmaceutical
applications.
High corrosion-resistant AlloyC4 (2.4610) is available for
the fork and process connections for applications in very
aggressive liquids.
EEx ia, EEx de and EEx d protection enable it to be used
in hazardous areas.
Your benefits
• Use in safety systems requiring functional safety
to SIL2/SIL3 in accordance with IEC 61508/
IEC 61511-1
• Large number of process connections to choose from:
universal usage
• Wide variety of electronics, e.g. NAMUR, relay,
thyristor, PFM signal output: the right connection for
every process control system
Application • PROFIBUS PA protocol:
The Liquiphant M is a level limit switch for use in all for commissioning and maintenance
liquids • No calibration: quick, low-cost start-up
– for process temperatures of –50 °C to 150 °C • No mechanically moving parts: no maintenance,
– for pressures up to 100 bar no wear, long operating life
– for viscosity up to 10000 mm2/s • Monitoring of fork for damage: guaranteed function
– for densities 0.5 g/cm3 or 0.7 g/cm3 other settings • FDA approved materials (PFA Edlon)
available on request
– foam detection on request
Liquiphant M FTL50(H), FTL51(H)
Table of contents
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Level limit detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Electronic insert FEL56 (NAMUR L-H edge) . . . . . . . 13
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Modularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic versions for level limit switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic versions for level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic version for density computer FML621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Electronic insert FEL58 (NAMUR H-L edge) . . . . . . . 14
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Measuring range (detection range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Product density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electronic insert FEL51 (AC 2-wire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Electronics FEL58 (NAMUR H-L edge,
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 in compact housing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electronics FEL51 (AC, in compact housing). . . . . . . . 7
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Electronic insert FEL57 (PFM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Electronic insert FEL52 (DC PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Electronic insert FEL50A (PROFIBUS PA) . . . . . . . . . 18
Electronics FEL52 (DC PNP, in compact housing) . . . . 9 Electronic insert FEL50D (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Light signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Electronic insert FEL54 (AC/DC with relay output) . 11
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connection and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fail-safe mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Switching time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connectable load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Switch-on behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electronic insert FEL55 (8/16 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sliding sleeves for unpressurised operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Influence of medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 High pressure sliding sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Influence of product density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Transparent cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Influence of medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Cover with sight glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Circular connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Supplementary Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Examples of mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Functional Safety (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Safety Instructions (ATEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety Instructions (NEPSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Ambient temperature limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Climate class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Medium conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Thermal shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Medium pressure pe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Test pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
State of aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Solids content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Lateral loading capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Dimensions in mm (1 mm = 0,0394 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Electronic inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Compact housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

General approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CRN-approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Other certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Combination of housings and electronic inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Product structure Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Product structure Liquiphant M FTL50H, FTL51H . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Welding neck G ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Welding neck G 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Welding neck G 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Welding neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
DRD welding flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lap joint flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Lap joint flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3
Application
Level limit detection Maximum or minimum detection in tanks or pipes containing all kinds of liquids, including use in hazardous
areas, food and pharmaceuticals
L00-FTL5xxxx-11-05-xx-xx-000

Measuring principle The sensor's fork vibrates at its intrinsic frequency.
This frequency is reduced when covered with liquid. The change in frequency then activates a limit switch.
Modularity Level limit switch

FEL51/52/54
Liquiphant M FTL with electronic versions
FEL51, FEL52, FEL54
Level sensor
FEL55/56/57/58/50A
Liquiphant M FTL with electronic versions
FEL55, FEL56, FEL57, FEL58
Ex i
for connecting to a separate switching unit or
or an isolating amplifier FEL50A Switching unit
for connecting to PROFIBUS PA segment PLC
Isolating
amplifier
Segment
coupler
…
EX EX
L00-FTL5xxxx-15-05-xx-en-000
4
Electronic versions FEL51:

for level limit switches Two-wire AC version;
Switch the load directly into the power supply circuit via the thyristor.
FEL52:
Three-wire DC version;
Switch the load via the transistor (PNP) and separate connection.
FEL54:
Universal current version with relay output;
Switch the loads via 2 floating change-over contacts.
Electronic versions FEL55:

for level sensor For separate switching unit; signal transmission 16/8 mA along two-wire cabling.
FEL56:
For separate switching unit; signal transmission L-H edge 0.6…1.0 / 2.2…2.8 mA
to EN 50227 (NAMUR) along two-wire cabling.
FEL58:
For separate switching unit; signal transmission H-L edge 2.2…3.5 / 0.6…1.0 mA
to EN 50227 (NAMUR) along two-wire cabling.
Checking of connecting cabling and other devices by pressing a key on the electronic insert.
FEL57:
For separate switching unit; PFM signal transmission;
Current pulses superposed on the power supply along the two-wire cabling.
Cyclical checking from the switching unit without changing levels.
FEL50A:
For connecting to PROFIBUS PA;
Cyclic and acyclic data exchange acc. to PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.0 Discrete Input
Electronic version FEL50D:

for density computer FML621 For separate Density Computer FML621.
Galvanic isolation FEL51, FEL52, FEL50A:

Between sensor and power supply
FEL54:
Between sensor and power supply and load
FEL55, FEL56, FEL57, FEL58, FEL50D:
See switching unit connected
Design FTL50: Compact

FTL51: With extension pipe
FTL50H: Compact, with polished tuning fork and hygienic process connections
FTL51H: With extension pipe, polished tuning fork and hygienic process connections
Input
Measured variable Level (limit value)
Measuring range FTL50:

(detection range) Depends on mounting point.
FTL51:
Depends on mounting point and the pipe extension. Standard 3000 mmm (up to 6000 mm on request)
Product density Adjustment on the electronic insert > 0.5 g/cm3 or > 0.7 g/cm3 (other on request)
5
Electronic insert FEL51 (AC 2-wire)

Power supply Supply voltage: 19...253 V AC
Power consumption: < 0.83 W
Residual current consumption: < 3.8 mA
Short-circuit protection
FEM51 overvoltage protection: overvoltage category III
Electrical connection Two-wire AC connection

Always connect in series with a load!
FEL51
Check the following:
• The residual current in blocked state
(up to 3.8 mA)
• that for low voltage 1 2
– the voltage drop across the load is such * External load R
that the minimum terminal voltage at the must be connected
electronic insert (19 V) when blocked is
not undershot. min.
– the voltage drop across the electronics when 19 V
switched through is observed
(up to 12 V) 1A
• that a relay cannot de-energise with holding
power below 3.8 mA.
If this is the case, a resistor should be *
connected parallel to the relay. An RC module is R
available under modification no. MVT2Y1278.
• When selecting the relay, pay attention to
the holding power/rated power
(See "Connectable load") L1 N N PE
(Ground)
U~ max. 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
Output signal Safety mode Level Output signal LEDs

green red
IL
1 2
IL = load current Max.
(switched through)
< 3.8 mA
1 2
< 3.8 mA = residual current
(blocked)
IL
1 2
= lit
Min.
= unlit < 3.8 mA

1 2
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000 L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-001
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: < 3.8 mA
Connectable load • For relays with a minimum holding power/rated power > 2.5 VA at 253 V AC (10 mA) or
> 0.5 VA at 24 V AC (20 mA)
• Relays with a lower holding power/rated power can be operated by means of an RC module connected
inparallel
• For relays with a maximum holding power/rated power < 89 VA at 253 V AC or < 8.4 VA at 24 V AC
• Voltage drop across FEL51 max. 12 V
• Residual current with blocked thyristor max. 3.8 mA
• Load switched directly into the power supply circuit via the thyristor.
Transient (40 ms) max. 1.5 A, max. 375 VA at 253 V or max. 36 VA at 24 V (not short-circuit proof)
6
Electronics FEL51 (AC, in compact housing)

Power supply Supply voltage: 19...253 V AC
Power consumption: < 0.83 W
Residual current consumption: < 3.8 mA
Short-circuit protection
FEM51 overvoltage protection: overvoltage category III
Electrical connection Two-wire AC connection

Always connect in series with a load!
Connector MAX MIN
FTL5#(H)- #######C3# (GN/YE) (GN/YE)
Check the following: 1 1
• The residual current in (BU) (BU) 2
(BK)
blocked state (up to 3.8 mA)
• that for low voltage 3
(BN)
– the voltage drop across
> 19 V > 19 V
the load is such that the
minimum terminal voltage R R
at the electronic insert 1.0 A 1.0 A
(19 V) when blocked is not
PE L1 N PE L1 N
undershot. (Ground) (Ground)
– the voltage drop across
FTL5#(H)- #######D3#
the electronics when switched (Pg11) 1 1 2
through is or
observed (up to 12 V). FTL5#(H)- #######E3#
(NPT ½") 3
• That a relay
cannot de-energise with > 19 V > 19 V
holding power below 3.8 mA.
If this is the case, a resistor R R
1.0 A 1.0 A
should be connected parallel
to the relay. PE L1 N PE L1 N
(RC module available on request). (Ground) (Ground)

green red
IL
1 3
(switched through)
< 3.8 mA
1 3
< 3.8 mA = residual current
(blocked)
IL
1 2
= lit
Min.
= unlit < 3.8 mA

1 2
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000 L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-001a
Connectable load • For relays with a minimum holding power/rated power > 2.5 VA at 253 V AC (10 mA) or
> 0.5 VA at 24 V AC (20 mA)
• Relays with a lower holding power/rated power can be operated by means of an RC module connected
inparallel
• For relays with a maximum holding power/rated power < 89 VA at 253 V AC or < 8.4 VA at 24 V AC
• Voltage drop across FEL51 max. 12 V
• Residual current with blocked thyristor max. 3.8 mA
• Load switched directly into the power supply circuit via the thyristor.
Transient (40 ms) max. 1.5 A, max. 375 VA at 253 V or max. 36 VA at 24 V (not short-circuit proof)
7
Electronic insert FEL52 (DC PNP)

Power supply Supply voltage: 10…55 V DC
Ripple: max. 1.7 V, 0…400 Hz
Current consumption: max. 15 mA
Power consumption: max. 0.83 W
Reverse polarity protection
Overvoltage protection FEL52: overvoltage category III
Electrical connection Three-wire DC connection

Preferably used with programmable
logic controllers (PLC). FEL52
DI module as per EN 61131-2.

Positive signal at switching output of
the electronics (PNP);
Output blocked on reaching limit. 1 2 3
(+)
0.5 A
e.g.
Relay
PLC
–
L+ L–
U–
... 10…55 V DC

green red
L+ IL +
1 3
(switched through)
< 100 µA
1 3
< 100 μA = residual current
(blocked)
L+ IL +
1 3
= lit Min.
= unlit < 100 µA

1 3
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: < 100 μA
Connectable load • Load switched via the transistor and separate PNP connection, max. 55 V DC
• Load current max. 350 mA (pulsed overload and short-circuit protection)
• Residual current < 100 μA (with transistor blocked)
• Capacitive load max. 0.5 μF at 55 V, max. 1.0 μF at 24 V
• Residual voltage < 3 V (with transistor switched through)
8
Electronics FEL52 (DC PNP, in compact housing)

Power supply Supply voltage: 10…55 V DC
Ripple: max. 1.7 V, 0…400 Hz
Current consumption: max. 15 mA
Electrical connection Three-wire DC connection

Preferably used with programmable
Connector MAX MIN
logic controllers (PLC).
DI module as per EN 61131-2. FTL5#(H)- #######N3# 2 1 2 1
(M12x1) (WT) (BN) (WT) (BN)
Positive signal at switching 52018763
output of the electronics (PNP); 3 4 3 4
Output blocked on reaching limit. (BU) (BK) (BU) (BK)
R R
FTL5#(H)- #######N3#
(M12x1)
52010285 / 52024216 0.5 A 0.5 A
L– L+ L– L+
FTL5#(H)- #######D3#
(Pg11) 1 1
or
2 2
FTL5#(H)- #######E3#
(NPT ½") 3 + 3
+
R
– R
–
0.5 A 0.5 A
PE L– L+ PE L– L+
(Ground) (Ground)
FTL5#(H)- #######C3# (GN/YE) (GN/YE)

1 2 1 2
(BU) (BK) (BU) (BK)
3 + 3
(BN) (BN) +
R
– R
–
0.5 A 0.5 A
PE L– L+ PE L– L+
(Ground) (Ground)
Output signal With valve connector or cable tail

Safety mode Level Output signal LEDs
green red
L+ IL +
3 2
(switched through)
L+ < 100 µA +
3 2
< 100 μA = residual current
(blocked) L+ +
IL
2 3
= lit
Min.
= unlit L+ < 100 µA +

2 3
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-004a
xx-xx-000
9
With M12x1 connector 52010285 / 52024216 (without LEDs)

gn ye
rd Safety mode Level Output signal LEDs
L00-FTL5xxxx-16-05-
xx-xx-002
L+ IL –
1 2
Max.
IL = load current
L+ < 100 µA –
(switched through) 1 2
< 100 μA = residual current L+ –

(blocked) IL
1 4
Min.
= lit
L+ < 100 µA –
= unlit 1 4
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000
With M12x1 connector 52018763 (with LEDs)

ye 1
ye 2 gn
Safety mode Level Output signal LEDs
L00-FTL5xxxx-16-05-
xx-xx-001
L+ IL –
1 2
Max.
IL = load current
L+ < 100 µA –
(switched through) 1 2
< 100 μA = residual current L+ –

(blocked) IL
1 4
Min.
= lit
L+ < 100 µA –
= unlit 1 4
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: < 100 μA
Connectable load • Load switched via the transistor and separate PNP connection, max. 55 V DC
• Load current max. 350 mA (pulsed overload and short-circuit protection)
• Residual current < 100 μA (with transistor blocked)
• Capacitive load max. 0.5 μF at 55 V, max. 1.0 μF at 24 V
• Residual voltage < 3 V (with transistor switched through)
10
Electronic insert FEL54 (AC/DC with relay output)

Power supply Supply voltage: 19…253 V AC, 50/60 Hz or 19…55 V DC
Electrical connection Universal current connection with relay output

Power supply:
FEL54
Please note the different voltage ranges
for AC and DC.
Output:
When connecting an instrument with 1 2 3 4 56 7 8
high inductance, provide a spark arrester
to protect the relay contact.
A fine-wire fuse (depending on the
load connected) protects the relay
contact on short-circuiting.
Both relay contacts switch simultaneously.
*
0.5 A
* When jumpered, the relay
output works with NPN logic.
** See below "Connectable load"
NO C NC NO C NC
a u r a u r
L1 N PE ** **
L+ L– (Ground)
U~ 19…253 V AC, 50/60 Hz

U–
... 19… 55 V DC

green red
3 4 5 6 7 8
Max.
= relay energised 3 4 5 6 7 8
= relay de-energised
3 4 5 6 7 8
= lit
Min.
= unlit
3 4 5 6 7 8
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: relay de-energised
Connectable load • Loads switched via 2 floating change-over contacts (DPDT)

• I~ max. 6 A (Ex de 4 A), U~ max. 253 V AC; P~ max. 1500 VA, cos ϕ = 1, P~ max. 750 VA, cos ϕ > 0.7
• I% max. 6 A (Ex de 4 A) to 30 V DC, I% max. 0.2 A to 125 V
• When connecting a low-voltage circuit with double isolation according to IEC 1010 the following applies:
total of voltages of relay output and power supply max. 300 V
11
Electronic insert FEL55 (8/16 mA)

Power supply Supply voltage: 11...36 V DC
Power consumption: < 600 mW
Electrical connection Two-wire connection for separate switching unit

For connecting to programmable
FEL55
logic controllers (PLC).
AI module 4...20 mA to EN 61131-2.
Output signal jump from high to low
current on limit.
1 2
EEx ia
EX
EX
– +
U–
... 11…36
11…36 V DC
e.g. PLC

green red
+ ~16 mA
2 1
Max.
+ ~8 mA
~ 16 mA = 16 mA ± 5 % 2 1
~ 8 mA = 8 mA ± 6 %
+ ~16 mA
2 1
= lit
Min.
= unlit + ~8 mA
2 1
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000
Connectable load • R = (U - 11 V) : 16.8 mA

• U = connection voltage: 11…36 V DC
Example:
PLC with 250 Ω loop powered input
250 Ω = (U – 11V) / 16, 8 mA

4,2 [Ω/Α] = U – 11 V
U = 15,2 V
12
Electronic insert FEL56 (NAMUR L-H edge)

Power supply Power consumption: < 6 mW bei I < 1 mA; < 38 mW bei I = 2,2...4 mA
Connection data interface: IEC 60947-5-6

For connecting to isolating amplifiers
acc. to NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6), FEL56
e.g. FXN421, FXN422, FTL325N,
FTL375N or Commutec SIN100,
SIN110 from Endress+Hauser.
Output signal jump from low 1 2
to high current on limit.
(L-H edge)
Connecting to multiplexer: EEx ia

Set clock time to min. 2 s.
EX
I
EX
L
– +
Isolating amplifier
to IEC 60947-5-6
(NAMUR)

green red
0.6 …
+ 1.0 mA
2 1
Max.
2.2 …
+ 2.8 mA
2 1
= lit 0.6 …
+ 1.0 mA
2 1
= flashes
Min.
2.2 …
= unlit + 2.8 mA
2 1
L00-FTL5xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-002
Signal on alarm Output signal in the event of damaged sensor: > 2.2 mA
Connectable load • See Technical Data of isolating amplifier connected according to IEC 60947-5-6 (NAMUR)
13
Electronic insert FEL58 (NAMUR H-L edge)


For connecting to isolating amplifiers
FEL58
acc. to NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6),
e.g. FXN421, FXN422, FTL325N,
FTL375N or Commutec SIN100,
SIN110 from Endress+Hauser.
Output signal jump from high 1 2
to low current on limit.
(H-L edge)
EEx ia
Additional function:
Test key on the electronic insert.
Pressing the key breaks the connection EX
to the isolating amplifier.
H
! Note! I
EX
For Ex-d applications, the additional function L
can only be used if the housing is not exposed
to an explosive atmosphere.
Connecting to multiplexer: – +
Set clock time to min. 2 s. Isolating amplifier
to IEC 60947-5-6
(NAMUR)

green yellow
2.2 …
+ 3.5 mA
2 1
Max.
0.6 …
+ 1.0 mA
2 1
= lit 2.2 …
+ 3.5 mA
2 1
= flashes
Min.
0.6 …
= unlit + 1.0 mA
2 1
L00-FTL5xxxx-07-05- L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-007
xx-xx-002
Signal on alarm Output signal in the event of damaged sensor: < 1.0 mA
• Connection also to isolating amplifiers which have special safety circuits (I > 3.0 mA)
14
Electronics FEL58 (NAMUR H-L edge,

in compact housing)

For connecting to isolating
Connector MAX MIN
amplifiers acc. to
FTL5#(H)- #######N3#
NAMUR (IEC 60947-5-6), (M12x1)
e.g. FXN421, FXN422, 2 1 2 1
52018763 (BN) (BN)
(WT) (WT)
FTL325N, FTL375N
or Commutec SIN100,
3 4 3 4
SIN110 from Endress+Hauser. (BU) (BK) (BU) (BK)
Output signal jump from high FTL5#(H)- #######N3#
(M12x1)
to low current on limit. 52010285 / 52024216
(H-L edge) – + – +
Additional function: FTL5#(H)- #######D3#

If the test magnet is held (Pg11)
or 1 1
against the marking on the 2
FTL5#(H)- #######E3#
nameplate, the output signal (NPT ½")
is inverted. 3
Connecting to multiplexer:
Set clock time to min. 3 s. + – + –
FTL5#(H)- #######C3#
The NAMUR interface has 1 1 2
(BU) (BU) (BK)
a defined power consumption.
Thus, it is not possible to use
the M12 connector with 3
integrated LED (52018763). (BN)
+ – + –

green yellow
2.2…
+ 3.5 mA –
1 3
Max.
0.6…
+ 1.0 mA –
1 3
= lit 2.2…
+ 3.5 mA –
1 2
= flashes Min.
0.6…
= unlit + 1.0 mA –
1 2
L00-FTL5xxxx-07-05-
L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-xx-007a
xx-xx-002
Signal on alarm Output signal in the event of damaged sensor: < 1.0 mA
• Connection also to isolating amplifiers which have special safety circuits (I > 3.0 mA)
Endress+Hauser 15
Electronic insert FEL57 (PFM)

Power supply Supply voltage: 9,5...12,5 V DC
Current consumption: 10...13 mA
Power consumption: < 150 mW

For connecting to switching units
FEL57
Nivotester FTL320, FTL325P,
FTL370, FTL372, FTL375P
(also with cyclical checking)
Commutec SIF101, SIN111
from Endress+Hauser. 1 2
Output signal jump of PFM signal
from high to low frequency
when sensor is covered.
Switching between minimum/maximum EEx ia
safety in the Nivotester.
EX
Additional function "cyclical checking":
After interruption of the power supply,
a test cycle is activated which checks PFM
50 /
the sensor and electronics without any 150 Hz
change in level. EX
Approved for overfill protection acc. to WHG,
Germany. – + Nivotester
The following can be switched at the FTL320
7 8 FTL325P 1CH
electronic insert:
33 34 FTL325P 3CH
– Standard (STD): 37 38
for low corrosive liquids; FTL370/372
simulation approx. 8 s d4 d2 FTL375P 1CH
Input 1
tuning fork exposed – covered – exposed.
– Extended (EXT): FTL372
z4 z2 FTL375P 2CH
for highly corrosive liquids; Input 2
simulation approx. 41 s FTL375P 3CH
z6 d6
tuning fork exposed – covered – corroded – Input 3
exposed.
Commutec S
2 1
The check is activated and monitored at the SIF101, SIF111
switching unit. L00-FTL5xxxx-04-05-xx-en-003
16
Switching behaviour of the connected device:
Fail-safe mode Setting Fork Switching status of relay in switching unit

set at at FEL57 on = energised off = de-energised
switching unit
Test start End of test start
(power off) (power on)
>3s
Max. STD free on off ~ 5 s off ~ 2 s on ~ 2 s off on

Max. EXT free on off ~ 5 s off ~ 2 s on ~ 35 s off on
Max. STD covered off off off
Max. EXT covered off off off
Min. STD free off ~ 3 s on ~ 5 s off ~ 3 s on off
*
Min. EXT free off ~ 3 s on ~ 7 s off ~ 30 s on off
*
Min. STD covered on ~ 3 s on ~ 5 s off on
*
Min. EXT covered on ~ 3 s on ~ 5 s off ~ 35 s on ~ 3 s off on
*
* De-energised on power supply failure
Please note this switching response and function of the plant, especially when replacing a Liquiphant with an
EL17Z or FEL37 electronic insert by a Liquiphant M with the FEL57 electronic insert.

(PFM) green yellow
150 Hz
= lit
= unlit 50 Hz
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
xx-xx-000
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: 0 Hz
Connectable load • Floating relay contacts in the connected switching unit Nivotester FTL320, FTL325P, FTL370, FTL372,
FTL375P or Commutec SIF101, SIF111
• For contact load see the Technical Data of the switching unit
17
Electronic insert FEL50A (PROFIBUS PA)

Power supply Bus voltage: 9...32 V DC
Bus current:
• 12,5 mA +/– 1,0 mA (Software Version: 01.03.00, Hardware Version: 02.00)
• 10,5 mA +/– 1,0 mA (Software Version: 01.03.00, Hardware Version: 01.00)
Electrical connection Two-wire connection for power supply and data transfer
For connecting to PROFIBUS PA

FEL50A
Additional functions:
– Digital communication enables the
representation, reading and editing
1 2
of the following parameters:
Fork frequency, switch-on frequency,
switch-off frequency, switch-on time and
switch-off time, status, measured value,
density switch.
– Matrix locking possible
– Switch to WHG mode possible EX
(WHG approval).
– For a detailed description see BA198F
EX
PA– PA+
–
–
PROFIBUS PA
U–
... 9…32 V DC
–
Segment coupler
–
PC with Commuwin II
Proficard or Profiboard
PLC
Segment coupler
PROFIBUS DP
EX
PROFIBUS PA
EX
18
Output signal Setting Level LEDs FEL50A

green yellow
OUT_D = 0
PA bus signal
not
inverted OUT_D = 1
PA bus signal
OUT_D = 1
PA bus signal
= lit inverted
OUT_D = 0
= unlit PA bus signal
L00-FTL2xxxx-07-05-
Signal on alarm • Failure information can be opened using the following interfaces:
Yellow LED flashing, status code, diagnostic code; see BA198F
19
Electronic insert FEL50D (Density)

Power supply Frequency range: 300 to 1500 Hz
Signal level: 4 mA
Pulse height: 16 mA
Pulse width: 20 μS
Electrical connection Two-wire connection at density computer FML621

For connecting to the density and concentration computer FML621.
The output signal is based on pulse technology. FEL50D

With the aid of this signal, the fork frequency is
constantly forwarded to the switching unit.
"
1 2
Caution! –+
Operation with other switching units,
such as FTL325P, is not permitted.
EEx ia
This electronic insert cannot be installed in devices
that were originally used as a limit switch.
EX
pulse
EX
– +
FML621
10 82 On
Endress+Hauser
FML621
112 182
TI420en004
Signal on alarm Output signal on power failure or in the event of damaged sensor: 0 Hz
Calibration In the Liquiphant M modular system, the option of calibrating is also provided in addition to the electronics
(see feature 60: "Additional Option on → Page 40 ff.").
There are three types of calibration:
Standard calibration (see TI328F, ordering information for additional fittings, basic version A)
• Here, two fork parameters are determined to describe the sensor characteristics, indicated in the
calibration report and provided with the product.
These parameters must be transmitted to the FML621 density computer.
Special calibration (see TI328F, ordering information for additional fittings, special calibration,
density H2O (K) or special calibration, density H2O with 3.1 certificate (L))
• Here, three fork parameters are determined to describe the sensor characteristics, indicated in the
calibration report and provided with the product.
These parameters must be transmitted to the FML621 density computer.
Greater accuracy is achieved with this type of calibration (see also "Performance characteristics").
Field calibration
• During field calibration, a density value actually determined by the customer is entered and the
system is automatically calibrated to this value (wet calibration).
20
Function Measuring the density of a liquid medium in pipes and tanks. Also suitable for use in hazardous areas, and
preferably for applications in the chemical and food industry.
EX EX
* *
Endress+Hauser
RMM621
On
FML621
PLC/SPS
1. 2. 3. 4.
Endress+Hauser
RMM621
On
FML621
PLC/SPS
TI420Fxx016
* Pressure and temperature information required depending on the application.

1. Liquiphant M sensor with electronic insert FEL50D (pulse output);
2. Temperature sensor (e.g. 4 to 20 mA output);
3. Pressure transmitter (4 to 20 mA output);
4. Liquiphant density and concentration computer FML621
Light signals LED Symbol Information
Yellow Measurement valid
Process situation instabile
Maintenance required
Green Power on
Power off
Red No fault
Maintenance required
Device failure
21
Connection and function

Connecting cables • Electronic inserts: cross-section max. 2.5 mm2; strand in ferrule to DIN 46228
• Protective earth in housing: cross-section max. 2.5 mm2
• External equipotential bonding connection on housing: cross-section max. 4 mm2
Fail-safe mode Minimum/maximum residual current safety selectable on electronic insert

(with FEL57 on Nivotester only)
Max. = maximum safety:
The output switches to the power fail response when the fork is covered
For use with overfill protection for example
Max. = minimum safety:
The output switches to the power fail response when the fork is exposed
For use with dry running protection for example
Switching time When fork is covered: approx. 0.5 s

When fork is exposed: approx. 1.0 s
Other switching times on request
Additionally configurable for PROFIBUS PA: 0.5...60 s
Switch-on behaviour When switching on the power supply, the output assumes the alarm signal.
After max. 3 s it assumes the correct switching mode (Exception: FEL57)
Reference operating Ambient temperature: 23 °C
conditions
Medium temperature: 23 °C
Product density: 1 g/cm3 (water) Switchpoint
13 mm
2 for
Viscosity: 1 mm /s reference conditions
Medium pressure pe: 0 bar

Sensor mounting: vertical from above
Density switch: to > 0.7
Maximum measured error Specified by mounting position: max. +/–1 mm
Repeatability 0.1 mm
Hysteresis Approx. 2 mm
Influence of medium Max. +1.8…–2.8 mm (–50…+150 °C)

temperature
Influence of product density Max. +4.8…–3.5 mm (0.5…1.5 g/cm3)
Influence of medium pressure Max. 0…–2.5 mm (–1…64 bar)
22
Operating conditions
Installation Installation instructions
Switch points on the sensor depend on the mounting position, with reference to water,
density 1 g/cm3, 23 °C, pe 0 bar.
4 mm
4 mm
13 mm
Mounting from above Mounting from below Mounting from the side
! Note!
The switchpoints of the Liquiphant M are at other positions to those of the previous version Liquiphant II.
Examples of mounting Examples of mounting with regard to the viscosity ν of the liquid and the amount of build-up
Optimum mounting, without problem even with high viscosity:

Position the fork so that the narrow edge of the tines is vertical.
This ensures that the liquid can run off easily.
Vertical from above Flush-mounted from the side
23
With build-up on the tank walls:

* Ensure that there is sufficient distance between the build-up expected on the tank wall and the fork.
*
*
Vertical from above Protruding into the tank from the side
Mounting positions with low viscosity (up to 2000 mm2/s):

* Deburr the nozzle surfaces
*
* min. 25
(min. 1 in)
Mounting in piping from 2"

Fluid velocities up to 5 m/s for viscosity 1 mm2/s and density 1 g/cm3.
(Check the function for other operating conditions.)
24
Support the Liquiphant M FTL51(H)

in the event of high dynamic loads.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Ensure adequate space outside the tank .................................................................................................................................
.. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ....

.. .. .. .. .. .. .....................................................................
for mounting, electrical connection and
configuration.
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .
Orientation FTL50(H) and FTL51(H) with short pipe (up to approx. 500 mm) – any position,
FTL51(H) with long pipe – vertical
Environment
Ambient temperature range Permitted ambient temperature Ta at the housing depending on the medium temperature Tp in the tank:
Ta
Ta ** *
70 °C
50 °C
0 °C
Tp
–50 °C 0 °C 50 °C 100 °C 150 °C Tp
90 °C
–50 °C
* Additional temperature range for devices with a temperature spacer or flameproof bushing
** Maximum ambient temperature with FEL50D in hazardous areas.
Ambient temperature limits –50…+70 °C (function with restricted data)
25
Storage temperature –50…+80 °C
Climate class Climate protection to IEC 68, Part 2-38, Fig. 2a
Degree of protection • Polyester, steel and aluminium housings: IP66/IP67 to EN 60529

• Aluminium housing (EEx d, EEx de): IP66/IP68 to EN 60529 (1 m, 24 h)
• Compact housing:
– IP65 with valve connector Pg11/NPT ½
– IP66/68 with 5m cable tail
– IP66/68 with M12x1 connector (52010285) 316L (metal);
– IP69k with connector (52024216), elbowed / L= 5 m, without build-in LEDs
– IP69k with connector (52018763), elbowed / L= 5 m, with build-in LEDs
Vibration resistance To IEC 68, Part 2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.15 mm, 100 cycles)
Electromagnetic compatibility Interference emission to EN 61326, Electrical Equipment Class B

Interference immunity to EN 61326; Annex A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC)
Medium conditions
Medium temperature range –50…+150 °C; for exceptions, see "Process connections"
Thermal shock Max. 120 °C/s
Medium pressure pe
pe
bar
(psi)
(psi)
*
100
(1450)
64
(928)
Tp
–1 °C
–50 (–14.5) 0 (°F)
150
(–58) (32) (300)
* Allowed pressure rating by selecting the "100 bar" option (see "Ordering Information FTL51" code 060,
see Page 40 ff.)
Exceptions see "Process connections"
The pressure values permitted at higher temperatures can be found in the following standards:
• pR EN 1092-1: 2005 Table, Appendix G2
With regard to its stability property, the material 1.4435 is identical to 1.4404 which is grouped under 13EO
in EN 1092-1 Tab. 18. The chemical composition of the two materials can be identical.
• ASME B 16.5a - 1998 Tab. 2-2.2 F316
• ASME B 16.5a - 1998 Tab. 2.3.8 N10276
• JIS B2238/2220
In each case it applies to the lowest value from the derating curves of the device and the selected flange.
Test pressure pe = 64 bar:

max. 100 bar (1.5 times the medium pressure pe); no function during test pressure
Burst pressure of diaphragm 200 bar
pe = 100 bar:
max. 150 bar (1.5 times the medium pressure pe); no function during test pressure
26
Burst pressure of diaphragm 400 bar
State of aggregation Liquid
Density 0.7 g/cm3 = delivery status

0.5 g/cm3* adjustable over switches
* Density settings for the compact housing on request
Viscosity Max. 10000 mm2/s
Solids content Max. ø5 mm
Lateral loading capacity ≤ 75 Nm
Design Summary of all electrical and mechanical versions
Plug-in electronic inserts to mount in the housing
FEL51*: Two-wire AC connection

FEL52*: Three-wire DC connection PNP
FEL54: Universal current connection, 2 relay outputs
FEL55: Output 16/8 mA for separate switching unit
FEL56: Output 0.6…1.0 / 2.2…2.8 mA for separate switching unit (NAMUR)
FEL58*: Output 2.2…3.5 / 0.6…1.0 mA for separate switching unit (NAMUR)
L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-000 FEL57: Output 150/50 Hz, PFM, for separate switching unit (Nivotester)
FEL50A: Digital communication PROFIBUS PA
FEL50D: Pulse output for Density computer FML621
* Electronics also available as compact housing. The electronics cannot be exchanged!
Housing
L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-019 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-001 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-002 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-003 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-004
Pipe housing F16 F15 F17/F13 T13

Compact (316L) Polyester (PBT) Steel (316L) Aluminium Aluminium with separate
(also for EEx d), connection compartment
coated (also for EEx de and
EEx d), coated
Process connections
L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-006 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-007 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-008 L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-009
27
G ¾, DIN ISO 228/I G 1, DIN ISO 228/I Diverse Flanges to DIN, ANSI, JIS
R ¾, EN10226 R 1, EN10226 hygienic and aseptic from DN 25 / 1"
NPT ¾, ANSI B 1.20.1 NPT 1, ANSI B 1.20.1 connections
(AF 32) (AF 41)
Sensors Compact Length L Length L II

Compact,
with extension pipe up to 3 m (to 6 m on request)
or special length "L II" (see also page 30)
pe = 64 bar 64 bar 64 bar

100 bar 100 bar
Bushings
Temperature spacer and flameproof bushing
Dimensions in mm Housing and sensor FTL50(H)

(1 mm = 0,0394 in)
Compact housing
1. 2. 3.
40
30
166
141
133
ø40 ø40 ø40

232
206
199
32 AF 32 AF 32 AF
1. 5 m cable
*
2. M12 connector
3. Pg11/NPT ½ connector
Polyester housing ø85 max. 76

max. 155
max. 40.7
*
17.5
28
Steel housing ø76 max. 64
max. 150
~25
*
Aluminium housing max. 65

ø80 max. 60
max. 173
ø21.5
*
10
Aluminium housing max. 65 max. 97

with separate
connection compartment
max. 190
*
* see "Process connections"
! Note!
Bushings: temperature spacer, flameproof bushing

Temperature spacer
Provides sealed insulation
for the vessel and normal ambient
temperatures for the housing.
Flameproof bushing
Protects the housing from pressures
up to 100 bar if the sensor is damaged. Vessel
insulation
Provides sealed insulation
for the vessel and normal ambient additional length
140 mm
temperatures for the housing.
29
Process connections for FTL50(H) and FTL51(H)
Process connection Dimensions Accessories Pressure

Temperature
G¾ GQ2 66.5
max. 100 bar (FTL51)
DIN ISO 228/l GQ5 max. 150 °C
with defined 32 AF 50.5
thread start
With elastomer
flat seal to DIN 7603:
supplied L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-en-001
G¾ GQ2 66.5
Welding neck max. 25 bar
DIN ISO 228/l GQ5 (with defined max. 150 °C
with defined 32 AF 50.5 thread start)
thread start with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
Endress+Hauser max. 100 °C
For flush-mounted 52001052
installation in
L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-en-001 In conformity with
welding neck
FDA*
See "Accessories"
G1 GR2 69 max. 100 bar (FTL51)

DIN ISO 228/l GR5 41 AF max. 150 °C
50.5
With elastomer
flat seal to DIN 7603:
supplied
G1 GW2 80 Welding neck max. 25 bar

DIN ISO 228/l 41 AF (with defined max. 150 °C
61.3
with defined thread start)
thread start with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
With seal surface 52001051
for flush-mounted
In conformity with
installation in L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-en-003
FDA*
welding neck
See "Accessories"
NPT ¾ GM2 In conformity with max. 100 bar (FTL51)

(66.5)
ANSI B 1.20.1 GM5 FDA* max. 150 °C
32 AF 50.5
or
R¾ GE2
EN10226 GE5
NPT 1 GN2 (69) In conformity with max. 100 bar (FTL51)

ANSI B 1.20.1 GN5 41 AF FDA* max. 150 °C
50.5
or
R1 GF2
EN10226 GF5
* FDA approved materials according to 21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
30

Temperature
Flanges Seal See nominal pressure

ANSI B 16.5 A## according to design of flange, however
66.5
EN 1092-1 B## installed on site max. 100 bar (FTL51)
(DIN 2527 B) C## max. 150 °C
In conformity with
JIS B2220 F##
FDA*
N##
K##
For a higher chemical resistance are AlloyC4 coated flanges available.

The flange beams material consists of 316L and comes with a 2 ... 3 mm AlloyC4
disc welded. The surface roughness in the area of sealing surface is:
Ra = 0.3 ... 1.0
Tri-Clamp 66.5
Clamping ring and max. 16 bar
1 ½" = ø50.5 mm TC2 front seal max. 120 °C
2" = ø64.0 mm TE2 installed on site
ISO 2852 max. 2 bar
In conformity with
max. 150 °C
FDA*
Threaded pipe joint Sealing ring with collar, DN 32, DN 40:

66.5
DN 32 MA2 installed on site max. 40 bar to 100 °C
DN 40 MC2 max. 25 bar to 140 °C
In conformity with
DN 50 ME2
FDA*
DIN 11851 DN 50:
max. 25 bar
with screw cap max. 140 °C
Flush-mounted for 1" EE2 55.5

Welding neck max. 40 bar
welding neck (fork can be max. 100 °C
Factory standard positioned)
Endress+Hauser with Endress+Hauser max. 25 bar
silicone seal 52001047 max. 150 °C
and screw cap:
In conformity with
supplied
FDA*
See "Accessories"
Aseptic HE2 Sealing ring, max. 25 bar

66.5
DN 50 installed on site max. 140 °C
DIN 11864-1
In conformity with
Form A
FDA*
for pipe DIN 11850
with screw cap
DRD PE2 66.5

Welding flange with max. 40 bar
With clamped flange PTFE flat seal max. 100 °C
(fork can be
positioned) max. 25 bar
52002041
In conformity with
FDA*
See "Accessories"
(or installed on site)
31

Temperature
SMS UE2 66.5

Sealing ring, max. 25 bar
2" installed on site max. 140 °C
(DN 51)
In conformity with
with screw cap
FDA*
Varivent WE2 56.5

Clamping ring and See specification as per
for piping O-ring seal, Tuchenhagen VARIVENT-
≥ DN 65 installed on site Inline housing but:
≥ O.D. 3"
In conformity with
≥ I.P.S. 3" max. 25 bar
ø68
FDA*
max. 150 °C
Sensor length L for FTL51 and FTL51H,

depending on process connection
Thread: G¾ Thread: NPT ¾ Flanges and

G1 NPT 1 flange-like process connections
R¾
R1
L
L
L
ø21.5
L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-017 L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-018
From seal surface of From lower edge of

thread adapter thread
Any length L:
148...3000 mm (6...115 in); special version (TSP) on request up to 6000 mm (235 in)
! Note!
Special length "L II":
With vertical mounting from above the same switchpoint as for the Liquiphant II
FTL360, FTL365, FDL30, FDL35
"L II" depends on process connection:

L = 115 mm for flanges and flange-like process connections
L = 99 mm for threads NPT and R (BSPT)
L = 118 mm for threads G 1 (BSP 1)
L = 115 mm for threads G ¾ (BSP ¾)
L = 104 mm for flush-mounted 1" (Endress+Hauser)
32
Weights See "Product structure"
Material – Wetted parts:

Process connection and extension pipe: AISI 316L (1.4435) or 2.4610 (AlloyC4)
Tuning fork: AISI 316L (1.4435) or 2.4610 (AlloyC4)
– Flanges made of AISI 316L (1.4435 or 1.4404)
– Flat seal for process connection G ¾ or G 1: elastomer fibre, asbestos-free
– Polyester housing: PBT-FR
with PBT-FR cover or with PA12 cover with sight glass,
Cover seal: EPDM
– Steel housing: AISI 316L,
Cover seal: silicone
– Aluminium housing: EN-AC-AlSi10Mg, plastic-coated,
Cover seal: EPDM
– Compact housing: valve connector or M12 connector
– Cable gland: polyamide or brass, nickel-plated
– Temperature spacer: AISI 316L (1.4435)
– Flameproof bushing: AISI 316L (1.4435)
Process connections – Parallel thread G ¾, G 1 to DIN ISO 228/I with flat seal to DIN 7603
– Tapered thread R ¾, R 1 to EN10226
– Tapered thread ¾ -14 NPT, 1 - 11½ NPT to ANSI B 1.20.1
– Flush-mounted with welding neck to factory standard producer(G ¾, G 1)
– Flush-mounted with welding neck to factory standard producer(1"),
Sensor can be positioned
– Tri-Clamp 1½", 2" to ISO 2852
– Threaded pipe joint DN 32, 40, 50 to DIN 11851
– Aseptic connection DN 50 to DIN 11864-1 Form A for pipe DIN 11850
– SMS connection 2" (DN 51)
– DRD flange
– Varivent® DN 50 (50/40) to factory standard Tuchenhagen
– Flanges to EN/DIN from DN 25, for standards see "Product structure", to ANSI B 16.5 from 1",
to JIS B2220 (RF)
33
Human interface
Electronic inserts With FEL51, FEL52, FEL54, FEL55:
• 2 switches for safety mode and density change,
• green LED to indicate operational status, FEL51
L1 N U~
• red LED to indicate the switching status, 19...253V AC
1 Max >0,7
50/60Hz
flashes in the event of corrosion damage 2
on sensoror if the electronics are defect
Min >0,5
I max : 350mA
1 2
With FEL56:
• 2 switches for safety mode and density change, Connecting terminal LEDs Switches
• green LED flashes to indicate operational status,
• red LED to indicate the switching status, L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-en-001
flashes in the event of corrosion damage

on sensor or if the electronics are defect
With FEL57:
• 2 switches for density change and cyclical checking,
• green LED to indicate operational status,
• yellow LED to indicate the covered status,
flashes in the event of corrosion damage
on sensor or if the electronics are defect
With FEL58:
• 2 switches for safety mode and density change,
• green LED
– flashes quickly to indicate operational status,
– flashes slowly to indicate corrosion damage
at the sensor or if the electronics are defect, L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-013
• yellow LED to indicate the switching status,

Test key – breaks the cable connection
With FEL50A:
FEL50A
• 8 switches for configuring the device address, Address
• green LED to indicate operational status, ON SW

OFF HW
PA– PA+
pulsing to indicate communication; 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• yellow LED to indicate the switching status,

flashes in the event of corrosion damage on sensor
1 2
or if the electronics are defect
Connecting terminal LEDs Switches
With FEL50D:
• yellow LED: to indicate the validation of the FEL50D
measurement
Impuls
• green LED: to indicate the operating mode – +
• red LED: to indicate faults
YE
GN RD
TI328Fxx004
Compact housings Function test with test magnet
Versions AC, DC-PNP and NAMUR:

During the test, the current state of the electronic switch is reversed.
34
Performing the test

Hold the test magnet against the marking on the nameplate:
The switching status is changed.
Light signals
Versions AC and DC-PNP with valve connector or cable tail
AC/DC NAMUR
rd ye
gn gn
Green light (gn) light up (AC/DC):

Liquiphant M is connected to the power supply and is operational.
Green light (gn) flashing (NAMUR):

Red light (rd) lights up (AC/DC):

MAX application mode (overfill protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.
MIN application mode (dry running protection): sensor is not immersed in liquid.
Yellow light (ye) lights up (NAMUR):

MAX application mode (overfill protection): sensor is not immersed in liquid.
MIN application mode (dry running protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.
Red light (rd) flashing (AC/DC):

Liquiphant M has detected a fault.
35
Version NAMUR and DC-PNP with M12x1 round connector 316L
ye rd
gn
Green light (gn) lights up (DC-PNP):

Green light (gn) flashing with 1 Hz (NAMUR):

Yellow light (ye) lights up (DC-PNP):

Sensor is immersed in liquid.
Yellow light (ye) lights up (NAMUR):

Red light (rd) flashing (DC-PNP):

Green light (gn) flashing with 0.3 Hz (NAMUR):

36
Version DC-PNP with M12x1 round connector 316L
ye 1
ye 2 gn
Green light (gn) lights up:

Yellow light (ye 1) lights up:

MIN application mode (dry running protection): sensor is not immersed in liquid.
Yellow light (ye 2) lights up:

MAX application mode (overfill protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.
Green light (gn) lights up, both yellow lights (ye 1+2) do not light up:
Operating concept Onsite configuration
37

General approvals For Liquiphant M FTL50H, FTL51H the following approvals are available:
• EHEDG: Certification (from TNO, The Netherlands), Report No. V99.394
• 3A: 3A Certificate (USA), Authorization No. 459
Process connections Order Code

+
Flush-mounted G ¾, G1 (with welding neck) GQ2, GW2 X
Tri-Clamp 2" (special seal from Hyjoin Limited, UK) TE2 X
Threaded pipe joint MA2, MC2, ME2 X
Flush-mounted (fork can be positioned) EE2 X

Aseptic HE2 X
DRD PE2 X
SMS UE2 X
Varivent® WE2 X
! Note!
For CIP (Clean in Place) and SIP (Sterilize in Place) processes the pressure and temperture specifications of the
process connections must be observed.
# Warning!
To avoid risk of contamination, install according to the "Hygienic Equipment Design Criteria (HDC)" as stated
in the Subgroup Design Principles of the EHEDG, Doc. 8, July 1993. The flow of liquid during cleaning is
important and should be in compliance with HDC.
CRN-approval Versions with a CRN approval (Canadian Registration Number) are marked with a " * " in ordering information
feature 20 "process connection" (see Page 40 ff.) CRN-approved devices are controlled by a separate sign with
the registration number 0F10525 C .5.
Other certificates • Leak detection system in combination with WHG-approval

Approval no.: Z–65.40–446
See "Ordering information"
• TSE Certificate of Suitability
The following applies to wetted device components:
– They do not contain any materials derived from animals.
– No auxiliaries or operating materials derived from animals are used in production or processing.
! Note!
Process wetted device components are listed in the “Mechanical construction” (→ Page 27 ff.) and
“Ordering information” (→ Page 40 ff.) sections.
Combination Based on the various certificates, permissible combinations of housings *) and electronic inserts are given in
of housings and the following table.
electronic inserts *) Abbreviations: Polyester = PBT, Steel 316L = St., Aluminium = Alu
Aluminium housing with separate connection compartment = Alu/sep
Certificate, applications Housing Electronic inserts
A Without any special certificate PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,

(for non-hazardous area) FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
D Overfill protection to WHG (Germany) PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,

FEL55/56/57/58/50A
38
Certificate, applications Housing Electronic inserts

B ATEX II 3G EEx nC IIC T6, WHG PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL54
ATEX II 3G EEx nC IIC T6, WHG St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL54

ATEX II 3D T85°C
C ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6, WHG PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52,

FEL55/56/57/58/50A/
50D***
ATEX II 3G EEx nA II T6, WHG St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52,

ATEX II 3D T85°C FEL55/56/57/58/50A/
50D***
E ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx de, WHG Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,

FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
F ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx ia IIC T6, WHG PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx ia IIC T6, WHG St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
ATEX II 1/2 D, T80°C
G ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx ia IIC T6 PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx ia IIC T6 St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D

ATEX II 1/2 D, T80°C
H ATEX II 1G, EEx ia IIC T6 FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
J ATEX II 1G, EEx ia IIC T6, WHG FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
I ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx de Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,

FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
K ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx d IIC T6 Alu FEL51/52/54,
FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
L ATEX II 1/2 G, EEx d IIC T6, WHG Alu FEL51/52/54,

FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
P FM, IS, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50D***
with NPT cable entry
Q FM, XP, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G Alu FEL51/52/54,
with NPT cable entry FEL55/56/57/58/50D
R FM, NI, Cl. I, Div. 2, Gr. A-D St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,
with NPT cable entry FEL55/56/57/58/50D***
PBT FEL55/56/57/58/50D***
U CSA, General Purpose St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,
PBT FEL51/52,
S CSA, IS, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL55/56/57/58/50D***
T CSA, XP, Cl. I, II, III, Div. 1, Gr. A-G Alu FEL51/52/54,
V TIIS Ex ia IIC T3 PBT, St., Alu FEL57/50D***

W TIIS Ex d IIB T3 Alu FEL52/54/50D***
Y Other certificate PBT, St., Alu, Alu/sep. FEL51/52/54,

(for non-hazardous area) FEL55/56/57/58/50A/50D
*** In preparation!
! Note!
on polyester housing (PBT), electric connecting cables run in pipes:
Do not screw cable entries firmly to the piping. Use flexible connections (e.g. with armoured hose).
If the piping is used for earthing then ensure that there is a continuous electrical connection.
39
! Note!
Despite the additional Dust-Ex-certificate, the FTL5x(H) is to be used as a liquid limit switch only.
! Note!
This overview does not mark options wich are mutually exclusive.
Product structure Design Basic weight

Liquiphant M FTL50 Compact 0.6 kg
FTL50 FTL51 With extension pipe 0.6 kg
FTL51
10 Approval:
B ATEX/NEPSI II 3 G EEx nC II T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
ATEX/NEPSI II 3 D T 85 °C*
C ATEX/NEPSI II 3 G EEx nA II T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
D Non-hazardous area Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
E ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
F ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
ATEX II 1/2 D T 80 °C*
G ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
H ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6
I ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6
J ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
K ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6
L ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
M NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
N NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
P FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
Q FM XP, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group B-G, for E5 housing Group A-G
R FM NI, Class I Division 2, Group A-D
S CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
T CSA XP, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
U CSA General Purpose
V TIIS Ex ia IIC T3
W TIIS Ex d IIB T3
X TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
7 TIIS Ex d IIC T3
8 TIIS Ex d IIC T6
Y Special version
*) not valid for PBT
20 Process Connection: Additional weight

Note!
For 100 bar process pressure, please select the appropriate option under "Additional option"
GQ2 G¾ 316L Thread ISO 228
Installation > accessory: welding neck
GQ5 G¾ AlloyC4 Thread ISO 228
GR2 G1 316L Thread ISO 228 0.2 kg
GR5 G1 AlloyC4 Thread ISO 228 0.2 kg
GW2* G 1 316L Thread ISO 228 0.2 kg
GM2* NPT ¾ 316L Thread ANSI
GM5* NPT ¾ AlloyC4 Thread ANSI
GN2* NPT 1 316L Thread ANSI 0.2 kg
GN5* NPT 1 AlloyC4 Thread ANSI 0.2 kg
GE2 R¾ 316L Thread EN10226
GE5 R¾ AlloyC4 Thread EN10226
GF2 R1 316L Thread EN10226 0.2 kg
GF5 R1 AlloyC4 Thread EN10226 0.2 kg
40

BA2 DN32 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.2 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BB2 DN32 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.0 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BC2 DN40 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BD2 DN40 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BE2 DN50 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.6 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BG2 DN50 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 3.2 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BH2 DN65 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BJ2 DN50 PN100 A 316L (FTL51) Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2527 B)
BK2 DN65 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 4.3 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BM2 DN80 PN10/16 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 4.8 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BN2 DN80 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.9 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BQ2 DN100 PN10/16 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.6 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BR2 DN100 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 7.5 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
B12 DN80 PN100 A 316L (FTL51) Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2527 B)
B82 DN25 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
CA2 DN32 PN6 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.1 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CA5 DN32 PN6 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.1 kg
(DIN 2527)
CE2 DN50 PN6 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.5 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CE5 DN50 PN6 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.5 kg
(DIN 2527)
CG2 DN50 PN25/40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.9 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CG5 DN50 PN25/40 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.9 kg
(DIN 2527)
CJ2 DN50 PN100 B2 316L (FTL51) Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2527)
CN2 DN80 PN25/40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.2 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CN5 DN80 PN25/40 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.2 kg
(DIN 2527)
CQ2 DN100 PN10/16 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.3 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CQ5 DN100 PN10/16 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.3 kg
(DIN 2527)
C12 DN80 PN100 B2 316L (FTL51) Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2527)
C82 DN25 PN25/40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.3 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
C85 DN25 PN25/40 AlloyC4 >316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.3 kg
(DIN 2527)
DG2 DN50 PN40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2526 D)
DN2 DN80 PN40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2526 D)
D82 DN25 PN40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1
(DIN 2526 D)
FG2 DN50 PN40 C 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.6 kg
(DIN 2512 F)
NG2 DN50 PN40 D 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.9 kg
(DIN2512 N)
AA2* 1¼" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.2 kg
AB2* 1¼" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 2.0 kg
AC2* 1½" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.5 kg
AD2* 1½" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 2.7 kg
AE2* 2" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 2.4 kg
AE5* 2" 150 lbs RF AlloyC4 >316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 2.4 kg
AF2* 2" 300 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 3.2 kg
AG2* 2" 600 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 4.2 kg
41

AJ2* 2½" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 4.8 kg
AL2* 3" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 4.9 kg
AM2* 3" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 6.8 kg
AN2* 3" 600 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5
AP2* 4" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 7.0 kg
AQ2* 4" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 11.5 kg
AR2* 4" 600 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51) Flange ANSI B16.5 17.3 kg
A82* 1" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.0 kg
KA2 10 K 25 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KC2 10 K 40 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KE2 10 K 50 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220 1.7 kg
KE5 10 K 50 RF AlloyC4 >316L Flange JIS B2220 1.7 kg
KL2 10 K 80 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KP2 10 K 100 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
TC2* DN25-38 (1...1½") 316L ISO 2852 Tri-Clamp
TE2* DN40-51 (2") 316L ISO 2852 Tri-Clamp 0.1 kg
YY9 Special version
* CRN-approval
30 Probe Length; Type:

FTL50
AA Compact; Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit
IA Compact; temperature spacer 0.6 kg
QA Compact; pressure tight feed through 0.7 kg
FTL51
BB ....... mm; 316L** Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit
BE ....... mm; AlloyC4** Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit
CB ....... inch; 316L** Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit
CE ....... inch; AlloyC4** Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
DB Length: type II*; 316L Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit 0.1 kg
DE Length: type II*; AlloyC4 Ra <3.2 μm/80 grit 0.1 kg
JB ....... mm; 316L** + temperature spacer 0.9 kg/m
+0.6 kg
JE ....... mm; AlloyC4** + temperature spacer 0.9 kg/m
+0.6 kg
KB ....... inch; 316L** + temperature spacer 2.3 kg/100 in
+0.6 kg
KE ....... inch; AlloyC4** + temperature spacer 2.3 kg/100 in
+0.6 kg
LB Length: type II*; 316L + temperature spacer 0.1 kg
+0.6 kg
LE Length: type II*; AlloyC4 + temperature spacer 0.1 kg
+0.6 kg
RB ....... mm; 316L** + pressure tight feed through 0.9 kg/m
+0.7 kg
RE ....... mm; AlloyC4** + pressure tight feed through 0.9 kg/m
+0.7 kg
SB ....... inch; 316L** + pressure tight feed through 2.3 kg/100 in
+0.7 kg
SE ....... inch; AlloyC4** + pressure tight feed through 2.3 kg/100 in
+0.7 kg
TB Length: type II*; 316L + pressure tight feed through 0.1 kg
+0.7 kg
TE Length: type II*; AlloyC4 + pressure tight feed through 0.1 kg
+0.7 kg
YY Special version
*) Replacing instruments: when vertically mounting a Liquiphant M

FTL51 with length II, the switch point is at the same height as for the
Liquiphant II FTL360, FTL365, FDL30, FDL35
See also Page 32 "L II" depends on process connection.
**) Order 3001...6000 mm (116...235 in) via yy
40 Electronics; Output:
A FEL50A PROFIBUS PA
D FEL50D Density/Concentration
1 FEL51* 2-wire, 19...253 V AC
2 FEL52* 3-wire PNP, 10... 55 V DC
4 FEL54 relay DPDT, 19...253 V AC, 19...55 V DC
42
5 FEL55 8/16 mA, 11... 36 V DC
6 FEL56 NAMUR (L-H signal)
7 FEL57 2-wire PFM
8 FEL58* NAMUR + test button (H-L signal)
9 Special version
*) Also available in compact housing
50 Housing; Cable Entry:

C3 Compact 316L IP66/68; cable 5 m
D3 Compact 316L IP65; plug Pg11 ISO 4400
E3 Compact 316L NEMA4X; plug NPT ½ ISO 4400
N3 Compact 316L IP66/68; plug M12
E4 F16 Polyester NEMA4X; thread NPT ½
E5 F13/F17 Alu NEMA4X; thread NPT ¾ 0.5 kg
E6 F15 316L NEMA4X; thread NPT ½ 0.1 kg
E7 T13 Alu coated IP66; thread NPT ¾ 0.9 kg
separate connection compartment
F4 F16 Polyester IP66; thread G ½
F5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; thread G ½ 0.5 kg
F6 F15 316L IP66; thread G ½ 0.1 kg
F7 T13 Alu coated IP66; thread G ½ 0.9 kg
G4 F16 Polyester IP66; gland M20
G5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; gland M20 0.5 kg
(EEx d > thread M20)
G6 F15 316L IP66; gland M20 0.1 kg
G7 T13 Alu coated IP66; gland M20 0.9 kg
separate connection compartment (EEx d > thread M20)
N4 F16 Polyester IP66; plug M12
N5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; plug M12
N6 F15 316L IP66; plug M12
Y9 Special version
60 Additional Option:
A Basic version
B Cleaned for silicone-free service, max 2000mm
C EN 10204 - 3.1 material (316L wetted parts)
Inspection certificate
K Special adjustment density H20
L Special adjustment density H20, EN10204-3.1
N EN 10204 - 3.1 material, NACE MR0175 (316L wetted parts)
P 100 bar process pressure (FTL51)
R 100 bar process pressure, EN 10204 - 3.1 material,
NACE MR0175 (316L wetted parts) (FTL51)
S GL/ABS marine certificate (FTL51: max. 1600 mm)
Y Special version
FTL5# - Complete product designation
! Note!
The basic weight includes the compact sensor, thread adapter G ¾, electronic insert, polyester housing
43
Product structure Design Basic weight

Liquiphant M FTL50H Compact 0.7 kg
FTL50H FTL51H With extension pipe 0.7 kg
FTL51H
10 Approval:
B ATEX/NEPSI II 3 G EEx nC II T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
C ATEX/NEPSI II 3 G EEx nA II T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
D Non-hazardous area Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
E ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
F ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
G ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
H ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6
I ATEX II 1/2 G EEx de IIC T6
J ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
K ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6
L ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d IIC T6 Overfill protection to WHG (Germany)
M NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
N NEPSI Ex d IIC T6
P FM IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
Q FM XP, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group B-G, for E5 housing Group A-G
R FM NI, Class I Division 2, Group A-D
S CSA IS, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
T CSA XP, Class I, II, III Division 1, Group A-G
U CSA General Purpose
V TIIS Ex ia IIC T3
W TIIS Ex d IIB T3
X TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
7 TIIS Ex d IIC T3
8 TIIS Ex d IIC T6
Y Special version
*) not valid for PBT

GQ2 G¾ 316L (FTL50H) Thread ISO 228
GW2* G1 316L Thread ISO 228 0.2 kg
BA2 DN32 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.2 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BB2 DN32 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.0 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BC2 DN40 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BD2 DN40 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BE2 DN50 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.6 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BG2 DN50 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 3.2 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BH2 DN65 PN6 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 2.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BK2 DN65 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 4.3 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BM2 DN80 PN10/16 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 4.8 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BN2 DN80 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.9 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BQ2 DN100 PN10/16 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.6 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
BR2 DN100 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 7.5 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
B82 DN25 PN25/40 A 316L Flange EN 1092-1 1.4 kg
(DIN 2527 B)
44

CG2 DN50 PN25/40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 3.2 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CN2 DN80 PN25/40 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.9 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
CQ2 DN100 PN10/16 B1 316L Flange EN 1092-1 5.6 kg
(DIN 2527 C)
EE2 1" flush-mounted (52001047) Installation > accessory: welding neck, 316L 0.3 kg
HE2 DN50 Tube DIN 11850 316L DIN 11864-1 A 0.3 kg
AA2* 1¼" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.2 kg
AC2* 1½" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.5 kg
AE2* 2" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 2.4 kg
AF2* 2" 300 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 3.2 kg
AJ2* 2½" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51H) Flange ANSI B16.5 4.8 kg
AL2* 3" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 4.9 kg
AM2* 3" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51H) Flange ANSI B16.5 6.8 kg
AP2* 4" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 7.0 kg
AQ2* 4" 300 lbs RF 316/316L (FTL51H) Flange ANSI B16.5 11.5 kg
A82* 1" 150 lbs RF 316/316L Flange ANSI B16.5 1.0 kg
KA2 10 K 25 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KC2 10 K 40 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KE2 10 K 50 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220 1.7 kg
KL2 10 K 80 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
KP2 10 K 100 RF 316L Flange JIS B2220
MA2 DN32 PN25 316L DIN 11851 0.1 kg
MC2 DN40 PN25 316L DIN 11851 0.2 kg
ME2 DN50 PN25 316L DIN 11851 0.3 kg
PE2 DRD 65 mm 316L 0.3 kg
TC2* DN25-38 (1...1½") 316L ISO 2852 Tri-Clamp
TE2* DN40-51 (2") 316L ISO 2852 Tri-Clamp 0.1 kg
UE2 SMS 2" PN25 316L 0.2 kg
WE2* DN65-162 PN10 316L Varivent N tube 0.5 kg
YY9 Special version
* With CRN-approval.

FTL50H
AC Compact; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit
AD Compact; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3
IC Compact; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit + temperature spacer 0.6 kg
ID Compact; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3 + temperature spacer 0.6 kg
QC Compact; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit+ pressure tight feed through 0.7 kg
QD Compact; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3 + pressure tight feed through 0.7 kg
FTL51H
BC ....... mm; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.9 kg/m
BD ....... mm; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3 0.9 kg/m
CC ....... inch; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
CD ....... inch; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3 2.3 kg/100 in
DC Length: type II*; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.1 kg
DD Length: type II*; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit / A3 0.1 kg
JC ....... mm; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.9 kg/m
+ temperature spacer +0.6 kg
JD ....... mm; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 0.9 kg/m
KC ....... inch; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
KD ....... inch; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
LC Length: type II*; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.1 kg
LD Length: type II*; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 0.1 kg
RC ....... mm; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.9 kg/m
+ pressure tight feed through +0.7 kg
RD ....... mm; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 0.9 kg/m
SC ....... inch; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
SD ....... inch; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 2.3 kg/100 in
45

TC Length: type II*; Ra <1.5 μm/120 grit 0.1 kg
TD Length: type II*; Ra <0.3 μm/320 grit 0.1 kg
YY Special version
*) Replacing instruments: when vertically mounting a Liquiphant M

FTL51H with length II, the switch point is at the same height as for the
Liquiphant II FTL360, FTL365, FDL30, FDL35
See also Page 32 "L II" depends on process connection.
A FEL50A PROFIBUS PA
D FEL50D Density/Concentration
1 FEL51* 2-wire, 19...253 V AC
2 FEL52* 3-wire PNP, 10... 55 V DC
4 FEL54 relay DPDT, 19...253 V AC, 19...55 V DC
5 FEL55 8/16 mA, 11... 36 V DC
6 FEL56 NAMUR (L-H signal)
7 FEL57 2-wire PFM
8 FEL58* NAMUR + test button (H-L signal)
9 Special version
*) Also available in compact housing
50 Housing; Cable Entry:

C3 Compact 316L IP66/68; cable 5 m
D3 Compact 316L IP65; plug Pg11 ISO 4400
E3 Compact 316L NEMA4X; plug NPT ½ ISO 4400
N3 Compact 316L IP66/68; plug M12
E4 F16 Polyester NEMA4X; thread NPT ½ –0.1 kg
E5 F13/F17 Alu NEMA4X; thread NPT ¾ 0.4 kg
E6 F15 316L NEMA4X; thread NPT ½
E7 T13 Alu coated IP66; thread NPT ¾ 0.8 kg
F4 F16 Polyester IP66; thread G ½ –0.1 kg
F5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; thread G ½ 0.4 kg
F6 F15 316L IP66; thread G ½
F7 T13 Alu coated IP66; thread G ½ 0.8 kg
G4 F16 Polyester IP66; gland M20 –0.1 kg
G5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; gland M20 0.4 kg
(EEx d > thread M20)
G6 F15 316L IP66; gland M20
G7 T13 Alu coated IP66; gland M20 0.8 kg
separate connection compartment (EEx d > thread M20)
N4 F16 Polyester IP66; plug M12
N5 F13/F17 Alu IP66; plug M12
N6 F15 316L IP66; plug M12
Y9 Special version
60 Additional Option:
A Basic version
B CoC, EN 10204 - 3.1 material (316L wetted parts)
C EN 10204 - 3.1 material (316L wetted parts)
K Special adjustment density H20
L Special adjustment density H20, EN10204-3.1
S GL/ABS marine certificate (FTL51H: max. 1600 mm)
Y Special version
FTL5#H - Complete product designation
! Note!
The basic weight includes the compact sensor, thread adapter G ¾, electronic insert, steel housing
46
Accessories
Welding neck G ¾ Order number: 52001052 max. 25 bar / max. 150 °C
with 3.1.B material certificate: 52011897
max. 40 bar / max. 100 °C
for flush-mounting
a Liquiphant FTL50 or FTL50H 26
with process connection GQ2
21
• With defined thread start *
• Sensor cannot be positioned
Material: corrosion-resistant steel
ø55 –0.4
ISO 228
G¾
ø32
1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Weight: 0.13 kg
Seal: silicone O-ring
Order number: 52001387 L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-019
FDA approved materials according to

21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
! Note!
Use only for FTL50/51 and FTL50H/51H!
Welding neck G 1 Order number: 52001051 max. 25 bar / max. 150 °C

for flush-mounting
a Liquiphant M 29.6
with process connection GW2 24.6
• With defined thread start *
• Sensor cannot be positioned
ø60 –0.4
1.4435 (AISI 316L) ISO 228
ø41
G1
Weight: 0.19 kg
Seal: silicone O-ring
Order number: 52001386
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
* The tolerance of the defined thread beginnings between welding boss and sensor amounts to ± 15°.
47
Welding neck G 1 Order number: 52001221 max. 25 bar / max. 150 °C

for flush-mounting
a Liquiphant M
26
with process connection GW2
• Sensor can be positioned
ø65 –0.3
Material (wetted):
corrosion-resistant steel
1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Weight: 0.43 kg
5
Seal: silicone moulded seal L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-021
Order number: 942816-0000
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
Welding neck Order number: 52001047 max. 25 bar / max. 150 °C

for flush-mounting
a Liquiphant FTL50H, FTL51H 4.5
with process connection EE2
1.4435 (AISI 316L)
RD 52 x 1 6
ø42.3
ø65
Weight: 0.15 kg
Seal on Liquiphant: silicone moulded seal
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600 ~26
DRD welding flange Order number: 52002041 20

for flush-mounting 15
a Liquiphant FTL50H, FTL51H

with process connection PE2
1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Weight: 0.9 kg
Seal: PTFE flat seal (FDA listed)
ø105
ø125
ø66
ø50
ø84

21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
M10
13
16
48
Lap joint flange Order number: 918158-0000

with G 1 thread for mounting 2
a Liquiphant FTL50, FTL51
with process connection GR2
14
Pressure up to 40 bar
92
92
1.4301 (AISI 304)
Weight: 0.54 kg
G1 12
Lap joint flanges with G 1 thread for mounting

a Liquiphant FTL50, FTL51
with process connection GR2
1.4571 (AISI 316Ti)
– Order number: 918143-0000
Flange DN50 PN40, EN 1092-1
Weight: 3.11 kg L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-015

Flange ANSI 2", 150 psi, RF
Weight: 2.38 kg
Sliding sleeves for continuous adjustment of the switch point

FTL51
for unpressurised operation of a Liquiphant M FTL51 41 AF
19

1.4435 (AISI 316L)
18
M6 (3x)
Weight for G 1, NPT 1: 0.21 kg
Weight for G 1½, NPT 1½: 0.54 kg G1A
(1 NPT)
55 AF
19
pe =
0 bar
22
M6 (3x)
G 1½ A
(1½ NPT)
Thread Standard Material Order number Approval

G1 DIN ISO 228/I 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003978
G1 DIN ISO 228/I 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011888 3.1 material certificate
NPT 1 ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003979
NPT 1 ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011889 3.1 material certificate
G 1½ DIN ISO 228/I 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003980
G 1½ DIN ISO 228/I 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011890 3.1 material certificate
NPT 1½ ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003981
NPT 1½ ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011891 3.1 material certificate
49
High pressure sliding sleeves For continuous adjustment of the switch point
of a Liquiphant M FTL51.
1.4435 (AISI 316L) or AlloyC4 ø60 FTL51
~70
Weight for G 1, NPT 1: 1.13 kg 50 AF
Weight for G 1½, NPT 1½: 1.32 kg
Seal package made of graphite
18
2
G1A
(1 NPT)
ø60
~72
50 AF
22
G 1½ A
(1½ NPT)
Thread Standard Material Order number Approval

G1 DIN ISO 228/1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003663
G1 DIN ISO 228/1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011880 3.1 material certificate
G1 DIN ISO 228/1 AlloyC4 52003664
NPT 1 ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003667
NPT 1 ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011881 3.1 material certificate
NPT 1 ANSI B 1.20.1 AlloyC4 52003668
G 1½ DIN ISO 228/1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003665
G 1½ DIN ISO 228/1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011882 3.1 material certificate
G 1½ DIN ISO 228/1 AlloyC4 52003666
NPT 1½ ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52003669
NPT 1½ ANSI B 1.20.1 1.4435 (AISI 316L) 52011883 3.1 material certificate
NPT 1½ ANSI B 1.20.1 AlloyC4 52003670
pe
bar
(psi) Liquiphant M FTL51*
100 Liquiphant S
(1450)
80
(1160)
64
(928)
Liquiphant M
Tp
°C
–60 –50 –1 0 150 230 280 (°F)
(–76) (–58) (–14.5) (32) (300) (440) (540)
* FTL51 with high pressure sliding sleeves (1450 psi). See "Additional Option" Page 40 ff. option "P" or "R".
50
Transparent cover Order number: 943461-0001

for polyester housing
Material: PA 12
Weight: 0.04 kg
Cover with sight glass for steel housing

Material: AISI 316L
Weight: 0.16 kg
With glass sight glass
– Order number: 52001403
With PC sight glass L00-FTL5xxxx-03-05-xx-xx-017
(Not for CSA, General Purpose)
Circular connector Order number: 52010285

4x0,34 M12 socket
Cable: PVC (grey) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PUR (blue)
Coupling nut: Cu Sn/Ni min. 40
Protection: IP67
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-004
Temperature range: –25...+70 °C

4x0,34 M12 socket
Cable: PVC (orange) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PVC (orange)

Coupling nut: 316L min. 40
Protection: IP69K (fully locked)
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-005

4x0,34 M12 socket with integrated LEDs
Cable: PVC (orange) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PVC (transparent)

Coupling nut: 316L min. 40
Protection: IP69K (fully locked)
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-005
51
Supplementary Documentation
! Note!
This supplementary documentation can be found on our product pages on www.endress.com
Operating Instructions Electronic insert FEL50A for Liquiphant M/S

PROFIBUS PA
BA141F/00/en
Liquiphant M Density,
Density Computer FML621
BA335F/00/en
Liquiphant M FTL50, FTL51
KA143F/00/a6
KA144F/00/a6
Liquiphant M FTL51C
KA162F/00/a6
Liquiphant M FTL50-####### # 7 #, FTL51-####### # 7 #
KA163F/00/a6
Liquiphant M FTL50H-######## 7 #, FTL51H-######## 7 #
KA164F/00/a6
Liquiphant M FTL51C-######## 7 ##
KA165F/00/a6
Liquiphant M FTL5#-# ### ## # #3 #, FTL5#H-# ### ## # #3 #
KA220F/00/a6
Liquiphant M Density FTL50, FTL51
Electronic insert: FEL50D
KA284F/00/a6
Liquiphant M Density FTL50H, FTL51H
KA285F/00/a6
Liquiphant M Density FTL51C
KA286F/00/a6
Technical Information Nivotester FTL370/372, switching units in Racksyst design

for Liquiphant M with electronic insert FEL57
TI198F/00/en
Nivotester FTL320, switching unit in Minipac design
for Liquiphant M with electronic insert FEL57
TI203F/00/en
General instructions for electromagnetic compatibility
(Test procedure, installation recommendation)
TI241F/00/en
Isolating amplifier FXN421/422, switching units for top-hat rail mounting
for Liquiphant M with electronic insert FEL56, FEL58
TI332F/00/en
Liquiphant M FTL51C, wetted parts with highly corrosion-resistant coating
made of ECTFE, PFA or enamel
TI347F/00/en
Isolating amplifier FTL325P, 1 or 3-channel switching units for top-hat rail mounting
for Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL57
TI350F/00/en
Isolating amplifier FTL325N, 1 or 3-channel switching units for top-hat rail mounting
for Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL56, FEL58
TI353F/00/en
52
Liquiphant S FTL70/71, for medium temperatures up to 280 °C

TI354F/00/en
Isolating amplifier FTL375P, 1 to 3-channel switching units for top-hat rail mounting
for Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL57
TI360F/00/en
Isolating amplifier FTL375N, 1 to 3-channel switching units for top-hat rail mounting
for Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL56, FEL58
TI361F/00/en
Liquiphant M Density
Density computer FML621
TI420F/00/en
Functional Safety (SIL) Liquiphant M/S + Nivotester FTL325P

SD111F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S + Nivotester FTL375P
SD113F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with FEL58 + Nivotester FTL325N (MAX)
SD161F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL54 (MAX)
SD162F/00/en
SD163F/00/en
SD164F/00/en
SD167F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with FEL56 + Nivotester FTL325N (MAX)
SD168F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with FEL58 + Nivotester FTL325N (MIN)
SD170F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with electronic insert FEL51 (MIN)
SD185F/00/en
SD186F/00/en
SD187F/00/en
Liquiphant M/S with FEL56 + Nivotester FTL325N (MIN)
SD188F/00/en
Safety Instructions (ATEX) 4 0 II 1/2 G, EEx d IIC/B

(KEMA 99 ATEX 1157)
XA031F/00/a3
4 0 II 1/2 G, EEx ia/ib IIC/B
(KEMA 99 ATEX 0523)
XA063F/00/a3
4 0 II 1 G, EEx ia IIC/B
(KEMA 99 ATEX 5172 X)
XA064F/00/a3
4 0 II 1/2 G, EEx de IIC/B
(KEMA 00 ATEX 2035)
XA108F/00/a3
4 0 II 3 G, EEx nA/nC II
(EG 01 007-a)
XA182F/00/a3
53
Safety Instructions (NEPSI) Ex d IIC/IIB T3...T6 , Ex d IIC T2...T6

(NEPSI GYJ06424)
XA401F/00/b2
Ex ia IIC T2...T6, Ex ia IIB T3...T6

(NEPSI GYJ05556, NEPSI GYJ06464),
XC009F/00/b2
Ex nA II T3...T6, Ex nC/nL IIC T3...T6

(NEPSI GYJ04360, NEPSI GYJ071414)
XC010F/00/b2
System Information Liquiphant M

SI040F/00/en
54
Dosing pumps MAXROY® series A, B and D
Maximum flow rate: 1110 l/h • Maximum pressure: 28 bar • Hydraulically actuated diaphragm
Technical characteristics
•Flow rate up to:
- 64 l/h for MAXROY® D105
- 410 l/h for MAXROY® A105
- 420 l/h for MAXROY® B105
- 1100 l/h for MAXROY® B145
•Pressure up to:
- 10 bar for MAXROY® A105 and B145
- 28 bar for MAXROY® B105 and D105
•Maximum temperature of pumped liquid:
- +90 °C for metallic liquid end
- +50 °C for plastic liquid end
•Adjustment of flow rate while running or stopped: from 0 to 100%
•Accuracy: ± 1% of rated flow from 10% to 100% stroke MAXROY® A dosing pump - Plastic liquid end
•Internal safety valve, normally set at the factory
Optional relief valve setting Options
•Suction lift: up to 2 m water save for "Viscous Liquids" version •Flexible coupling (API 675)
•Maximum suction pressure condition: 2 bar •Double diaphragm with rupture detector
•Working life of the diaphragm can exceed 20,000 hours depending •Automatic flow rate adjustment: electronic servomotor,
on the pumped fluid, working conditions and installation explosion-proof servomotor, pneumatic servomotor, frequency
•Single or double diaphragm variation
•Multiplexing available •Flange connections
•Can comply with API 675 •Stroke counter
•Explosion-proof version is in accordance with ATEX CE II 2 G/D c T4
(plastic liquid end, please consult us)
Liquid end construction
Construction
PVC (1) 316L (2)
Components
Liquid end body PVC 316L
Electrical Check valve cartridge PVC 316L
characteristics of motors Seats
Balls
PE (3)
Glass (3)
316L
316L
Contour plate PVC 316L
Standard motor data: Diaphragm PTFE PTFE
•Supply: 230/400 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz or 260/460 V, 3-phase, 60 Hz Discharge ball spring Hastelloy C 316L
•IM V1 mounting, FF130 flange, 14x30 mm shaft for Seals Viton (4) PTFE
MAXROY® A105, B145 and D105 (1)
Pressure is limited to 10 bar at 20 °C and pressure derated 1.1 bar / 5 °C.
IM V1 mounting, FF165 flange, 19x40 mm or 24x50 mm shaft Maximum operating temperature: 50 °C.
(2)
Milton Roy Europe keeps an interchangeability table for national and international
for MAXROY® B105 standards (AFNOR, DIN, ASTM, BS, etc).
•Protection: IP 55, tropicalized (90%) (3)
MAXROY® B145: PVC
•Insulation: class F
(4)
Other material on request
•Ambient temperature: -16 °C to +40 °C Other liquid end material
•Motor speed:
- "H2SO4 concentrated" version: 316L S.S. liquid end with seats in 904L and balls in Hastelloy C
- 1500 rpm for MAXROY® A105, B145 and D105 - "Viscous liquids" version: 316L S.S. liquid end with balls in 316L S.S. and spring in Hastelloy C
- 1000 or 1500 rpm for MAXROY® B105 - "Slurries" version: 316L S.S. liquid end with seats and balls in 440C
•Motors are in accordance with national and international - "Polyelectrolytes" version: PVC liquid end with seats and balls in 316L and spring in
Hastelloy C
standards - Other version on request: consult us
•Special or specific motors on request
Performances
Plastic liquid end Metallic liquid end
Stroke speed Plunger Ø Diaphragm Ø Swept volume
Type Flow rate at 10 bar Flow rate at 10 bar Flow rate at 28 bar Gear
(spm) (1) (mm) (mm) (cm3) (3)
(l/h) (l/h) (l/h)
18 16 58 1/25 22 105 7.2
MAXROY® D105 32 28 96 1/15 22 105 7.2
47 42 144 1/10 22 105 7.2
58 52 180 (2) 1/8 22 105 7.2
84 84 36 1/25 41.1 105 38.8
MAXROY® B105 130 130 58 1/25 41.1 105 38.8
209 209 96 1/15 41.1 105 38.8
316 316 144 1/10 41.1 105 38.8
391 391 180 (2) 1/8 41.1 105 38.8
127 127 58 1/25 50 105 38.8
MAXROY® A105 210 210 96 1/15 50 105 38.8
322 322 144 1/10 50 105 38.8
400 400 180 (2) 1/8 50 105 38.8
363 363 58 1/25 66.5 145 118.1
MAXROY® B145 621 621 96 1/15 66.5 145 118.1
860 860 144 1/10 66.5 145 118.1
1051 1051 180 (2) 1/8 66.5 145 118.1
(1)
Stroke rates are given for a motor speed of 1440 rpm.
Flow and stroke rates increase by 20% for a 60 Hz motor
(2)
Do not use with 60 Hz motor
(3)
Theoretical swept volume
MAXROY® D105 MAXROY® B105

Flow rate (l/h)
450
Flow rate (l/h) 420
400 391
70 350 340
64 58 316
60 300
50 51 47 52
250
42 225 209
40 32 200
35
30 150 140
28 130
20 20 18
100 90
16 84
10 50
Pressure Pressure
0 0
2 10 28 (bar) 2 28(*) (bar)
* Plastic liquid end: Pmax = 10 bar
MAXROY® A105 MAXROY® B145

Flow rate (l/h)
450
410 Flow rate (l/h)
400 400
350
330 322
300 1200
1100 1051
250 1000
900 860
200 215 210 800
600 650 621
150
130 127
100 400 380 363
50 200
Pressure Pressure
0 0
2 10 (bar) 2 10 (bar)
Dimensions (in mm)
MAXROY® A105 and D105 – Metallic liquid end

Simplex version
100
a 27
MAXROY® A105, D105 and B105

N2 Models (spm) Dimensions (mm) Connections
R1 Metallic liquid end
b
a = 618 maxi
b = 550 maxi
All models (*) c = 411 -
B
d = 91
240
e = 68
87
10
A = 160 N1 = R 1/2"G or 1/2"NPT

A
58 - 96 - 144
L1 V1 B = 160 N2 = R 1/2"G or 1/2"NPT
Screwed
c A = 186 N1 = R 3/4"G or 3/4"NPT
150 167 maxi d e 180
B = 160 N2 = R 1/2"G or 1/2"NPT
N1 218 maxi
A = 160 N1 = 1/2"
58 - 96 - 144
234 B = 160 N2 = 1/2"
Welded
3xØ10 A = 186 N1 = 3/4"
180
N1: Suction B = 160 N2 = 1/2"
68
160
136
N2: Discharge
53
A = 208 N1 = 1/2" ANSI 150 LBS

V1: Drain 58 - 96 - 144
B = 208 (**) N2 = 1/2" ANSI 150 LBS (**)
13.5 L1: Oil level Flanged
25 35 R1: Oil fill A = 239 N1 = 3/4" ANSI 150 LBS
180
261 B = 208 (**) N2 = 1/2" ANSI 150 LBS (**)
58 - 96 - 144 A = 160 DIN 11851 Ø 28

Food grade or
180 B = 160 SMS 1145 Ø 25
MAXROY® B105 – Plastic liquid end
Simplex version Plastic liquid end
a = 597 maxi
b = 539 maxi
15° All models (*)
c = 394 -
d = 93
e = 66
100
35
A = 131 N1 = Ø 15x20 F
Female 58 - 96 - 144
B = 131 N2 = Ø 15x20 F
plain
socket A = 160 N1 = Ø 25x32 F
180
B = 131 N2 = Ø 15x20 F
A = 195 N1 = PN 10 DN 15
N2 58 - 96 - 144
B = 195 N2 = PN 10 DN 15
672 maxi
R1 Flanged
A = 196 N1 = PN 10 DN 25
180
B = 195 N2 = PN 10 DN 15
B
(*)
MAXROY® B105: c = 432 for metallic liquid end and 415 for plastic liquid end
(**)
MAXROY® B105: B = 213 and N2 = 1/2’’ ANSI 300 LBS
110
A
L1
c V1 262 maxi 71
164 maxi
N1 302 maxi
15 240 15
N1: Suction
N2: Discharge
70
140
140
180
V1: Drain
3xØ10 L1: Oil level
30 42
270 R1: Oil fill
MAXROY® B145 – Plastic liquid end
Simplex version 15°
Models (spm) Dimensions (mm) Connections
Metallic liquid end
100
35
A = 191 N1 = R 1" or 1"NPT
58 - 96 - 144
B = 191 N2 = R 1" or 1"NPT
Screwed
A = 231 N1 = R 1 1/2" or 1 1/2"NPT
180
B = 191 N2 = R 1" or 1"NPT
N2
A = 191 N1 = 1"
58 - 96 - 144
B = 191 N2 = 1"
Welded
673 maxi
R1 A = 231 N1 = 1 1/2"
180
B = 191 N2 = 1"
A = 246 N1 = 1" ANSI 150 LBS
B
58 - 96 - 144
B = 246 N2 = 1" ANSI 150 LBS
Flanged
A = 316 N1 = 1 1/2" ANSI 150 LBS
110
180
12
L1
B = 246 N2 = 1" ANSI 150 LBS
A
V1
58 - 96 - 144 A = 208 DIN 11851 Ø 40
71 164 maxi Food grade or
150 450 261 maxi
301 maxi
180 B = 208 SMS 1145 Ø 38
N1
15 240 15 Plastic liquid end
N1: Suction A = 176 N1 = Ø 25x32 F
Female 58 - 96 - 144
70
N2: Discharge B = 176 N2 = Ø 25x32 F

140
140
180
V1: Drain plain

socket A = 219 N1 = Ø 32x40 F
3xØ10 L1: Oil level 180
30
270
42 B = 176 N2 = Ø 25x32 F
R1: Oil fill
A = 217 N1 = PN 10 DN 25
58 - 96 - 144
B = 217 N2 = PN 10 DN 25
Flanged
A = 276 N1 = PN 10 DN 25
180
B = 217 N2 = PN 10 DN 25
MAXROY® B105 - Metallic liquid end

Duplex and Triplex versions Protection
240 240 160
•As a standard pumps are protected with one coat of AMERON
35 polyurethane paint of 100 microns, yellow RAL 1018
•Other treatment: consult us
Lubrication
• Ambient temperature from -5 °C to +50 °C: Oil ISO - VG150
equivalent
• Quantity:
- 2.5 litres for MAXROY® A105 and D105
- 4 litres for MAXROY® B105 and B145
190
Weight and Packing

80
Duplex: 550
Triplex: 750 Net weight (kg) Gross weight (kg) Packing (2)
Simplex version
(with oil) (1) (with packing) (1) (L x W x H - mm)
MAXROY® A105 and D105 33 40 515 x 465 x 720
MAXROY® B105 57 67 800 x 400 x 900
MAXROY® B145 63 70 790 x 390 x 740
(1)
Approximately - Standard cardboard packing
(2)
Submersible pump N 3202, 50 Hz
4G35+2x1,5 mm2
Y/D start
7G4+2x1,5 mm2
7G6+2x1,5 mm2
Leakage sensor in inspection chamber FLS
Material
Impeller (.185) High chromium cast iron
N 3202 O-rings
Alternative
1
Material
Nitrile rubber
Product
Submersible pump for pumping clean water, surface water and waste
water containing solids or long-fibred material. Alternative Inner seal Outer seal
Denomination cemented carbide/ cemented carbide/
Product code 3202.180 cemented carbide cemented carbide
(High chromium) 3202.185 2 Corrosion resistant Silicon carbide/Silicon
Installation P, S, T, Z cemented carbide/ carbide
Corrosion resistant
Impeller characteristics LT, MT, HT
cemented carbide
Process data Surface Treatment

All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Liquid temperature-standard max +40 °C is a high-solid two pack paint.
The pH of the pumped liquid 5,5 -14 Weight
3
Liquid density max. 1100 kg/m See dimensional drawing.
Motor data Option

Frequency 50 Hz 3202.090 Ex. proof design
Insulation class H (+180 °C) 3202.095 (High chromium) Ex. proof design
Voltage variation Warm liquid version on request
- continuously running max ± 5% Other cables
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2% Accessories
Discharge connections, adapters, hose connections and other
Cable Electrical accessories such as pump controller, control panels, starters,
Direct-on-line start monitoring relays, cables.
SUBCAB® 4G4+2x1,5 mm2 See separate booklet or www.ittwww.com, for further information.
4G6+2x1,5 mm2
4G10+2x1,5 mm2
4G16+2x1,5 mm2
4G25+2x1,5 mm2
N 3202 3
P2 [kW]
curve
40
Ex proof version available 35 610
30
612
Power factor cos ϕ
25
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
614
20 615
616
15 617
H [m]
Installation
P S T Z LT
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min 20
6151 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • •
6161 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • • 16

617 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • •
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min
12
6121 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •
614 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •
6151 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • • 8
614
6161 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •

617 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • • 4
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min 616
612 610
615
617
610 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •
0
6121 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • • 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450
614 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • • Q [l/s]
6151 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •
616 1 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •

617 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •

1 Only .180
4 N 3202
MT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW]
curve 431
40
432
30 433

434
20
435
Power factor cos ϕ
10
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
0
H [m]
MT
Installation 35
P S T Z
30
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min
640 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • •
25
6411 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • •
642 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • • 20
6431 22 43 238 0,84 • • • • •
15
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min 431
433 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • • 10 432

433
4341 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • • 434
5
435 1 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • • 435
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min 0

640 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • • 0 40 80 120 160 200
Q [l/s]
6411 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •
642 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •
6431 30 59 320 0,83 • • • • •
P2 [kW]
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min
4321 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
40
433 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
30
4341 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
640
4351 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • • 20 641

642
643
10
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 970 r/min
0
640 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •
H [m]
6411 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • •
642 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • • MT
1 37 71 410 0,83 • • • • • 35
643
30
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min
431 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
25
4321 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
433 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • • 20
4341 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
15
4351 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •

1 Only .180
5 642 641 640

643
0
0 40 80 120 160 200
Q [l/s]
N 3202 5
HT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW]
curve
50
450 452

454
456
30 458
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
460
Rated current, A
20
H [m]
Installation HT
P S T Z 50
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min
4541 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • •
40
456 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • • 450
4581 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • •

460 30 54 360 0,88 • • • • • 30
452
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min 20 454
4501 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • • 456
452 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • • 458

10 460
4541 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
456 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
4581 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • • 0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
460 37 66 460 0,88 • • • • •
Q [l/s]
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min

4501 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
452 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
4541 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
456 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
4581 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •
460 45 79 540 0,89 • • • • •

1
Only .180
6 N 3202
Dimensional drawing
N 3202 7
LT, T-installation LT, Z-installation
8 N 3202
MT, T-installation MT, T-installation
N 3202 9
10 N 3202
HT, Z-installation
N 3202 11
21836_HyperDive_4_Seiter 15.08.02 11:16 Uhr Seite 1
C M Y CM MY CY CMY K
HY P E R DI V E ®
The Hyperboloid-Mixer
H Y P E R D I V E -Mixer
®
with submersed drive
Te chnical Spe cific ations for H D R K A/ 2500-Se rie s
Type Diameter Rotational Installed Power

speed power consumption
t e c h n o l o g y
HDRKA/2500-18-1.5 2500 mm 18.0 rpm 1.5 kW 0.9 kW
HDRKA/2500-22-1.5 2500 mm 22.0 rpm 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
HDRKA/2500-26-3.0 2500 mm 26.0 rpm 3.0 kW 2.3 kW
HDRKA/2500-30-4.0 2500 mm 30.0 rpm 4.0 kW 3.6 kW
HDRKA/2500-34-5.5 2500 mm 34.0 rpm 5.5 kW 4.8 kW
m i x i n g
Fluid mechanically
optimized
Energy saving
Robust & proven
Minimum mainte-
Side view Top view nance efforts
Easy installation
Contact
HD 1000 5.02 -1E
For further information or detailed technical and commercial offers please contact our
head office or your local representative.
IN V E N T Umwelt- und Verfahrenstechnik GmbH & Co. KG • Am Weichselgarten 36 • 91058 Erlangen • Germany
Fon: +49 (0)9131 69098 - 0 • Fax: + 49 (0)9131 69098 - 99 • http://www.invent-uv.de • E-Mail: info@invent-uv.de
Probedruck
Easy installation
® ®
HY P E R DI V E HY P E R DI V E
Just drag & drop
A n O ve r vie w D e sign Ins ta llat ion
As alternative to the H YPER- flow-pattern and fluidmecha- TRIPO D is totally sealed with stainless steel. It also carries put the mixer in position in
C LASSI C ® - Mixers with top- nical advantages as the The tripod is made from biologically neutral gel-coat. a lifting lug to install and to the empty or filled basin and
mounted drive and shaft we H YPER - C L A SSI C ® - Mixer. massive coated carbon steel The eight transport ribs which lift out the whole connect the electrical cable
The main components such as accelerate the fluid are H Y PER D IVE ®
- Mixer. to the power supply. The
offer the submersed driven which provides sufficient weight
integrated into the mixer-body. weight of the mixer will keep
H YPER D IVE ® - Mixer Series. the hyperboloid mixer-body to keep the H YPER D IVE -
®
This design ensures maximum the system in position safely.

They can be applied in cases are identical. Mixer in position safely during The installation of the
robustness and longevity. The No extra supports, bridges or
where bridges are not avail- The design of our H YPER - operation and standstill. It hub which connects mixer- H Y PER D IVE ®
- Mixers is other additional devices are
able or when submersed drive D IVE ® - Mixer is simple, robust supports the submersed drive body and drive is made from simple and time-saving. Just required.
mixers are preferred. and proven. Figure 1 shows and holds the electrical supplies
The H YP ER D I VE - Mixers the main components in an away from the mixer-body.
®
feature exactly the same exploded view.

SU BMERSED-DRIVE
As gear-drives we use costum-
made gear-drives from
Hub
renowned manufacturers. They
consist of submersed three-
phase electrical motor, spur-
Hyperboloid Mixer-Body gear, special bearing-lantern
and special seal. On the end
of the stainless-steel drive-shaft
the hyperboloid mixer-body is
mounted.
Tripod HYPERBO LO ID MIX ER-BODY
The hyperboloid mixer-body is

Submersed Drive made from high quality fiber-
reinforced-plastic (FRP) which
Probedruck
Easy installation
® ®
HY P E R DI V E HY P E R DI V E
Just drag & drop
A n O ve r vie w D e sign Ins ta llat ion
As alternative to the H YPER- flow-pattern and fluidmecha- TRIPO D is totally sealed with stainless steel. It also carries put the mixer in position in
C LASSI C ® - Mixers with top- nical advantages as the The tripod is made from biologically neutral gel-coat. a lifting lug to install and to the empty or filled basin and
mounted drive and shaft we H YPER - C L A SSI C ® - Mixer. massive coated carbon steel The eight transport ribs which lift out the whole connect the electrical cable
The main components such as accelerate the fluid are H Y PER D IVE ®
- Mixer. to the power supply. The
offer the submersed driven which provides sufficient weight
integrated into the mixer-body. weight of the mixer will keep
H YPER D IVE ® - Mixer Series. the hyperboloid mixer-body to keep the H YPER D IVE -
®
This design ensures maximum the system in position safely.

They can be applied in cases are identical. Mixer in position safely during The installation of the
robustness and longevity. The No extra supports, bridges or
where bridges are not avail- The design of our H YPER - operation and standstill. It hub which connects mixer- H Y PER D IVE ®
- Mixers is other additional devices are
able or when submersed drive D IVE ® - Mixer is simple, robust supports the submersed drive body and drive is made from simple and time-saving. Just required.
mixers are preferred. and proven. Figure 1 shows and holds the electrical supplies
The H YP ER D I VE - Mixers the main components in an away from the mixer-body.
®
feature exactly the same exploded view.

SU BMERSED-DRIVE
As gear-drives we use costum-
made gear-drives from
Hub
renowned manufacturers. They
consist of submersed three-
phase electrical motor, spur-
Hyperboloid Mixer-Body gear, special bearing-lantern
and special seal. On the end
of the stainless-steel drive-shaft
the hyperboloid mixer-body is
mounted.
Tripod HYPERBO LO ID MIX ER-BODY
The hyperboloid mixer-body is

Submersed Drive made from high quality fiber-
reinforced-plastic (FRP) which
Probedruck
HY P E R DI V E ®
H Y P E R D I V E -Mixer
®
Te chnical Spe cific ations for H D R K A/ 2500-Se rie s
Type Diameter Rotational Installed Power

speed power consumption
t e c h n o l o g y
HDRKA/2500-18-1.5 2500 mm 18.0 rpm 1.5 kW 0.9 kW
HDRKA/2500-22-1.5 2500 mm 22.0 rpm 1.5 kW 1.5 kW
HDRKA/2500-26-3.0 2500 mm 26.0 rpm 3.0 kW 2.3 kW
HDRKA/2500-30-4.0 2500 mm 30.0 rpm 4.0 kW 3.6 kW
HDRKA/2500-34-5.5 2500 mm 34.0 rpm 5.5 kW 4.8 kW u m w e
l t
u n
d
v
e
r f
a h
r e
m i x i n g
n s t k
e c h n i
Fluid mechanically
optimized
Energy saving
Robust & proven
Minimum mainte-
Side view Top view nance efforts
Easy installation
Contact
HD 1000 5.02 -1E
For further information or detailed technical and commercial offers please contact our
head office or your local representative.
Probedruck
BLOWERS
The 3 lobes blowers offer considerable usage’s advantages, versus the 2 lobes construction, in most applications because of
Higher rigidity: rotor beam 8 times more rigid
Better balance: more even mass distribution
Higher discharge pressure: 2 dynamic seal points rotor/case
Lower pulsation: 6 cycles instead of 4 per shaft rotation
Lower efficiency losses: minimal sensitivity to back-pressure
In addition, producer has managed to eliminate those negative characteristics of the three lobe construction exhibited by the blowers presently
in the market, such as
smaller displacement
gas retention between rotors causing:
- energy wastage (overheating and noise)
- consequent remedies, like indentations in the rotor profile, that, in turn, reduce efficiency and increase re-flow losses
2 lobes 3 lobes
ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES
Higher pressure Smaller displacement
Higher frequency Gas retention
Higher rigidity
rP oducer by adopting an innovative profile (STEM patent), achieves:
Optimal exploitation of the potential displacement.
Rotors meshing with total lack of gas retention in-between thus preventing gas re-circulation .
 No gas retention between rotors
 No profile indentation
 Bigger displacement
3 lobes "BORA"
TABLE OF MODELS
BLOWERS 163 233 293 353 463 673 883
Tri-lobe positive displacement blowwers offer an “avant-garde” product with continuos

improvement in performance and reliability. Significant technical elements:
rotors profile (STEM patent) with total lack of gas retention in-between
syncro gears, finished by precision grinding, optimize the timing with best efficiency. Special
tooth profile ensures the most silent working
high de-hydrogenated steel bearings
zero friction labyrinth seals
low viscosity pure synthetic lube for best performance and long lasting
minimal distance between bearings: compactness of the project
SECTION AND PART LISTING

Pos. Description Pos. Description
Washer with lubricating
1 Case 11.2
disk
2.1 Cover - driver side 12 Spacer
2.2 Cover - gear side 13 Bearing cover
3.1 Carter - driver side 15.1 Rotor - driving
3.2 Carter - gear side 15.2 Rotor - driven
6.1 Driving gear 16.1 Centering ring
Centering ring - with
6.2 Driven gear 16.2
hole
7 Centrifuge ring A Bearing - gear side
8 Seal B Bearing - drive side
9 O ring C Cone clamper
10 Lubricating disk D INA ring
11.1 Washer E Cup spring
Technical information download PDF

1) Performance curves 163 (163.pdf)
8) Section and part listing (pdf)
THICKENING DIGESTER TANK EQUIPMENT

Annexes
Derby-E
Compact C serie
“A competitively priced progressing cavity
pump, with a compact construction and
maximum performance characteristics.”
Waste water pumping
Features & Benefits

Capacity up to 225m3/h
Pressure up to 24 bar
Temperature -10°C up to 100°C
Typical applications include:

• Domestic and industrial effluents
• Hydrated lime slurry
• Sludge
• Shear sensitive latex emulsion
• Milk curds, sauces, fruit juices
• Industrial chemicals and detergents
• Starch slurries
• Coating clays, gypsum and silicate
• Paper stocks
• Agricultural slurries
Handles gas entrainment Materials of construction Sealed joints

No air or gas locking in the pump. Available in cast iron or stainless Fully sealed drive train to maximise
The positive seal formed by the in- steel, with a choice of rotor and life and minimise downtime.
terference fit between rotor and stator materials to suit individual ap-
stator enables the pump to self plications e.g. hard chrome plated Duracoat coating
prime and it also allows tri-phase rotor or natural rubber stator. Rotors can be supplied with Flygt’s
liquids i.e. solids, gases and liquids range of specialist coatings to
to be handled easily. Versatile help extend the life of the rotors
Can be installed vertically or hori- by increasing wear and corrosion
Robust drives zontally to suit the application. Can resistance
Specially selected drives and gear- be run in either direction.
boxes for longer life. Options include Shaft sealing options
electric motor drive units supplied as Baseplate Packed gland or single and double
overhead vee belt driven, direct-cou- Pumps are supplied on a baseplate mechanical seals are available.
pled or variable speed drives with me- to ease installation.
chanical variable speed or frequency Surface mounted
inverter. Inspection cover Making it easier, cleaner and less
Available for applications where rag hazardous for maintenance.
Low running speeds content is a problem.
Reduced wear for a longer working Compact unit
pump life which extends the periods Gentle pumping action As the drive forms an integral part of
between routine maintenance. Think Minimises shear and crush damage the unit, the pump is ideal for space-
of the savings you could make on to the pumped product. saving installations.
abrasive applications.
Viscous products Up to 8.5m suction lift
High pressure The pump can be supplied with a Deep sumps can be easily pumped
Long haul pumping can offer con- square inlet and conveyor to assist vis- without the use of submersible
siderable project cost savings by cous slurries into the pumping element. equipment.
utilising small bore pipework and
eliminating the need for a series Plug in shaft
of pumps, when pumping over Ease of maintenance when assem-
long distances or with high head bling or dismantling, with extraction
requirements. facility.
Performance data
Pumping of slurry mix
225 140
C1BK C1BA C1BB

165 94
C1AK C1AA C1AB

125 71.5
C19K C19A C19B

97 57.5
C18K /
C18A / S18A C18B C18D
S18K
79 49.5
C17K / S17K C17A / S17A C17B C17D

Capacity m3/h
57 35.5
C16K /
C16A / S16A C16B C16D
Capacity m3/h
S16K
37 25.5
C15K /
C15A / S15A C15B C15D
S15K
22 14.5
C14K / S14K C14A / S14A C14B C14D

13 10.7
C1XK C2XA C2XB C1XD

10 6
C23K C23A C23B C13D

3.4
0 4 6
Differential pressure – BAR C22A C22B C22D
1.5
C21B C21D
0 6 12 24
Differential pressure – BAR
Product dimensions
A1 A
DISMANTLING
DISTANCE B C
D
Transfer of industrial detergents
E
F
G
H
A1 A
MODEL A A1 B C D E F G H
DISMANTLING
C21B 429 115 296 133 1¼” 144 85 120 160 A1
DISTANCE B A C
C21D 573 250 440 133 1¼” 144 85 120 160 DISMANTLING
DISTANCE B D C
C22A 429 115 296 133 1¼” 144 85 120 160
D
C22B 573 250 440 133 1¼” 144 85 120 160
E
C22D 959 525 822 137 1½” 148 85 120 160
F
C23A 520 165 383 137 1½” 148 85 120 160
E
F
C23B 665 300 528 137 1½” 148 85 120 160 G
C23K 665 300 528 137 1½” 148 85 120 160 GH
H
A1 A
MODEL A A1 B C D E F G H DISMANTLING
DISTANCE
C1XK 750 300 593 157 50 190 85 120 160 B C
C14K 986 455 756 230 65 227 112 140 200
C15K 1102 570 882 220 80 232 112 140 200 D
C16K 1272 680 1036 236 100 255 125 160 250
C17K 1478 800 1198 281 125 310 150 180 300
C18K 1654 880 1374 280 125 310 150 180 300
E
F
C19K 1856 990 1541 315 150 345 160 200 300
C1AK 2007 1100 1692 315 150 345 160 200 300 G
C1BK 2437 1210 2009 427 200 450 225 280 350 H
C13D 1160 525 930 230 65 227 112 140 200
A1 A
C2XA 566 135 409 157 50 190 85 120 160 DISMANTLING
C2XB 749 315 592 157 50 227 112 120 160 A1
DISTANCE A
DISMANTLING B C
C1XD 1363 650 1086 277 80 245 125 160 250 DISTANCE
C14A 781 250 551 230 65 227 112 140 200 B D C

C14B 986 455 756 230 65 227 112 140 200
D
C14D 1462 780 1185 277 80 245 125 160 250
C15A 842 310 622 220 80 232 112 140 200
E E
C15B 1159 570 882 277 80 245 125 160 250

F F
C15D 1776 1005 1457 319 100 280 150 180 300 G
C16A 960 365 724 236 100 255 125 160 250
C16B 1355 680 306 319 100 280 150 180 300 GH
C16D 2181 1210 1813 369 125 320 160 200 300 H
C17A 1110 430 830 281 125 310 150 180 300
C17B 1478 800 1198 281 125 310 150 180 300 A1 A
C17D 2626 1385 2224 402 150 410 225 280 350 DISMANTLING
C18A 1246 475 966 281 125 310 150 180 300 DISTANCE
B C
C18B 1742 880 1374 386 125 320 160 200 300
C18D 2786 1555 2384 402 150 410 225 280 350 D
C19A 1394 530 1079 315 150 345 160 200 300
C19B 1856 990 1541 315 150 345 160 200 300
C1AA 1476 610 1161 315 150 345 160 200 300
C1AB 2159 1100 1756 402 150 410 225 280 350
E
C1BA 1794 640 1366 427 200 450 225 280 350
F
G
A1 A
H
MODEL A A1 B C D E F G H
A1
DISMANTLING
DISTANCE A
DISMANTLING B C
S14A 781 250 526 255 165x165 236 112 140 200 DISTANCE
S14K 986 455 731 255 165x165 236 112 140 200 B C
D
S15A 842 310 587 255 165x165 236 112 140 200
D
S15K 1102 570 847 255 165x165 236 112 140 200
S16A 960 365 674 286 200x200 260 125 160 250
S16K 1272 680 986 286 200x200 260 125 160 250
E E
S17A 1110 430 777 333 240x240 310 150 180 300
F F
S17K 1478 800 1145 333 240x240 310 150 180 300
S18A 1246 475 912 334 240x240 310 150 180 300 G
S18K 1654 880 132 334 240x240 310 150 180 300 GH
H
Motor/baseplate dimensions
Length
MODEL LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT
C1XK 1304 300 304
C14K 1665 300 475
C15K 1777 360 475
C16K 1947 360 488
C17K 2464 360 609
Height
C18K 2640 420 609
C19K 2902 420 649
C1AK 3053 420 649
C1BK 3481 520 537
C13D 1835 360 475
C2XA 1120 300 304
C2XB 1329 300 304
C1XD 2038 420 488
C14A 1456 300 475
C14B 1665 300 475
C14D 2137 360 488
Width
C15A 1517 300 475

C15B 1834 360 488
C15D 2762 420 609
C16A 1635 360 488
C16B 2341 420 609
C16D 3225 520 472
C17A 2066 360 584
C17B 2464 360 609
C17D 3672 520 727 All dimensions in mm’s and refer to the largest selected drive.
C18A 2202 360 584
C18B 2788 420 649
C18D 3830 520 537
C19A 2440 420 649
C19B 2902 420 649
C1AA 2522 420 649
C1AB 3205 520 727
C1BA 2840 520 727

C21B 984 300 304
C21D 1149 300 304
C22A 984 300 304
C22B 1149 300 304
C22D 1544 300 304
C23A 1084 300 304
C23B 1234 300 304
C23K 1234 300 304

S14A 1456 300 475
S14K 1665 300 475
S15A 1517 300 475
S15K 1777 360 475
S16A 1635 360 488
S16K 1947 360 488
S17A 2066 360 584
S17K 2464 360 609
S18A 2202 360 584
S18K 2640 420 609
Submersible pump C 3102, 50 Hz
C 3102
Thermal contacts opening temperature 125 °C
Material
Impeller Cast iron

Alternative Inner seal Outer seal
1 Aluminium oxide/ Aluminium oxide/
2 Aluminium oxide/ Corrosion resistant
Corrosion resistant cemented carbide/
C 3102
cemented carbide Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide
3 Corrosion resistant Aluminium oxide/
cemented carbide/ Corrosion resistant
Corrosion resistant cemented carbide
water containing solids or long-fibred material.
Denomination
Surface Treatment
Product code 3102.181 All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Installation P, S, T, Z is a high-solid two pack paint.
Weight
Process data See dimensional drawing.
Option
The pH of the pumped liquid pH 5,5-14 3102.090 Ex. proof design
Liquid density max. 1100 kg/m3 Warm liquid version on request
Impeller throughlet See Motor rating table Leakage sensor in stator housing FLS
Motor data Surface treatment Epoxy treatment
Frequency 50 Hz Other cables
Insulation class H (+180 °C) Zinc anodes
Voltage variation
Accessories
- intermittent running max ± 10% Discharge connections, adapters, hose connections and other
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2% mechanical accessories.
No. of starts/hour max 30 Electrical accessories such as pump controller, control panels, starters,
Cable
SUBCAB® 4G2,5 mm2
4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
Y/D start
7G2,5 mm2
35
C 3102

curve P2 [kW]
3.5
Impeller thoughlet, mm
3.0 410
440
2.5
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
411
2.0 441
442
412
1.5
H [m]
Installation
P S T Z LT
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1450 r/min 10
411 2,4 5,8 39 0,71 52 • • •
412 2,4 5,8 39 0,71 54 • • • 8
441 2,4 5,8 39 0,71 100 • • •
442 2,4 5,8 39 0,71 100 • • •
6
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1435 r/min

410 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 55 • • • 4 410
440
411 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 52 • • • 411
441
412 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 54 • • • 2 442 412
440 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 100 • • •

441 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 100 • • •
0
442 3,1 6,9 39 0,77 100 • • •
0 10 20 30 40 50
Q [l/s]
MT-Motor rating and performance

P2 [kW]
curve
3.5
430
3.0
2.5
435
2.0
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
432
434
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
1.5 433
1.0
H [m]
Installation MT
P S T Z 14
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1450 r/min
12
432 2,4 5,1 37 0,83 76 • • •
433 2,4 5,1 37 0,83 76 • • •
10
434 2,4 5,1 37 0,83 76 • • •
435 2,4 5,1 37 0,83 76 • • • 8
430
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1435 r/min 6
430 3,1 6,4 37 0,86 76 • • •
4
432 3,1 6,4 37 0,86 76 • • •
433 3,1 6,4 37 0,86 76 • • •
2 435
434 3,1 6,4 37 0,86 76 • • • 434 432
433
435 3,1 6,4 37 0,86 76 • • • 0

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current. Q [l/s]
36
C 3102
HT-Motor rating and performance

curve P2 [kW]

5
4
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
252
3
254
H [m]
Installation
P S HT
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 2870 r/min 25
252 4,4 8,6 64 0,92 52 • • •
254 4,4 8,6 64 0,92 52 • • •
20
15
10
254 252
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Q [l/s]
37
C 3102
Dimensional drawing

LT, P-installation LT, P-installation
38
C 3102
39
C 3102
LT, T-installation LT, Z-installation
LT, Z-installation MT, P-installation
40
C 3102
MT, S-installation MT, T-installation
MT, Z-installation SH-HT, P-installation
41
C 3102
HT-SH, S-installation HT-SH, Z-installation
42
Submersible mixers S 4640, 50 Hz
Material
Stator housing Stainless steel
Oil casing Vinyl ester based SMC
Part ASTM 304 ASTM 316 L

Jet ring • •
Fixing plate • •
Lifting device •
ASTM 304: general purpose stainless steel
ASTM 316 L: high grade stainless steel
Propeller
Angle ASTM 316 L Alloyed white

iron
Two blade propeller
S 4640
5° •
9° •
13° •
Three blade propeller
Product 5° • •
7° • •
Direct drive mixer with two or three blade propeller intended for mixing
9° • •
liquid and sludge containing fibres and solids. The mixer is designed to
10° •
be operated completely immersed in the liquid.
11° •
Denomination 13° • •
15° • •
Product code 4640.411 16° •
Installation Guide bar system 17° •
Flange mounted Alloyed white iron (extremely abrasion-resistant alloy)
Process data O-rings
Liquid temperature max +40 °C Alternative Material

Depth of immersion max 20 m 1 Nitrile rubber
The pH of the mixed liquid pH 1 - 12
Liquid viscosity max 5000 cp Mechanical face seals
Motor data Alternative Inner seal Outer seal

1 Aluminium oxide/ Silicon carbide/ Silicon
Frequency 50 Hz Corrosion resistant carbide
Insulation class H (+180 °C) cemented carbide
Voltage variation 2 Aluminium oxide/ Carbon Aluminium oxide/
Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide
- intermittent running max ± 10% 3 Aluminium oxide/ Corrosion resistant
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2% Corrosion resistant cemented carbide/
No. of starts/hour max 30 cemented carbide Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide
Cable
Direct-on-line start Surface Treatment
SUBCAB® 4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2 Stainless steel parts are blasted to a dull grey surface.
S 4640 3
Weight Cable protection
Two blade propeller
Mixer data chart Accessories

Propeller material ASTM 316 L Stand and Single guide bar system, lifting equipment and other
code With jet ring (J) Without jet ring (F) Electrical accessories such as starters, alarm units.
083705SX 250 1,20 290 1,35

083707SX 330 1,35 390 1,65
083709SX 430 1,55 490 1,95
083710SX 480 1,70 530 2,10
083711SX 540 1,85 580 2,30
083713SX 640 2,15 670 2,90
083715SX 760 2,60
083716SX 790 2,85
Propeller material Alloyed white iron (High-Chrome)

083705HX 200 1,10 220 1,15
083707HX 260 1,25 290 1,35
083709HX 330 1,45 360 1,55
083711HX 410 1,65 440 1,80
083713HX 500 1,95 520 2,20
083715HX 590 2,30 610 2,65
083717HX 670 2,65
Key to the 8-digit Propeller Code:
1:st and 2:nd digit - Motor pole No (16=16-pole)
3:rd and 4:th digit - Propeller diameter (77=766 mm)
5:th and 6:th digit - Propeller blade angle
7:th digit - Propeller material (S=ASTM 304, ASTM 316 L, H=High-Chrome)
8:th digit - Hydraulic end (J=with jet ring, F=without jet ring)
Motor rating
Rated output power, kW
Power factor cos ϕ

Starting current, A
Rated current, A
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 705 r/min

2,5 6,9 22 0,70 •
Option
4640.491 Ex. proof version
Seal flushing
Seal protection
Cutting rings
4 S 4640
Dimensional drawing
With jet ring
Without jet ring Flange mounted
S 4640 5
Vortex shield
6 S 4640
DEWATERING UNIT

Annexes
Derby-E
Sludge extractor

The sludge extractor kit is composed by component and provisions listed below:
‐N°1 centrifugal extractor having the following characteristics:
hydraulic flow rate m3/h 5.5
bowl diameter mm 232
bowl length mm 975
slenderness ratio L/D 4,2
max. bowl rpm 5200
max. g force x g 3500
differential screw rpm 10/26
main motor power kW 7,5
sludge‐scraper motor power kW 0,18
‐ Main Construction Materials
conical bowl part and shaft AISI 414
scroll AISI 304
feed pipe AISI 304
weir plates AISI 304
liquids discharge chamber AISI 304
solids discharge chamber AISI 304
external housing carbon steel
supporting structure carbon steel
‐ Overall Dimensions and Weight
max. length mm2100
max. width mm785
max. height mm1090
weight kg650
‐ Painting
Body Grey RAL 7004
Cover Grey ‐ Pieralisi Blu
‐ Manufacture details
Interchangeable liquid and solid discharge head,
cylindrical external bowl housing in carbon steel plate,
close tubular structure, with minimum thickness 8 mm,
patented sludge‐scraper for continuous discharge of dehydrated sludge,
wearproof protection of the screw in tungsten carbide,
exchangeable bushings in hardened AISI 440 (60 HRC),
electronic safety device for protection from overloading.
‐ Centrifugal extractor kit
Special keys for ordinary maintenance
Regulation rings set
Oil and grease for first maintenance
Teeth belts and V‐belts
Sensors for screw and bowl speed survey
Blocks for machine fixing
Toolkit with adjustable wrenches
‐ N°1 SLUDGE POLYMER MIXER in AISI 304
‐ N°1 AUTOMATIC UNIT FOR PREPARATION OF POLYELECTROLYTE SOLUTION for the powder or emulsion
product equipped with tank divided in 3 sectors, with hopper, fully in AISI 304.
volume output per hour ‐ 700 l
Principal Characteristics of the Unit :
‐ tank: diameter 0,95 m ‐ height 1,38 m ‐ total capacity 0,7 m3;
‐ hopper installed 1,2 m from the ground for the powder charge without support
of lift systems, with capacity of 120 l.
‐ dosage system of polyelectrolyte powder complete of direct current electric
motor of 80W, adjustable by the control panel
‐ mixing and dissolution system
‐ mono pump with body in Aisi 316 L, rotor and regulator shaft in Aisi 316 Ti,
stator in viton, complete of manual gearmotor Kw 0,25, rpm 0‐400, flow: 0‐50 l/h
‐ n.3 slow agitators of 0,55 kW
‐ electric control panel
‐N°1 MONO PUMP to feed the polymer solution, having body in cast iron, rotor in stainless steel, stator in
neoprene, on base, complete of gearmotor kW 0,75 ‐ rpm 80÷400, flow 100÷600 l/h
‐N°1 POLYMER FLOWMETER complete with by‐pass (120÷1.300 l/h)
‐N°1 SCREW CONVEYOR in CARBON STEEL, with central shaft, channel and spiral inAISI 304,
diameter 200 mm, length 5,0 m, motor reducer 1,5 kW, max inclination 30°, discharge height m.2,3
‐N°1 Standard ELECTRIC CONTROL PANEL
Dimensions about 600 x 500 x 1.900 mm.
protection IP 55, RAL 7035 painting
The panel board controls and supply power to the following motors:
‐ main centrifuge motor 7,5 kW;
‐ sludge scraper 0,18 kW;
‐ sludge feeding pump motor 1,5 kW;
‐ polymer solution dosing pump motor 0,75 kW;
‐ sludge screw conveyor motor 1,5 kW;
The following device is included:
‐ rpm‐counter where three amplified sensors are installed to detect bowl and differential scroll speed
Included:
ELECTRICAL AND WATER CONNECTIONS between equipment constituting the sludge dewatering plant,
PIPING in galvanized steel, UNI flanged and fitted with conical and quick fitting adapters (if necessary), to
support the maintenance
VALVE: gate valve, Sanders type, in cast iron, bronze ball valve full bore, for the washing and flocculant
solution.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: made by flame‐proof cables, inserting in watertight in PVC or galvanized steel
and anchored to the building walls, where possible; branching boxes located near the equipment to
facilitate the cables positioning.

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACTORS
for industrial use
CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACTORS
A LEADER IN
C E N T R I F U G AT I O N
With its vast number and

range of installations producer
is able to offer the full
spectrum of centrifugation
solutions available to meet
production requirements and
offer new solutions to industrial being made to find new The aim of such activity is to
processes. solutions to the many generate new products,
More than 40,000 problems that arise, taking improve quality levels and
centrifugation systems have new approaches and reduce costs.
been installed all over the anticipating future Pieralisi's constant
world in a wide variety of developments. commitment to research is
industrial fields. aimed at finding and
Centrifugal extractors (decanters), developing new fields for the
vertical centrifuges use of centrifuges, carrying
(separators), belt filter presses out the necessary tests and
and filter centrifuges – producer monitoring the effectiveness
technology is available to solve of these new applications.
any problem of clarifying, The results have received
dewatering and separating with wide recognition not only
the safety and reliability derived from the market, but also
from a progressive, innovative from top research institutes.
production.
RESEARCH -
THE KEY TO
GROWTH
Pieralisi's business strategy

is based on the constant
commitment to research.
Innovation is one of the
foundation stones on which
the group's strength lies.
The group's dedication to
this aspect is demonstrated
by the efforts continually
A L E A
I N C E N T R
P R I N C I P L E S O F T H E S E P A R AT I O N S Y S T E M
The decanter is used for the compatible with products being G regulate the torque on the
separation of two or more processed. It is generally used in decanter reduction gear to the
phases of different specific purification processes for the maximum levels allowed;
gravity, in particular for the drying of sludge, but not in G obtain the highest possible
clarifying of liquids in which intermediate product conversion percentage of dry solids in
suspended solids are present. processes, and even less in the dewatered sludge according
The separation of solids and processing of foodstuffs. to the type of product;
liquids takes place within a G ensure the highest levels
cylindrical/conical rotating drum, The ROTOVARIATOR - an of sludge capture;
upon the periphery of which the electronically programmable G adjust the rate of feed flow
heavier solid phase collects and is electro-mechanical system - is to the decanter thanks to
continually removed by the designed and manufactured by the a frequency inverter on the
internal conveyor. producer and patented feed pump.
A polyelectrolyte, suitably chosen worldwide for application on
for its type and specific decanter centrifuges of the FP
characteristics, may be added to 600 and JUMBO series including
the product being fed to the already installed decanters.
machine in order to improve the The ROTOVARIATOR continuously
solid-liquid separation. varies the number of screw
The polyelectrolyte favours the revolutions in relation to the bowl
aggregation and thus the easier of the centrifugal extractor.
capture of the solid particles. Thanks to the Rotovariator device,
A polyelectrolyte is not always it is possible to:
CROSS SECTION OF THE CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACTOR

4
5
Legenda:
1. Main motor 8
7
2. Hydraulic coupling
3. Bowl
9
4. Scroll, open type
10
5. Effluent weir plates
6. Pulley transmission
7. Planetary reduction unit
8. Scraper motor (patented system)
9. Separate sediment scraper room
(patented system) 1
10. Removable shuttle feed pipe
11. Studs (standard) 15
12. Cake discharge 6 13

13. Effluent discharge 3
14. Vibration dampers
15. Flushing drains 12
14 11
2
All parts in contact with the product to be treated are made of stainless steel.
D E R
I F U G A T I O N
TECHNICAL FEATURES
Optional variations OF CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACTORS
for special applications
Main Rotova- Slender - Dr um Centrifugal
of the decanters Model
motor riator
Dr um
diameter
ness r evolution for ce
Hydraulic
capacity
power power ratio max max
mm l/h
kW kW L/D rpm x g
BABY 1 5,50 / 232 2.43 5200 3500 2500
G Automatic differential speed BABY 2 7.50 / 232 3.33 5200 3500 4000
variation via Rotovariator BABY 3 7.50÷11 / 232 4.20 5200 3500 5500
FP600/M 11 4÷7 353 2.62 4100 3300 6000

- other systems on request
FP600 RS/M 11 4÷7 353 3.48 4100 3300 9000
G Selection of optimum FP600 2RS/M 15 4÷7 353 4.32 4100 3300 12000
JUMBO 1 30 15 470 2.51 3350 2950 25000

conveyor and bowl design
JUMBO 2 37 15 470 3.38 3350 2950 35000
G Selection of product
JUMBO 3 45 15 470 4.25 3350 2950 45000
feedzone JUMBO 4 45 15 470 5.12 3350 2950 55000
HERCULES 470/2 45 15 470 3.38 3350 2950 35000

G Conveyor and bowl in various
HERCULES 470/3 52 15 470 4.25 3350 2950 45000
stainless steels, incl. Duplex HERCULES 470/4 52 15 470 5.12 3350 2950 55000
G Wear protection incl. MAMMOTH 2 45÷75 15÷25 570 3.92 2700 2350 65000
MAMMOTH 3 55÷90 15÷25 570 5.10 2700 2350 85000

interchangeable sintered
GIANT 2 90÷150 22÷38 700 3.59 2000 1570 110000
Tungsten Carbide segments GIANT 3 90÷150 38÷45 700 4.25 2000 1570 140000
GIANT II 90÷200 / 735 3.20 2500 2500 120000

G 3-phase design
GIANT III 110÷250 / 800 2.90 2400 2500 150000
G Liquid discharge by
GIANT IV 150÷300 / 880 3.10 2400 2500 180000
pressure, centripetal pump NOTE: “Hercules” series decanters, Mammoth and Giant 2 are equipped with the Rotovariator system.
Total length Total width Total height

Model
mm mm mm
BABY 1 1700 785 1090
BABY 2 1900 785 1090
BABY 3 2100 785 1090
FP600/M 2250 1050 1400
FP600 RS/M 2250 1050 1400
FP600 2RS/M 3000 1050 1400
JUMBO 1 3000 1470 1650
JUMBO 2 3500 1470 1650
JUMBO 3 3910 1470 1650
JUMBO 4 4385 1470 1650
HERCULES 470/2 3380 1635 1720
HERCULES 470/3 3920 1635 1720
HERCULES 470/4 4330 1635 1720
MAMMOTH/2 4350 1920 1985
MAMMOTH/3 5010 1920 1985
GIANT 2 5200 2200* 2200
GIANT 3 5700 2500* 2200
GIANT II 5000 3000 1300
GIANT III 5000 3000 1400
GIANT IV 5000 3000 1500
Centrifugal extractor Giant III *3250 mm with stabilizers

P I E R A L I S I
C E N T R I F U G A L E X T R A C T O R S
A R E A S O F A P P L I C AT I O N
Environmental Applications: oils from the petrochemical Food Industry:
G filtering and dewatering industry; G fruit juices;
of sludge from municipal and G pig and cattle manure; G tomato juice;
industrial waste waters G waste oil. G liquorice;
(paper, tanning, textile, G distillery dregs;
quarrying industries, etc.); Sugar Industry: G potato starch recovery.
G sugar beet wash water.
Other Sectors:
Chemical-Pharmaceutical G treatment of
Industry: fish-processing by-products;
G calcium and sodium G treatment of
sulphate/sulphite; butchery by-products;
Meat processing G potassium sulphate; G plastic waste recovery;
G polyethylene, PVC;
G sludge from water G bio-diesel production;
treatment plants; G biotechnological
G drilling mud recovery; processes;
G supply of mobile platforms G chemical processes.
or skids for third-party Decanter centrifuge

“Hercules” series.
sludge dewatering; Wine Industry: G paint waste recovery.
G tank oil residues and slop G must and lees.
Decanter centrifuge “Mammoth” series Treatment of slop oils

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
S O M E E X A M P L E S O F A P P L I C AT I O N S
Biodiesel production Sludges from depuration plants
Animal blood treatment Refinery slurries
Drilling mud recovery Chemical-pharmaceutical industry
Waste treatment on Cruise ship Pig manure
Sugar beet wash water Bio-waste treatment

Electric submersible pump for supernatant

The electric submersible pumps for sewage will have these features: body pump, motor case, foot support
and Shaft in AISI 304; Dry motor insulation class F, Impeller in reinforced nylon.
Single‐phase version already accompanied by level switch.
Power 0.55 kW;
Voltage 220/380 V;
Flow 50‐100‐200‐300 liters/min;
Prevalence 8.8‐7.3‐4.8‐2.0 m;
Discharge pipeline diameter 1" 1/2.
Including electrical wiring and plumbing, and any other charges and mastery for giving the complete work
and working to perfect rule of art.
SEPTIC TANK RETREIVING STATION

Annexes
Derby-E
Septic tank retrieving station

Compact plant for pre‐mechanical treatment of loot first stage consists of screening, second stage of grit
removal. The plant is fully enclosed and allows the washing of solids gratings and dehydration‐compaction
of the solids extracted (gratings and sands). The propeller cleaning and transport shaftless plant is
constructed from special steel with high strength and surface hardness. The carpentry is in AISI 304.
The plant has the following specifications:
Flow 30 l / s
Filtration hole 5 mm
Degree of separation of sand 90%
Screw shaftless diameter 700 mm
Screw diameter compaction shaftless 277 mm
Dumping height 1700 mm grid
Motor power 1.1 kW grid
Diameter screw conveyor shaft 277 mm sand without
P.I. motor screw conveyor sands 0.55 kW
Screw diameter 200 mm sands classified
P.I. 0.55 kW motor auger classified
Scope blower 15 NMC / h
Blowing power 0.55 kW
Motor protection IP55
Materials of construction steel augers wear
Materials of construction equipment stainless steel AISI 304
Tubing input "attack Perrot" DN 100 PN10
Outlet pipes DN 300 PN10
Plant length 8100 mm approx.
Plant width 1100 mm approx
Cleaning system is screened
Tube cleaning system
Cleaning system box is
With:
Electrical control and management of all units, solenoid valves, piping and wiring connection; Foot Pivot
adjustable vibration; frame support in AISI 304.

Pump N 3127, 50 Hz
Y/D start
SUBCAB® 7G2,5 mm2
7G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
7G4+2x1,5 mm2
VFD Application
Material
Impeller (.185) Hard Iron™
N 3127

1 Carbon/ Aluminium Corrosion resistant
oxide tungsten carbide/
Product Corrosion resistant
tungsten carbide
Submersible pump for pumping clean water, surface water and waste 2 Corrosion resistant Silicone carbide/
water containing solids or long-fibred material. tungsten carbide/ Silicone carbide
Corrosion resistant
Denomination tungsten carbide
Product code 3127.181 3 Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
tungsten carbide/ tungsten carbide/
(Hard Iron™) 3127.185
Installation P, S, T, Z, L1 tungsten carbide tungstencarbide
Impeller characteristics LT, MT, HT, SH
1 for information about L-installation, see Technical specification no 894894 Surface Treatment
All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Process data
Liquid temperature-standard max +40 °C Weight
Liquid density max. 1100 kg/m3 Option
Motor data 3127.090 Ex. proof design
Frequency 50 Hz 3127.095 (Hard Iron™) Ex. proof design
Insulation class H (+180 °C) Warm liquid version on request
Voltage variation Leakage sensor in stator housing FLS
- continuously running max ± 5% Leakage sensor in oil housing CLS
- intermittent running max ± 10% Surface treatment Epoxy treatment
Voltage imbalance between phases max 2% Other cables
No. of starts/hour max 30 Zinc anodes
Cable Accessories
SUBCAB® 4G2,5 mm2
4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
4G4 mm2
4G4+2x1,5 mm2
N 3127 3
P2 [kW]
curve
Installation 6
5 420
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
4
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
421
3
422
H [m]
LT
P S T Z 16
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1395 r/min
421 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • • 14
422 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • •
12
421 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • •
422 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • • 10
420 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •
421 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • • 8
422 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •
6
4
2 421
420
422
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Q [l/s]

P2 [kW]
curve
Installation 6
437
5
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
4
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
438
439
3
H [m]
MT
P S T Z
16
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1395 r/min
438 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • • 14
439 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • •
12
438 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • •
439 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • • 10
437 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •
438 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • • 8
439 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •
6
437
4
438
2 439
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Q [l/s]
4 N 3127
P2 [kW]
curve
Installation 6

486 487
488
4
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
489
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
0
H [m]
P S T Z HT
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1395 r/min 25
488 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • •
489 4,0 8,3 56 0,84 • • •
20 486
488 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • •
489 4,7 9,6 56 0,86 • • • • •
4861 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • • 15
487 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •
487
488 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • • 10
489 5,9 12 77 0,84 • • •

1 Only .181
489
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Q [l/s]
SH-Motor rating and performance

P2 [kW]
curve
245
246
Installation 7
6 247
5
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
248
Rated current, A
4
249
3
H [m]
P S T Z SH
40
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 2900 r/min
2451 7,4 14 114 0,91 • • • 35
245
246 7,4 14 114 0,91 • • •
30
247 7,4 14 114 0,91 • • •
248 7,4 14 114 0,91 • • • 25
249 7,4 14 114 0,91 • • •
20
1 Only .181
15
246
247
10
248
249
5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Q [l/s]
N 3127 5
Dimensional drawing

LT, P-installation LT, P-installation, hydroejector
6 N 3127
N 3127 7
LT, L-installation LT, Z-installation
MT,P -installation MT, P-installation
8 N 3127
MT, P-installation MT, P-installation, JA 117
MT, S-installation, JA 117 MT, S-installation
N 3127 9
MT, S-installation MT, T-installation
10 N 3127
N 3127 11
HT, Z-installation
12 N 3127
SH, S-installation
N 3127 13
FINAL PUMPING STATION

Annexes
Derby-E
Flygt N 3301, 50 Hz
4G50 mm2
4G70 mm2
Y/D start
SUBCAB® 7G6+2x1,5 mm2
Leakage sensor in inspection chamber FLS
Material
Impeller (.185) Hard-Iron™
O-rings
N 3301 Alternative
1
2
Material
Nitrile rubber
Fluorinated rubber
Product Mechanical face seals
Submersible pump for pumping clean water, surface water and waste Alternative Inner seal Outer seal
water containing solids or long-fibred material. 1 Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
Denomination Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
Product code 3301.180 2 Corrosion resistant Silicon carbide/
3301.185 cemented carbide/ Silicon carbide
Installation P, S, T, Z Corrosion resistant
cemented carbide
Surface Treatment
Process data All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Depth of immersion max 20 m Weight
The pH of the pumped liquid 5,5 -14
Motor data Option

Frequency 50 Hz
Insulation class H (+180 °C)
Voltage variation
Other cables
- intermittent running max ± 10% Accessories
Cable Electrical accessories such as pump controller, control panels, starters,

SUBCAB® 4G6+2x1,5 mm2
4G10+2x1,5 mm2
4G16+2x1,5 mm2
4G25+2x1,5 mm2
4G35+2x1,5 mm2
N 3301 3
curve
P [kW]
35
810
30
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
812
Rated power, kW
25
Rated current, A
814
20
816
15
818
H [m]
Installation
P S T Z LT
16
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 735 r/min
810 37 80 425 0,74 • • • • 14
8121 37 80 425 0,74 • • • •
12
814 37 80 425 0,74 • • • •
8161 37 80 425 0,74 • • • • 10
818 1 37 80 425 0,74 • • • •

8
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 985 r/min
6
6221 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • •
624 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • • 4
6261 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • • 810
2 814 812
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 985 r/min 818 816
620 55 113 660 0,78 • • • • • 0

0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current. Q [l/s]
1
Only .180
P [kW]
50 620
45
622
40
35 624
30
626
H [m]
LT
25
20
15
10
5
622 620
626 624
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Q [l/s]
4 N 3301
curve
P [kW]

630
50
632
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
40
634
30 636
Installation H [m]
P S T Z MT
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 985 r/min 35
6321 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • •
634 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • • 30
6361 45 93 545 0,78 • • • • •

25
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 985 r/min
630 55 113 660 0,78 • • • • • 20
6321 55 113 660 0,78 • • • • •
15
634 55 113 660 0,78 • • • • •
6361 55 113 660 0,78 • • • • •
10 630

1 5 634
Only .180 636
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Q [l/s]

P [kW]
curve
80
450 452 454

60 456
458
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
40
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
20
0
H [m]
Installation HT
P S T Z 70
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min
452 55 103 490 0,84 • • • • • 60
450
454 55 103 490 0,84 • • • • •
50
456 55 103 490 0,84 • • • • •
452
4581 55 103 490 0,84 • • • • • 40
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1475 r/min 30 454
4501 70 132 565 0,83 • • • • • 456

20
452 70 132 565 0,83 • • • • • 458
454 70 132 565 0,83 • • • • • 10
456 70 132 565 0,83 • • • • •
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1 Only .180
Q [l/s]
N 3301 5
Dimensional drawing
LT, P-installation
LT, T-installation LT, T-installation
6 N 3301
LT, Z-installation LT, Z-installation
N 3301 7
MT, P-installation MT, S-installation
8 N 3301
HT, P-installation HT, S-installation
HT, T-installation HT, Z-installation
N 3301 9
PUMPING STATION N°2

Annexes
Derby-E
Submersible pump N 3102, 50 Hz
N 3102
Material
Impeller (.185) High chromium cast iron

1 Aluminium oxide/ Aluminium oxide/
tungsten carbide tungsten carbide
2 Aluminium oxide/ Corrosion resistant
Corrosion resistant tungsten carbide/
N 3102 tungsten carbide Corrosion resistant

tungsten carbide
3 Corrosion resistant Aluminium oxide/
tungsten carbide/ Corrosion resistant
Product Corrosion resistant tungsten carbide
tungsten carbide
water containing solids or long-fibred material.
tungsten carbide/ tungsten carbide/
Denomination tungsten carbide tungsten carbide
Product code 3102.181 Surface Treatment
(High chromium) 3102.185 All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Installation P, S, T, Z, L is a high-solid two pack paint.
Impeller characteristics LT, MT, SH

Weight
Process data See dimensional drawing.

Option
The pH of the pumped liquid pH 5,5-14 3102.090 Ex. proof design
3 3102.095 (High chromium) Ex. proof design
Liquid density max. 1100 kg/m
Motor data Leakage sensor in stator housing FLS
Frequency 50 Hz Leakage sensor in oil housing CLS
Insulation class H (+180 °C) Surface treatment Epoxy treatment
Voltage variation Other cables
- continuously running max ± 5% Zinc anodes
Accessories
No. of starts/hour max 30 Discharge connections, adapters, hose connections and other
Cable Electrical accessories such as pump controller, control panels, starters.
SUBCAB® 4G2,5 mm2
4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
Y/D start
SUBCAB® 7G2,5 mm2
7G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
3
N 3102
LT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW]
curve 3.5
420*
3.0

420**
2.5 421*
421**
Power factor cos ϕ
2.0
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
423*
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
423**
1.5
H [m]
Installation LT
P S T Z L 10
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1460 r/min
421 2,4 5,7 40,0 0,71 • • •
8
4231 2,4 5,7 40,0 0,71 • • •
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1450 r/min 6

420 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • •
421 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • • • 4
423 1 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • • • 420*
421*
Y/D starting current is approximately 1/3 of D starting current. 2 420**
1 423* 421**
Only .181
423**
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Q [l/s]
* Pumphousing with outlet 100 mm
** Pumphousing with outlet 150 mm
MT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW]
curve 460
3
461
462
2 463
464
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
1
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
0
H [m]
Installation
MT
14
P S T Z
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1460 r/min
12
4621 2,4 5,7 40,0 0,71 • • •
463 2,4 5,7 40,0 0,71 • • • 10
4641 2,4 5,7 40,0 0,71 • • •
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 1450 r/min 8 460
4601 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • •

6
461 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • •
4621 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • • 4
463 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • •
4641 3,1 6,8 40,0 0,78 • • • 2 461
462
464 463

0
1 Only .181
0 10 20 30 40 50
Q [l/s]
4
N 3102
SH-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW]
curve
5
255
3
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated power, kW
Rated current, A
2 256
H [m]
Installation SH
P S T Z 30
400 V, 50 Hz, 3 ~, 2850 r/min, 2 poles
255 4.2 8.2 52 0,94 • • • • • 25
256 4.2 8.2 52 0,94 • • • • •
20
15
10
5
256
255
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Q [l/s]
5
N 3102
Dimensional drawing

LT, P-installation LT, P-installation
6
N 3102
LT, S-installation LT, S-installation
LT, T-installation LT, T-installation
7
N 3102
LT, Z-installation LT, Z-installation
MT, P-installation MT, S-installation
8
N 3102
HT- SH, P-installation HT- SH, S-installation
9
N 3102
HT-SH, T-installation HT-SH, Z-installation
L-installation LT, P-installation
10
PUMPING STATION N°3

Annexes
Derby-E
Flygt N 3127, 60 Hz
Y/D start
SUBCAB® 7G2,5 mm2
7G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
7G4+2x1,5 mm2
VFD Application
Thermal contacts opening temp. 125° C
Material
Impeller (185) Hard Iron™
N 3127 Alternative
1
Inner seal
Corrosion resistant
Outer seal
Corrosion resistant
Aluminium oxide Corrosion resistant
Submersible pump for pumping clean water, surface water and waste 2 Corrosion resistant Corrosion resistant
water containing solids or long-fibred material. cemented carbide/ cemented carbide/
Denomination
3 Corrosion resistant Silicone carbide/
Product code 3127.181 cemented carbide/ Silicone carbide
Corrosion resistant
(Hard Iron™) 3127.185
cemented carbide
Installation P, S, T, Z, L1
Impeller characteristics LT, MT, HT, SH Surface Treatment
1For information about L-installation, see Technical Specification 894919 All cast parts are primed with a water-borne primer. The finishing coat
Process data Weight
Option
Motor data 3127.095 (High chromium) Ex. proof design
Frequency 60 Hz
Insulation class H (+180° C)
Voltage variation
Surface treatment Epoxy treatment
Other cables
Zinc anodes
Accessories
Cable Discharge connections, adapters, hose connections and other
SUBCAB® 4G2,5 mm2
4G2,5+2x1,5 mm2
See separate booklet or www.flygt.com, for further information.
4G4 mm2
4G4+2x1,5 mm2
2 N 3127
P2 [kW] / [hp]
curve 12
Installation

8
10
7
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
421
8 6
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
5
422
6
H [m] / [ft]
LT
P S T Z 60 18
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
16
422 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • 50
422 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • • • • 14
421 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 40 12
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min
422 7,5 30 67 0,95 • • 10
30
422 7,5 30 67 0,95 • 8
4
10
421
2 422
0 0
MT-Motor rating and performance 0 20 40 60 80 100
curve 0 200 400 600 800 10001200140016001800
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
Installation
P2 [kW] / [hp]
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
10
7
438
8 6
439
5
6
P S T Z 4
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
439 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • H [m] / [ft]
439 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • •
439 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 70
MT
438 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 20
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min 60
439 7,5 32,0 66,0 0,97 • • • 16
50
40 12
30
8
20
4 439
438
10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
N 3127 3
HT-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW] / [hp]
16
curve
10
Installation
8 487 488
8 6
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
489
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
4
4
H [m] / [ft]
HT
P S T Z 100 30
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 1740 r/min
489 7,3 9,8 75 0,83 • • • 80 25
487
489 7,5 9,9 62 0,85 • • •
487 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 20
488 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 60
489 10 13 75 0,87 • • • 15
230 V, 60 Hz, 1 ~, 1740 r/min 40
489 7,5 32,0 66,0 0,97 • • • 10 488

5 489
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 200 400 600 800 1000
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
SH-Motor rating and performance P2 [kW] / [hp]

curve 12 9
Installation
8
10 248
7
Power factor cos ϕ
Starting current, A
Curve/Impeller No
8 6
Rated current, A
Rated power, hp
249
5
6
H [m] / [ft]
160
SH
45
P S T Z 140
40
460 V, 60 Hz, 3 ~, 3395 r/min
120
248 11 13 113 0,91 • • • 35
249 11 13 113 0,91 • • • 100 30
80 25
20
60
15
40 248
10 249
20 5
0 0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0 100 200 300 400 500
Q [l/s] / [usgpm]
4 N 3127
Dimensional drawing
LT, P-installation LT, P-installation hydroejector
N 3127 5
6 N 3127
LT, Z-installation LT, L-installation
N 3127 7
MT, P-installation MT, P-installation JA 117
8 N 3127
MT, S-installation JA 117 MT, T-installation
N 3127 9
10 N 3127
HT, Z-installation
N 3127 11
SH, S-installation
12 N 3127
ALARM SYSTEM

Annexes
Derby-E
ALIMENTATORI
POWER SUPPLIES
Alimentatori - Power Supplies
BXM12 BXM12
Stazione di alimentazione Power Supplies
CARATTERISTICHE FEATURES
• Alimentatore switching controllato a microprocessore • Microprocessor controlled switching power

• Ingresso: 230 Vac ±10% 50/60 Hz supply
• Stabilità: ±1% • Bus-in and bus-out totally uncoupled
• Controllo costante degli alimentatori switching con disconnessione in (galvanically isolated and regenerated, only
caso di guasto o anomalia in “-B” versions)
• Controllo costante dell’accumulatore con disconnessione in caso • Input voltage: 230 Vac ±10% 50/60 Hz
di guasto o anomalia • Stability: ±1%
• Controllo presenza, carica e efficienza dell’accumulatore • Continuous monitoring of switching power supply with cut out in the
• 3 uscite indipendenti protette da termofusibile event of fault or irregularity
• Antisabotaggio ed antistrappo • Continuous monitoring of the battery with cut out in the event of fault
• 2 uscite open-collector per segnalazione anomalie e guasti or irregularity
(solo per versioni “-U”) • Test for battery presence, level and the efficiency
• Accumulatore allocabile: uno da 12 Vdc - 17 Ah. • 3 independent outputs protected by thermal fuse
• Bus di ingresso e di uscita (rigenerato ed isolato galvanicamente • Tamper and snatch switches
solo per versioni “-B”) • 2 Open collector outputs for failures signalling (only in “-U” versions)
• Può lavorare in abbinamento al kit sonda termica KST • Battery compartment: one battery 12 Vdc - 17 Ah
MKTSSBL1BXM12 REV001
• Compatible with thermal probe KST
ARTICOLO USCITA (Vdc) CORRENTE (A) DIMENSIONI (lxhxp) PESO (senza accumulatore)
ARTICLE OUTPUT (Vcc) CURRENT (A) DIMENSIONS (wxhxd) WEIGHT (withoout batt.)
BXM12/30-B 13,8 3 max. 240 x 348 x 97 mm 2,8 Kg
BXM12/50-B 13,8 5 max. 240 x 348 x 97 mm 2,9 Kg
BXM12/30-U 13,8 3 max. 240 x 348 x 97 mm 2,8 Kg
BXM12/50-U 13,8 5 max. 240 x 348 x 97 mm 2,9 Kg
BAQ BAQ
Gli alimentatori switching della serie BAQ sono protetti contro il cortocir- Switching power supply battery-chargers of BAQ series are protected
cuito ed il sovraccarico. Inoltre possono gestire una sonda termica (KTS) against short-circuit and overload, and can be fitted with a thermal probe
che permette ai dispositivi di diminuire la tensione di uscita all’aumentare that will allow the device to detect temperature rises, and drop the out-
della temperatura. Tale funzione consente di evitare il surriscaldamento put voltage accordingly to avoid battery overheat.
della batteria.
FEATURES
CARATTERISTICHE
• Power supplies battery chargers
• Alimentatori caricabatteria • Small dimension
• Dimensioni contenute • In 230 Vac ±10%, 50/60Hz
• Ingresso: 230 Vac ±10% - 50/60 Hz • Complies with EN60950
• Conforme alla norma EN 60950 • Insulation class I
• Classe di isolamento I • Stability > 1% with full load
• Stabilità > dell’1% a pieno carico • Protected against short-circuit and overload
• Protezione ai sovraccarichi • Compatible with thermal probe KST
• Protezione ai cortocircuiti
• Tensione di uscita controllata in temperatura mediante kit sonda
termica KST (opzionale)
BA2C BA2C
Alimentatore caricabatterie lineare Linear power supply batery charger
• Alimentatore caricabatteria lineare • Input voltage: 230 Vac ±10% - 50/60 Hz

• Ingresso: 230 Vac ±10% - 50/60 Hz • Output voltage: 13.8 Vdc
• Tensione di uscita 13,8Vdc • Max current 2 A
• Corrente massima 2 A • Complies with EN60950
• Conforme alla norma EN 60950 • Insulation class II
• Classe di isolamento II • Stability > 1% with full load
• Stabilità > dell’1% a pieno carico • Overload protection
• Protezione ai sovraccarichi • Short-circuit protection
• Protezione ai cortocircuiti • Dimensions (wxhxd): 195x85x80 mm
• Dimensioni (lxhxp): 195x85x80 mm • Weight: 1.4 Kg
• Peso: 1,4 Kg
Distributed by:
BATTERIE - BATTERIES
BATTERIE - BATTERIES
Nessuna manutenzione
Non è necessario controllare livello e densità dell’elettrolita.
Totalmente sigillate
Non vi è possibilità di fuoriuscita dell’elettrolita dai terminali o dall’in-
volucro.
Lunga durata
Oltre 1000 cicli carica/scarica.
Lungo periodo di stoccaggio
Fino ad un anno ad una temperatura di 20°C (68°F).
Griglie altamente resistenti
Costruiti in lega di piombo-calcio per aumentare prestazioni e vita
d’impiego in uso sia ciclico che tampone – anche in condizioni di scar-
ica quasi totale.
Intervallo di Temperatura
L’ampio intervallo di temperatura operativa da -15° a 50°C permette
flessibilità nell’utilizzazione e nel posizionamento delle batterie.
Flessibilità di posizionamento e assenza di perdite
La costruzione ermetica e l’uso di separatori che trattengono l’elet-
trolita permettono la totale libertà nel posizionamento delle batterie, Maintenance free
senza rischi di fuoriuscita dell’elettrolita o perdita di prestazioni. No need to check specific gravity or add water.
MKTSSBL1BATT-AF REV001
Lunga vita in tampone Sealed construction
Da 3 a 5 anni sotto carica di mantenimento. Ensures that no electrolyte leakage can occur from terminals or
Alta capacità di recupero cases.
Anche dopo cicli di scarica quasi totale. Long cycle life
Bassa emissione di gas Over 1,000 discharge/recharge cycles.
La batteria è progettata per controllare efficacemente la gener- Long shelf life
azione di gas e per consentire la ricombinazione all’interno della stes- Up to one year at an ambient temperature of 68° (20°C).
sa di oltre il 99% del gas generato nel corso dell’uso normale. Heavy duty grids
Sistema di scarico a bassa pressione Constructed of lead-calcium alloy to enhance performance and serv-
Assicura un limitato sviluppo di gas nella batteria. Operando ad una ice life in both cyclic and floating applications, even in deep discharge
pressione di 7-10 psi (48- 69kPa), il sistema libera automatica- conditions.
mente il gas in eccesso se questo oltrepassa i valori normali. Operating Temperature range
La sigillatura è ripristinata quando la pressione torna nei valori nor- Broad operating temperature range of 5° to 122°F (-15° to 50°C)
mali. permits flexible system designs and battery locations.
Position flexibility and leakage free
Sealed construction and use of absorptive mat separetors permits
battery operation in any position without loss of electrolyte or serv-
ice life.
Long float life
3 to 5 years float life under trickle charge.
High recovery capability
Even after deep discharge.
Low gas generation
Battery design effectively controls generation of gas and allows
recombination within the battery of 99% of gas generated during
normal use.
Low pressure venting system
Ensures that there is no excessive buildup of gas in the battery.
Operating at 7-10 psi (48-69 kPa), the system automatically releas-
es excess gas if pressure rises above normal. Resealing
is automatic once pressure has returned to normal.
CODICI D’ORDINE Tensione nominale (V) Capacità (Ah) Corrente di carica Max. (A) Larghezza (mm) Altezza (mm) Profondità (mm) Altezza Tot. (mm) Peso (Kg)
Nominal Voltage (V) Rated Capacity (Ah) Max. Charging Current (A) Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm) Total Height (mm) Weight (Kg)
CB1212 12 1,2 0,36 97 52 43 59 0,60
CB1220 12 2,0 0,60 178 60 35 67 0,96
CB1234 12 3,4 1,02 134 60 67 67 1,37
CB1240 12 4,0 1,20 90 101 70 107 1,73
CB1270 12 7,0 2,10 151 95 65 101 2,66
CB12170 12 17,0 5,10 181 167 76 167 6,06
CB12250 12 25,0 7,50 166 125 175 125 8,80
Distributed by:
BGSM-100_GB 5-05-2009 0:43 Pagina 1
BGSM-100
GSM and GPRS
Communicator Interface
• Simulates land line

• Switches automatically to GSM
Network in the event land line trouble
(line down)
• 3 Open Collector Outputs
• GSM Quad-Band
• Antenna with magnetic base
- BGSM-100KEA: metal bracket and 2m cable
- BGSM-100KCA: 25cm cable
• Supports Contact ID communication format
from a connected control panel for
communication over the GPRS network
• 4 phone numbers programmable for
Contact ID Dialer on GPRS
• Up to 100 telephone numbers (max. 16 digits) programmable for the remote acti-
vation of the OC output
• Manages and signals Incoming/Outgoing calls
• GSM signal indicator
• Land line overvoltage protection
• GPRS/Internet communication with receivers Sur-Gard System III / II
• Remote activation of the outputs through caller identification
• PC-programmable options
BGSM-100_GB 5-05-2009 0:43 Pagina 2
BGSM-100
GSM and GPRS
Communicator Interface
The BGSM-100 is an alarm communicator Interface.
Simple to install and program (plug and play approach),
it is compatible with any control panel communicating
in contact ID format over standard phone lines (PSTN).
The BGSM-100 module is equipped with a quad band

GSM/GPRS radio and remote antenna with magnetic
base. Its extremely small size and low current draw
allows for installation inside the control panel’s cabinet
and does not require an additional battery. Easy to
service locally, the BGSM-100 allows module program-
ming and diagnostics via direct PC connections.
MKTSSBLEBGSM100 R000
The BGSM-100 is the best solution for reliable PSTN
alarm communication back up for the majority of
applications whether new or existing system
upgrades.
HOW TO INSTALL
1) Loosen the screws and remove the control panel

cover
2) Establish an area inside the metal casing which
can be used to hold the board, including the wiring
3) Position the 4 adhesive plastic supports [14] on
the base of the metal casing, then fit the holes [7]
on the Electronic board into the adhesive plastic
supports
4) Fit the antenna [1] to the outside of the casing
5) Connect the wire [3] to the GSM antenna connec-
tor [4]
6) Complete the connections on the terminal blocks
[10]
7) Following the arrow, insert the SIM-CARD [8] face
down in the SIM holder [6]
8) The SIM-CARD PIN must be disabled before the
card is inserted into the transmitter
9) Checking Signal Strenght No. Parts
1 GSM Antenna
10) Close the control panel cover
2 Magnetic base
3 Antenna cable
4 Connector SMA for
GSM Antenna
5 Status LEDs
Imput Voltage between 9,6 and 27,6 V
6 SIM holder
Standby current 100 mA max (not including the outputs) at 13,8 Vcc
Alarm (Trasmitting) current 200 mA max (not including the outputs) a 13,8 Vcc
7 P.C.B. fixing holes
Outputs 3 open collector, 100 mA 8 SIM CARD

Operating frequency 900/1800 Mhz or 850/1900 Mhz 9 Connection cable for
programming via PC
Maximum loop resistance of line between 1 Kohm 10 Terminal Blocks
the device connected in series on LI
Maximum number of parallel devices 11 Antenna cable feed
2 opening
connected on LI 12 Metal bracket fixing
Operating Temperature 5 to 40 °C / 41 to 104 °F holes
P.C.B. dimensions 60,45 x 142 mm
13 Metal bracket
P.C.B. weight 77 gr 14 Adesive plastic support

Sistemi di Comunicazione - Alternat Wireless Communication
BGSM-A
BGSM-A
Il BGSM-A rappresenta la frontiera più avanzata nell’inte- BGSM-A is the state of the art for the integration between
grazione tra sistemi di sicurezza e comunicazioni su rete GSM. security systems and GSM communication. It can be simply
Il dispositivo può operare come interfaccia per rete GSM, come and cost-effectively integrated with all alarm systems, and can
avvisatore telefonico vocale, come avvisatore SMS e come operate as a GSM interface, voice dialler, SMS dialler and
attuatore via SMS. remote control via SMS.
Il BGSM-A può operare come interfaccia, e quindi mettere a dispo-

sizione una linea simulata alla quale collegare le normali apparecchia- The BGSM-A Interface facility allows ordinary two-wire PSTN tele-
ture telefoniche che si desidera connettere alla rete GSM. Può phones to switch to the GSM network in the event of PSTN Trouble
essere utilizzato per avere una linea GSM come back-up di una linea (line down). The simulated line, provided by the BGSM-A, supplies the
tradizionale, in questo caso viene gestita automaticamente la com- line and ring voltage, thus allowing the hardwired telephone device
mutazione automatica sulla rete GSM quando la linea analogica di to operate as a wireless device. The BGSM-A can also operate as a
terra presenti un’anomalia. 4 channels SMS dialler. In fact, it provides 4 inputs (channels), each
Il dispositivo può operare anche come un avvisatore SMS a 4 canali. able to manage 2 text messages (SMS), that will be sent when the
Infatti il BGSM-A dispone di 4 ingressi per ognuno dei quali è possi- channel status changes.
bile associare 2 messaggi SMS. Installando la scheda opzionale
NC2/VOX, il BGSM-A diventa un avvisatore telefonico vocale su rete The 4 input channels can also be used to activate the GSM voice
GSM. dialler facility. The BGSM-A can be used in numerous telematic appli-
cations, and it is the perfect way to complete a security system.
I 4 canali di ingresso possono infatti essere utilizzati per attivare il
combinatore telefonico vocale.
MKTSSBL1BGSMA REV001
FEATURES
CARATTERISTICHE • Supplies a simulated PSTN line

• 4 Inputs for the activation of voice and SMS dialler (optional NC2/VOX board
• Fornisce una linea analogica (PSTN) simulata required for voice dialler)
• 4 ingressi per l’attivazione dell’avvisatore SMS e vocale (l’avvisatore vocale è • 2 SMS messages available on each input
disponibile installando la scheda opzionale NC2/VOX) • Programmable Voice/SMS dialler-channel activation polarity
• 2 messaggi SMS disponibili per ognuno dei 4 ingressi • 8 telephone numbers available for the Voice/SMS dialler facility
• Programmazione della polarità di attivazione dei 4 canali di ingresso • 5 outputs open collector (150mA)
• 8 numeri di telefono per le funzioni di avvisatore SMS e vocale • Output control via SMS
• 5 uscite open collector (150mA) • Outputs can be used for status and troubles signalling
• Possibilità di attivare e disattivare le uscite per mezzo dell’invio di SMS al • Programmable output-activation polarity
BGSM-A • Management of incoming and outgoing calls
• Possibilità di utilizzare le uscite per la segnalazioni relative allo stato • Incoming and outgoing call LED’s
del dispositivo • Signal strength indicator
• Programmazione della polarità delle uscite • Display for device status signalling
• Gestione delle chiamate in ingresso ed uscita • Includes prefix when operating in Interface mode
• Segnalazione delle telefonate entranti ed uscenti • Dual-band
• Indicatore intensità di campo • SIM card programmable via any GSM cellphone, or via a specific software
• Display per la segnalazione dello stato del dispositivo application (runs under Windows)
• Possibilità di introduzione di un prefisso qualora operi • Calls register available via software
come interfaccia • Dimensions antenna excluded (wxhxd): 141x233x59 mm
• Dual-band • Weight (without battery): 1,29 Kg (BGSM-A/12); 1,6 Kg (BGSM-A/220)
• Programmazione della SIM Card per mezzo
di qualsiasi telefono cellulare o per mezzo
del software BGSM-A (richiesto Windows95
o superiore)
• Registro delle chiamate disponibile via software
• Peso (senza accumulatore): 1,29 Kg
(BGSM-A/12); 1,6 Kg (BGSM-A/230)
ACCESSORI - ACCESSORIES
NC2/VOX
Scheda vocale da 8 messaggi per un totale di 90 secondi
Voice board: 8 messages for a total of 90 seconds
GSM-LINK
Cavo programmazione interfacce cellulari GSM
Serial link for GSM cellular net interface
Distributed by:
BMD500 11-05-2007 10:01 Pagina 1
BMD500 SERIES BMD500 SERIES
NEW
Security BMD500 Series
of Detection Devices
MKTSSBLEBMD500
NEW BMD500 Series

SENSIBILITY AND DESIGN

Company subject to the direction and coordinating activity of Tyco International Ltd
The new BMD500 detector series guarantees the highest levels

of reliability, catch performance and false alarm immunity.
• BMD501: Infrared detector with Pet immunity (up to 25 kg)

• BMD503/504: Double Technology Detectors with Pet immunity
• Advanced ASIC technology
• Digital Analysis Signal
• Quad Linear Imaging Technology
• Anti-masking (BMD503)
• Adjustment of PIR range from 3 to 12 m
• CE approved
• Linear Design
• User-friendly Installation
Distributed by: BENTEL SECURITY srl

Via Gabbiano 22, Zona Industriale
S. Scolastica - 64013 Corropoli (TE) Italy
Tel. +39 0861 839060 Fax. +39 0861 839065
www.bentelsecurity.com infobentelsecurity@tycoint.com
BMD500 11-05-2007 10:01 Pagina 3
BMD501 BMD503-504
Digital PIR Detector with Pet Immunity FEATURES Digital PIR and Microwave Detector with Anti-Masking and FEATURES
BMD501 Pet Immunity BMD503 and BMD504
• Dimensions: 92 mm x 62.5 mm x 40 mm (3.62” x 2.46” x 1.57”) • Dimensions: 118 mm x 62.5 mm x 41 mm (4.65” x 2.46” x 1.61”)
Whether it’s a residential or commercial installation, the BMD500 • Weight: 58 gr (2.04 oz) Whether it’s a residential or commercial installation, the BMD500 • Weight: 97 gr (3.42 oz)
series of detection devices readies a security system for the unex- • Detection Method: Quad (Four Element) PIR series of detection devices readies a security system for the unex- • Detection Method: Quad (Four Element) PIR & Microwave Pulse Doppler
pected by providing protection for every room, corner and corridor. • Power Input: 8.2 to 16 VDC pected by providing protection for every room, corner and corridor. • Power Input: 8.2 to 16 VDC
The BMD501 effectively blends performance with competitive pric- • Current Draw (Standby): 8 mA (± 5%) The BMD503 is a dual-technology motion detector that combines • Current Draw (Standby): 18 mA
ing. The detector features intelligent signal analysis for reliable passive infrared and microwave detection with anti-masking fea- • Current Draw (Active): 25.5 mA
• Current Draw (Active): 10 mA (± 5%)
detection, pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs) and a slim design that tures. The anti-masking feature prevents intruders from defeating
• Tamper Switch: Contact Rating: 0.1 Amp @ 28 VDC • Tamper Switch: Contact Rating…0.1 Amp @ 28 VDC
complements any décor. the detector by covering its field of view. The BMD504 dual-technol-
• RFI Protection: 30 V/m 10-1000 MHz EMI • RFI Protection: 30 V/m 10-1000 MHz
ogy motion detector with out anti-masking offers reliable prevention
• Protection: 50,000 V of false alarms at an economical price • EMI Protection: 50,000 V
• Form ‘A’ alarm contact and tamper switch
• Digital signal analysis
• Slim profile design • Anti-masking (BMD503 only)
• Features ABS plastic for shock and impact protection • Form ‘A’ alarm contact and tamper switch
• Pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs) • Digital signal analysis
• Exceptional white light immunity • Slim profile design
• Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions • Features ABS plastic for shock and impact protection
and differentiation from backgrounds and pets • Pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs)
• Advanced ASIC-based electronics • Exceptional white light immunity
• Compact design for residential installations • Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions
• Adjustable variable pulse count and differentiation from backgrounds and pets
• PIR sensitivity adjustment • Microwave detection based on Doppler concept
• Height installation calibration free • Unique microwave motion sensor module with micro-strip patch antenna
• Advanced ASIC-based electronics
• Height installation calibration free
RELIABLE PROTECTION • 2-way PIR/microwave sensitivity adjustment
Advanced ASIC-based processing provides both superior detection and • User-friendly installation with or without swivel-mount bracket (bracket
false alarm rejection to help keep people and possessions secure. Quad sold separately)
Linear Imaging Technology provides sharp analysis of body dimensions and
differentiation from backgrounds and pets.
RELIABLE PROTECTION
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Advanced ASIC-based processing provides both superior detection and
Effective motion detection is dependent on a sensor’s ability to identify false alarm rejection to help keep people and possessions secure. Quad
intruders and provide true false alarm resistance. The LC series of detec- Linear Imaging Technology provides sharp analysis of body dimensions and
tion devices pinpoints intruders through digital signal processing. Digital differentiation from backgrounds and pets.
information is more accurately analyzed using software and is not subject
to signal degradation caused by amplification, noise, distortion or signal DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
clipping. Effective motion detection is dependent on a sensor’s ability to identify
intruders and provide true false alarm resistance. The LC series of detec-
PET IMMUNITY tion devices pinpoints intruders through digital signal processing. Digital
Highly accurate sensors are able to provide quality detection while at the information is more accurately analyzed using software and is not subject
same time ignoring pets weighing up to 25 kg (55 lbs). to signal degradation caused by amplification, noise, distortion or signal
clipping.
FAST AND EASY INSTALLATION
Once the detector is installed at the recommended height, installers sim- ANTI-MASKING
ply conduct a brief walk-test, make any necessary adjustments, and the The BMD503 features PIR and microwave sensors. The microwave sen-
unit is ready to perform. Highly visible LEDs can be viewed at a glance and sor of the detector features two channels, one for microwave (MW)
help the installer identify the detection range from any distance or angle detection, and the other for anti-masking detection. The anti-masking fea-
within the coverage pattern. ture works by sensing intruders who approach the detector from the dis-
tance of 0.8 m and closer. If the field of view of the detector is intention-
LOCATING THE DETECTOR ally obscured by an intruder, the anti-masking relay opens (switches from
When choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider the following: NC to NO) and remains in this status until the PIR sensor is activated.
• Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces
• Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow PET IMMUNITY
• Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected sunlight Highly accurate sensors are able to provide quality detection while at the
• Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the coverage area same time ignoring pets weighing up to 25 kg (55 lbs).

EXCEPTIONAL WHITE Once the detector is installed at the recommended height, installers sim-
Built-in temperature compensation adjusts processing to ensure the ply conduct a brief walk-test, make any necessary adjustments, and the
detector is able to function in harsh environments without causing false unit is ready to perform. Highly visible LEDs can be viewed at a glance and
alarms.. help the installer identify the detection range from any distance or angle
within the coverage pattern.
DETECTION RANGE
Adjustment The detection range of the motion detector is adjustable to LOCATING THE DETECTOR
about 3 m to 12 m (10’ to 40’). A potentiometer can be adjusted clock- When choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider the following:
wise or counter-clockwise to increase or decrease the range respective- • Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces
ly. For optimum performance, range should be adjusted so that it effec- • Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow
tively protects the dimensions of the intended area. The LC-100-PI is fac- • Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected sunlight
tory-set for 84%. • Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the coverage area
DETECTION RANGE
The detection range of the motion detector is adjustable to about 3 m to
12 m (10’ to 40’). A potentiometer can be adjusted clockwise or count-
er-clockwise to increase or decrease the range respectively. For optimum
performance, range should be adjusted so that it effectively protects the
dimensions of the intended area. The BMD503 and BMD504 are facto- ORDERING INFORMATION
ry-set for 65%.
BMD503 Digital PIR and Microwave Detector with Anti-Masking
and Pet Immunity (10.525 GHz)
BMD504 Digital PIR and Microwave Detector with Pet Immunity
(10.525 GHz)
BMD-MB Swivel mounting bracket
BMD-F Filter for 10K LUX (set of 12)
BMD-CL Curtain Lens Set (set of 12)
www.bentelsecurity.com
BMD500 11-05-2007 10:01 Pagina 3
BMD501 BMD503-504
Digital PIR Detector with Pet Immunity FEATURES Digital PIR and Microwave Detector with Anti-Masking and FEATURES
BMD501 Pet Immunity BMD503 and BMD504
• Dimensions: 92 mm x 62.5 mm x 40 mm (3.62” x 2.46” x 1.57”) • Dimensions: 118 mm x 62.5 mm x 41 mm (4.65” x 2.46” x 1.61”)
Whether it’s a residential or commercial installation, the BMD500 • Weight: 58 gr (2.04 oz) Whether it’s a residential or commercial installation, the BMD500 • Weight: 97 gr (3.42 oz)
series of detection devices readies a security system for the unex- • Detection Method: Quad (Four Element) PIR series of detection devices readies a security system for the unex- • Detection Method: Quad (Four Element) PIR & Microwave Pulse Doppler
pected by providing protection for every room, corner and corridor. • Power Input: 8.2 to 16 VDC pected by providing protection for every room, corner and corridor. • Power Input: 8.2 to 16 VDC
The BMD501 effectively blends performance with competitive pric- • Current Draw (Standby): 8 mA (± 5%) The BMD503 is a dual-technology motion detector that combines • Current Draw (Standby): 18 mA
ing. The detector features intelligent signal analysis for reliable passive infrared and microwave detection with anti-masking fea- • Current Draw (Active): 25.5 mA
• Current Draw (Active): 10 mA (± 5%)
detection, pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs) and a slim design that tures. The anti-masking feature prevents intruders from defeating
• Tamper Switch: Contact Rating: 0.1 Amp @ 28 VDC • Tamper Switch: Contact Rating…0.1 Amp @ 28 VDC
complements any décor. the detector by covering its field of view. The BMD504 dual-technol-
• RFI Protection: 30 V/m 10-1000 MHz EMI • RFI Protection: 30 V/m 10-1000 MHz
ogy motion detector with out anti-masking offers reliable prevention
• Protection: 50,000 V of false alarms at an economical price • EMI Protection: 50,000 V
• Form ‘A’ alarm contact and tamper switch
• Digital signal analysis
• Slim profile design • Anti-masking (BMD503 only)
• Features ABS plastic for shock and impact protection • Form ‘A’ alarm contact and tamper switch
• Pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs) • Digital signal analysis
• Exceptional white light immunity • Slim profile design
• Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions • Features ABS plastic for shock and impact protection
and differentiation from backgrounds and pets • Pet immunity up to 25 kg (55 lbs)
• Advanced ASIC-based electronics • Exceptional white light immunity
• Compact design for residential installations • Quad Linear Imaging Technology for sharp analysis of body dimensions
• Adjustable variable pulse count and differentiation from backgrounds and pets
• PIR sensitivity adjustment • Microwave detection based on Doppler concept
• Height installation calibration free • Unique microwave motion sensor module with micro-strip patch antenna
• Advanced ASIC-based electronics
• Height installation calibration free
RELIABLE PROTECTION • 2-way PIR/microwave sensitivity adjustment
Advanced ASIC-based processing provides both superior detection and • User-friendly installation with or without swivel-mount bracket (bracket
false alarm rejection to help keep people and possessions secure. Quad sold separately)
Linear Imaging Technology provides sharp analysis of body dimensions and
differentiation from backgrounds and pets.
RELIABLE PROTECTION
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Advanced ASIC-based processing provides both superior detection and
Effective motion detection is dependent on a sensor’s ability to identify false alarm rejection to help keep people and possessions secure. Quad
intruders and provide true false alarm resistance. The LC series of detec- Linear Imaging Technology provides sharp analysis of body dimensions and
tion devices pinpoints intruders through digital signal processing. Digital differentiation from backgrounds and pets.
information is more accurately analyzed using software and is not subject
to signal degradation caused by amplification, noise, distortion or signal DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
clipping. Effective motion detection is dependent on a sensor’s ability to identify
intruders and provide true false alarm resistance. The LC series of detec-
PET IMMUNITY tion devices pinpoints intruders through digital signal processing. Digital
Highly accurate sensors are able to provide quality detection while at the information is more accurately analyzed using software and is not subject
same time ignoring pets weighing up to 25 kg (55 lbs). to signal degradation caused by amplification, noise, distortion or signal
clipping.
Once the detector is installed at the recommended height, installers sim- ANTI-MASKING
ply conduct a brief walk-test, make any necessary adjustments, and the The BMD503 features PIR and microwave sensors. The microwave sen-
unit is ready to perform. Highly visible LEDs can be viewed at a glance and sor of the detector features two channels, one for microwave (MW)
help the installer identify the detection range from any distance or angle detection, and the other for anti-masking detection. The anti-masking fea-
within the coverage pattern. ture works by sensing intruders who approach the detector from the dis-
tance of 0.8 m and closer. If the field of view of the detector is intention-
LOCATING THE DETECTOR ally obscured by an intruder, the anti-masking relay opens (switches from
When choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider the following: NC to NO) and remains in this status until the PIR sensor is activated.
• Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces
• Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow PET IMMUNITY
• Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected sunlight Highly accurate sensors are able to provide quality detection while at the
• Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the coverage area same time ignoring pets weighing up to 25 kg (55 lbs).

EXCEPTIONAL WHITE Once the detector is installed at the recommended height, installers sim-
Built-in temperature compensation adjusts processing to ensure the ply conduct a brief walk-test, make any necessary adjustments, and the
detector is able to function in harsh environments without causing false unit is ready to perform. Highly visible LEDs can be viewed at a glance and
alarms.. help the installer identify the detection range from any distance or angle
within the coverage pattern.
DETECTION RANGE
Adjustment The detection range of the motion detector is adjustable to LOCATING THE DETECTOR
about 3 m to 12 m (10’ to 40’). A potentiometer can be adjusted clock- When choosing a location for the detector, be sure to consider the following:
wise or counter-clockwise to increase or decrease the range respective- • Do not aim the detector at reflective surfaces
ly. For optimum performance, range should be adjusted so that it effec- • Avoid locations that are subject to direct high air flow
tively protects the dimensions of the intended area. The LC-100-PI is fac- • Do not locate the detector in the path of direct or reflected sunlight
tory-set for 84%. • Do not place next to large obstructions that may limit the coverage area
DETECTION RANGE
The detection range of the motion detector is adjustable to about 3 m to
12 m (10’ to 40’). A potentiometer can be adjusted clockwise or count-
er-clockwise to increase or decrease the range respectively. For optimum
performance, range should be adjusted so that it effectively protects the
ORDERING INFORMATION dimensions of the intended area. The BMD503 and BMD504 are facto-
ry-set for 65%.
BMD501 Digital PIR Detector with Pet Immunity
BMD-MB Swivel mounting bracket
BMD-F Filter for 10K LUX (set of 12)
BMD-CL Curtain Lens Set (set of 12)
BMD500 9-10-2007 15:37 Pagina 1
BMD500 SERIES BMD500 SERIES
NEW
Bentel Security BMD500 Series
MKTSSBLEBMD500
NEW BMD500 Series
STABILITY AND DESIGN
The new BMD500 detector series guarantees the highest levels

of reliability, catch performance and false alarm immunity.
• BMD501: Infrared detector with Pet immunity (up to 25 kg)

• BMD503/504: Double Technology Detectors with Pet immunity
• Advanced ASIC technology
• Digital Analysis Signal
• Quad Linear Imaging Technology
• Anti-masking (BMD503)
• Adjustment of PIR range from 3 to 12 m
• CE approved
• Linear Design
• User-friendly Installation
Distributed by:
Sirene da Esterno - Outside Sirens
CALL
CALL
La sirena autoalimentata Call rappresenta un punto di riferimento nella tecnolo- The Call self-powered siren is a landmark in Bentel Security range of products.
gia Bentel Security degli avvisatori ottico-acustici.
Made in polycarbonate and internally reinforced in metal, it guarantees a high level of

La struttura esterna è in policarbonato ed all’interno è presente una ulteriore pro- security and is totally weatherproof.
tezione metallica. In tal modo è garantito un elevato livello di sicurezza e la necessaria The Call is protected against tamper, snatch and wire cutting, and is equipped with a
impermeabilizzazione. La sirena Call è protetta contro l’apertura, la rimozione, il taglio flasher cutout circuit, that is activated automatically by low battery conditions. The Call
cavi e la rottura della lampada. Essa è inoltre dotata di un circuito che disabilita il lam- siren provides 2 trigger inputs for the sounder and flasher and a further tone option.
peggio in caso di batteria bassa.
This is useful to differentiate control systems installed in the same area.
La versione Call fornisce un insieme esteso di funzioni. Tra esse si ricorda la possibilità The tone option can also be used to differentiate alarm types (burglary, flooding, gas,
di programmare il suono da emettere. Quest’ultima funzione è particolarmente utile per etc.) and places (office, warehouse, garage, etc.).
differenziare installazioni adiacenti o differenti tipi di allarme sulla stessa installazione.
La sirena Call consente anche la programmazione del tempo massimo di allarme, della The maximum alarm time of the call can be programmed to match customer/site
polarità di attivazione degli allarmi e controlla l’efficenza dell’elemento acustico. Il suo requirements. Call-F versions garantee a further protection against foam injection and
design accattivante, la sua facilità di installazione e manutenzione, la sua filosofia are equipped with 1 visual alarm and 1 audio allarm to provide a great
improntata alla massima semplicità e versatilità ne fanno un elemento cardine nella sua flexibility of use.
categoria di prodotto.
Le versioni F offrono, inoltre, una ulteriore protezione dalla iniezione di schiuma e sono
dotate di due ingressi supplementari, uno per allarme luminoso ed uno per allarme
sonoro, che garantiscono una maggiore flessibilità di utilizzo.
• Sirena autoalimentata con flash • Self-powered siren with flasher
MKTSSBL1CALL REV001
• Linea estetica innovativa • Attractive design
• Contenitore in policarbonato resistente alle più avverse condizioni atmosferiche • Strong polycarbonate box, resistant to the most adverse weather
• Protezione supplementare metallica conditions
• 2 ingressi per allarme ottico-acustico di cui uno universale per l’attivazione con • Tropicalized-metal innerplate
qualsiasi tipo di centrale • 2 imputs for sounder and flasher, 1 of wich compatible with wathever control panel
• Emissione sonora modulata in frequenza con possibilità di associare sonorità • Modulated frequency sound emission with the possibility to assign different
diverse ai vari ingressi di allarme sounds to the allarm imput
• Autoprotezione contro taglio fili, apertura, rimozione e rottura lampada • Protected against wire cutting, tamper, snatch and flasher damage
• Inibizione del lampeggiatore con accumulatore scarico • Programmable maximum alarm time
• Programmazione tempo massimo di allarme • Battery test circuit with flasher cut out activated by low battery conditions
• Pressione Sonora: 105 dBA (3 metri) • Sound level at 3 m. 103 dB(A)
• Conforme alle norme CEI79-2/2nd Ed. 1993, livello di prestazione II • Complies with CEI 79-2/2nd Ed. 1993 performance grade II
• Grado di protezione IP34 • Protection class IP34
• Dimensione (L x H x P): 208 x 252 x 98mm • Dimensions (wxhxd): 208x252x98 mm
• Peso (senza accumulatore): 2,5 Kg • Weight (without battery): 2,5 Kg
CARATTERISTICHE GENERALI - GENERAL FEATURES

MODELLI - MODELS CALL-PI CALL/S CALL-FPI CALL-FS CALL-R24
Sirena autoalimentata per uso esterno gestita da microcontrollore con lampada di segnalazione
Self-powered microprocessor controlled horn with strobe/flasher for outdoor applications • • • • •
Robusto contenitore in policarbonato resistente alle più avverse condizioni atmosferiche
Strong weatherproof polycarbonate moulding • • • • •
Protezione supplementare con coperchio in acciaio tropicalizzato
Tropicalized-steel innerplate • • • • •
1 ingresso per allarme sonoro
1 Audible signal input • • •
1 ingresso per allarme lampeggiatore
1 Visual signal input • • •
Emissione sonora modulata in frequenza, con possibilità di associare suoni diversi ai vari ingressi di
allarme
Modulated frequency sound emission with sound options
• • • • •
Tromba esponenziale magnetodinamica adelevato rendimento acustico con controllo della funzionalità
High output magnetodynamic exponential horn with test circuit • • • • •
Autoprotezione contro il taglio dei fili, la rottura del filamento della lampada e l'effrazione
Protected against tamper, flasher bulb damage and wire cutting • • • • •
Dispositivo antischiuma
Antifoam device • •
Programmazione del tempo massimo di allarme
Programmable maximum alarm time • • • • • ACCESSORI
Circuito di test della batteria con esclusione del lampeggiatore a batteria bassa o inefficiente
Battery test circuit with flasher shutdown under low battery or battery trouble conditions • • • • • ACCESSORIES
Semplice installazione con dima di foratura
Drilling pattern for easy installation • • • • • LEDOPT
Scheda opzionale lampeggiatore
Conforme alle norme CEI 79-2/22a Ed. 1998; Ab2000, Livello II
Tested and approved to CEI 79-2/2nd Ed. 1993; Ab2000, Permormance grade II • • • • LED per segnalazione ausiliare
dello stato dell'impianto.
Alloggiamento per batteria tampone da 12V, 2 Ah
Battery location (12Vdc, 2 Ah) • • • • • LED option board for sirens
Lampeggiatore - Flasher • • • for auxiliary signal of the
•
system’s status.
Lampeggiatore strobo - Strobo • •
Contenitore esterno in policarbonato colore panna
External ivory white polycarbonate moulding • • • •
Plastica rossa + 24V - Red Plastic + 24V •
NOTE: Non disponibile per uso con centrali di segnalazione incendio - Not intended for use with fire control panel
Distributed by:
KYO320
NEW
Hybrid expandable control panel
for larger applications
KYO320
KYO320
The KYO320 is the flagship model of the KYO range. Its

flexibility and excellence of tailored solutions make it
truly unbeatable. It is the perfect solution for all appli-
cations. From the luxury home to the Bank — and
everything in between. With the creation of the
KYO320 Bentel wishes to consolidate its position as
forerunner in the design and manufacture of security
panels.
ZONES
• 344 zones in total, programmable for type, attribute and
balance type
• 8 wired zones on main board, directly connected to
vibration and roller-blind detectors
• Expandable up to 280 wired zones: 32 remote expander
modules M-IN/6 (6 zones each), 32 remote LCD keypads
(2 zones each) and 16 remote LED keypads (1 zone each)
• Management of 64 wireless zones
• 24h tamper zone on board
• 90° terminal blocks for an easier installation
PARTITIONS
• 32 partitions in total, to divide the system in independent
sections
• For each partition, individual management of keypads,
codes, readers, keys, times and outputs
KEYPADS
• 32 remote LCD keypads: Alison/S, Alison/DVP, Mia/S
(1 zone), Mia/D (2 zones)
• 16 remote LED keypads: Alison/32LP (1 zone)
• 4 different partition assignments for each code
• 195 user codes, with 16 programmable typologies,
to manage the system
• 5 installer codes, to program the system
READERS
• 32 remote ECLIPSE (keys) and PROXI (keys and cards)
proximity readers
• 2 different partition assignments for each reader
• 500 proximity keys and cards
WIRELESS MANAGEMENT
• Management of 2 wireless receivers amongst VECTOR
VRX32 433, VECTOR/RX and VECTOR/RX8
• Up to 64 wireless zones, by means of 2 wireless
receivers VRX32 433 with 32 zones each
• Up 32 keyfobs with 4 push buttons to manage
the system, 16 for each VRX32 433 wireless receiver
• Management of VECTOR/RX8 (8 zones and 8 keyfobs
each)
• Management of 2 VECTOR/QUAD repeaters: up to 4
wireless receivers of the same type in each, to increase
the area of coverage.
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS
• 3 supervised 3A relay outputs on board
• 3 programmable 1 A open collector outputs on board
• Expandable up to 118 outputs: 16 remote expander modules
M-OUT/6 (6 open collector outputs each, 150 mA),
16 remote LED keypads (1 open collector output each,
70mA)
KYO320
TIMERS FEATURES
• Scheduler with daily, weekly or yearly management
• 4 Arm/Disarm actions per day per partition selected from • Main unit weight (without batteries): 5,55 kg
16 programmable day types, for automatic management • Main unit dimensions (wxhxd): 339x488x108 mm
of the system (holiday, overtime,etc)
• Automatic control of outputs by means of 64 timers with
4 on/off programmable operations per day , for automat-
ic management of additional services (stair lights, heating,
gates, etc)
• Automatic control of outputs, codes, keys and proximity
cards by means of 64 timers, for periodic on/off actions
on them.
EVENT LOGGER
• 10.000 event logger with date and time
• Free choice of the event typology to be recorded
• Print capability by means of K3/PRT2 optional board, to
be inserted on the mother board inside the control panel
PHONE COMMUNICATOR
• Multi-protocol digital dialler
• Already equipped with DTMF management, for the remote
full management of the system via DTMF standard tele-
phones
• Telephone line check
• Programmable double call, in case of shared telephone line
• 50 phone numbers for telemonitoring, voice communica-
tions and teleservice
• 62 messages voice dialler (K3/VOX2 optional board, to
be inserted on the mother board inside the control panel)
• 4 options for the quality of audio messages
• Voice driven menu via telephone line, to select the differ-
ent functions
• DTMF signals for the remote full management of the sys-
tem via DTMF standard telephones
• New digital communicator management, with ContactID/
SIA default and programmable codes for each event
• Programmable test call, for the periodic check of the system
• Programmable callback for teleservice
COMMUNICATION SERVICES AVAILABLE

• LAN and WAN management by means of B-NET commu-
nicator
• Future possibility of GSM/GPRS channel, by means of
K3/GSM optional board to be inserted on the mother
board inside the control panel
POWER SUPPLY
• 3.5 A switching power supply
• 12V 17Ah battery, to supply the panel in case of black-out
• Check for main fault and battery efficiency
• Up to 8 additional power supplies BXM12-B/30 (3A) and
BXM12-B/50 (5A), to supply remote devices and regen-
erate digital data
KYO320 KYO
MKTSSBLEKYO320
NEW
Hybrid expandable
control panel for larger applications
• Expandable up to 344 zones and 32 areas

• Supports two wireless receivers (64 wireless zones)
• Manages 500 keys and/or proximity cards
• Up to 200 user codes
• 64 timers and 16 calendar profiles for maximum management of system access
• Graphical map of system events using WinBCS software
• IP communication for fast and secure system management and alarm monitoring via B-NET
• GSM/GPRS Alarms Communication through BGSM-G module
Distributed by:
PREMIUM
LINE
KEYPADS
• Two versions: LCD, LED

• Blu display with regulation of the contrast to optimize the legibility in different conditions
of environment’s illumination
• Surface mounting and flush mounting with dedicated accessory BKP-BOX
• Key reader function thanks to a built in wireless key reader
• 3 programmable I/O
• Plug-in approach: electronic fixed on the cover
• Very simple and fast installation without cabling problems: terminals only on the back
• Easy to fix on the wall because of the integrated “bubble” accessory
• Continue adjustable volume
PREMIUM
LINE
Bentel Security has developed the new Premium Line
keypads in order to exceed the need for quality, reli-
ability and accuracy in high profile installations.
The elegant and innovative design makes the Premium

keypad adaptable to any interior décor, offering the
possibility to choose between surface and flush mount-
ing.
Premium, has an integrated Proxi Key reader function
and 3 programmable I/O, it is without a doubt the
most suitable keypad when it comes to integrating
high-performance and unique design.
VALUE PROPOSITION
• Top level functions
• Flush mounting option
• User friendly commands MAIN FEATURES
• Simplicity in the use
• Clear communication of the key functions
TWO VERSIONS: LCD, LED
• Winning design, adaptable to all the building contexts
LCD
• 2-line display, each consisting of 16 characters.
The display shows the system programming and the
alarm functions
• 7 LEDs for signalling
Behaviour: on, off, slow flashing, fast flashing
Colours: 3 red, 2 yellow, 2 green
• Display and back lighting colour: blue
SIMPLE TO INSTALL LED

• Flush mounting: box and installation kit • 16-zone LED and 7 LEDs for signalling.
• Plug-in approach: electronic fixed on the cover Behaviour: on, off, slow flashing, fast flashing
• Very simple and fast installation without cabling Colours: 3 red, 2 yellow, 2 green
problems: terminals only on the back
• Easy to fix on the wall because of the integrated • Surface and flush mounting
“bubble” accessory • Display: regulation of the contrast to optimize the
legibility in different conditions of environment’s illumi-
nation
• Number of keys:18 with numeric and alphanumeric
symbols
• Buzzer: adjustable intensity
• Key reader function thanks to a built in wireless key
reader
• 3 programmable I/O
NEW
Proximity TAG
dimension mm 50x30
Sirene - Sirens
WAVE
WAVE
È la sirena per uso interno dal design rivoluzionario.
Questa è la sirena per uso interno dal design rivoluzionario. È stata

progettata per rappresentare sonoramente e visivamente tutti gli
eventi d’intrusione.
Ci sono quattro versioni: con o senza flash e con o senza autoalimen-

tazione. L’emissione luminosa della lampada allo Xenon è visibile da
tutti gli angoli per garantire il massimo di copertura. L’intelligente ed
elegante design permette l’installazione anche in ambienti particolar-
mente esigenti in fatto di estetica.
CARATTERISTICHE
• Tensione di alimentazione 12 Vdc

• Corrente assorbita lampeggiatore (media) 135 mA
• Corrente assorbita elemento acustico (media) 90 mA
• Livello pressione acustica volume 104 dBA ± 3 dB @ 1 m.
• Intensità luminosa 60 cd
REV001
• Dimensioni (lxhxp): 126x132x53 mm
• Grado di protezione IP31
• Temperatura di funzionamento 5 ÷ 40 °C
MKTSSBL1WAVE
• Peso 245 gr
This high performance internal siren has been especially

designed for sound and visual warning in the event of intrusion.
Four versions are available: with or without flash; with or without

back-up battery (self-powered). The visual signals emitted by the
strobe’s high intensity Xenon tube can be seen from all angles, thus
providing maximum visual coverage.
The smart, low-profile siren blends with all environments, making it

ideal for hotels, hospitals, cinemas, offices and households.
ACCESSORI - ACCESSORIES
WAVE /BATT
Batteria di ricambio
FEATURES Spare battery
• Operating voltage 12 Vdc

• Strobe current draw (mean value) 135 mA
• Horn current draw (mean value) 90 mA
• Sound output volume 104 dBA ±3 dB @ 1 m
• Candela 60 cd • Size (wxhxd): 126x132x53 mm
• Protection class IP31
• Operating temperature 5 ÷ 40 °C
Distributed by:
REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

Annexes
Derby-E
SYSMAC CJ-series CJ1 CPU Units
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R/6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU1@ CSM_CJ1-CPU_DS_E_3_1
Introducing the High-speed "-R"

Flagship Models!
• Small! Fast! Flexible!
These machine controllers provide flexible control
for all kinds of applications.
CJ1H-CPU67H-R CJ1M-CPU12
Features
• Compact 90 × 65 mm (H × D) dimensions are first class in the industry.
• Provides excellent high-speed control performance, with high-speed processing of 16 ns for LD instructions and 0.24 μs for floating-point
calculations.
• A wide range of models is available, from the high-end models (2,560 points and 250K steps of program capacity) to basic models (160 points
and 5K steps).
• Other models are available with special functions such as the CJ1M-CPU2@, which provides positioning functions and built-in I/O, and the
CJ1G-CPU4@P.
• High-capacity Memory Cards up to 128 MB can be installed, and used to backup the program and system settings, or log customer data.
• The large instruction set can support diverse applications. Four types of programming are supported (ladder, structured text, sequential function
charts, and instruction lists), with approximately 400 instructions and 800 instruction variations.
• These CJ-series CPU Units support structured programming using function blocks, which can improve the customer's program development
resources.
• The various protection functions provide improved security to protect valuable software resources and property.
• The CPU Units are compatible with the CX-One Integrated Tool Package. Information for each component can be linked, and the system's data
can be integrated into one database. The software can provide total support from PLC settings to network startup.
1
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R/6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU1@
Ordering Information
International Standards
• The standards are abbreviated as follows: U: UL, U1: UL (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations), C: CSA, UC: cULus,
UC1: cULus (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations), CU: cUL, N: NK, L: Lloyd, and CE: EC Directives.
• Contact your OMRON representative for further details and applicable conditions for these standards.
Current
Specifications
consumption(A)
International
Name Maximum number of I/O LD Model number
Program Data area memory 5V 24 V standards
points and mountable Units execution
capacity capacity system system
(No. of Expansion Racks) time
448K words
250K steps DM: 32K words CJ1H-CPU67H-R
EM: 32K words × 13 banks
CJ1-H-R
256K words
CPU Units
EM: 32K words × 7 banks 0.99
2,560 I/O points and 40 Units UC1, CE, N,
0.016 μs (See −
max. (3 Expansion Racks max.) 128K words L
note.)
64K words
EM: 32K words × 1 bank
448K words
CJ1H-H 250K steps DM: 32K words CJ1H-CPU67H
CPU Units EM: 32K words × 13 banks
256K words 0.99
2,560 I/O points and 40 Units UC1, CE, N,
120K steps DM: 32K words 0.02 μs (See − CJ1H-CPU66H
max. (3 Expansion Racks max.) L
EM: 32K words × 7 banks note.)
128K words
60K steps DM: 32K words CJ1H-CPU65H
CJ1G-H 128K words
CPU Units 1,280 I/O points and 40 Units 60K steps DM: 32K words CJ1G-CPU45H
max. (1 Expansion Rack max.) EM: 32K words × 3 banks 0.91
UC1, CE, N,
30K steps 0.04 μs (See − CJ1G-CPU44H
64K words L
note.)
960 I/O points and 30 Units max. 20K steps DM: 32K words CJ1G-CPU43H
(2 Expansion Racks max.) EM: 32K words × 1 bank
10K steps CJ1G-CPU42H
CJ1M 640 I/O points and 20 Units max.
20K steps CJ1M-CPU13
CPU Units (1 Expansion Rack max.)
32K words 0.58
320 I/O points and 10 Units max. UC1, CE, N,
10K steps DM: 32K words 0.1 μs (See − CJ1M-CPU12
(No Expansion Racks) L
EM: None note.)
160 I/O points and 10 Units max.
5K steps CJ1M-CPU11
(No Expansion Racks)
Note: These values include the current consumption of a Programming Console. When using an NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter, add
0.15A/ per Adapter.
When using a CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter, add 0.04A per Adapter.
Accessories
The following accessories come with CPU Unit:
Item Specification
CJ1-H-R/ CJ1H-H/ CJ1G-H: CPM2A-BAT01
Battery
CJ1M: CJ1W-BAT01
End Cover CJ1W-TER01 (necessary to be mounted at the right end of CPU Rack)
End Plate PFP-M (2 pcs)
Serial Port (RS-232C) Connector Connector set for serial port connection (D-SUB 9-pin male connector)
2
Specifications
Common Specifications
Item Specifications
Control method Stored program
I/O control method Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
Programming LD (Ladder), SFC (Sequential Function Chart), ST (Structured Text), Mnemonic
• CJ1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access, Parallel Processing Mode
with Synchronous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
CPU processing mode
• CJ1M CPU Units: Normal Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
• CJ1 CPU Units: Normal Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
Instruction length 1 to 7 steps per instruction
Ladder instructions Approx. 400 (3-digit function codes)
• CJ1-H-R CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.016 μs min.
Special instructions: 0.048 μs min.
• CJ1-H CPU Units:
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU12/13/22/23):
Execution time Basic instructions: 0.10 μs min.
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/21):
• CJ1 CPU Units:
• CJ1-H-R CPU Units:
Normal mode: 0.13 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.28 ms min.
• CJ1-H CPU Units:
Overhead time Normal mode: 0.3 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.3 ms min.
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU12/13/22/23): 0.5 ms min.
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/21): 0.7 ms min.
• CJ1 CPU Units: 0.5 ms min.
Unit connection method No Backplane: Units connected directly to each other.
Mounting method DIN Track (screw mounting not possible)
• CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units:
Per CPU or Expansion Rack: 10 Units including Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units. Total per PLC: 10
Maximum number of connectable
Units on CPU Rack and 10 Units each on 3 Expansion Racks = 40 Units total
Units
• CJ1M CPU Units:
Total of 20 Units in the System, including 10 Units on CPU Rack and 10 Units on one Expansion Rack.
• CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units:
3 max. (An I/O Control Unit is required on the CPU Rack and an I/O Interface Unit is required on each Expansion Rack.)
Maximum number of Expansion • CJ1M CPU Units (CPU 13/23 only):
Racks 1 max. (An I/O Control Unit is required on the CPU Rack and an I/O Interface Unit is required on the Expansion Rack.)
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/12/21/22):
Expansion is not possible.
288 (cyclic tasks: 32, interrupt tasks: 256)
With CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Units, interrupt tasks can be defined as cyclic tasks called "extra cyclic tasks." Including these, up
to 288 cyclic tasks can be used.
Note: 1. Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled with TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
Number of tasks 2. The following 4 types of interrupt tasks are supported.
Power OFF interrupt tasks: 1 max.
Scheduled interrupt tasks: 2 max.
I/O interrupt tasks: 32 max.
External interrupt tasks: 256 max.
Scheduled Interrupts:
Interrupts generated at a time scheduled by the CPU Unit's built-in timer. (See note. 1)
I/O Interrupts: Interrupts from Interrupt Input Units.
Power OFF Interrupts (See note 2.): Interrupts executed when the CPU Unit's power is turned OFF.
External I/O Interrupts: Interrupts from the Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units.
Interrupt types Note: 1. CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval is either 1 ms to 9,999 ms (in increments of 1 ms) or
10 ms to99,990 ms (in increments of 10 ms) CJ1-H-R CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval is 0.2 ms to 999.9
ms (in increments of 0.1 ms), 1 ms to 9,999 ms (in increments of 1 ms), or 10 ms to 99,990 ms (in increments of
10 ms)
CJ1M CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval is 0.5 ms to 999.9 ms (in increments of 0.1 ms), 1 ms to 9,999 ms
(in increments of 1 ms), or 10 ms to 99,990 ms (in increments of 10 ms)
2. Not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is mounted.
Calling subroutines from more • CJ1-H CPU Units: Supported (called "global subroutines").
than one task • CJ1 CPU Units: Not supported.
Function blocks (CPU Unit with
Languages in function block definitions: ladder programming, structured text
unit version 3.0 or later only)
1,280: CIO 000000 to CIO 007915 (80 words from CIO 0000 to CIO 0079)
CIO The CIO Area can be used as
The setting of the first word can be changed from the default (CIO 0000) so that CIO 0000 to
(Core I/O) I/O Area work bits if the bits are not
CIO 0999 can be used.
Area used as shown here.
I/O bits are allocated to Basic I/O Units.
3
Item Specifications
3,200 (200 words): CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 (words CIO 1000 to CIO 1199)
Link Area
Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units in Controller Link Systems.
CPU Bus Unit Area CPU Bus Unit bits store the operating status of CPU Bus Units.
(25 words per Unit, 16 Units max.)
Special I/O Unit bits are allocated to Special I/O Units. (10 words per Unit, 96 Units max.)
Special I/O Unit Area
Note: Special I/O Units are I/O Units that belong to a special group called "Special I/O Units."
Example:CJ1W-AD081 Analog Input Unit
Serial PLC Link Area
(CJ1M CPU Units 1,440 (90 words): CIO 310000 to CIO 318915 (words CIO 3100 to CIO 3189)
only)
DeviceNet bits are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Unit remote I/O communications when the
Master function is used with fixed allocations. The CIO Area can be used as
work bits if the bits are not
Fixed allocation Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
CIO used as shown here.
setting 1 Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
(Core I/O)
Area Fixed allocation Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Fixed allocation Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
DeviceNet Area
The following words are allocated to the Master function even when the DeviceNet Unit is used
as a Slave.
Fixed allocation Outputs: CIO 3370 (Slave to Master)
setting 1 Inputs: CIO 3270 (Master to Slave)
37,504 (2,344 words): CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 (words CIO 3800 to CIO 6143)
Internal I/O Area
These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to control program execution. They cannot be used for external
I/O.
8,192 bits (512 words): W00000 to W51115 (W000 to W511)
Work Area Controls the programs only. (I/O from external I/O terminals is not possible.)
Note: When using work bits in programming, use the bits in the Work Area first before using bits from other areas.
8,192 bits (512 words): H00000 to H51115 (H000 to H511)
Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program, and maintain their ON/OFF status when the PLC is turned OFF
Holding Area or theoperating mode is changed.
Note: The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535. These words can be used only for the
function block instance area (internally allocated variable area).
Read only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A00000 to A44715 (words A000 to A447)
Auxiliary Area Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A44800 to A95915 (words A448 to A959)
Auxiliary bits are allocated specific functions.
16 bits (TR0 to TR15)
Temporary Area
Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON/OFF execution conditions at program branches.
Timer Area 4,096: T0000 to T4095 (used for timers only)
Counter Area 4,096: C0000 to C4095 (used for counters only)
32 Kwords: D00000 to D32767
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing data in word units (16 bits). Words in the DM Area maintain their
status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed.
DM Area Internal Special I/O Unit DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units)
Used to set parameters for Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit DM Area: D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units.
32 Kwords per bank, 13 banks max.: E0_00000 to EC_32767 max. (depending on model of CPU Unit)
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing data in word units (16 bits). Words in the EM Area maintain their
status when the PLC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed.
EM Area (CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU
The EM Area is divided into banks, and the addresses can be set by either of the following methods.
Units only)
Changing the current bank using the EMBC(281) instruction and setting addresses for the current bank.
Setting bank numbers and addresses directly.
EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number of the first bank.
IR0 to IR15
Store PLC memory addresses for indirect addressing. Index registers can be used independently in each task. One register is
Index Registers 32 bits (2words).
• CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: Setting to use index registers either independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
• CJ1 CPU Units: Index registers used independently in each task.
32 (TK0000 to TK0031)
Task Flag Area Task Flags are read-only flags that are ON when the corresponding cyclic task is executable and OFF when the corresponding
task is not executable or in standby status.
Trace Memory 4,000 words (trace data: 31 bits, 6 words)
Memory Cards: Compact flash memory cards can be used (MS-DOS format).
File Memory EM file memory (CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units only): Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory (MS-DOS format).
OMRON Memory Cards can be used.
4
Function Specifications
Item Specifications
1 to 32,000 ms (Unit: 1 ms)
Constant cycle time
When a Parallel Processing Mode is used for a CJ1-H CPU Unit, the cycle time for executing instructions is constant.
Possible (Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long): 10 to 40,000 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Cycle time monitoring When a Parallel Processing Mode is used for a CJ1-H CPU Unit, the instruction execution cycle is monitored. CPU Unit
operation will stop if the peripheral servicing cycle time exceeds 2 s (fixed).
Cyclic refreshing, immediate refreshing, refreshing by IORF(097).
IORF(097) refreshes I/O bits allocated to Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units.
With CJ1-H-R CPU Units the SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction (FIORF(225)) can be used to refresh Special I/O
I/O refreshing
Units whenever required (including allocated DM Area words).
With the CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, the CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction can be used to refresh bits
allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO and DM Areas whenever required.
Data links for Controller Link Units and SYSMAC LINK Units, remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, and other special refreshing for
CPU Bus Units is performed at the following times:
Timing of special refreshing for
• CJ1 CPU Units: I/O refresh period
CPU Bus Units
• CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: I/O refresh period and when the CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction is
executed.
I/O memory holding when
Depends on the ON/OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area.
changing operating modes
Load OFF All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the CPU Unit is operating in RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM mode.
Timer/Counter PV refresh • CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: BCD or binary (CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher).
method • CJ1 CPU Units: BCD only.
Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I/O Units. The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence of noise
Input response time setting
and chattering or it can be decreased to detect shorter pulses on the inputs.
Mode setting at power-up Possible (By default, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if a Programming Console is not connected.)
The user program and parameter area data (e.g., PLC Setup) are always backed up automatically in flash memory. (automatic
backup and restore.)
Flash memory (CJ1-H and CJ1M • CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only:
CPU Units only) When downloading projects from CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher, symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names,
I/O comments), comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments, other comments), and program index files (CX-Programmer
section names, section comments, or program comments) are stored in comment memory within the flash memory.
Automatically reading programs (autoboot) from the Memory
Possible
Card when the power is turned ON.
Program replacement during PLC operation Possible
User program: Program file format
Memory Card functions PLC Setup and other parameters: Data file format
Format in which data is stored in Memory Card
I/O memory: Data file format (binary format), text format, or
CSV format
User program instructions, Programming Devices (including
Functions for which Memory Card read/write is supported CX-Programmer and Programming Consoles), Host Link
computers, AR Area control bits, easy backup operation
Filing Memory Card data and the EM (Extended Data Memory) Area can be handled as files.
Control set/reset, differential monitoring, data tracing (scheduled, each cycle, or when instruction is executed), instruction error
Debugging
tracing, storing location generating error when a program error occurs.
When the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode, multiple program sections ("circuits") of the user program can be
edited together. This function is not supported for block programming areas.
Online editing
(With the CX-Programmer is used, multiple program sections of the user program can be edited together. When a Programming
Console is used, the program can be edited in mnemonics only.)
Overwrite protection: Set using DIP switch.
Program protection
Copy protection: Password set using CX-Programmer or Programming Consoles.
User-defined errors (i.e., user can define fatal errors and non-fatal errors)
Error check The FPD(269) instruction can be used to check the execution time and logic of each programming block.
FAL and FALS instructions can be used with the CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units to simulate errors.
Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log. Information includes the error code, error details, and the time the error occurred.
Error log
A CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit can be set so that user-defined FAL errors are not stored in the error log.
Built-in peripheral port: Programming Device (including Programming Console) connections, Host Links, NT Links Built-in RS-
232C port: Programming Device (excluding Programming Console) connections, Host Links, no-protocol communications,
Serial communications NT Links, Serial Gateway (Compoway/F master)
Serial Communications Unit (sold separately): Protocol macros, Host Links, NT Links, Modbus-RTU slave, No-protocol,
Serial Gateway (Compoway/F master, Modbus master)
Provided on all models.
Accuracy: Ambient temperature Monthly error
55°C −3.5 min to +0.5 min
Clock
25°C −1.5 min to +1.5 min
0°C −3 min to +1 min
Note: Used to store the time when power is turned ON and when errors occur.
AC Power Supply Unit: 10 to 25 ms (not fixed)
Power OFF detection time
DC Power Supply Unit PD025: 2 to 5 ms; PD022: 2 to 10 ms
0 to 10 ms (user-defined, default: 0 ms)
Power OFF detection delay time
Note: Not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is mounted.
Held Areas: Holding bits, contents of Data Memory and Extended Data Memory, and status of the counter Completion Flags
and present values.
Memory protection Note: If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned ON, and the PLC Setup is set to maintain the IOM Hold Bit status when
power to the PLC is turned ON, the contents of the CIO Area, the Work Area, part of the Auxiliary Area, timer Completion
Flag and PVs, Index Registers, and the Data Registers will be saved for up to 20 days.
5
Item Specifications
Sending commands to a Host FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by executing Network Communications
Link computer Instructions from the PLC.
Remote programming and Host Link communications can be used for remote programming and remote monitoring through a Controller Link, Ethernet,
monitoring DeviceNet, or SYSMAC LINK network.
Remote programming and monitoring from Support Software and FINS message communications can be performed across
different network levels, even for different types of network.
Pre-Ver. 2.0: Three levels
Communicating across network
levels Version 2.0 or later: Eight levels for Controller Link and Ethernet
networks (See note.), three levels for other networks.
Note: To communicate across eight levels, the CX-Integrator or the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher must be
used to set the routing tables.
I/O comments can be stored as symbol table files in the Memory Card, EM file memory, or comment memory (see note).
Storing comments in CPU Unit Note: Comment memory is supported for CX-Programmer version 5.0 or higher and CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version
3.0 or later only.
Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction and instruction errors.
Program check
CX-Programmer can also be used to check programs.
Control output signals RUN output: The internal contacts will turn ON (close) while the CPU Unit is operating (CJ1W-PA205R).
Battery Set for CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units: CPM2A-BAT01
Battery life
Battery Set for CJ1M CPU Units: CJ1W-BAT01
Self-diagnostics CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O bus errors, memory errors, and battery errors.
Storage of number of times power has been interrupted.
Other functions
(Stored in A514.)
6
CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit
Item
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R CJ1H-CPU6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU2@/1@ CJ1G-CPU4@
Basic LD 0.016 μs 0.02 μs 0.04 μs 0.10 μs 0.08 μs
instructions OUT 0.016 μs 0.02 μs 0.04 μs 0.35 μs 0.21 μs
Examples
240.1 μs 300.1 μs 380.1 μs 650.2 μs 633.5 μs
XFER
(for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words)
140.2 μs 200.1 μs 220.1 μs 400.2 μs 278.3 μs
BSET
(for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words) (for 1,000 words)
Instruction • CPU11/21
executions 21.5 μs min.
BCD arithmetic 7.6 μs min. 8.2 μs min. 8.4 μs min. 14.0 μs min.
times Special • Other CPU Units
instructions 18.9 μs min.
Binary
0.18 μs min. 0.18 μs min. 0.20 μs min. 0.30 μs min. 0.37 μs min.
arithmetic
• CPU11/21
Floatingpoint 15.7 μs min.
0.24 μs min. 8.0 μs min. 9.2 μs min. 10.2 μs min.
math • Other CPU Units
13.3 μs min.
SBS/RET 1.33 μs 2.12 μs 3.56 μs 3.84 μs 37.6 μs
Normal mode: Normal mode: • CPU11/21
0.13 ms 0.3 ms 0.7 ms
Overhead time 0.5 ms 0.5 ms
Parallel mode: Parallel mode: • Other CPU Units
0.28 ms 0.3 ms 0.5 ms
Any of the following four modes:
1. Normal (instructions and peripheral servicing performed
Either of following two modes:
consecutively)
1. Either of following two modes: Normal
2. Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode (instruction execution
(instructions and peripheral servicing
interrupted to service peripherals at a specific cycle and time;
performed consecutively)
CPU execution processing consecutive refreshing also performed)
2. Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
modes 3. Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory Access
(instruction execution interrupted to
(instruction executed and peripheral services in parallel while
service peripherals at a specific cycle
synchronizing access to I/O memory)
and time; consecutive refreshing also
4. Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory Access
Execution performed)
(instruction executed and peripheral services in parallel without
timing synchronizing access to I/O memory)
Data links
DeviceNet
CPU Bus Unit
remote I/O
special
refreshing Protocol macro During I/O refresh period or via special CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruction During I/O refresh
send/ receive (DLNK(226)) period
data
Refreshing of CIO and DM Areas
words allocated to CPU Bus Unit
Not supported.
Cyclic execution of interrupt
Supported. (No extra cyclic
tasks via TKON instruction
(Up to 256 extra cyclic tasks, increasing the total number of cyclic tasks to 288 max.) tasks; 32 cyclic
(called "extra cyclic tasks")
tasks max.)
Not supported.
Independent/shared
Supported. (Only independent
specifications for index and data
The time to switch between tasks can be reduced if shared registers are used. registers for each
registers
task.)
Initialization when tasks are Supported. Only Task Flag for
started Task Startup Flags supported. first execution.
Starting subroutines from
Global subroutines can be defined that can be called from more than one task. Not supported.
multiple tasks
0.2 ms to 999.9 ms 0.5 ms to 999.9 ms
(in increments of 0.1 (in increments of 0.1
1 ms to 9,999 ms (in
ms), 1 ms to 9,999 ms), 1 ms to 9,999
Tasks 1 ms to 9,999 ms (in increments of 1 ms) or increments of 1 ms)
Scheduled interrupt interval for ms (in increments of ms (in increments of
10 ms to 99,990 ms (in increments of 10 or 10 ms to 99,990
scheduled interrupt tasks 1 ms), or 10 ms to 1 ms), or 10 ms to
ms) ms (in increments of
99,990 ms (in 99,990 ms (in
10 ms)
increments of 10 increments of 10
ms) ms)
Any instruction that is being executed is interrupted when interrupt task conditions are met to start the interrupt
For instructions
task. If the cyclic task (including extra cyclic tasks) accesses the same data area words as the instruction that
Other than the
was interrupted, data may not be concurrent. To ensure data concurrency, the DI and EI instructions must be
following ones
Interrupt task used to disable and enable interrupts during a specific part of the program.
execution For BIT
timing during COUNTER
instruction (BCNT) or Interrupt tasks are started only after execution of the instruction has been completed,
execution BLOCK ensuring data concurrency even when the same data area words are accessed from the
TRANSFER instruction and the interrupt task.
(XFER)
instructions
7
Item
Only the user
In addition to the data listed at the right, data from Units mounted to the CPU Rack or
program,
Backup to Memory Cards Expansion Racks can also be backed up to the Memory Card (via pushbutton on front
parameters, and I/O
(simple backup function) panel). This is very effective when replacing Units. Backup data includes scan lists for
memory in the CPU
DeviceNet Units, protocol macros for Serial Communications Units, etc.
Debugging Unit.
Supported
Automatic user program and
(enabling battery-free operation without a Memory Card) The user program and
parameter area backup to flash Not supported.
parameter area data are automatically backed up the flash memory whenever they are
memory
transferred to the CPU Unit from the CX-Programmer, file memory, etc.
Detailed information on I/O table Detailed I/O table error information is stored in A261 whenever the I/O tables cannot be
Not supported.
creation errors created for any reason.
I/O tables It's possible to confirm if the first rack word has been specified for the system on the
Displaying presence of first rack
Programming Console display.
word setting on Programming Not supported.
The first rack word is specified from the CX-Programmer, making it previously impossible
Console
to confirm the setting from the Programming Console.
Built-in I/O Not supported. CJ1M-CPU2@ Not supported.
Serial PLC Link Not supported. Supported. Not supported.
Scheduled interrupts set in increments of 0.1 ms Supported. Not supported. Supported. Not supported.
Battery CPM2A-BAT01 CJ1W-BAT01 CPM2A-BAT01
Operation
when Unit
doesn't Starting or not starting (standby) the CPU Unit in MONITOR or RUN mode even if a Unit CPU Unit standby
CPU Unit startup
complete has not completed startup processing can be specified in the PLC Setup. (fixed)
startup
process
Not supported.
(The same results
can be achieved by
Differentiated LD NOT,
combining
AND NOT, and OR NOT Supported.
differentiated LD,
instructions
Sequence AND, and OR
instructions instructions with the
NOT instruction.)
OUTB, SETB, and RSTB
instructions to manipulate
Supported. Not supported.
individual bits in DM and EM
Area words
Supported.
TIMU (0.1-ms, BCD), Either BCD or binary
TIMUX (0.1-ms, binary), can be selected
Not supported.
TMUH (0.01-ms, BCD), (with
Timer/ TMUHX (0.01-ms, binary) CX-Programmer
counter Ver.7.1 or higher).
instructions
Format for updating PVs for TIM,
TIMH, TMHH, TTIM, TIML, MTIM, Supported.
BCD only
CNT, CNTR, CNR, TIMW, TMHW, Either BCD or binary can be selected (with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher).
CNTW instructions
32-bit signed data line
Special math coordinates and X axis starting
Supported. Not supported.
instructions point specification for APR
instruction
Supported
High-speed trigonometric
(with
functions: SINQ, COSQ, and Not supported.
CX-Programmer
TANQ instructions
Ver. 7.1 or higher).
Single-precision calculations Supported
Floating- Not supported.
and conversions (enabling standard deviation calculations).
point decimal
instructions Supported.
Conversions between
Floating point can be converted to ASCII for display on PTs.
single-precision floating point Not supported.
ASCII text strings from measurement devices can be converted to floating-point decimal
and ASCII
for use in calculations.
Double-precision calculations Supported
Not supported.
and conversions (enabling high-precision positioning).
Data processing can be performed normally or in the background (specified for each
Text string and table data
instruction). Normal processing
processing instruction
Text string, (Using time slices to process instruction over several cycles reduces the effect of these only.
execution
table data, instructions on the cycle time.).
and data shift Stack insertions/deletions/
instructions replacements and stack counts Supported.
Not supported.
with table processing Effective for tracking workpieces on conveyor lines.
instructions
Data control Supported
PID with autotuning Not supported.
instructions (eliminating the need to adjust PID constants).
Supported
Subroutine
Global subroutines (GSBS, GSBN, and GRET instructions) Not supported.
instructions
Enables easier structuring of subroutines.
8
Item
Supported.
Failure Error log storage for FAL FAL can be executed without placing an entry in the error log. (Only system FAL errors Not supported.
diagnosis will be placed in the error log.)
instructions Supported.
Error simulation with FAL/FALS Not supported.
Fatal and nonfatal errors can be simulated in the system to aid in debugging.
Data AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCP)
comparisonin and DOUBLE RANGE COMPARE Supported. Not supported.
structions (ZCPL)
Index register
real I/O Program and real I/O memory CVM1/CV-series real I/O memory addresses can be converted to CJ-series addresses
address address compatibility with and placed in index registers or CJ-series real I/O memory addresses in index registers Not supported.
conversion CVM1/CVseries PLCs can be converted to CVM1/CV-series addresses.
for CVM1/CV
Condition Flag status can be saved or loading using the SAVE CONDITION FLAGS
Condition
Compatibility with (CCS) and LOAD CONDITION FLAGS (CCL) instructions, enabling applications where
Flag saving Not supported.
CVM1/CV-series PLCs Condition Flag status must be passed between different program locations, tasks, or
and loading
cycles.
Supported.
Disabling power interruptions in program
Instructions between DI and EI are executed without performing power OFF processing Not supported.
sections
even if a power interruption has been detected and confirmed.
The Equals,
Negative, and Error
Flags are turned
OFF after executing
the following
The statuses of the Equals, Negative, and Error Flags are maintained for execution of instructions.TIM,
the following instructions. TIMH, TMHH, CNT,
Condition Flag operation
TIM, TIMH, TMHH, CNT, IL, ILC, JMP0, JME0, XCHG, XCGL, MOVR, input comparison IL,ILC, JMP0,
instructions, CMP, CMPL, CPS, CPSL, TST, TSTN, STC, and CLC. JME0, XCHG,
XCGL, MOVR, input
comparison
instructions, CMP,
CMPL, CPS, CPSL,
TST, and TSTN.
Unit Versions
Units Models Unit version
Unit version 4.2
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Unit version 4.1
Unit version 4.0
CJ1-H CPU Units Unit version 4.0
CJ1@-CPU@@H Unit version 3.0
CJ1@-CPU@@P Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
Unit version 4.0
CJ1M-CPU12/13 Unit version 3.0
CJ1M CPU Units Pre-Ver. 2.0
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 2.0
9
Function Support by Unit Version
Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions added for unit version 4.0.
Additional functions are supported if CX-Programmer version 7.2 or higher is used.
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units

CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P,
Function CJ1M-CPU@@
Unit version 4.0 or
Other unit versions
later
Online editing of function blocks
OK −
Note: This function cannot be used for simulations on the CX-Simulator.
Input-output variables in function blocks OK −
Text strings in function blocks OK −
Number-Text String Conversion Instructions:
New application OK −
NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
instructions
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT) OK −
OK with CX-Programmer
ST programming in task programs −
version 7.2 or higher
OK with CX-Programmer
SFC programming in task programs −
version 7.2 or higher
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit version 4.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with
unit version 3.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download programs containing unit version 4.0 functions to
a CPU Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, a program error will occur
when operation is started or when the unit version 4.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will stop.
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Version 4.1 Specifications Change

The following specifications changes have been made for CJ1H-CPU@@H-R version 4.1.
The following specifications for unit version 4.2 and later are the same as the specifications for unit version 4.0.
Functionality Changes
CPU Unit version CJ1-H Ver. 4.0 CJ1-H-R Ver. 4.0 CJ1-H-R Ver. 4.1
Timer numbers that can be used with
0000 to 0015 0000 to 4095 0016 to 4095
ONE-MS TIMER instructions
0.01-s clock pulse Not supported Supported Not supported
Note: If ONE-MS TIMER instructions (TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)) with timer numbers 0 to 15 are used in existing programs with CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
version 4.1, the timer numbers must be changed to timer numbers between 0016 and 4095
Performance Changes
CPU Unit version CJ1-H Ver. 4.0 CJ1-H-R Ver. 4.0 CJ1-H-R Ver. 4.1
Timing precision of HUNDRED-MS
−10 to 0 ms −10 to 0 ms −100 to 0 ms
TIMER instructions (TIM/TIMX(550))
Timing precision of ONE-MS TIMER
−1 to 0 ms −1 to 0 ms −10 to 0 ms
instructions (TMHH(540)/TMHHX(522))
Note: 1. The timing precision of version 4.0 and version 4.1 are different. Be sure to check the effect on the application.
2. There have been no changes in the timing precision of TEN-MS TIMER instructions (TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)) and TENTH-MS TIMER
instructions (TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556)) since version 4.0. Use TEN-MS TIMER instructions and TENTH-MS TIMER instructions if
accuracy is a problem when using HUNDRED-MS TIMER instructions and ONE-MS TIMER instructions.
10


CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P,
Function CJ1M-CPU@@
Unit version 3.0 or
Other unit versions
later
Function blocks OK −
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F commands at
OK −
the built-in serial port)
Comment memory (in internal flash memory) OK −
Expanded simple backup data OK −
TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol
communications with Serial Communications Units with OK −
unit version 1.2 or later)
New application
Model conversion instructions:
instructions
XFERC(565), DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568), OK −
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instructions: GETID(286) OK −
PRV(881) and PRV2(883) instructions: Added high-
Additional
frequency calculation methods for calculating pulse OK −
instruction functions
frequency. (CJ1M CPU Units only)
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with
unit version 2.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download programs containing unit version 3.0 functions to
a CPU Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, a program error will occur
when operation is started or when the unit version 3.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will stop.
11


CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1M CPU Units
(CJ1H-CPU@@H-R)
(CJ1@-CPU@@H) CJ1M-CPU12/13/22/23 CJ1M-CPU11/21
Function
(CJ1G-CPU@@P)
Unit version Other unit Unit version Other unit Unit version
2.0 or later versions 2.0 or later versions 2.0 or later
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks OK − OK − OK
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords OK − OK − OK
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent
OK − OK − OK
to CPU Units via Networks
− (Supported − (Supported
Online Network Connections without I/O if I/O tables are if I/O tables are
OK OK OK
Tables automatically automatically
generated at startup.) generated at startup.)
Communications through a Maximum of 8
OK − OK − OK
Network Levels
OK from OK from
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs OK OK OK
lot number 030201 lot number 030201
OK for up to OK for up to OK for up to OK for up to OK for up to
Setting First Slot Words
64 groups 8 groups 64 groups 8 groups 64 groups
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a
OK − OK − OK
Parameter File
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method
OK − OK − OK
for Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Operation Start/End Times OK − OK − OK
MILH, MILR, MILC OK − OK − OK
=DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT,
OK − OK − OK
>DT, >=DT
BCMP2 OK − OK OK OK
OK from OK from
GRY OK OK OK
lot number 030201 lot number 030201
TPO OK − OK − OK
New Application
Instructions DSW, TKY, HKY, MTR,
OK − OK − OK
7SEG
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
OK − OK − OK
ECHRD, ECHWR
Reading/Writing CPU Bus
OK − OK − OK
Units with IORD/IOWR
OK, but only for CPU OK, but only for CPU
PRV2 − − −
Units with built-in I/O Units with built-in I/O
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download programs containing unit version s.0 functions to a Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Unit, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a Pre- Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, a program error will occur when operation is started
or when the unit version 2.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will stop.
12
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Programmer versions.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices

CX-Programmer
Programming
CPU Unit Functions (See note 1.) Ver. 5.0 Ver. 7.0
Ver. 3.3 Ver. 4.0 Console
Ver. 6.0 or higher
OK
Using new
− − − (See note 2
CS/CJ-series unit Functions added functions
and 3.)
Ver. 4.0 for unit version 4.0
Not using new
OK OK OK OK
functions
Using new
− − OK OK No
restrictions
Ver. 3.0 for unit version 3.0 Not using new
OK OK OK OK
functions
Using new
− OK OK OK
Ver. 2.0 for unit version 2.0 Not using new
OK OK OK OK
functions
Note: 1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version as long as the functions added for unit versions are not used.
2. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new functionality of CJ1-H-R CPU Units.
When using CJ1-H-R CPU unit Ver.4.1, use CX-Programmer Ver.7.2 or later (Check the CX-Programmer version in "Version
Information").
3. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the functional improvements made for unit version 4.0 of the CS/CJ-series CPU
Units. With CX-Programmer version 7.2 or higher, you can use even more expanded functionality.
Device Type Setting

The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Device type setting on

Series CPU Unit group CPU Unit model
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G-H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ Series
(See note.) CJ1H-H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU@@ CJ1M
Note: Select one of the following CPU types: CPU67-R, CPU66-R, CPU65-R, or CPU64-R.
13
External Interface
A CJ1-series CPU Unit provides two communications ports for external interfaces: a peripheral port and an RS-232C port.
LED Indicators
SYSMAC RUN DIP Switch

CJ1G-CPU44 ERR/ALM
Battery Compartment PROGRAMMABLE INH
PRPHL
(Inside the battery compartment)
CONTROLLER COMM
Used for initial settings.
Memory Card Indicators
OPEN
MCPWR (green): Lit when power is
Memory Card Power MCPWR
supplied to Memory Card.
Supply Switch BUSY BUSY (orange): Lit when Memory
Press the power supply Card is being accessed.
switch to disconnect Peripheral Port
power before removing Connected to Programming Devices,
the Memory Card. Also, such as a Programming Console or host computers.
press the Memory Card PERIPHERAL
Power Supply Switch to Memory Card Connector
perform an easy backup Connects the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
operation.
RS-232C Port
Connected to Programming Devices
(excluding Programming Consoles),
Host Computers, general-purpose external
PORT
devices, Programmable Terminals, and other
devices.
Memory Card Eject Button

Press the eject button to remove te
Memory Card from the CPU Unit.
Peripheral port
The peripheral port is used to connect a Programming Device (including a Programming Console) or a host computer. It can also be used as an
RS-232C port by connecting a suitable cable, such as the CS1W-CN118 or CS1W-CN@26. The connector pin arrangement when using a
connecting cable for an RS-232C port is shown below.
1
6
9
5
CS1W-CN118
Pin No. Signal Name Direction

1 − − −
2 SD (TXD) Send data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive data Input
4 RS (RTS) Request to send Output
5 CS (CTS) Clear to send Input
6 Reserved None −
7 − − −
8 − − −
9 SG (0V) Signal ground −
Connector hood FG Protection earth −
14
RS-232C Port
Item Specification
Communications method Half duplex
Synchronization Start-stop
0.3/0.6/1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4/57.6/115.2 kbps
Baud rate
(See note.)
Transmission distance 15 m max.
Interface EIA RS-232C
Protocol Host Link, NT Link, 1:N, No-protocol, or Peripheral Bus
Note: Baud rates for the RS-232C are specified only up to 19.2 kbps. The CJ Series supports serial communications from 38.4 kbps to 115.2 kbps,
but some computers cannot support these speeds. Lower the baud rate if necessary.
1
6
9
5
Pin No. Signal Name Direction

1 FG Protection earth −
2 SD (TXD) Send data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive data Input
4 RS (RTS) Request to send Output
5 CS (CTS) Clear to send Input
6 5V Power supply −
7 DR (DSR) Data set ready Input
8 ER (DTR) Data terminal ready Output
9 SG (0V) Signal ground −
Connector hood FG Protection earth −
Note: Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything but the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter.
Using this power supply for any other external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device.
15
Dimensions (Unit : mm)
CJ1-H-R and CJ1-H CPU Units
2.7
SYSMAC RUN
CJ1G-CPU44 ERR/ALM
PROGRAMMABLE INH
CONTROLLER PRPHL
COMM
OPEN
MCPWR
BUSY
90
PERIPHERAL
PORT
2.7 65
62 73.9
CJ1M CPU Units

2.7
90
2.7
65
31 73.9
16
About Manuals
Name Cat. No. Contents
SYSMAC CJ/NSJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@, Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation,
W393
CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
This manual describes programming and other methods to use the
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, W394
functions of the CS/CJ-series and NSJ-series PLCs.
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions supported by
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, W340
CS/CJ-series and NSJ-series PLCs
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
Provides information on how to program and operate CS/CJ-series
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E W341
PLCs using a Programming Console.
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1G-CPU@@,
CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H,
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communications
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, W342
commands used with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@ Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer for all
W446
CX-Programmer Operation Manual functionality except for function blocks.
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
Function Blocks Describes the functionality unique to the CX-Programmer Ver. 7.0 and
(CS1G-CPU@@H, CS1H-CPU@@H, CP-series CPU Units or CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0
W447
CJ1G-CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H, or later based on function blocks. Functionality that is the same as that
CJ1M-CPU@@, CP1H-X@@@@-@, of the CX-Programmer is described in W446 (enclosed).
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@
CPU Units)
CXONE-AL@@C-V@/ CXONE-AL@@D-V@ Describes operating procedures for the CX-Integrator Network
W464
CX-Integrator Operation Manual Configuration Tool for CS-, CJ-, CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
CXONE-AL@@C-V@/AL@@D-V@
W463 Installation and overview of CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual
17
Read and Understand This Catalog
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or
comments.
SYSMAC CJ-Series Analog I/O Unit
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD CSM_CJ1W-AD_DA_MAD_DS_E_2_1
Consistent Microsecond Throughput:

Models with Direct Conversion Join
the Lineup
• Analog Input Units for converting analog input signals into
binary data
• Analog Output Units for converting binary data into analog
output signals
CJ1W-AD042 CJ1W-DA042V
Features
Analog Input Units
• Input up to eight analog signals with one Unit.
• Functions include line disconnection detection, averaging, peak value holding, offset/gain adjustment, and scaling.
(Offset/gain adjustment is not supported by the CJ1W-AD042. Scaling is supported only by the CJ1W-AD042.)
• High-speed A/D conversion in 20 μs/point with direct conversion function * (CJ1W-AD042 only).
Analog Output Units
• Output up to eight analog signals with one Unit.
• Functions include output holding, offset/gain adjustment, and scaling. (Offset/gain adjustment is not supported by the CJ1W-DA042V. Scaling
is supported only by the CJ1W-DA08V/DA08C/DA042V.)
• High-speed D/A conversion in 20 μs/point with direct conversion function * (CJ1W-DA042V only).
Analog I/O Units
• Input up to four analog signals and output up to two analog signals with one Unit.
• Functions include line disconnection detection, input averaging, scaling, input peak value holding, output holding, ratio conversion, and offset/
gain adjustment.
* Direct Conversion Instructions for High-speed type can be used to create a consistent response time from input through data processing and
output.
System Configuration
CPU Unit Analog Input Unit
Analog Output Unit
RUN AD081-V1 DA041
SYSMAC ERR/ALM RUN RUN
CJ1G-CPU44 INH ERC ERC
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER PRPHL ERH B1 A1 ERH B1 A1
COMM ADJ ADJ
OPEN
MCPWR
MACH MACH
No. No.
BUSY 1 1
x10 x10
0 0
x10 x10
PERIHERAL
1 2
1 2
MODE MODE
PORT
Sensor
Temperature Regulator
Pressure (Temperature control)
Preamp
Speed
Servo- M
Flow rate
controller
(Position control)
Voltage Variable speed M
Current controller
Transducer (Speed control)
Power
Power factor Chart recorder
Sensor
Note: The above diagram is an installation example for the CJ1W-AD081-V1 Analog Input Units and CJ1W-DA041 Analog Output Units.
1
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Analog Input Units

Accuracy at No. of Current
Signal consumption
Product I/O Signal Conversion ambient External unit
Unit type range Resolution (A) Model Standards
name points range period temperature connection numbers
selection
of 25°C allocated 5 V 24 V
Analog
Input
Unit 20 μs/1 point,
1 to 5 V (1/10,000), Voltage:
25 μs/2 points,
0 to 10 V (1/20,000), ±0.2% of
High-speed type 30 μs/3 points,
4 -5 to 5 V (1/20,000), F.S.
35 μs/4 points 0.52 --- UC1, CE
inputs -10 to 10 V (1/40,000), Current: CJ1W-AD042
The Direct
and ±0.4% of
conversion
4 to 20 mA (1/10,000) F.S.
Set is provided.
CJ1 Removable
separately
Special terminal 1
for each
I/O Units Analog block
input
Input 8
1 to 5 V, CJ1W-AD081-V1
Units inputs 1/4,000 1 ms/point Voltage:
0 to 5 V,
(Settable (250 μs/point ±0.2% of F.S.
0 to 10 V, UC1, N,
to can also be Current: 0.42 ---
-10 to 10 V, L, CE
4 1/8,000) set.) ±0.4% of F.S.
4 to 20
inputs *1 *1 *2 CJ1W-AD041-V1
mA
*1 The resolution and conversion speed cannot be set independently. If the resolution is set to 1/4,000, then the conversion speed will be 1 ms/
point.
*2 At 23 ±2°C
Analog Output Units

Signal External consumption
Unit type range Resolution power (A) Model Standards
selection supply
of 25°C allocated 5V 24 V
20 μs/
Analog 1 point,
Output 25 μs/
Unit 2 points,
High-speed type 1 to 5 V (1/10,000), 30 μs/
4 0 to 10 V (1/20,000), 3 points, ±0.3% of
--- 0.40 --- UC1, CE
outputs and 35 μs/ F.S.
CJ1W-DA042V
−10 to 10 V (1/40,000) 4 points
The Direct
conver-
sion is
provided.
24 VDC
1 to 5 V,
+10%
8 0 to 5 V, −15% , 0.14 UC1, N,
CJ1W-DA08V
CJ1 outputs Set 0 to 10 V, 1/4,000 1 ms/point Removable 140 mA *2 L, CE
separately −10 to 10 V (Settable (Settable
Special ±0.3% of terminal max. 1
for each to to 250 μs/ 0.14
I/O Units F.S. block
output 1/8,000) point) 24 VDC
Analog
Output 8 4 to 20 *1 *1 +10%
−15%, 0.17 UC1, N,
CJ1W-DA08C
Units outputs mA *2 CE
170 mA
max.
24 VDC
+10%
4 −15%, 0.2
Voltage: CJ1W-DA041
outputs 1 to 5 V, *2
±0.3% of 200 mA
0 to 5 V, max.
1 ms/ F.S. UC1, N,
0 to 10 V, 1/4,000 0.12
point Current: 24 VDC L, CE
−10 to 10 V,
±0.5% of +10%
2 4 to 20 mA −15%, 0.14
F.S. CJ1W-DA021
outputs *2
140 mA
max.
*1 The resolution and conversion speed cannot be set independently. If the resolution is set to 1/4,000, the conversion speed will be 1 ms/point.
*2 This is for an external power supply, and not for internal current consumption.
2
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Analog I/O Units

Signal consumption
Unit type range Resolution (A) Model Standards
selection
of 25°C allocated 5 V 24 V
Analog Voltage:
I/O 4 ±0.2% of F.S.
Units inputs Set 1 to 5 V, 1 ms/ Current:
1/4,000
CJ1 separately 0 to 5 V, point ±0.2% of F.S. Removable
(Settable UC1, N,
Special for each 0 to 10 V, (Settable terminal 1 0.58 − CJ1W-MAD42
to L, CE
I/O Units input and −10 to 10 V, to 500 μs/ Voltage: block
2 1/8,000) ±0.3% of F.S.
output 4 to 20 mA point)
outputs Current:
±0.3% of F.S.
Note: The resolution and conversion speed cannot be set independently. If the resolution is set to 1/4,000, then the conversion speed will be 1
ms/point.
Accessories
Model Accessories
CJ1W-AD081-V1/AD041-V1
CJ1W-DA08V/DA08C/DA041/DA021
None.
CJ1W-DA042V
CJ1W-MAD42
Four jumpers
CJ1W-AD042
(For a current input, a jumper is used to connect the current input positive terminal and the voltage input positive terminal.)
Mountable Racks
CJ system (CJ1, CJ2) CP1H system NSJ system
Model
CPU Rack Expansion Backplane CP1H PLC NSJ Controller Expansion Backplane
9 Units *2 9 Units *2
CJ1W-AD042 8 Units *1 (per Expansion (per Expansion
Backplane) Backplane)
CJ1W-AD081-V1
CJ1W-AD041-V1
CJ1W-DA042V
CJ1W-DA08V 10 Units *1 (per Expansion 2 Units *3 Not supported (per Expansion
CJ1W-DA08C Backplane) Backplane)
CJ1W-DA041
CJ1W-DA021
CJ1W-MAD42 7 Units *1 (per Expansion (per Expansion
Backplane) Backplane)
Note: It may not be possible to mount this many Units to a Rack depending on the current consumption of the other Units.
*1 This is the number of Units for a CJ2H-CPU6@ CJ2H CPU Unit (without EtherNet/IP) and a CJ1W-PA205@ or CJ1W-PD025 Power Supply Unit.
*2 This is the number of Units for a CJ1W-PA205@ or CJ1W-PD025 Power Supply Unit.
*3 A CP1W-EXT01 CJ Unit Adaptor is required.
3
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Individual Specifications
Analog Input Units CJ1W-AD041-V1/AD081-V1/AD042
Specifications
Item CJ1W-AD041-V1 CJ1W-AD081-V1 CJ1W-AD042
Unit type CJ-series Special I/O Unit
Between I/O and PLC signals:
Between I/O and PLC signals: Photocoupler
Isolation *1 Digital isolator (No isolation between
(No isolation between I/O signals.)
I/O signals.)
External terminals 18-point detachable terminal block (M3 screws)
Power consumption 420 mA max. at 5 VDC 520 mA max. at 5 VDC
Dimensions (mm) 31 × 90 × 65 mm (W × H × D)
Weight 140 g max. 150 g max.
General specifications Conforms to general specifications for SYSMAC CJ Series.
Number of analog inputs 4 8 4
1 to 5 V 1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V −5 to 5 V
Input signal range *2
−10 to 10 V −10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
*3 *4
Maximum rated input Voltage Input: ±15 V
(for 1 point) *5 Current Input: ±30 mA
Input impedance Voltage Input: 1 MΩ min. Current Input: 250 Ω (rated value)
Input 1 to 5 V 10,000
specifications
0 to 10 V 20,000
Resolution 4,000/8,000 *6 −5 to 5 V 20,000
−10 to 10 V 40,000
4 to 20 mA 10,000
Converted output data 16-bit binary data
25°C *8 Voltage Input: ±0.2% of F.S.Current Input: ±0.4% of F.S.
Accuracy *7
0°C to 55°C Voltage Input: ±0.4% of F.S.Current Input: ±0.6% of F.S.
20 μs/1 point, 25 μs/2 points,
A/D conversion period *9 1 ms/250 μs per point *6
30 μs/3 points, 35 μs/4 points
Stores the last "n" data conversions
Stores the last "n" data conversions in the buffer, and stores the mean value in the buffer, and stores the mean
Mean value processing of the conversion values. value of the conversion values.
Buffer number: n = 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 Buffer number:
n = 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512
Peak value holding Stores the maximum conversion value while the Peak Value Hold Bit is ON.
Setting values in any specified unit
within a range of ±32,000 as the upper
Scaling --- and lower limits allows A/D conversion to
be executed and analog signals to be
output with these values as full scale.
Input
functions Input disconnection detection Detects the disconnection and turns ON the Disconnection Detection Flag. *10
Offset/gain adjustment Supported ---
A/D conversion is performed and the
converted value is refreshed when the
ANALOG INPUT DIRECT CONVER-
SION instruction (AIDC) is executed.
This instruction is supported by the
Direct conversion ---
CJ2H-CPU@@(-EIP) CPU Units with
unit version 1.1 or later.
CJ1 and CP1H CPU Units and NSJ
Controllers do not support direct con-
version.
*1 Do not apply a voltage higher than 600 V to the terminal block when performing withstand voltage test on this Unit. Otherwise, internal elements
may deteriorate.
*2 Input signal ranges can be set for each input.
*3 Voltage input or current input are chosen by using the voltage/current switch at the back of the terminal block.
*4 To use a current input, connect the positive current input terminal and positive voltage input terminal with the enclosed short bar.
*5 The Analog Input Unit must be operated according to the input specifications provided here. Operating the Unit outside these specifications
will cause the Unit to malfunction.
*6 The resolution can be set to 8,000 and the conversion period to 250 μs in the DM Area (m+18). There is only one setting for both of these, i.e.,
they are both enabled or disabled together.
*7 The accuracy is given for full scale. For example, an accuracy of ±0.2% means a maximum error of ±8 (BCD) at a resolution of 4,000.
For the CJ1W-AD041-V1/ AD081-V1, the default setting is adjusted for voltage input. To use current input, perform the offset and gain
adjustments as required.
*8 For the CJ1W-AD041-V1/ AD081-V1, 23±2°C.
*9 The A/D conversion period is the time required from when the Analog Input Unit receives the analog signal until it stores the converted value
in internal memory. It takes at least one cycle for the converted data to be stored in the CPU Unit. (The direct conversion function of the CJ1W-
AD042 is can be used to input data immediately to the CPU Unit.)
*10 Line disconnection detection is supported only when the range is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA. If there is no input signal when the 1 to 5 V or
4 to 20 mA range is set, the Line Disconnection Flag will turn ON.
4
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Analog Output Units CJ1W-DA021/DA041/DA08V/DA08C/DA042V

Specifications
Item CJ1W-DA021 CJ1W-DA041 CJ1W-DA08V CJ1W-DA08C CJ1W-DA042V
Between I/O and PLC signals:
Isolation *1 Between I/O and PLC signals: Photocoupler (No isolation between I/O signals.) Digital isolator (No isolation
between I/O signals.)
Power consumption 5 VDC, 120 mA max. 5 VDC, 140 mA max. 5 VDC, 400 mA max.
+10%
24 VDC −15% (inrush current: 20 A max., pulse width: 1 ms min.) ---
External power supply *2
140 mA max. 200 mA max. 140 mA max. 170 mA max. ---
Weight 150 g max.
General specifications Conforms to general specifications for SYSMAC CJ-series Series.
Number of analog outputs 2 4 8 8 4
1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V 0 to 5 V
Output signal range *3 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
−10 to 10 V
−10 to 10 V −10 to 10 V
0.5 Ω max. 0.5 Ω max.
Output impedance 0.5 Ω max. (for voltage output) ---
(for voltage output) (for voltage output)
Max. output current (for 1 2.4 mA 2 mA
12 mA (for voltage output) ---
point) (for voltage output) (for voltage output)
Maximum permissible
600 Ω (current output) --- 350 Ω ---
load resistance
Output
specifica- 1 to 5 V 10,000
tions Resolution 4,000 4,000/8,000 *8 0 to 10 V 20,000
-10 to 10 V 40,000
Set data 16-bit binary data
Voltage output: ±0.3% of F.S.
25°C ±0.3% of F.S. ±0.3% of F.S. ±0.3% of F.S.
Accuracy Current output: ±0.5% of F.S.
*4 Voltage output: ±0.5% of F.S.
0°C to 55°C ±0.5% of F.S. ±0.6% of F.S. ±0.5% of F.S.
Current output: ±0.8% of F.S.
20 μs/1 point,
25 μs/2 points,
D/A conversion period *5 1.0 ms per point 1.0 ms or 250 μs per point *8
30 μs/3 points,
35 μs/4 points
Outputs the specified output status (CLR, HOLD, or MAX) under any of the following circumstances.
• When the Conversion Enable Bit is OFF. *6
Output hold function • In adjustment mode, when a value other than the output number is output during adjustment. *7
• When output setting value error occurs or PLC operation stops.
• When the Load is OFF.
Supported only for a conversion period of Setting values in any specified
1 ms and resolution of 4,000. unit within a range of ±32,000
Setting values in any specified unit within a as the upper and lower limits
Scaling --- range of ±32,000 as the upper and lower allows D/A conversion to be
limits allows D/A conversion to be execut- executed and analog signals to
ed and analog signals to be output with be output with these values as
Output these values as full scale. full scale.
functions Offset/gain adjustment Supported ---
D/A conversion is performed and
the output value is refreshed
when the ANALOG OUTPUT DI-
RECT CONVERSION instruction
(AODC) is executed. This instruc-
Direct conversion --- tion is supported by the CJ2H-
CPU@@(-EIP) CPU Units with
unit version 1.1 or later.
CJ1 and CP1H CPU Units and
NSJ Controllers do not support
direct conversion.
*1 Do not apply a voltage higher than 600 V to the terminal block when performing withstand voltage test on this Unit.
*2 The maximum number of Analog Output Units that can be mounted to one Rack varies depending on the current consumption of the other
Units mounted to the Rack.
Select a 24 VDC power supply based on the surge current. The following OMRON external power supplies are recommended.
Manufacturer Model number Specifications
S8VS-06024 100 to 240 VAC, 60 W
S8VS-12024 100 to 240 VAC, 120 W
OMRON
S8VM-05024 100 to 240 VAC, 50 W
S8VM-10024 100 to 240 VAC, 100 W
*3 Output signal ranges can be set for each output.
*4 The accuracy is given for full scale. For example, an accuracy of ±0.3% means a maximum error of ±60 mV for a −10 to 10 V range. For the
5
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
CJ1W-DA021/041, the accuracy is at the factory setting for a current output. When using a voltage output, adjust the offset gain as required.
*5 The D/A conversion period is the time required for the Analog Output Unit to convert and output the data that was received from the CPU Unit.
It takes at least one cycle for the data stored in the CPU Unit to be read by the Analog Output Unit. (The direct conversion function of the CJ1W-
DA042V can be used to output data immediately from the CPU Unit.)
*6 When the operation mode for the CPU Unit is changed from RUN mode or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode, or when the power is turned
ON, the Output Conversion Enable Bit will turn OFF. The output status specified according to the output hold function will be output.
*7 The CJ1W-DA042V does not have an Adjustment Mode.
*8 The CJ1W-DA08V/08C can be set to a conversion cycle of 250 μs and a resolution of 8,000 using the setting in D (m+18).
Analog I/O Unit CJ1W-MAD42

Specifications
Item CJ1W-MAD42
Between I/O and PLC signals: Photocoupler
Isolation
(No isolation between I/O signals.)
Current consumption 580 mA max. at 5 V DC
Weight 150 g max.
General specifications Conforms to general specifications for SYSMAC CJ-series Series.
Input Specifications and Functions

Item Voltage input Current input
Number of analog inputs 4
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
Input signal range *1 4 to 20 mA *2
0 to 10 V
−10 to 10 V
Maximum rated input (for 1
±15 V ±30 mA
point) *3
Input impedance 1 MΩ min. 250 Ω (rated value)
Resolution 4,000/8,000 *7
Converted output data 16-bit binary data
25°C ±0.2% of F.S.
Accuracy *4
0°C to 55°C ±0.4% of F.S.
A/D conversion period *5 1.0 ms/500 μs per point *7
Stores the last "n" data conversions in the buffer, and stores the mean value of the conversion values.
Mean value processing
Buffer number: n = 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64
Peak value holding Stores the maximum conversion value while the Peak Value Hold Bit is ON.
Enabled only for conversion period of 1 ms and resolution of 4,000. Setting any values within a range of
Scaling ±32,000 as the upper and lower limits allows the A/D conversion result to be output with these values as full
scale.
Input disconnection detection Detects the disconnection and turns ON the Disconnection Detection Flag.
Offset/gain adjustment Supported
6
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Output Specifications
Item Voltage output Current output
Number of analog outputs 2
1 to 5 V
0 to 5 V
Output signal range *1 4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
−10 to 10 V
Output impedance 0.5 Ω max. −
Maximum external output
2.4 mA −
current (for 1 point)
Maximum allowed load
− 600 Ω
resistance
Resolution 4,000/8,000 *7
Set data 16-bit binary data
25°C ±0.3% of F.S. ±0.3% of F.S.
Accuracy *4
0°C to 55°C ±0.5% of F.S. ±0.6% of F.S.
D/A conversion period *5 1.0 ms/500 μs per point
Outputs the specified output status (CLR, HOLD, or MAX) under any of the following circumstances.
• When the Conversion Enable Bit is OFF. *6
Output hold function • In adjustment mode, when a value other than the output number is output during adjustment.
• When output setting value error occurs or PLC operation stops.
• When the Load is OFF.
Enabled only for conversion period or 1 ms and resolution of 4,000. Setting any values within a range of
Scaling ±32,000 as the upper and lower limits allows D/A conversion to be executed and analog signals to be output
with these values as full scale.
Stores the results of positive and negative gradient analog inputs calculated for ratio and bias as analog output
values.
Positive gradient: Analog output = A × Analog input + B
Ratio conversion function *5
(A: 0 to 99.99, B: 8000 to 7FFF hex)
Negative gradient:Analog output = F − A × Analog input + B
(A: 0 to 99.99, B: 8000 to 7FFF hex, F: Output range maximum value)
Offset/gain adjustment Supported
*1 Input and output signal ranges can be set for each input and output.
*2 Voltage input or current input are chosen by using the voltage/current switch at the back of the terminal block.
*3 The Analog I/O Unit must be operated according to the input specifications provided here. Operating the Unit outside these specifications will
cause the Unit to malfunction.
*4 The accuracy is given for full scale. For example, for an input, an accuracy of ±0.2% means a maximum error of ±8 (BCD) at a resolution of
4,000. For an output, an accuracy of ±0.3% means a maximum error of ±60 mV for a −10 to 10 V range.
*5 The A/D conversion period is the time required from when the Analog Input Unit receives the analog signal until it stores the converted value
in internal memory. It takes at least one cycle for the converted data to be stored in the CPU Unit.
The D/A conversion period is the time required for the Analog Output Unit to convert and output the data that was received from the CPU Unit.
It takes at least one cycle for the data stored in the CPU Unit to be read by the Analog Output Unit.
*6 When the operation mode for the CPU Unit is changed from RUN mode or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode, or when the power is turned
ON, the Output Conversion Enable Bit will turn OFF. The output status specified according to the output hold function will be output.
*7 By means of the D (m+18) setting, the resolution can be changed to 8,000, and the conversion period can be changed to 500 μs.
7
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
External Interface
Analog Input Units CJ1W-AD041-V1/AD081-V1/AD042
Components
Front
With Terminal Block With Terminal Block Removed
Indicators *1
AD081-V1 AD081-V1
RUN RUN Terminal block
ERC ERC
ERH ERH
ADJ B1 A1 ADJ B1 A1
Unit number
MACH 78 MACH 78
setting switch
456
456
901
901
No. No.
2
x10 1 x10 1 Voltage/current
23 23
1
switch *2
ON
78 78
456
456
901
901
x10 0 x10 0
23 23
2
1
ON
2
1
ON
O
O
N
N
1 2
1 2
2
MODE MODE
1
ON
Terminal block
DIN Track
mounting pin
Terminal block lock lever
Operating mode switch *2 (pull down to release terminal block)
Side Slider
Expansion connector
*1 The ADJ LED is not provided with the CJ1W-AD042.

*2 These switches are not mounted for the CJ1W-AD042.
Slider
Indicators
The indicators show the operating status of the Unit. The following table shows the meanings of the indicators.
LED Meaning Indicator Operating status
Lit Operating in normal mode.
RUN (green) Operating
Not lit Unit has stopped exchanging data with the CPU Unit.
Alarm has occurred (such as disconnection detection) or initial
Lit
ERC (red) Error detected by Unit settings are incorrect.
Not lit Operating normally.
Lit Error has occurred during data exchange with the CPU Unit.
ERH (red) Error in the CPU Unit
Flashing Operating in offset/gain adjustment mode.
ADJ (yellow) * Adjusting
Not lit Other than the above.
* The ADJ LED is not provided with the CJ1W-AD042.
8
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Input Circuits
The following diagrams show the internal circuit of the analog input section.
CJ1W-AD041-V1/AD081-V1 CJ1W-AD042
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
Current
Input (+) Input circuit
250 Ω Input (+)
1 MΩ and 250 Ω
conversion 2.2 kΩ
15 kΩ 15 kΩ Voltage
circuit Input circuit
Input (–) Input (+)
Voltage/ 510 kΩ and
current conversion
input switch 2.2 kΩ
AG Input (–) circuit
(analog 0 V)
1 MΩ
510 kΩ
AG (common to all inputs)
AG
(analog 0 V)
Terminal Arrangement
The signal names corresponding to the connecting terminals are as shown in the following diagram.
CJ1W-AD041-V1 CJ1W-AD081-V1
Input 2 (+) B1 Input 2 (+) B1

A1 Input 1 (+) A1 Input 1 (+)
Input 2 (−) B2 Input 2 (−) B2
A2 Input 1 (−) A2 Input 1 (−)
Input 4 (+) B3 Input 4 (+) B3
A3 Input 3 (+) A3 Input 3 (+)
Input 4 (−) B4 Input 4 (−) B4
A4 Input 3 (−) A4 Input 3 (−)
AG B5 AG B5
A5 AG A5 AG
N.C. B6 Input 6 (+) B6
A6 N.C. A6 Input 5 (+)
N.C. B7 Input 6 (−) B7
A7 N.C. A7 Input 5 (−)
N.C. B8 Input 8 (+) B8
A8 N.C. A8 Input 7 (+)
N.C. B9 Input 8 (−) B9
A9 N.C. A9 Input 7 (−)
CJ1W-AD042
Current Input 2 (+) B1

A1 Current Input 1 (+)
Voltage Input 2 (+) B2
A2 Voltage Input 1 (+)
Input 2 (−) B3
A3 Input 1 (−)
AG B4
A4 AG
Current Input 4 (+) B5
A5 Current Input 3 (+)
Voltage Input 4 (+) B6
A6 Voltage Input 3 (+)
Input 4 (−) B7
A7 Input 3 (−)
AG B8
A8 AG
N.C. B9
A9 N.C.
Note: 1. The analog input numbers that can be used are set in the Data Memory (DM).
2. The input signal ranges for each input are set in the Data Memory (DM). They can be set in units of input numbers.
3. The AG terminals are connected to the 0 V analog circuit in the Unit. Connecting shielded input lines can improve noise resistance.
4. Do not connect anything to NC terminals.
5. To use a current input with the CJ1W-AD042, connect the positive current input terminal and positive voltage input terminal with the
enclosed short bar.
6. Connect a surge suppressor to inductive loads in the system (e.g., magnetic contactors, relays, and solenoids).
9
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Analog Output Units CJ1W-DA021/041/08V/08C/DA042V

Components
Front Side
With Terminal Block Slider
Indicators *1
DA041
RUN
ERC
ERH
ADJ B1 A1
MACH 78
Unit number
456
901
No.
switches x10 1
23
78
456
901
x10 0
23
Expansion
connector
O
N
1 2
MODE
Terminal block

(pull down to release terminal block) Slider
Operating mode switch

*2
DIN Track mounting pin
*1 The ADJ LED is not provided with the CJ1W-DA042V.

*2 This switch is not mounted for the CJ1W-DA08V, CJ1W-DA08C and CJ1W-DA042V.
Indicators

Lit
ADJ (yellow) * Adjusting
* The ADJ LED is not provided with the CJ1W-DA042V.
10
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Output Circuits
The following diagrams show the internal circuit of the analog output section.
CJ1W-DA021/DA041/DA08V/DA08C
Voltage Output Circuits Current Output Circuits
Voltage output section Current output section
Output AMP Voltage

switch and Current
output (+) AMP
conversion output (+)
Output
circuit
Voltage switch and
conversion AMP
output (–) Current
circuit
output (−)
AG (common to all outputs)
CJ1W-DA042V
Voltage Output Circuits
Output AMP
Voltage
switch and output (+)
conversion
circuit
Voltage
output (–)
AG (common to all outputs)
CJ1W-DA021 CJ1W-DA041
Voltage output 2 (+) B1 Voltage output 2 (+) B1

A1 Voltage output 1 (+) A1 Voltage output 1 (+)
Output 2 (−) B2 Output 2 (−) B2
A2 Output 1 (−) A2 Output 1 (−)
Current output 2 (+) B3 Current output 2 (+) B3
A3 Current output 1 (+) A3 Current output 1 (+)
N.C. B4 Voltage output 4 (+) B4
A4 N.C. A4 Voltage output 3 (+)
N.C. B5 Output 4 (−) B5
A5 N.C. A5 Output 3 (−)
N.C. B6 Current output 4 (+) B6
A6 N.C. A6 Current output 3 (+)
N.C. B7 N.C. B7
A7 N.C. A7 N.C.
N.C. B8 N.C. B8
A8 N.C. A8 N.C.
0V B9 0V B9
A9 24 V A9 24 V
CJ1W-DA08V (Voltage Output)

and CJ1W-DA08C (Current Output) CJ1W-DA042V
Output 2 (+) B1 Output 2 (+) B1

A1 Output 1 (+) A1 Output 1 (+)
Output 2 (−) B2 Output 2 (−) B2
A2 Output 1 (−) A2 Output 1 (−)
Output 4 (+) B3 N.C. B3
A3 Output 3 (+) A3 N.C.
Output 4 (−) B4 Output 4 (+) B4
A4 Output 3 (−) A4 Output 3 (+)
Output 6 (+) B5 Output 4 (−) B5
A5 Output 5 (+) A5 Output 3 (−)
Output 6 (−) B6 N.C. B6
A6 Output 5 (−) A6 N.C.
Output 8 (+) B7 N.C. B7
A7 Output 7 (+) A7 N.C.
Output 8 (−) B8 N.C. B8
A8 Output 7 (−) A8 N.C.
0V B9 N.C. B9
A9 24 V A9 N.C.
Note: 1. The analog output numbers that can be used are set in the Data Memory (DM).
2. The output signal ranges for each output are set in the Data Memory (DM). They can be set in units of output numbers.
3. The N.C. terminals are not connected to internal circuit.
4. Use a separate power supply from the one used for Basic I/O Units. Faulty Unit operation may be caused by noise if power is supplied
from the same source. (This does not apply to CJ1W-DA042V.)
5. Connect a surge suppressor to inductive loads in the system (e.g., magnetic contactors, relays, and solenoids).
11
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Analog I/O Unit CJ1W-MAD42

Components
Front
With Terminal Block With Terminal Block Removed
Indicators
MAD42 MAD42
RUN RUN Terminal block
ERC ERC
ERH ERH
ADJ B1 A1 ADJ B1 A1
MACH 78 MACH 78
456
456
901
901
User No. No.
x10 1 x10 1
23 23
number
78 78
setting
456
456
901
901
x10 0 x10 0
23 23
switch
2
Voltage/current
1
ON
switch
2
1
ON
Terminal block
DIN Track
mounting pin
(pull down to release terminal bloc
Side Slider
Expansion connector
Slider
Indicators

Lit
ADJ (yellow) Adjusting
12
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
I/O Circuit
The following diagrams show the internal circuit of the analog I/O section.
Input Circuits
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
Input (+) Input circuit
250 Ω
and
1 MΩ conversion
15 kΩ 15 kΩ
Input (–) circuit
Voltage/
current
AG input switch
(analog 0 V)
1 MΩ
Voltage Output Circuits Current Output Circuits
Output AMP Voltage

switch and
output (+)
conversion
circuit
Voltage
Output AMP
output (–)
switch and Current
conversion AMP output (+)
AG (common to all outputs) circuit
Current
output (–)
CJ1W-MAD42
Voltage output 2 (+) B1

A1 Voltage output 1 (+)
Output 2 (–) B2
A2 Output 1 (–)
Current output 2 (+) B3
A3 Current output 1 (+)
N.C. B4
A4 N.C.
Input 2 (+) B5
A5 Input 1 (+)
Input 2 (–) B6
A6 Input 1 (–)
AG B7
A7 AG
Input 4 (+) B8
A8 Input 3 (+)
Input 4 (–) B9
A9 Input 3 (–)
Note: 1. The analog I/O numbers that can be used are set in the Data Memory (DM).
2. The I/O signal ranges for each input and output are set in the Data Memory (DM). They can be set in units of I/O numbers.
3. The AG terminal (A7, B7) is connected to the 0 V analog circuit in the Unit. Connecting shielded input lines can improve noise resistance.
4. The N.C. terminals (A4, B4) are not connected to internal circuit.
Wiring Vasic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks

Crimp terminals
Use crimp terminals (M3) having the dimensions shown below.
6.2 mm max. 6.2 mm max.
13
CJ1W-AD/DA/MAD
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
CJ1W-AD041-V1/081-V1/AD042
CJ1W-DA021/041/08V/08C/DA042V
CJ1W-MAD42
Terminal Block
89
31 Dimensions
2.7 65
AD081-V1
17.5
RUN
ERC
ERH
8.2
ADJ B1 A1
6.4
MACH 78
456
901
No.
x10 1
23 7.62
78
456
901
x10 0
23
90 74.77
O
N
1 2
MODE
2.7
Note: The appearance varies with the model.
About Manuals
Cat. No Model Manual name Contents
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CS1W-AD041-V1/081-V1/161
CS1W-DA041/08V/08C CS/CJ-series
Provides information on using the CS/CJ-series Analog Input,
W345 CS1W-MAD44 Analog I/O Units
Analog Output, and Analog I/O Units.
CJ1W-AD041-V1/081-V1 Operation Manual
CJ1W-DA021/041/08V/08C
CJ1W-MAD42
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H SYSMAC CJ Series Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation,
W393 CJ1G-CPU@@P Programmable Controllers maintenance, and other
CJ1G-CPU@@ Operation Manual basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
CJ1M-CPU@@
Describes the following for CJ2 CPU Units:
• Overview and features
CJ-series • Basic system configuration
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
W472 CJ2 CPU Unit • Part nomenclature and functions
CJ2H-CPU6@
Hardware User's Manual • Mounting and setting procedure
• Remedies for errors
Also refer to the Software User's Manual (W473).
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@-V1
CS/CJ/NSJ-series
W474 CJ1G/H-CPU@@H Describes each programming instruction in detail.
Instructions Reference Manual
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1M-CPU@@
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
14
Read and Understand This Catalog
Please read and understand this catalog before purchasing the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or
comments.
SYSMAC CJ-series Input Units
CJ1W-ID/IA CSM_CJ1W-INPUT_DS_E_4_1
A Wide Range of Basic Input

Units for High Speed Input and
Different Applications
• Receive ON/OFF signals from external devices
into the PLC System to update I/O memory in the
CPU Unit.
• New high-speed input models CJ1W-ID212 and
CJ1W-ID233 are now available. These units can
help to increase system throughput. CJ1W-ID212 CJ1W-ID233
Features
• High-speed input models are available, meeting versatile applications.
ON Response Time: 15μs, OFF Response Time: 90μs
• Use 24-VDC, 100-VAC, and 200-VAC models to connect to devices with different types of outputs.
• The 24-VDC models can be connected to devices with either NPN or PNP outputs. There is no need to select the polarity. (See note 1.)
• A digital filter in the Unit can be set from 0 to 32 ms to reduce the influence of external noise.
• Either a Fujitsu or MIL connector interface can be used. (See note 2.)
• Several models of Terminal Block Conversion Units are available, making it easy to connect to external devices.
Note: 1. The same polarity is used for the same common.
2. For models with 32 or 64 inputs.
1
CJ1W-ID/IA
Input Units
Current
Specifications consumption
Product (A)
Unit type Model Standards
name No. of
Input voltage and External
I/O points Commons words 5V 24 V
current connection
allocated
Independent Removable
8 inputs 12 to 24 VDC, 10 mA 1 word 0.09 − CJ1W-ID201
contacts terminal block UC1, N, L,
DC Input CE
16 points, Removable
Units 16 inputs 24 VDC, 7 mA 1 word 0.08 − CJ1W-ID211
1 common terminal block
16 inputs 16 points, Removable
24 VDC, 7 mA 1 word 0.13 − N, L, CE
(High speed) 1 common terminal block CJ1W-ID212
16 points,
32 inputs 24 VDC, 4.1 mA Fujitsu connector 2 words 0.09 − CJ1W-ID231
1 common
UC1, N, L,
CE
16 points,
32 inputs 24 VDC, 4.1 mA MIL connector 2 words 0.09 − CJ1W-ID232
1 common
32 inputs 16 points,
CJ1 Basic 24 VDC, 4.1 mA MIL connector 2 words 0.20 − N, L, CE
I/O Units (High speed) 1 common CJ1W-ID233
16 points,
64 inputs 24 VDC, 4.1 mA Fujitsu connector 4 words 0.09 − CJ1W-ID261
1 common
16 points,
64 inputs 24 VDC, 4.1 mA MIL connector 4 words 0.09 − CJ1W-ID262
1 common
AC Input UC1, N, L,
Units 200 to 24 VAC, 10 mA 8 points, Removable CE
8 inputs 1 words 0.08 − CJ1W-IA201
(200 V, 50 Hz) 1 common Terminal Block
100 to 120 VAC, 7 mA 16 points, Removable

16 inputs 1 words 0.09 − CJ1W-IA111
(100 V, 50 Hz) 1 common Terminal Block
Accessories
Connectors are not included for models with connectors. Either use one of the applicable connector listed below or use an applicable Connector-
Terminal Block Conversion Unit or I/O Relay Terminal. For details on wiring methods, refer to External Interface.
2
CJ1W-ID/IA
Applicable Connectors
Fujitsu Connectors for 32-input, 32-output, 64-input, 64-output, 32-input/32-output, and 16-input/16-output Units
Name Connection Remarks Applicable Units Model Standards
FCN-361J040-AU Connector
Soldered FCN-360C040-J2 Connector C500-CE404
Fujitsu Connectors:
Cover
CJ1W-ID231(32 inputs): 1 per Unit
40-pin FCN-363J040 Housing CJ1W-ID261 (64 inputs): 2 per Unit
Connectors FCN-363J-AU Contactor CJ1W-OD231 (32 outputs):1 per Unit
Crimped C500-CE405
FCN-360C040-J2 Connector CJ1W-OD261 (64 outputs): 2 per Unit
Cover CJ1W-MD261 (32 inputs, 32 outputs): 2 per Unit
Pressure welded FCN-367J040-AU/F C500-CE403
−
Soldered FCN-360C024-J2 Connector C500-CE241
Cover
24-pin FCN-363J024 Housing Fujitsu Connectors:
Connectors FCN-363J-AU Contactor CJ1W-MD231 (16 inputs, 16 outputs): 2 per Unit
Crimped C500-CE242
FCN-360C024-J2 Connector
Cover
MIL Connectors for 32-input, 32-output, 64-input, 64-output, 32-input/32-output, and 16-input/16-output Units
MIL Connectors:
CJ1W-ID232/233 (32 inputs): 1 per Unit
40-pin CJ1W-OD232/233/234 (32 outputs):1 per Unit
Pressure welded FRC5-AO40-3TOS XG4M-4030-T
Connectors CJ1W-ID262 (64 inputs): 2 per Unit
CJ1W-OD262/263 (64 outputs): 2 per Unit −
CJ1W-MD263/563 (32 inputs, 32 outputs): 2 per Unit
20-pin MIL Connectors:
Connectors CJ1W-MD232/233 (16 inputs, 16 outputs): 2 per Unit
Applicable Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units

Size Mounting
Number Terminal Common Bleeder
Type Series I/O Depth Height Width DIN Indicators Model Standards
of poles type Screws terminals resistance
(mm) (mm) (mm) Track
20 79 XW2D-20G6
I/O No XW2D-40G6
Slim XW2D M3 39 40 Yes Yes No No XW2D-40C6
40 149
Inputs XW2D-40G6-RF
Built-in
only XW2D-40G6-RM
M3.5 112.5 XW2B-20G5
20 M3
(European 67.5 XW2B-20G4
type)
Through XW2B I/O 45 45.3 Yes Yes No No No
M3.5 202.5 XW2B-40G5
40 M3
(European 135 XW2B-40G4
type) −
With I/O 20 M3 39 40 149 No XW2C-20G6-IO16
common XW2C Inputs Yes Yes Yes No
terminals 20 M3.5 50 38 160 Yes XW2C-20G5-IN16
only
With
Inputs
common
XW2E only, 20 M3.5 50 53 149 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2E-20G5-IN16
terminals,
3 tiers
3-tier
Inputs
Screwless 20 Clamp 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2F-20G7-IN16
only
clamp XW2F
terminals Outputs
20 Clamp 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2F-20G7-OUT16
only
Inputs e-CON
e-CON XW2N 20 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2N-20G8-IN16
only connector
Note: For the combination of Input Units with Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units, refer to 2. Connecting Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Units.
3
CJ1W-ID/IA
Applicable I/O Relay Terminals

Size (horizontal
Specifications Mounting
mounting)
Terminal
Type Series Number Rated ON block for Model Standards
Operation Horizontal Vertical Height DIN
Classification Polarity of current at power Screws
indicators (mm) (mm) (mm) Track
points contacts supply
wiring
Relay
5A or 3A G70D-VSOC16
Vertical outputs 16
U, C,
type MOSFET NPN (SPST- Yes Expandable 135 46 81 Yes Yes
CE
G70D-V relay NO × 16) 0.3A G70D-VFOM16
outputs
8 (SPST-
5A 68 93 44 G70D-SOC08 −
NO × 8)
NPN 16
Space-
G70D Outputs Relay (SPST- 3A G70D-SOC16
saving
outputs NO × 16)
Flat −
type 16 Yes − Yes Yes
G70D PNP (SPST- 3A G70D-SOC16-1
NO × 16) 156 51 39
MOSFET NPN 16 G70D-FOM16

relay (SPST- 0.3A −
outputs PNP NO × 16) G70D-FOM16-1
High-
capacity, Relay 8 (SPST-
G70R Outputs NPN 10A Yes − 136 93 55 Yes Yes G70R-SOC08 −
space- outputs NO × 8)
saving
AC
16 G7TC-IA16
inputs
Inputs NPN (SPST- 1A 182
DC NO × 16) G7TC-ID16
inputs
8 (SPST- U, C
102 G7TC-OC08
NO × 8)
Standard G7TC Yes − 85 68 Yes −
NPN 16
Relay (SPST- G7TC-OC16
Outputs 5A
outputs NO × 16)
182
16
PNP (SPST- G7TC-OC16-1 −
NO × 16)
G70A-ZOC16-3
(Socket only) +
NPN 16 Relay/SSR/
10 A MOSFET Relay/
(SPDT ×
High- (Terminal Timer
G70A Relay 16 U, C,
capacity Outputs block No − 234 75 64 Yes −
(Socket only) outputs possible G70A-ZOC16-4 CE
socket allowable
with G2R (Socket only) +
current)
PNP Relays) Relay/SSR/
MOSFET Relay/
Timer
Note: For the combination of Input Units with I/O Relay Terminal and Connecting Cables, refer to 3. Connecting I/O Relay Terminals.
4
CJ1W-ID/IA
Mountable Racks
Model
CJ1W-ID201
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-ID212
CJ1W-ID231
CJ1W-ID232 10 Units 10 Units
10 Units (per Expansion Not supported Not supported (per Expansion
CJ1W-ID233 Backplane) Backplane)
CJ1W-ID261
CJ1W-ID262
CJ1W-IA201
CJ1W-IA111
5
CJ1W-ID/IA
Specifications
CJ1W-ID201 DC Input Unit (12 to 24-VDC, 8 Points)
Name 8-point DC Input Unit with Terminal Block
Model CJ1W-ID201
Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Rated Input Voltage
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Range
Input Impedance 2.4 kΩ
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 8.8 VDC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF
3 VDC max./1 mA max.
Current
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) *1
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms using PLC Setup) *1
Number of Circuits 8 independent circuits
Number of
Simultaneously ON 100% simultaneously ON
Points
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (100 VDC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 VAC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Internal Current
80 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 110 g max.
Signal name
2.4 kΩ
IN0
Internal circuits
1000 pF
560 Ω
COM0
Input indicator
Circuit Configuration to
2.4 kΩ
IN7
Internal circuits
1000 pF
560 Ω
COM7
Input indicator
*2
Signal Connec- Signal
name tor pin name
C0
A0 IN0
C1 B0
A1 IN1
C2 B1
A2 IN2
C3 B2
A3 IN3
C4 B3
A4 IN4
C5 B4
A5 IN5
C6 B5
A6 IN6
Terminal Connections C7 B6
A7 IN7
NC B7
A8 12 to 24 VDC
B8 NC
Polarity of the input power supply can be connected in either direction.

*1. The ON response time will be 20 μs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 μs maximum even if the response time are set to 0 ms due
to internal element delays.
*2. Terminal numbers A0 to A8 and B0 to B8 are used in this datasheet, but they are not printed on the Unit.
Note: Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in
the I/O tables.
6
CJ1W-ID/IA
CJ1W-ID211 DC Input Unit (24 VDC, 16 Points)

Model CJ1W-ID211
Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
8.0 ms max.
ON Response Time
(Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) *1
8.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
(Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms using PLC Setup) *1
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
Number of
100% simultaneously ON (at 24 VDC)
Simultaneously ON
(Refer to the following illustration.)
Points
Internal Current
80 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 110 g max.
Temperature characteristics 16 points

for simultaneously ON points at 45°C.
18
No. of simultaneously ON points

Signal
name 16
3.3 kΩ 470 Ω 12 points
14
IN0 Input voltage: 26.4 VDC at 55°C.
12
Internal circuits
to
IN15 10
Circuit Configuration 1000 pF
8
COM 6
Input indicator 4
COM
2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
Ambient temperature
*2
name tor pin name
IN0
A0
IN1
B0
IN2
A1
IN3
B1
IN4
A2
IN5
B2
IN6
A3
IN7
Terminal Connections B3
IN8
A4 24 VDC
IN9
B4
IN10
A5
IN11
B5
IN12
A6
IN13
B6
IN14
A7
IN15
B7
COM
A8
COM
B8

7
CJ1W-ID/IA

Model CJ1W-ID212
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
8.0 ms max.
ON Response Time
(Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms in the PLC Setup.) *1
8.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time
(Can be set to between 0 and 32 ms using PLC Setup) *1
Number of
100% simultaneously ON (at 24 VDC)
Simultaneously ON
(Refer to the following illustration.)
Points
Internal Current
130 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 110 g max.
Temperature characteristics 16 points

for simultaneously ON points at 45°C.
18
No. of simultaneously ON points

Signal
name 16
3.3 kΩ 470 Ω 12 points
14
IN0 Input voltage: 26.4 VDC at 55°C.
12
Internal circuits
to
IN15 10
Circuit Configuration 1000 pF
8
COM 6
Input indicator 4
COM
2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
Ambient temperature
*2
name tor pin name
IN0
A0
IN1
B0
IN2
A1
IN3
B1
IN4
A2
IN5
B2
IN6
A3
IN7
IN8
A4 24 VDC
IN9
B4
IN10
A5
IN11
B5
IN12
A6
IN13
B6
IN14
A7
IN15
B7
COM
A8
COM
B8

8
CJ1W-ID/IA

Name 32-point DC Input Unit with Fujitsu Connector
Model CJ1W-ID231
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) *
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) *
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Number of
Simultaneously ON 75% (12 points/common) simultaneously ON (at 24 VDC) (Refer to the following illustration.)
Points
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
Allocated Signal
CIO word name Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
5.6 kΩ Ambient Temperature Characteristic
IN0
32 points at 48°C
1000 pF
Number of simultaneously ON points

Wd m to 32 points at 40°C Input voltage:
560 Ω
35 24 VDC
Connector IN15
row A 30 Input voltage:
COM0 26.4 VDC
25
Internal circuits
COM0
SW 12 points/
20 common
Circuit Configuration at 55°C
15
Input indicator 10 points/
common
10 at 55°C
5.6 kΩ
IN0 5
Wd
1000 pF
to
560 Ω
m+1
Connector IN15 0
row B 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
COM1
COM1 Ambient Temperature
Allocated Signal Connec- Signal Allocated

CIO word name tor pin name CIO word
IN0 IN0
A1 B1
IN1 IN1
A2 B2
IN2 IN2
A3 B3
IN3 IN3
A4 B4
Wd m IN4 IN4
Wd m+1
A5 B5
24 24
IN5 IN5
VDC A6 B6 VDC
IN6 IN6
A7 B7
IN7 IN7
A8 B8
COM0 COM1
A9 B9
IN8 IN8
A10 B10
Terminal Connections IN9
A11 B11
IN9
IN10 IN10
A12 B12
IN11 IN11
A13 B13
Wd m Wd m+1
IN12 IN12
A14 B14
IN13 IN13
A15 B15
IN14 IN14
A16 B16
IN15 IN15
A17 B17
COM0 COM1
A18 B18
NC NC
A19 B19
NC NC
A20 B20
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.

• Be sure to wire both pins A9 and A18 (COM0), and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both pins B9 and B18 (COM1), and set the same polarity for both pins.
* The ON response time will be 20 μs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 μs maximum even if the response times are set to 0 ms due
Note: Observe the following restrictions when connecting to a 2-wire sensor.
• Make sure the input power supply voltage is larger than the ON voltage (19 V) plus the residual voltage of the sensor (approx. 3 V).
• Use a sensor with a minimum load current of 3 mA min.
• Connect bleeder resistance if you connect a sensor with a minimum load current of 5 mA or higher.
9
CJ1W-ID/IA

Name 32-point DC Input Unit with MIL Connector
Model CJ1W-ID232
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
Number of
Points
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
Allocated Signal
IN0
32 points at 48°C
Input voltage:
1000 pF
Wd m to 32 points at 40°C
560 Ω
35 24 VDC
Connector IN15
COM0 26.4 VDC
Internal circuits
COM0 25 12 points/common
SW at 55°C
Circuit Configuration 20
10 points/common
15 at 55°C
Input indicator
10
5.6 kΩ
IN0 5
Wd
1000 pF
to
560 Ω
m+1 0
Connector IN15
row B 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
COM1

24 VDC
NC NC
1 2
COM1 COM1
3 4
IN15 IN7
5 6
IN14 IN6
7 8
IN13 IN5
9 10
IN12 IN4
m+1 words 11 12 m+1 words
IN11 IN3
13 14
IN10 IN2
15 16
IN9
17 18 IN1
IN8
19 20 IN0
NC NC
Terminal Connections 21 22
COM0 COM0
23 24
IN15 IN7
25 26
IN14 IN6
27 28
IN13 IN5
29 30
IN12 IN4
m words 31 32 m words
IN11 IN3
33 34
IN10 IN2
35 36
IN9 IN1
24 VDC 37 38
IN8 IN0
39 40

• Be sure to wire both pins 23 and 24 (COM0), and set the same polarity for both pins.
10
CJ1W-ID/IA

Model CJ1W-ID233
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
Number of
Points
Internal Current
200 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
Allocated Signal
IN0
32 points at 48°C
Input voltage:
1000 pF
Wd m to 32 points at 40°C
560 Ω
35 24 VDC
Connector IN15
COM0 26.4 VDC
Internal circuits
SW at 55°C
Circuit Configuration 20
10 points/common
15 at 55°C
Input indicator
10
5.6 kΩ
IN0 5
Wd
1000 pF
to
560 Ω
m+1 0
Connector IN15
row B 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
COM1

24 VDC
NC NC
1 2
COM1 COM1
3 4
IN15 IN7
5 6
IN14 IN6
7 8
IN13 IN5
9 10
IN12 IN4
m+1 words 11 12 m+1 words
IN11 IN3
13 14
IN10 IN2
15 16
IN9
17 18 IN1
IN8
19 20 IN0
NC NC
Terminal Connections 21 22
COM0 COM0
23 24
IN15 IN7
25 26
IN14 IN6
27 28
IN13 IN5
29 30
IN12 IN4
m words 31 32 m words
IN11 IN3
33 34
IN10 IN2
35 36
IN9 IN1
24 VDC 37 38
IN8 IN0
39 40

11
CJ1W-ID/IA

Name 64-point DC Input Unit with Fujitsu Connector
Model CJ1W-ID261
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
Number of
Simultaneously ON 50% (16 points/common) simultaneously ON (at 24 VDC) (Refer to the following illustrations.)
Points
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
Allocated Signal Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.

CIO word name 5.6 kΩ Ambient Temperature Characteristic
Internal circuits
IN0
1000 pF
Wd m to 64 points at
560 Ω

25°C 64 points at 35°C 64 points at 47°C
Connector IN15 70
row A COM0
COM0 60 Input voltage:
CN1 20.4 VDC
Wd IN0 SW
Connector m+1 to Indicator 50
row B IN15 Input indicator switching 12 points/common
Circuit Configuration COM1 circuit 40 Input voltage: (total: 45 points)
COM1 5.6 kΩ 24 VDC at 55°C
Internal circuits
Wd IN0 30 Input voltage: 8 points/common

1000 pF
to
560 Ω
m+2 IN15 26.4 VDC at 55°C

Connector 20
row A COM2
CN2 (total: 26 points max.)
Wd IN0
to 0 at 55°C
Connector m+3 IN15
row B 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
COM3
CN1 CN2
Allocated Signal Connec- Signal Allocated Allocated Signal Connec- Signal Allocated
CIO word name tor pin name CIO word CIO word name tor pin name CIO word
IN0 IN0
B20 A20 A1 B1
NC NC
IN1 IN1
B19 A19 A2 B2
NC NC
IN2 IN2
B18 A18 A3 B3
COM1 COM0
Wd m+2
Wd m+3
IN3 IN3
B17 A17 A4 B4
IN15 IN15
IN4 IN4
B16 A16 A5 B5
IN14 IN14 24 24
IN5 IN5
B15 A15 VDC A6 B6 VDC
Wd m+1
IN13 IN13
Wd m
IN6 IN6
B14 A14 A7 B7
IN12 IN12
IN7 IN7
B13 A13 A8 B8
IN11 IN11
B12 A12 COM2 COM3
IN10 IN10
A9 B9
IN8 IN8
B11 A11 A10 B10
IN9 IN9
IN9 IN9
Terminal Connections IN8
B10 A10
IN8 A11 B11
IN10 IN10
B9 A9 A12 B12
Wd m+3
COM1 COM0
Wd m+2
IN11 IN11
B8 A8 A13 B13
IN7 IN7
IN12 IN12
B7 A7 A14 B14
IN6 IN6
IN13 IN13
B6 A6 24 A15 B15
24 IN5
Wd m+1
IN5
VDC
Wd m
VDC B5 A5 IN14
A16 B16
IN14
IN4 IN4
IN15 IN15
B4 A4 A17 B17
IN3 IN3
B3 A3 COM2 COM3
IN2 IN2 A18 B18
B2 A2 NC NC
IN1 IN1 A19 B19
B1 A1 NC NC
IN0 IN0 A20 B20
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction. • The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both pins A9 and A18 (COM0) of CN1, and set the • Be sure to wire both pins A9 and A18 (COM2) of CN2, and set the
same polarity for both pins. same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both pins B9 and B18 (COM1) of CN1, and set the • Be sure to wire both pins B9 and B18 (COM3) of CN2, and set the
12
CJ1W-ID/IA

Model CJ1W-ID262
Rated Input Voltage
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Range
OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
Number of
Simultaneously ON 50% (8 points/common) simultaneously ON (at 24 VDC) (Refer to the following illustrations.)
Points
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
Allocated Signal Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.

CIO word name Ambient Temperature Characteristic
5.6 kΩ
Internal circuits
IN0
64 points at 25°C 64 points at 35°C 64 points at 47°C
1000 pF
to
560 Ω
Wd m 70
IN15
COM0 60 Input voltage:
COM0 20.4 VDC
CN1 IN0 SW 50
Wd m+1 to Indicator 12 points/common
IN15 switching Input voltage: (total: 45 points)
Circuit Configuration Input indicator 40 24 VDC
COM1 circuit at 55°C
COM1 5.6 kΩ 30
Internal circuits
IN0 Input voltage: 8 points/common

1000 pF
Wd m+2 to 26.4 VDC at 55°C

560 Ω
IN15 20
COM2 8 points/common
COM2 10 (total: 26 points max.)
CN2 IN0 at 55°C
to 0
Wd m+3
IN15 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 (°)
COM3
CN1 CN2
Allocated Signal Connec- Signal Allocated Allocated Signal Connec- Signal Allocated
CIO word name tor pin name CIO word CIO word name tor pin name CIO word
24 VDC
IN0 IN8 NC NC
40 39 1 2
IN1 IN9
COM3 COM3
38 37 3 4
24 VDC IN15 IN7
I/O word m
IN2 IN10 5 6
I/O word m
36 35
IN3 IN11 IN14 IN6
34 33 7 8
I/O word m+3
I/O word m+3
IN4 IN12 IN13 IN5

32 31 9 10
IN5 IN12 IN4
IN13
30 29 11 12
IN6 IN11 IN3
IN14 13 14
28 27
IN10 IN2
IN7 IN15
26 25 15 16
IN9 IN1
COM0 COM0
24 23 17 18
IN8 IN0
NC NC
22 21 19 20
IN0 IN8 NC NC
Terminal Connections 20 19 21 22
IN1 IN9
COM2 COM2
18 17 23 24
I/O word m+1
I/O word m+1
IN2 IN10 IN15 IN7

16 15 25 26
IN3 IN11 IN14 IN6
14 13 27 28
I/O word m+2
I/O word m+2
IN4 IN12 IN13 IN5

12 11 29 30
IN5 IN12 IN4
IN13 31 32
10 9
IN6 IN11 IN3
IN14 33 34
8 7
IN10 IN2
IN7 IN15
6 5 24 35 36
IN9 IN1
COM1
4 3
COM1 VDC 37 38
IN8 IN0
NC NC
2 1 39 40
24 VDC
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction. • The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both pins 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1, and set the • Be sure to wire both pins 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2, and set the
• Be sure to wire both pins 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1, and set the • Be sure to wire both pins 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2, and set the
13
CJ1W-ID/IA
CJ1W-IA201 AC Input Unit (200 VAC, 8 Points)

Name 8-point AC Input Unit with Terminal Block
Model CJ1W-IA201
Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Rated Input Voltage
170 to 264 VAC
Range
Input Impedance 21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
9 mA typical (at 200 VAC, 50 Hz),
Input Current
11 mA typical (at 200 VAC, 60 Hz)
ON Voltage/ON Current 120 VAC min./4 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF
40 VAC max./2 mA max.
Current
ON Response Time 18.0 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) *1
OFF Response Time 48.0 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) *1
Number of
Simultaneously ON 100% (8 points/common) simultaneously ON
Points
Internal Current
80 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 130 g max.
Accessories None
Signal
name
Input indicator
Internal circuits
820 Ω 1 MΩ
Circuit Configuration IN0
to
IN7 0.15 μF 220 Ω
COM
*2
Connector Signal
pin name
NC A0 IN0
B0
NC A1 IN1
B1
NC A2 IN2
B2
NC A3 IN3
200 to 240 VAC
NC A4 IN4
B4
NC A5 IN5
B5
NC A6 IN6
B6
NC A7 IN7
B7
NC A8 COM
B8
*1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC
Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the ON response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40
ms maximum due to internal element delays.
the I/O tables.
14
CJ1W-ID/IA
CJ1W-IA111 AC Input Unit (100 VAC, 16 points)

Name 16-point AC Input Unit with Terminal Block
Model CJ1W-IA111
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz *2
Rated Input Voltage
85 to 132 VAC
Range
Input Impedance 14.5 kΩ (50 Hz), 12 kΩ (60 Hz)
7 mA typical (at 100 VAC, 50 Hz),
Input Current
8 mA typical (at 100 VAC, 60 Hz)
ON Voltage/ON Current 70 VAC min./4 mA min
OFF Voltage/OFF
20 VAC max./2 mA max
Current
ON Response Time 18 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) *1
OFF Response Time 48 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) *1
Number of Inputs ON
100% simultaneously ON (16 points/common)
Simultaneously
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 130 g max.
Accessories None
Signal
name
Input indicator
Internal circuits
470 Ω 1 MΩ
Circuit Layout IN0
to
IN15 0.22 μF
270 Ω
COM
*3
Signal Connector Signal
name pin name
IN0 A0 IN1
IN2 B0
A1 IN3
IN4 B1
A2 IN5
IN6 B2 100 to 120 VAC
A3 IN7
Terminal Connections IN8 B3
A4 IN9
IN10 B4
A5 IN11
IN12 B5
A6 IN13
IN14 B6
A7 IN15
COM B7
A8 COM
B8
*1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC
Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the ON response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40
ms maximum due to internal element delays.
*2. Use an input voltage of 90 VAC or higher when connecting 2-wire sensors.
15
CJ1W-ID/IA
Bit Allocations for Input Unit

8-point Input Unit 16-point Input Unit
Allocated CIO word Allocated CIO word
Signal name Signal name
CIO Bit CIO Bit
00 IN0 00 IN0
01 IN1 01 IN1
Wd m
: : : :
(Input)
06 IN6 14 IN14
Wd m 07 IN7 15 IN15
(Input) 08 −
09 −
: :
14 −
15 −
32-point Input Unit 64-point Input Unit

CIO Bit CIO Bit
00 IN0 00 IN0
01 IN1 01 IN1
Wd m Wd m
: : : :
(Input) (Input)
14 IN14 14 IN14
15 IN15 15 IN15
00 IN0 00 IN0
01 IN1 01 IN1
Wd m+1 Wd m+1
: : : :
(Input) (Input)
14 IN14 14 IN14
15 IN15 15 IN15
00 IN0
01 IN1
Wd m+2
: :
(Input)
14 IN14
15 IN15
00 IN0
01 IN1
Wd m+3
: :
(Input)
14 IN14
15 IN15
16
CJ1W-ID/IA
External Interface
8-point/16-point Units (18-point Terminal Blocks)
Model number label
I/O indicators
Connector
Connect to the connector on the next Unit.
Terminal block for

I/O wiring, 18P × 1
ERR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
32-point Units (Models with 40-point Fujitsu Connector or MIL Connector)

Model number
Indicator Switch
ID231 ID232 1 2
I/O indicators
Changes the 16 I/O displayed on the I/O indicators.
I/O wiring
connector Fujitsu connector MIL connector
(40-pin × 1) Setting 1 Wd m (Row A on connector) Bottom of connector
Setting 2 Wd m+1 (Row B on connector) Top of connector
Unit with Fujitsu-compatible Unit with MIL Connector

Connector
Connector
ERR Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
0 1 2 3
Word m 4 5 6 7
or 8 9 10 11
m+1 12 13 14 15
17
CJ1W-ID/IA
64-point Units (Models with Two 40-point Fujitsu Connectors or MIL Connector)
Indicator Switch
Model number
1 2

ID261
ID261
I/O indicators
Setting 1 Wd m and m+1: CN1
Setting 2 Wd m+2 and m+3: CN2
I/O wiring
connector
(40-pin × 2)

Connector
Connector
Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
Word m or 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I
m+2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Word m+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
II
or m+3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Wiring Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks

Electric Wires
The following wire gauges are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector Wire Size
18-terminal AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
Crimp terminals
18
CJ1W-ID/IA
I/O Unit Wiring Methods

An I/O Unit can be connected to an external device by any of the following three methods.
1. User-provided Cable
An I/O Unit can be directly connected to an external device by using a connector.
A User-provided cable
B External device
B C Connector
C
2. Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit

Use a Connecting Cable to connect to a Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit.
Converting the I/O Unit connector to a screw terminal block makes it easy to connect external devices.
Connecting Cable for Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit

A
XW2Z
B Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
B
XW2@
C Conversion to a screw terminal block
3. I/O Relay Terminal

Use a Connecting Cable to connect to an I/O Relay Terminal.
The I/O specifications can be converted to relay outputs and AC inputs by connecting the I/O Relay Terminal to an I/O Unit.
A G79 I/O Relay Terminal Connecting Cable

B
G7@@ I/O Relay Terminals
B
Or, conversion to relay outputs and AC inputs.
19
CJ1W-ID/IA
1. Using User-made Cables with Connector
Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
32- and 64-point Basic I/O Units with Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
Applicable Units
Model Specifications Pins
CJ1W-ID231 Input Unit, 24 VDC, 32 inputs
40
Applicable Cable-side Connectors
Connection Pins OMRON set Fujitsu parts

Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Solder-type 40 C500-CE404
Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
Socket: FCN-363J040
Crimped 40 C500-CE405 Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-welded 40 C500-CE403 FCN-367J040-AU/F
32- and 64-point Basic I/O Units with MIL Connectors

Applicable Units

CJ1W-ID232
Input Unit, 24 VDC, 32 inputs
CJ1W-ID233 40
Connection Pins OMRON set DDK parts

Pressure-welded 40 XG4M-4030-T FRC5-A040-3T0S
Wire Size
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 or AWG 28 (0.2 mm2 to 0.08 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.
Crimping Tools
The following models are recommended for crimping tools and pressure-welding tools for Fujitsu connectors.
Tools for Crimped Connectors (Fujitsu Component)
Product Name Model
Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H
Contact Withdrawal Tool FCN-360T-T001/H
Tools for Pressure-welded Connectors (Fujitsu Component)

Product Name Model
Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H
The following models are recommended for crimping tools for MIL connectors.
Tools for Crimped Connectors (OMRON)
Product Name Model
Crimping Tool XY2B-0002
Attachment XY2B-1007
20
CJ1W-ID/IA
2. Connecting Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
Connection Patterns for Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
Number of
Pattern Configuration Branching
connectors
Connecting Cable
Connector-Terminal
A Block Conversion Unit None
40 or 60 terminals
1
Connecting Cable with two branches
Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit
B 2 branches
20 terminals 20 terminals
Connecting Cable
Connector-Terminal
D Block Conversion Unit None
40 or 60 terminals 40 or 60 terminals
2
Connector-Terminal
F 2 branches
20 terminals 20 terminals 20 terminals 20 terminals
Combination of I/O Units with Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units

Number of Connection Number of Connecting Connector-Terminal Block Common
Unit I/O capacity Polarity
connectors pattern branches Cable Conversion Unit terminal
A None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6 None
A None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6-RF *2 None
A None XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 None
A None XW2Z-@@@BU XW2D-40C6 None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
1 Fujitsu
CJ1W-ID231 32 inputs NPN/PNP B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
connector
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2E-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2F-20G7-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2N-20G8-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
21
CJ1W-ID/IA
Number of Connection Number of Connecting Connector-Terminal Block Common

Unit I/O capacity Polarity
connectors pattern branches Cable Conversion Unit terminal
A None XW2Z-@@@K XW2D-40G6 None
A None XW2Z-@@@K XW2D-40G6-RM *2 None
A None XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
1 MIL B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
CJ1W-ID232 32 inputs NPN/PNP
connector B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2E-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2N-20G8-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
A None XW2Z-@@@K XW2D-40G6-RM *2 None
1 MIL B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
connector B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2E-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2N-20G8-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
D None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6 None
D None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6-RF *2 None
D None XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 None
D None XW2Z-@@@BU XW2D-40C6 None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
2 Fujitsu
CJ1W-ID261 64 inputs NPN/PNP F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
connectors
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2E-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2F-20G7-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@D XW2N-20G8-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
D None XW2Z-@@@K XW2D-40G6 None
D None XW2Z-@@@K XW2D-40G6-RM *2 None
D None XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
2 MIL F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
connectors F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2E-20G5-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2N-20G8-IN16 (2 Units) *1 Yes
*1. The inputs are NPN. For PNP inputs, reverse the polarity of the external power supply connections to the power supply terminals on the
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit.
*2. Bleeder resistance (5.6 kΩ) is built in.
22
CJ1W-ID/IA
Types of Connecting Cables

Cable lenght XW2Z-@@A XW2Z-@@B XW2Z-@@BU XW2Z-@@D XW2Z-@@L XW2Z-@@X
0.25m − − − − − −
0.5m XW2Z-050A XW2Z-050B XW2Z-050BU − − XW2Z-C50X
1.0m XW2Z-100A XW2Z-100B XW2Z-100BU XW2Z-100D XW2Z-100L XW2Z-100X
1.5m XW2Z-150A XW2Z-150B XW2Z-150BU XW2Z-150D XW2Z-150L −
10.0m XW2Z-010A XW2Z-010B − XW2Z-010D XW2Z-010L XW2Z-010X
15.0m XW2Z-15MA XW2Z-15MB − XW2Z-15MD XW2Z-15ML −
20.0m XW2Z-20MA XW2Z-20MB − XW2Z-20MD XW2Z-20ML −
23
CJ1W-ID/IA
3. Connecting I/O Relay Terminals
Connection Patterns for I/O Relay Terminals
Pattern Configuration
Connecting Cable
I/O Relay Terminal

A
I/O Relay Terminal I/O Relay Terminal

B
Connecting Cable
Combination of I/O Units with I/O Relay Terminal and Connecting Cables
Number of Connection Number of

Model I/O points Polarity Connecting Cable I/O Relay Terminal
connectors pattern branches
1 Fujitsu A 2 G79-I@C-@ G7TC-ID16
CJ1W-ID231 32 inputs NPN
connector A 2 G79-I@C-@ G7TC-IA16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-ID16
CJ1W-ID232 32 inputs 1 MIL connector NPN
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-IA16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-ID16
CJ1W-ID233 32 inputs 1 MIL connector NPN
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-IA16
2 Fujitsu B 2 G79-I@C-@ G7TC-ID16
connectors B 2 G79-I@C-@ G7TC-IA16
2 MIL B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-ID16
connectors B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-IA16

Cable lenght G79-@C G79-I@C G79-I@C-@ G79-O@C G79-O@C-@ G79-O@-@-D1
0.25m − G79-I25C − G79-O25C − −
0.5m − G79-I50C − G79-O50C − G79-O50-25-D1
1.0m G79-100C − G79-I100C-75 − G79-O100C-75 G79-O75-50-D1
1.5m G79-150C − G79-I150C-125 − G79-O150C-125 −
2.0m G79-200C − G79-I200C-175 − G79-O200C-175 −
3.0m G79-300C − G79-I300C-275 − G79-O300C-275 −
5.0m G79-500C − G79-I500C-475 − G79-O500C-475 −
24
CJ1W-ID/IA

CJ1W-ID201
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-ID212
CJ1W-IA201
CJ1W-IA111
89
2.7
65
ID211
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
90
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
COM
DC24V
7mA
2.7
31
32-point Units (Input Units)

With Fujitsu-compatible Connector (40-pin × 1)
CJ1W-ID231
(112.5)
66.5
2.7
65
ID231
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
0 1
1 1
90
DC24V 4.1mA
20 20
A B
2.7
20
With MIL Connector (40-pin × 1)

CJ1W-ID232
CJ1W-ID233
83.6
2.7
65
ID231
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
0 1
90
1ch
DC24V 4.1mA
0ch
2.7
20
25
CJ1W-ID/IA
64-point Units (Input Units)

With Fujitsu-compatible Connector (40-pin × 2)
CJ1W-ID261
(112.5)
66.5
31 65
2.7
90
2.7

CJ1W-ID262
83.6
31 65
2.7
90
2.7
Related Manuals
CJ-series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual • Basic system configuration
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP W472 • Part nomenclature and functions
CJ2H-CPU6@ • Mounting and setting procedure
• Also refer to the Software User’s Manual (W473).
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P, Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation, maintenance, and other
W393
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@ basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
26
SYSMAC CJ-series Output Units
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD CSM_CJ1W-OUTPUT_DS_E_3_1
A Wide Range of Basic Output

Units for High Speed Output
and Different Applications
• These Output Units receive the results of
output instructions from the CPU Unit and
perform ON/OFF control for external devices.
• New high-speed Output models CJ1W-OD213
and CJ1W-OD234 now available. These units
can help to increase system throughput.
CJ1W-OD213 CJ1W-OD234
Features
• High-speed output models are available, meeting versatile applications.
ON Response Time: 15μs, OFF Response Time: 80μs
• Output Units are available with any of three output types: relay contact outputs, triac outputs, or transistor outputs.
• For transistor outputs, select from sinking outputs or sourcing outputs.
• Output Units with load short-circuit protection are also available. *1
• Select the best interface for each application: Fujitsu connectors or MIL connectors. *2
• A wide variety of Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units are available to allow you to easily wire external output devices.
*1. The following Units have load short-circuit protection: CJ1W-OC202, CJ1W-OD204, CJ1W-OD212, and CJ1W-OD232.
*2. Available for models with 32 outputs or 64 outputs
1
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Output Units
Current
Specifications No. of consumption
Product (A)
Unit type words Model Standards
name
Output I/O Maximum switching External allocated
Commons 5V 24 V
type points capacity connection
Relay Removable
Contact 8 Independen 0.048
− 250 VAC/24 VDC, 2 A terminal 1 words 0.09 CJ1W-OC201
Output Units outputs t contacts max.
block
Removable
16 16 points, 0.096
− 250 VAC/24 VDC, 2 A terminal 1 words 0.11 CJ1W-OC211
outputs 1 common max.
block
Triac Output
Unit
Removable
8 8 points, UC1, N, L,
− 250 VAC, 0.6 A terminal 1 words 0.22 − CJ1W-OA201
outputs 1 common CE
block
Removable
8 4 points,
Sinking 12 to 24 VDC, 2 A terminal 1 words 0.09 − CJ1W-OD201
outputs 1 common
block
Removable
8 8 points,
Sinking 12 to 24 VDC, 0.5 A terminal 1 words 0.10 − CJ1W-OD203
outputs 1 common
block
Removable
16 16 points,
Sinking 12 to 24 VDC, 0.5 A terminal 1 words 0.10 − CJ1W-OD211
outputs 1 common
block
16
CJ1 Removable
Transistor outputs 16 points,
Basic Sinking 24 VDC, 0.5 A terminal 1 words 0.15 − N, L, CE
Output Units (High 1 common CJ1W-OD213
I/O Units block
speed)
32 16 points, Fujitsu
Sinking 12 to 24 VDC, 0.5 A 2 words 0.14 − CJ1W-OD231
outputs 1 common connector UC1, N, L,
32 16 points, MIL CE
outputs 1 common connector
32
outputs 16 points, MIL
Sinking 24 VDC, 0.5 A 2 words 0.22 − N, L, CE
(High 1 common connector CJ1W-OD234
speed)
64 16 points, Fujitsu
64 16 points, MIL
Removable
8 24 VDC, 2 A 4 points,
Sourcing terminal 1 words 0.11 − CJ1W-OD202
outputs Short-circuit protection 1 common
block
Removable
8 24 VDC, 0.5 A 8 points, UC1, N, L,
outputs Short-circuit protection 1 common CE
block
Removable
16 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 points,
outputs Short-circuit protection 1 common
block
32 24 VDC, 0.5 A 16 points, MIL
Sourcing 2 words 0.15 − CJ1W-OD232
outputs Short-circuit protection 1 common connector
64 16 points, MIL
Sourcing 12 to 24 VDC, 0.3 A 4 words 0.17 − CJ1W-OD262
Accessories
Connectors are not included for models with connectors. Either use one of the applicable connector listed below or use an applicable Connector-
Terminal Block Conversion Unit or I/O Relay Terminal. For details on wiring methods, refer to External Interface.
2
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Fujitsu Connectors for 32-input, 32-output, 64-input, 64-output, 32-input/32-output, and 16-input/16-output Units
Soldered Fujitsu Connectors: C500-CE404
FCN-360C040-J2 Connector Cover CJ1W-ID231(32 inputs): 1 per Unit
40-pin FCN-363J040 Housing CJ1W-ID261 (64 inputs): 2 per Unit
Connectors Crimped FCN-363J-AU Contactor CJ1W-OD231 (32 outputs): 1 per Unit C500-CE405
FCN-360C040-J2 Connector Cover CJ1W-OD261 (64 outputs): 2 per Unit
CJ1W-MD261 (32 inputs, 32 outputs): 2 per Unit
−
Soldered C500-CE241
FCN-360C024-J2 Connector Cover
24-pin FCN-363J024 Housing Fujitsu Connectors:
Connectors Crimped FCN-363J-AU Contactor CJ1W-MD231 (16 inputs, 16 outputs): 2 per Unit C500-CE242
FCN-360C024-J2 Connector Cover
MIL Connectors for 32-input, 32-output, 64-input, 64-output, 32-input/32-output, and 16-input/16-output Units
MIL Connectors:
CJ1W-ID232/233 (32 inputs): 1 per Unit
40-pin CJ1W-OD232/233/234 (32 outputs): 1 per Unit
Connectors CJ1W-ID262 (64 inputs): 2 per Unit
CJ1W-OD262/263 (64 outputs): 2 per Unit −
CJ1W-MD263/563 (32 inputs, 32 outputs): 2 per Unit
20-pin MIL Connectors:
Connectors CJ1W-MD232/233 (16 inputs, 16 outputs): 2 per Unit
Applicable Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units

Size Mounting
Number Terminal Common Bleeder
Type Series I/O Depth Height Width DIN Indicators Model Standards
of poles type Screws terminals resistance
(mm) (mm) (mm) Track
20 79 XW2D-20G6
I/O No XW2D-40G6
Slim XW2D M3 39 40 Yes Yes No No XW2D-40C6
40 149
Input XW2D-40G6-RF
Built-in
only XW2D-40G6-RM
M3.5 112.5 XW2B-20G5
20 M3
(European 67.5 XW2B-20G4
type)
Through XW2B I/O 45 45.3 Yes Yes No No No
M3.5 202.5 XW2B-40G5
40 M3
(European 135 XW2B-40G4
type) −
With I/O 20 M3 39 40 149 No XW2C-20G6-IO16
common XW2C Input Yes Yes Yes No
terminals 20 M3.5 50 38 160 Yes XW2C-20G5-IN16
only
With
Inputs
common
XW2E only, 20 M3.5 50 53 149 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2E-20G5-IN16
terminals,
3 tiers
3-tier
Input
Screwless 20 Clamp 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2F-20G7-IN16
only
clamp XW2F
terminals Outputs
20 Clamp 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2F-20G7-OUT16
only
Input e-CON
e-CON XW2N 20 50 40 95.5 Yes Yes Yes No No XW2N-20G8-IN16
only connector
Note: For the combination of Output Units with Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units, refer to 2. Connecting Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Units.
3
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Applicable I/O Relay Terminals

Size (horizontal
Specifications Mounting
mounting)
Terminal
Type Series Number Rated ON block for Model Standrads
Operation Horizontal Vertical Height DIN
Classification Polarity of current at power Screws
indicators (mm) (mm) (mm) Track
points contacts supply
wiring
Relay
5A or 3A G70D-VSOC16
Vertical outputs 16
U, C,
type MOSFET NPN (SPST- Yes Expandable 135 46 81 Yes Yes
CE
G70D-V relay NO × 16) 0.3A G70D-VFOM16
outputs
8 (SPST-
5A 68 93 44 G70D-SOC08 −
NO × 8)
NPN 16
Space-
G70D Outputs Relay (SPST- 3A G70D-SOC16
saving
outputs NO × 16)
Flat −
type 16 Yes − Yes Yes
G70D PNP (SPST- 3A G70D-SOC16-1
NO × 16) 156 51 39
MOSFET NPN 16 G70D-FOM16

relay (SPST- 0.3A −
outputs PNP NO × 16) G70D-FOM16-1
High-
capacity, Relay 8 (SPST-
G70R Outputs NPN 10A Yes − 136 93 55 Yes Yes G70R-SOC08 −
space- outputs NO × 8)
saving
AC
16 G7TC-IA16
inputs
Inputs NPN (SPST- 1A 182
DC NO × 16) G7TC-ID16
inputs
8 (SPST- U, C
102 G7TC-OC08
NO × 8)
Standard G7TC Yes − 85 68 Yes −
NPN 16
Relay (SPST- G7TC-OC16
Outputs 5A
outputs NO × 16)
182
16
PNP (SPST- G7TC-OC16-1 −
NO × 16)
G70A-ZOC16-3
(Socket only) +
NPN 16 Relay/SSR/
10 A
(SPDT × MOSFET Relay/
High- (Terminal Timer
G70A Relay 16 U, C,
capacity Outputs block No − 234 75 64 Yes −
(Socket only) outputs possible G70A-ZOC16-4 CE
socket allowable
with G2R (Socket only) +
current)
PNP Relays) Relay/SSR/
MOSFET Relay/
Timer
Note: For the combination of Output Units with I/O Relay Terminal and Connecting Cables, refer to 3. Connecting I/O Relay Terminals.
• The standards indicated in the "Standards" column are those current for UL, CSA, cULus, cUL, NK, and Lloyd standards and EC Directives as
of the end of November 2008. The standards are abbreviated as follows: U: UL, U1: UL (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations),
C: CSA, UC: cULus, UC1: cULus (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations), CU: cUL, N: NK, L: Lloyd, and CE: EC Directives.
• Ask your OMRON representative for the conditions under which the standards were met.
4
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Mountable Racks
CJ System (CJ1, CJ2) CP1H System NSJ System
Model
CJ1W-OC201
CJ1W-OC211
CJ1W-OA201
CJ1W-OD201
CJ1W-OD203
CJ1W-OD211
CJ1W-OD213
CJ1W-OD231
10 Units 10 Units
CJ1W-OD233 10 Units (Per Expansion Not Supported Not Supported (Per Expansion
CJ1W-OD234 Backplane) Backplane)
CJ1W-OD261
CJ1W-OD263
CJ1W-OD202
CJ1W-OD204
CJ1W-OD212
CJ1W-OD232
CJ1W-OD262
5
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Specifications
CJ1W-OC201 Contact Output Unit (Independent Relays, 8 Points)
Name 8-point Contact Output Unit with Terminal Block (Independent Relays)
Model CJ1W-OC201
Max. Switching
2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
Capacity
Min. Switching
1 mA 5 VDC
Capacity
Relays NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Components, Ltd.), Cannot be replaced.
Electrical: 150,000 operations (24 VDC, resistive load)/100,000 operations (240 VAC, cosφ = 0.4, inductive load)
Service Life of Relay Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected load.
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
Number of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Insulation
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 VDC)
Resistance
Internal Current 90 mA 5 VDC max.
Consumption 48 mA 24 VDC max. (6 mA × No. of ON points)
Weight 140 g max.
Signal
name
OUT
Internal circuits
Circuit Configuration
OUTc
Output indicator
*
name pin name
OUT0
A0 OUTC0
OUT1
B0 L
A1 OUTC1
OUT2
B1 L
A2 OUTC2
OUT3
B2 L
A3 OUTC3
OUT4
B3 L
A4 OUTC4
OUT5
B4 L
Terminal A5 OUTC5
Connections OUT6
B5 L
A6 OUTC6
OUT7
B6 L
A7 OUTC7
NC
B7 L
A8 NC
B8
2 A 250 VAC,
2 A 24 VDC max.
• The input power supply polarity can be connected in either direction.

* Terminal numbers A0 to A8 and B0 to B8 are used in this datasheet, but they are not printed on the Unit.
the I/O tables.
6
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CJ1W-OC211 Contact Output Unit (16 Points)

Name 16-point Contact Output Unit with Terminal Block
Model CJ1W-OC211
Max. Switching
2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosφ = 0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Capacity
Min. Switching
1 mA 5 VDC
Capacity
Relays NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Components, Ltd.), Cannot be replaced.
Electrical: 150,000 operations (24 VDC, resistive load)/ 100,000 operations (250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4, inductive load)
Service Life of Relay Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected load.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
Number of Circuits 16 points/common, 1 circuit
Insulation
20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR terminal (500 VDC)
Resistance
Internal Current 110 mA 5 VDC max.
Consumption 96 mA 24 VDC max. (6 mA × No. of ON points)
Weight 170 g max.
Signal
name
OUT0
to
OUT15
Internal circuits
COM
COM
Output indicator
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0
OUT1
OUT2
B0 L
L A1
OUT3
OUT4
B1 L
L A2
OUT5
OUT6
B2 L
Terminal L A3
OUT7
Connections OUT8
B3 L
L A4
OUT9
OUT10
B4 L
L A5
OUT11
OUT12
B5 L
L A6
OUT13
OUT14
B6 L
L A7
OUT15
COM B7 L
2 A 250 VAC, A8
2 A 24 VDC max. COM
B8
7
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CJ1W-OA201 Triac Output Unit (8 Points)

Name 8-point Triac Output Unit with Terminal Block
Model CJ1W-OA201
Max. Switching
0.6 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2.4 A/Unit)
Capacity
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 10 ms max.)
Min. Switching
50 mA 75 VAC
Capacity
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.6 VAC max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
Surge Protector C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
5 A (1/common, 1 used)
Fuses
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
Insulation
20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (500 VDC)
Resistance
Internal Current
220 mA max.
Consumption
Weight 150 g max.
Signal
name
Output indicator
Internal circuits
Circuit Configuration OUT0

to
OUT7
COM
Fuse
*
Connector Signal
pin name
NC A0 OUT0
B0 L
NC
A1 OUT1
B1 L
NC
A2 OUT2
B2 L
NC A3
Terminal OUT3
Connections
B3 L
NC OUT4 250 VAC max.
A4
B4 L
NC A5 OUT5
B5 L
NC OUT6
A6
B6 L
NC A7 OUT7
B7 L
NC
A8 COM
B8
the I/O tables.
8
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CJ1W-OD201 Transistor Output Unit (8 Points)

Name 8-point Transistor Output Unit with Terminal Block (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD201
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
2.0 A/point, 8.0 A/Unit
Current
Maximum Inrush
10 A/point, 10 ms max.
Current
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
90 mA max.
Consumption
6.3 A (1/common, 2 used)
Fuse
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
External Power
12 to 24 VDC, 10 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Signal
name
+V
OUT0
to
OUT3
Internal circuits
Circuit Configuration Fuse

Output indicator COM0
+V
OUT4
to
OUT7
Fuse
COM1
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0 OUT1
OUT2
B0 L
L A1 OUT3
NC
B1 L
12 to 24 VDC A2 NC
COM0
B2
A3 +V
Terminal B3
NC
Connections A4 NC
B4
OUT4
L A5 OUT5
OUT6
B5 L
L A6 OUT7
NC
B6 L
12 to 24 VDC A7 NC
B7
COM1
A8
+V
B8
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is reversed.
the I/O tables.
9
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Model CJ1W-OD203
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
100 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
10.2 to 26.4 VDC, 20 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Signal
name
Output indicator
Internal circuits
+V
OUT0
to
OUT7
COM
*
name pin name
L OUT0 A0 OUT1 L
B0
L OUT2 A1 OUT3 L
B1
L OUT4 A2 OUT5 L
B2
Terminal L OUT6 A3 OUT7 L
NC B3
Connections A4 NC
NC B4
A5 NC
NC B5
A6 NC
NC B6
12 to 24 VDC A7 NC
COM B7
A8 +V
B8
the I/O tables.
10
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Model CJ1W-OD211
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC 100 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
10.2 to 26.4 VDC, 20 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Signal
name
Internal circuits
Output indicator
+V
OUT0
to
OUT15
COM
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0 OUT1
OUT2 B0 L
L A1 OUT3
OUT4 B1 L
L A2 OUT5
OUT6 B2 L
L A3 OUT7
Terminal OUT8 B3 L
L A4
Connections OUT9
L
OUT10 B4
L A5 OUT11
OUT12 B5 L
L A6 OUT13
OUT14 B6 L
L A7 OUT15
COM B7 L
A8 +V
B8
12 to 24 VDC
11
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Model CJ1W-OD213
Rated Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
ON Response Time 15 μs max.
OFF Response Time 80 μs max.
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC 150 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
20.4 to 26.4 VDC, 55 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Signal
name
Internal circuits
Output indicator
+V
OUT0
to
OUT15
COM
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0 OUT1
OUT2 B0 L
L A1 OUT3
OUT4 B1 L
L A2 OUT5
OUT6 B2 L
L A3 OUT7
Terminal OUT8 B3 L
L A4
Connections OUT9
L
OUT10 B4
L A5 OUT11
OUT12 B5 L
L A6 OUT13
OUT14 B6 L
L A7 OUT15
COM B7 L
A8 +V
B8
24 VDC
12
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 32-point Transistor Output Unit with Fujitsu Connector (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD231
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/common, 4.0 A/Unit
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC 140 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
10.2 to 26.4 VDC, 30 mA min.
Supply
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
+V
OUT0
to Wd m Connector
OUT15 row A
COM0
Internal circuits
COM0
Output indicator
Circuit Configuration SW
+V
OUT0
to Wd m+1 Connector
OUT15 row B
COM1
COM1
Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated

name pin name CIO word
CIO word
OUT0 OUT0
L A1 B1 L
OUT1 A2 B2 OUT1
L L
L OUT2 A3 B3 OUT2
L
12 to L OUT3 A4 B4 OUT3
L 12 to
I/O word "m" I/O word "m+1"
24 VDC L OUT4 A5 B5 OUT4
L
24 VDC
OUT5 OUT5
L A6 B6 L
OUT6 OUT6
L A7 B7 L
L OUT7 A8 B8 OUT7
L
COM0 COM1
A9 B9
+V A10 B10 +V
OUT8 A11 B11 OUT8

L L
Terminal OUT9 OUT9
L A12 B12
Connections L
L OUT10 A13 B13 OUT10 L
I/O word "m" I/O word "m+1"
OUT12 OUT12
L A15 B15 L
OUT13 OUT13
L A16 B16 L
OUT14 OUT14
L A17 B17 L
COM0 COM1
A19 B19
+V +V
A20 B20
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM0).
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM1).
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V).
• Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V).
13
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 32-point Transistor Output Unit with MIL Connector (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD233
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
0.5 A/point, 2 A/common, 4 A/Unit
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
140 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
Supply
Weight 70 g max.
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
+V
OUT0
to Wd m
OUT15
COM0
COM0
Internal circuits
Output indicator
SW
+V
OUT0
to Wd m+1
OUT15
COM1
COM1

CIO word name pin name CIO word
24 VDC +V +V
1 2
COM1 COM1
3 4
OUT15 OUT7
L 5 6 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 7 8 L
I/O word m+1
I/O word m+1
OUT13 OUT5
L 9 10 L
OUT12 OUT4
L 11 12 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 13 14 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 15 16 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 17 18 L
OUT8 OUT0
L 19 20 L
+V +V
Terminal 21 22
COM0 COM0
Connections 23 24
OUT15 OUT7
L 25 26 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 27 28 L
OUT13 OUT5
29 30
I/O word m
L L
I/O word m
OUT12 OUT4
L 31 32 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 33 34 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 35 36 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 37 38 L
OUT8 OUT0
24 VDC L 39 40 L
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V).
14
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 32-point Transistor Output Unit with MIL Connector (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD234
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
0.5 A/point, 2 A/common, 4 A/Unit
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
ON Response Time 15 μs max.
OFF Response Time 80 μs max.
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
220 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
20.4 to 26.4 VDC, 110 mA min.
Supply
Weight 70 g max.
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
+V
OUT0
to Wd m
OUT15
COM0
COM0
Internal circuits
Output indicator
SW
+V
OUT0
to Wd m+1
OUT15
COM1
COM1

24 VDC +V +V
1 2
COM1 COM1
3 4
OUT15 OUT7
L 5 6 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 7 8 L
I/O word m+1
I/O word m+1
OUT13 OUT5
L 9 10 L
OUT12 OUT4
L 11 12 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 13 14 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 15 16 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 17 18 L
OUT8 OUT0
L 19 20 L
+V +V
Terminal 21 22
COM0 COM0
Connections 23 24
OUT15 OUT7
L 25 26 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 27 28 L
OUT13 OUT5
29 30
I/O word m
L L
I/O word m
OUT12 OUT4
L 31 32 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 33 34 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 35 36 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 37 38 L
OUT8 OUT0
24 VDC L 39 40 L
15
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 64-point Transistor Output Unit with Fujitsu Connectors (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD261
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC, 170 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
10.2 to 26.4 VDC, 50 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
+V
OUT0
to Word m Connector
OUT15 row A
COM0
COM0 CN1
+V
Internal circuits
OUT0 Connector
SW to Word m+1
OUT15 row B
Circuit Configuration COM1
+V
OUT0 Connector
to Word m+2
OUT15 row A
COM2
COM2 CN2
+V
OUT0
to Word m+3 Connector
OUT15 row B
COM3
COM3
16
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CN1 CN2
Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated

Allocated name pin
CIO word name pin name CIO word name CIO word
CIO word OUT0
B20 A20 L A1 B1 OUT0 L
+V +V
OUT1 A2 B2 OUT1
B19 A19 L L
COM1 COM0
I/O word "m+2"
I/O word "m+3"

OUT2 A3 B3 OUT2
L B18 A18 L L L
OUT15 OUT15 12 to 12 to
OUT3 A4 B4 OUT3
L B17 A17 L 24 L L 24
OUT14 OUT14
VDC OUT4 A5 B5 OUT4
VDC
L L
I/O word "m+1"
I/O word "m"

L OUT13
B16 A16
OUT13
L
OUT5 A6 B6 OUT5
L B15 A15 L L L
OUT12 OUT12
OUT6 B7 OUT6
L B14 A14 L L A7 L
OUT11 OUT11
OUT7 A8 B8 OUT7
L B13 A13 L L L
OUT10 OUT10
COM2 COM3
L B12 A12 OUT9 L A9 B9
OUT9
+V +V
L B11 A11 OUT8 L A10 B10
OUT8
OUT8 OUT8
B10 A10 +V L A11 B11 L
+V
OUT9 OUT9
Terminal COM1
B9 A9
COM0
L A12 B12 L
I/O word "m+3"

OUT10 OUT10
Connections
I/O word "m+2"

L B8 A8 OUT7 L L A13 B13 L
OUT7
OUT11 OUT11
OUT6
I/O word "m+1"
OUT12 OUT12
I/O word "m"

OUT5
OUT13 OUT13
12 to OUT4 12 to OUT14 OUT14
24 L B4 A4 OUT3 L 24 L A17 B17 L
OUT3
VDC OUT15 OUT15
VDC L B3 A3 OUT2 L L A18 B18 L
OUT2
COM2 COM3
L L A19 B19
OUT1 B2 A2 OUT1
+V +V
L L A20 B20
OUT0 B1 A1 OUT0
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external • When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external
power supply. The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is power supply. The load may operate incorrectly if the polarity is
reversed. reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM0) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM2) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM1) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM3) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V) of CN2.
17
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 64-point Transistor Output Unit with MIL Connectors (Sinking Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD263
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
170 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
+V
OUT0
to Word m
OUT15
COM0
COM0 CN1
Internal circuits
+V
OUT0
SW to Word m+1
OUT15
Circuit Configuration COM1
+V
OUT0
to Word m+2
OUT15
COM2
COM2 CN2
+V
OUT0
to Word m+3
OUT15
COM3
COM3
18
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CN1 CN2
Allocated Allocated Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated

Signal Connector Signal CIO word CIO word name pin
CIO word name pin name name CIO word
12 to
24
OUT0 OUT8 VDC +V 1 2 +V
L 40 39 L 12 to
OUT9 COM3 COM3
L OUT1
38 37 L 24 3 4
VDC OUT15
L OUT2 OUT10
L L 5 6 OUT7 L
I/O word m
36 35
I/O word m
OUT14 OUT6
OUT3 OUT11 L 7 8 L
L 34 33 L
OUT13 OUT5
I/O word m+3
I/O word m+3

OUT4 OUT12 L 9 10 L
L 32 31 L
OUT12 OUT4
OUT5 OUT13 L 11 12 L
L 30 29 L
OUT11 OUT3
OUT6 OUT14 L 13 14 L
L 28 27 L
OUT15 OUT10 OUT2
L OUT7
26 25 L L 15 16 L
OUT9 OUT1
COM0 COM0 L 17 18 L
24 23
OUT0
+V
22 21
+V L OUT8 19 20 L
L OUT0
20 19 OUT8 L
+V 21 22 +V
Terminal OUT1 OUT9
COM2
23 24
COM2
Connections L 18 17 L
OUT15 OUT7
OUT2
16 15 OUT10 L L 25 26 L
I/O word m+1

L
I/O word m+1
OUT14 OUT6
L OUT3
14 13 OUT11 L L 27 28 L
OUT13 OUT5
I/O word m+2

I/O word m+2
L OUT4
12 11 OUT12 L L 29 30 L
OUT12 OUT4
L OUT5
10 9 OUT13 L L 31 32 L
OUT11 OUT3
L OUT6
8 7 OUT14 L L 33 34 L
OUT10 OUT2
L OUT7
6 5 OUT15 L L 35 36 L
OUT9 OUT1
COM1 COM1 12 to L 37 38 L
4 3
24 OUT8 OUT0
+V +V 12 to VDC L 39 40 L
2 1
24
VDC
reversed. reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN2.
19
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 8-point Transistor Output Unit with Terminal Block (Sourcing Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD202
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
2 A/point, 8 A/Unit
Current
Load Short-circuit Detection current: 6 A min.
Protection Automatic restart after error clearance.
Line Disconnection
Detection current: 200 mA
Detection
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
110 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
24 VDC, 50 mA min.
Supply
Weight 120 g max.
Signal
name
COM0 (+V)
Short-circuit
protection
OUT0
to
OUT3
0V
Internal circuits
Output indicator
Circuit Configuration COM1 (+V)

Short-circuit
protection
OUT4
to
OUT7
0V
ERR indicator
• The ERR indicator will light and the corresponding bit in A050 to A069 (Basic I/O Unit Information, two points per bit) will turn ON if an
overcurrent or line disconnection is detected.
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0 OUT1
B0 L
OUT2
L A1 OUT3
NC
B1 L
A2 NC
0V
B2 24 VDC
A3 COM0 (+V)
Terminal NC B3
Connections A4 NC
B4
OUT4
L A5 OUT5
B5 L
OUT6
L A6 OUT7
NC
B6 L
A7 NC
0V B7
24 VDC
A8 COM1 (+V)
B8
* Terminal numbers A0 to A8 and B0 to B8 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
the I/O tables.
20
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Model CJ1W-OD204
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Load Short-circuit Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
20.4 to 26.4 VDC, 40 mA min.
Supply
Weight 120 g max.
Signal
name
COM (+V)
Short-circuit
protection
OUT0
to
Internal circuits
OUT7
0V
Output indicator
ERR indicator
• When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A069)
will turn ON.
*
name pin name
L OUT0 A0 OUT1 L
B0
L OUT2 A1 OUT3 L
B1
L OUT4 A2 OUT5 L
B2
L OUT6 A3
Terminal B3
OUT7 L
NC
Connections A4 NC
NC B4
A5 NC
NC B5
A6 NC
NC B6
A7 NC
0V B7
A8 COM (+V)
B8
24 VDC
the I/O tables.
21
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Model CJ1W-OD212
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
0.1 mA max.
Current
Leakage Current 1.5 V max.
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC, 100 mA max.
Consumption
External Power
20.4 to 26.4 VDC, 40 mA min.
Supply
Weight 120 g max.
Signal
name
COM (+V)
Short-circuit
protection
OUT0
Internal circuits
to
OUT15
0V
Output indicator
ERR indicator
• When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A069)
will turn ON.
*
name pin name
OUT0
L A0 OUT1
OUT2
B0 L
L A1 OUT3
OUT4
B1 L
L A2 OUT5
OUT6
B2 L
L A3 OUT7
Terminal OUT8
B3 L
Connections L A4 OUT9
OUT10
B4 L
L A5 OUT11
OUT12
B5 L
L A6 OUT13
OUT14
B6 L
L A7 OUT15
0V B7 L
A8 COM (+V)
B8
24 VDC
22
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 32-point Transistor Output Unit with MIL Connector (Sourcing Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD232
Operating Load
20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
5 VDC 150 mA max.
Consumption
External Power
20.4 to 26.4 VDC, 70 mA min.
Supply
Weight 80 g max.
Accessories None
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
COM0 (+V)
Short-circuit
COM0 (+V)
protection
OUT0
to I/O word "m"
OUT15
0V
Internal circuits
SW
Output indicator
COM1 (+V)
Short-circuit
COM1 (+V)
protection
OUT0
to I/O word "m+1"
OUT15
0V
ERR indicator
• When the output current of any output exceeds the detection current, the output for that point will turn OFF. At the same time, the ERR
indicator will light and the corresponding flag (one for each common) in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A069) will turn ON.
23
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

24 VDC
COM1 (+V) COM1 (+V)
1 2
0V 0V
3 4
OUT15 OUT7
L 5 6 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 7 8 L
I/O word "m+1"

I/O word "m+1"
OUT13 OUT5
L 9 10 L
OUT12 OUT4
L 11 12 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 13 14 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 15 16 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 17 18 L
OUT8 OUT0
L 19 20 L
COM0 (+V) COM0 (+V)
21 22
Terminal 0V
23 24 0V
Connections OUT15 OUT7

L 25 26 L
OUT14 OUT6
L 27 28 L
OUT13 OUT5
L 29 30 L
I/O word "m"

I/O word "m"
OUT12 OUT4
L 31 32 L
OUT11 OUT3
L 33 34 L
OUT10 OUT2
L 35 36 L
OUT9 OUT1
L 37 38 L
OUT8 OUT0
L 39 40 L
24 VDC
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM0 (+V)).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM1 (+V)).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V).
24
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Name 64-point Transistor Output Unit with MIL Connectors (Sourcing Outputs)
Model CJ1W-OD262
Operating Load
10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Voltage Range
Maximum Load
Current
Maximum Inrush
Current
Insulation
Resistance
Internal Current
170 mA max. (5 VDC)
Consumption
Fuse None
External Power
10.2 to 26.4 VDC, 50 mA min.
Supply
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
Signal Allocated
name CIO word
COM0
COM0
OUT0
to I/O word m
OUT15
0V
Output indicator CN1 (OUT)
COM1
COM1
Internal circuits
Indicator switch OUT0

to I/O word m+1
Circuit Configuration OUT15
0V
COM2
COM2
OUT0
to I/O word m+2
OUT15
0V
CN2 (OUT)
COM3
COM3
OUT0
to I/O word m+3
OUT15
0V
25
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
CN1 CN2
Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated Allocated Signal Connector Signal Allocated
CIO word name pin name CIO word CIO word name pin name CIO word
12 to
12 to 24 VDC
OUT0 OUT8 COM3 (+V) COM3 (+V)
L 40 39 L 24 VDC 1 2
L OUT1 OUT9 L 0V 0V
38 37 3 4
L OUT2 OUT10 L L OUT15 OUT7 L
36 35 5 6
I/O word m
I/O word m
OUT3 OUT11
L 34 33 L L OUT14 7 8
OUT6 L
OUT4 OUT12
L 32 31 L L OUT13 9 10
OUT5 L
I/O word m+3
I/O word m+3

OUT5 OUT13
L 30 29 L L OUT12 10 12
OUT4 L
OUT6 OUT14
L 28 27 L L OUT11 13 14
OUT3 L
OUT7 OUT15
L 26 25 L L OUT10 15 16
OUT2 L
0V 0V
24 23 L OUT9 17 18
OUT1 L
COM0 (+V) COM0 (+V)
22 21 L OUT8 19 20
OUT0 L
OUT0 OUT8 COM2 (+V) COM2 (+V)
L 20 19 L 21 22
Terminal L
OUT1 OUT9
L 0V 0V
18 17 23 24
Connections OUT2 OUT10
L L L OUT15 25 OUT7
I/O word m+1

16 15 26 L
OUT3 OUT11
I/O word m+1
L 14 13 L L OUT14 27 28
OUT6 L
OUT4 OUT12
L 12 11 L L OUT13 29 30
OUT5 L
I/O word m+2

OUT5 OUT13
I/O word m+2

L 10 9 L L OUT12 31 32
OUT4 L
OUT6 OUT14
L 8 7 L L OUT11 33 34
OUT3 L
OUT7 OUT15
L 6 5 L L OUT10 35 36
OUT2 L
0V 0V
4 3 L OUT9 37 38
OUT1 L
COM1 (+V) COM1 (+V) OUT0
2 1 L OUT8 39 40 L 12 to
12 to 24 VDC
24 VDC
reversed. reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM0 (+V)) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM2 (+V)) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM1 (+V)) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM3 (+V)) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V) of CN1. • Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V) of CN2.
26
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
Bit Allocations for Output Unit

8-point Output Unit 16-point Output Unit
CIO Bit CIO Bit
00 OUT0 00 OUT0
01 OUT1 01 OUT1
Wd m
: : : :
(Output)
06 OUT6 14 OUT14
Wd m 07 OUT7 15 OUT15
(Output) 08 −
09 −
: :
14 −
15 −
32-point Output Unit 64-point Output Unit

CIO Bit CIO Bit
00 OUT0 00 OUT0
01 OUT1 01 OUT1
Wd m Wd m
: : : :
(Output) (Output)
14 OUT14 14 OUT14
15 OUT15 15 OUT15
00 OUT0 00 OUT0
01 OUT1 01 OUT1
Wd m+1 Wd m+1
: : : :
(Output) (Output)
14 OUT14 14 OUT14
15 OUT15 15 OUT15
00 OUT0
01 OUT1
Wd m+2
: :
(Output)
14 OUT14
15 OUT15
00 OUT0
01 OUT1
Wd m+3
: :
(Output)
14 OUT14
15 OUT15
27
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
External Interface
Model number label
I/O indicators
Connector
Connect to the connector on the next Unit.
Terminal block for

I/O wiring, 18P × 1
ERR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Note: The CJ1W-OD202, CJ1W-OD204, and CJ1W-OD212 also have an ERR indicator for the load short-circuit alarm.
32-point Units (Models with 40-point Fujitsu Connector or MIL Connector)

Model number
Indicator Switch
ID231 ID232 1 2
I/O indicators
I/O wiring
connector Fujitsu connector MIL connector
(40-pin × 1) Setting 1 Wd m (Row A on connector) Bottom of connector
Setting 2 Wd m+1 (Row B on connector) Top of connector

Connector
Connector
ERR Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
0 1 2 3
Word m 4 5 6 7
or 8 9 10 11
m+1 12 13 14 15
Note: Only the CJ1W-OD232 has an ERR indicator for the load short-circuit alarm.
28
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
64-point Units (Models with Two 40-point Fujitsu Connectors or MIL Connector)
Indicator Switch
Model number
1 2

ID261
ID261
I/O indicators Setting 1 Wd m and m+1: CN1

Setting 2 Wd m+2 and m+3: CN2
I/O wiring
connector
(40-pin × 2)

Connector
Connector
Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
Word m or 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I
m+2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Word m+1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
II
or m+3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Wiring Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks

Electric Wires
The following wire gauges are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector Wire Size
18-terminal AWG 22 to 18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
Crimp terminals
29
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
I/O Unit Wiring Methods

An I/O Unit can be connected to an external device by any of the following three methods.
1. User-provided Cable
An I/O Unit can be directly connected to an external device by using a connector.
A User-provided cable
B External device
B C Connector
C
2. Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit

Use a Connecting Cable to connect to a Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit.
Converting the I/O Unit connector to a screw terminal block makes it easy to connect external devices.
Connecting Cable for Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit

A
XW2Z
B Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
B
XW2@
C Conversion to a screw terminal block
3. I/O Relay Terminal

Use a Connecting Cable to connect to an I/O Relay Terminal.
The I/O specifications can be converted to relay outputs and AC inputs by connecting the I/O Relay Terminal to an I/O Unit.
A G79 I/O Relay Terminal Connecting Cable

B
G7@@ I/O Relay Terminals
B
Or, conversion to relay outputs and AC inputs.
30
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
1. Using User-made Cables with Connector
Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
32- and 64-point Basic I/O Units with Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
Applicable Units
CJ1W-OD231 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs, 32 outputs
40
CJ1W-OD261 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs, 64 outputs

Connection Pins OMRON set Fujitsu parts
Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Solder-type 40 C500-CE404
Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
Socket: FCN-363J040
Crimped 40 C500-CE405 Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-welded 40 C500-CE403 FCN-367J040-AU/F
32- and 64-point Basic I/O Units with MIL Connectors

Applicable Units
CJ1W-OD232 Transistor Output Unit with sourcing outputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD262 Transistor Output Unit with sourcing outputs, 64 outputs
CJ1W-OD233 40
Transistor Output Unit with sinking outputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD234
CJ1W-OD263 Transistor Output Unit with sinking outputs, 64 outputs

Connection Pins OMRON set DDK parts
Pressure-welded 40 XG4M-4030-T FRC5-A040-3T0S
Wire Size
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 or AWG 28 (0.2 mm2 to 0.08 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.
Crimping Tools
The following models are recommended for crimping tools and pressure-welding tools for Fujitsu connectors.
Tools for Crimped Connectors (Fujitsu Component)
Product Name Model
Hand Crimping Tool FCN-363T-T005/H
Contact Withdrawal Tool FCN-360T-T001/H
Tools for Pressure-welded Connectors (Fujitsu Component)

Product Name Model
Hand Press FCN-707T-T101/H
Cable Cutter FCN-707T-T001/H
Locator Plate FCN-367T-T012/H
The following models are recommended for crimping tools for MIL connectors.
Tools for Crimped Connectors (OMRON)
Product Name Model
Crimping Tool XY2B-0002
Attachment XY2B-1007
31
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
2. Connecting Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
Connection Patterns for Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
Number of
Pattern Configuration Branching
Connectors
Connecting Cable
Connector-Terminal
A Block Conversion Unit None
40 or 60 terminals
1
Connector-Terminal
B 2 branches
20 terminals 20 terminals
Connecting Cable
Connector-Terminal
D Block Conversion Unit None
40 or 60 terminals 40 or 60 terminals
2
Connector-Terminal
F 2 branches
20 terminals 20 terminals 20 terminals 20 terminals
Combination of I/O Units with Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units

I/O Number of Connection Number of Connector-Terminal Block Common
Unit Polarity Connecting Cable
capacity connectors pattern branches Conversion Unit terminal
A None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6 None
A None XW2Z-@@@BU XW2D-40C6 None
1 Fujitsu
CJ1W-OD231 32 outputs NPN B 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
connector
B 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
B 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2F-20G7-OUT16 (2 Units) Yes
CJ1W-OD232 32 outputs 1 MIL connector PNP
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
B 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-OUT16 (2 Units) Yes
32
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
I/O Number of Connection Number of Connector-Terminal Block Common

Unit Polarity Connecting Cable
capacity connectors pattern branches Conversion Unit terminal
CJ1W-OD233 32 outputs 1 MIL connector NPN
CJ1W-OD234 32 outputs 1 MIL connector NPN
D None XW2Z-@@@B XW2D-40G6 None
D None XW2Z-@@@BU XW2D-40C6 None
2 Fujitsu
CJ1W-OD261 64 outputs NPN F 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
connectors
F 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2B-20G5 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2C-20G6-IO16 (2 Units) Yes
F 2 XW2Z-@@@L XW2F-20G7-OUT16 (2 Units) Yes
2 MIL F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
CJ1W-OD262 64 outputs PNP
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-OUT16 (2 Units) Yes
2 MIL F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2D-20G6 (2 Units) None
CJ1W-OD263 64 outputs NPN
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2B-20G4 (2 Units) None
F 2 XW2Z-@@@N XW2F-20G7-OUT16 (2 Units) Yes

Cable length XW2Z-@@B XW2Z-@@BU XW2Z-@@L XW2Z-@@K XW2Z-@@N
0.25m − − − XW2Z-C25K −
0.5m XW2Z-050B XW2Z-050BU − XW2Z-C50K −
1.0m XW2Z-100B XW2Z-100BU XW2Z-100L XW2Z-100K XW2Z-100N
10.0m XW2Z-010B − XW2Z-010L − XW2Z-010N
15.0m XW2Z-15MB − XW2Z-15ML − XW2Z-15MN
20.0m XW2Z-20MB − XW2Z-20ML − XW2Z-20MN
33
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
3. Connecting I/O Relay Terminals
Connection Patterns for I/O Relay Terminals
Pattern Configuration
Connecting Cable
I/O Relay Terminal

A
I/O Relay Terminal I/O Relay Terminal

B
Connecting Cable
Combination of I/O Units with I/O Relay Terminal and Connecting Cables
Unit I/O capacity Polarity Connecting Cable I/O Relay Terminal
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G7TC-OC16
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G7TC-OC08
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-SOC16
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-FOM16
CJ1W-OD231 32 outputs 1 Fujitsu connector NPN A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-VSOC16
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-VFOM16
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relay
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70R-SOC08
A 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-SOC08
A 2 G79-I@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16-1
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16-1
CJ1W-OD232 32 outputs 1 MIL connector PNP
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-FOM16-1
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70A-ZOC16-4 and Relay
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC08
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-FOM16
CJ1W-OD233 32 outputs 1 MIL connector NPN A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VSOC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VFOM16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70R-SOC08
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC08
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC08
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-FOM16
CJ1W-OD234 32 outputs 1 MIL connector NPN A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VSOC16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VFOM16
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70R-SOC08
A 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC08
34
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

Unit I/O capacity Polarity Connecting Cable I/O Relay Terminal
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G7TC-OC16
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G7TC-OC08
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-SOC16
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-FOM16
CJ1W-OD261 64 outputs 2 Fujitsu connectors NPN B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-VSOC16
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-VFOM16
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relay
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70R-SOC08
B 2 G79-O@C-@ G70D-SOC08
B 2 G79-I@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16-1
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16-1
CJ1W-OD262 64 outputs 2 MIL connectors PNP
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-FOM16-1
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70A-ZOC16-4 and Relay
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC08
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-FOM16
CJ1W-OD263 64 outputs 2 MIL connectors NPN B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VSOC16
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-VFOM16
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relay
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70R-SOC08
B 2 G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC08

Cable length G79-O@C-@ G79-O@-@-D1 G79-I@-@-D1
0.25m − − −
0.5m − G79-O50-25-D1 G79-I50-25-D1
1.0m G79-O100C-75 G79-O75-50-D1 G79-I75-50-D1
1.5m G79-O150C-125 − −
2.0m G79-O200C-175 − −
3.0m G79-O300C-275 − −
5.0m G79-O500C-475 − −
35
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD

CJ1W-OC201/ OC211/ OA201/ OD201 / OD202/ OD203/ OD204/ OD211/ OD213 / OD212
89
2.7
65
ID211
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
90
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
COM
COM
DC24V
7mA
2.7
31
32-point Unit (Output Units)

With Fujitsu-Compatible Connector (40-pin × 1)
CJ1W-OD231
(112.5)
66.5
2.7
65
ID231
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
0 1
1 1
90
DC24V 4.1mA
20 20
A B
2.7
20

CJ1W-OD232 / OD233 / OD234
83.6
2.7
65
ID231
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15
0 1
1ch
90
DC24V 4.1mA
0ch
2.7
20
36
CJ1W-OC/OA/OD
64-point Units (Output Units)

With Fujitsu-Compatible Connector (40-pin × 2)
CJ1W-OD261
(112.5)
66.5
31 65
2.7
90
2.7

CJ1W-OD262 / OD263
83.6
31 65
2.7
90
2.7
Related Manuals
CJ-series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware User’s Manual • Basic system configuration
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP W472 • Part nomenclature and functions
CJ2H-CPU6@ • Mounting and setting procedure
• Also refer to the Software User’s Manual (W473).
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P, Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation, maintenance, and other
W393
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@ basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
37
SYSMAC CJ-series Power Supply Unit
CJ1W-PA/PD CSM_CJ1W-PA_PD_DS_E_2_1
Equipped with the RUN output for

checking the operation status, as
well as the replacement
notification function for easy
maintenance.
Lineup of five models including the
AC power supply (25W).
• Stable power supply is available from the CJ-series CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA202
CPU Unit to each I/O Units via the dedicated bus. The
most suitable Power Supply Unit can be selected among various I/O specifications and/or options.
Features
• The replacement notification function can prevent an overflow of the system due to the power lifetime. (CJ1W-PA205C only)
• Power Supply Unit provides wide variations according to the system scale up to maximum 25 W.
• Power Supply Unit provides wide variations according to the power supply (100 to 240 V AC/ 24 V DC) status.
• The output contact during operation enables you to check the CPU operation. (CJ1W-PA205R only)
• Conforming to the SEMI-F47 Standard. *
* AC input type, 200 V min. input.
1
CJ1W-PA/PD
Power Supply Units
Output capacity Options
Power supply 24-VDC
Product name 5-VDC 24-VDC Maintenance Model Standards
voltage Total power service RUN
output output forecast
consumption power output
capacity capacity monitor
supply
No Yes CJ1W-PA205C
5A 0.8 A 25 W
AC Power
100 to 240
Supply Yes No CJ1W-PA205R
VAC
Unit
UC1, N, L,
CE
2.8 A 0.4 A 14 W No No No CJ1W-PA202
5A 0.8 A 25 W No No CJ1W-PD025
DC Power
Supply 24 VDC
Unit
2A 0.4 A 19.6 W No No CJ1W-PD022 UC1, CE
Accessories
There is no accessory for the CJ series Power Supply Unit.
• The standards indicated in the "Standards" column are those current for UL, CSA, cULus, cUL, NK, and Lloyd standards and EC Directives as
of the end of September 2007. The standards are abbreviated as follows: U: UL, U1: UL (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations),
C: CSA, UC: cULus, UC1: cULus (Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations), CU: cUL, N: NK, L: Lloyd, and CE: EC Directives.
• Ask your OMRON representative for the conditions under which the standards were met.
2
CJ1W-PA/PD
Specifications
Item Specifications
Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA202 CJ1W-PD025 CJ1W-PD022
Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC (wide-range), 50/60 Hz 24 VDC
Operating voltage
and frequency 85 to 264 V AC, 47 to 63 Hz 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
ranges
Power consumption 100 VA max. 50 VA max. 50 W max. 35 W max.
At 100 to 120 V AC:
At 100 to 120 V AC: 20 A/8 ms max. for cold
15 A/8 ms max. for cold start at room temperature start at room temperature At 24 V DC:
Inrush current *1
At 200 to 240 V AC: At 200 to 240 V AC: 30 A/20 ms max. for cold start at room temperature
30 A/8 ms max. for cold start at room temperature 40 A/8 ms max. for cold
start at room temperature
2.8 A, 5 V DC 5.0 A, 5 V DC 2.0 A, 5 V DC
5.0 A, 5 V DC (including supply to CPU Unit) (including supply to CPU (including supply to CPU (including supply to CPU
Unit) Unit) Unit)
Output capacity *7
0.8 A, 24 V DC 0.4 A, 24 V DC 0.8 A, 24 V DC 0.4 A, 24 V DC
Total: 25 W max. Total: 14 W max. Total: 25 W max. Total: 19.6 W max.
Output terminal
Not provided.
(service supply)
Contact configuration:
SPST-NO
Switch capacity:
250 V AC, 2 A (resistive
RUN output *2 load) Not provided.
120 V AC, 0.5 A
(inductive load), 24 V DC,
2A (resistive load)
24 V DC, 2 A (inductive load)
With Alarm output (open-
Replacement collector output)
Not provided. Not provided.
notification function 30 V DC max., 50 mA
max.
• 20 MΩ min. (at 500 V
DC) between all
external terminals and
20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC) GR terminal, and 20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC) 20 MΩ min. (at 500 V DC)
Insulation between AC external and between all alarm between AC external and between DC external and −
resistance GR terminals output terminals. GR terminals GR terminals *6
*3 • 20 MΩ 1 min. (at 250 V *3 *3
DC) between all alarm
output terminals and
GR terminal.
• 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for
1 minute between all
external terminals and
GR terminal and
2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz between all alarm 2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz 1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz for
for 1 min between AC output terminals with a for 1 min between AC 1 minute between DC
external and GR terminals leakage current of 10 external and GR terminals external and GR terminals
Dielectric strength *3 mA max. *3 *3 −
*4 Leakage current: 10 mA • 1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz Leakage current: 10 mA Leakage current: 10 mA *6
max. for 1 minute between all max. max.
alarm output terminals
and GR terminal with a
leakage current of 10
mA max.
1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute between DC external and GR terminals *3
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Noise immunity 2 kV on power supply line (conforming to IEC61000-4-4)
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes
Vibration resistance
(Time coefficient: 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.) (according to JIS C0040)
Shock resistance 147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (Relay Output Unit: 100 m/s2) (according to JIS C0041)
Ambient operating
0 to 55°C
temperature
10% to 90% (with no
Ambient operating 10% to 90% (with no
condensation) 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
humidity condensation)
*5
Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gases.
Ambient storage −20 to 70°C (excluding
−20 to 75°C (See note 5.) −20 to 75°C (excluding battery)
temperature battery)
Grounding Less than 100 Ω
Enclosure Mounted in a panel.
Weight All models are each 5 kg max.
3
CJ1W-PA/PD
Item Specifications
Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA202 CJ1W-PD025 CJ1W-PD022
90.7 to 466.7 × 90 × 65 mm (W × H × D) (not including cables)
Note: W = a + b + 20 × n + 31 × m + 14.7
CPU Rack a: Power Supply Unit: PA205R and PA205C = 80; PA202 = 45; PD025 = 60; PD022=27
dimensions b: CPU Unit: CJ1-H or CJ1 = 62; CJ1M-CPU1@ = 31; CJ1M-CPU2@ = 49
The total width is given by the following: W = 156.7 + n × 20 + m × 31, where n is the number of 32-point I/O Units or I/O Control Units
and m is the number of other Units.
Safety measures Conforms to cULus and EC Directives.
*1. Disconnect the Power Supply Units LG terminal from the GR terminal when testing insulation and dielectric strength. Testing the insulation and
dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the GR terminals connected will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit.
*2. Supported only when mounted to CPU Rack.
*3. The inrush current is given for a cold start at room temperature. The inrush control circuit uses a thermistor element with a low-temperature
current control characteristic. If the ambient temperature is high or the PLC is hot-started, the thermistor will not be sufficiently cool, and the
inrush currents given in the table may be exceeded by up to twice the given values. When selecting fuses or breakers for external circuits,
allow sufficient margin in shut-off performance.
*4. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −25 to 30°C and relative humidity of 25% to 70% when storing the Unit for longer than 3 months
to keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition.
*5. Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If the full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the
switch on the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Supply Unit.
*6. CJ1W-PD022 is not insulated between the primary DC power and secondary DC power.
*7. Internal components in the Power Supply Unit will deteriorate or be damaged if the Power Supply Unit is used for an extended period of time
exceeding the power supply output capacity or if the outputs are shorted.
External Interface
CJ1W-PA205R
POWER Indicator
Lit when 5 V are being output from the Power Supply Unit.
PA205R
POWER
External connection terminals
L1
AC100-240V
INPUT AC input
L2/N
LG
GR
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
RUN output
CJ1W-PA205C
Replacement notification display
CJ1W-PA205C
POWER
Terminals POWER indicator
external connect Lit: 5-V output from Power Supply Unit.
AC100-240V
INPUT Years
L1
AC input
TEST TEST switch
L2/N
The TEST switch can be used to
LG temporarily turn OFF the alarm output
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
that notifies when replacement is
L
GR NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
+ needed.
NC
NC
Alarm output
(replacement notification output)
4
CJ1W-PA/PD
CJ1W-PA202
POWER Indicator
PA202
POWER
L1
AC100
-240V AC input
INPUT
L2/N
LG
GR
NC
NC
CJ1W-PD025
POWER Indicator
PD025
POWER
DC24V+
INPUT DC input
LG
GR
NC
NC
CJ1W-PD022
PD022
POWER
External
connection
terminals POWER Indicator
Lit when 5 V are being output
DC24V
from the Power Supply Unit.
INPUT
DC input +
NC
GR
5
CJ1W-PA/PD
AC Input
Supply 100 to 240 V AC (allowable: 85 to 264 V AC). (Voltage selection is not required.)
DC Input
Supply 24 V DC.
Allowable power supply voltage

Model
fluctuation range
CJ1W-PD025 19.2 to 28.8 VDC (±20%)
CJ1W-PD022 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (±10%)
LG
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and avoid electric shock.
GR
Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to avoid electric shock.
RUN Output (CJ1W-PA205R Only)

The internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating (RUN or MONITOR mode). The Power Supply Unit must be in the CPU Rack to use
this output.
Alarm Output (CJ1W-PA205C Only)

The alarm output is used to notify when Power Supply Unit replacement is required. The output is normally ON. The output turns OFF when the
time until replacement is 6 months or less.
Wiring
Wire
For AC/DC power supply
AWG14 to 20
Recommended wire size
(0.517 to 2.08mm2)
For grounding wire

Recommended wire size 2 mm2 min.
For alarm output

Pushing strength Pulling strength Length of stripped
Recommended wire size Use
(clamping operation) (holding force) section
AWG 22 to 18
Connecting to PLC terminal block models 30 N min.
(0.32 to 0.82 mm2)
30 N max. 7 to 10 mm
AWG 28 to 24
Connecting to PLC connector models 10 N min.
(0.08 to 0.2 mm2)
6
CJ1W-PA/PD
Crimp Terminals
The terminals on the Power Supply Unit are M4, self-raising terminals with screws. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
Crimp terminal for the AC power supply
7mm max.
Crimp terminal for the DC power supply
7mm max. 7mm max.
Crimp terminal for the grounding wire
7mm max. 7mm max.
The crimp terminal is not required for the alarm output.
Checking Current Consumption and Power Consumption

After selecting a Power Supply Unit based on considerations such as the power supply voltage, calculate the current and power requirements for
each Rack.
Condition 1: Current Requirements

There are two voltage groups for internal power consumption: 5 V and 24 V.
Current consumption at 5 V (internal logic power supply)
Current consumption at 24 V (relay driving power supply)
Condition 2: Power Requirements

For each Rack, the upper limits are determined for the current and power that can be provided to the mounted Units. Design the system so that
the total current consumption for all the mounted Units does not exceed the maximum total power or the maximum current supplied for the voltage
groups shown in the following tables.
The maximum current and total power supplied for CPU Racks and Expansion Racks according to the Power Supply Unit model are shown below.
Note: 1. For CPU Racks, include the CPU Unit current and power consumption in the calculations. When expanding, also include the current and
power consumption of the I/O Control Unit in the calculations.
2. For Expansion Racks, include the I/O Interface Unit current and power consumption in the calculations.
Max. current supplied

Power Supply Units Max. total power supplied
5V 24 V (relay driving current)
CJ1W-PA205R 5.0 A 0.8 A 25 W
CJ1W-PA205C 5.0 A 0.8 A 25 W
CJ1W-PA202 2.8 A 0.4 A 14 W
CJ1W-PD025 5.0 A 0.8 A 25 W
CJ1W-PD022 2.0 A 0.4 A 19.6 W
Conditions 1 and 2 below must be satisfied.
Condition 1: Maximum Current
(1) Total Unit current consumption at 5 V ≤ (A) value
(2) Total Unit current consumption at 24 V ≤ (B) value
Condition 2: Maximum Power
(1) × 5 V + (2) × 24 V ≤ (C) value
7
CJ1W-PA/PD
Example: Calculating Total Current and Power Consumption

Example: When the Following Units are Mounted to a CJ-series CPU Rack Using a CJ1W-PA202 Power Supply Unit
Voltage group
Unit type Model Quantity
5V 24 V
CPU Unit CJ1G-CPU45H 1 0.910 A −
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 1 0.020 A −
Basic I/O Units CJ1W-ID211 2 0.080 A −
(Input Units) CJ1W-ID231 2 0.090 A −
Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-OC201 2 0.090 A 0.048 A
(Output Units)
Special I/O Unit CJ1W-DA041 1 0.120 A −
CPU Bus Unit CJ1W-CLK23 1 0.350 A −
0.910 + 0.020 + 0.080 × 2 + 0.090 ×
Total 0.048 A × 2
Current consumption 2 + 0.090 × 2 + 0.120 + 0.350
Result 1.92 A (≤ 2.8 A) 0.096 A (≤ 0.4 A)
Total 1.92 × 5 V = 9.60 W 0.096 A × 24 V = 2.304 W
Power consumption
Result 9.60 + 2.304 = 11.904 W (≤ 14 W)
Note: For details on Unit current consumption, refer to Ordering Information.
Using the CX-Programer to Display Current Consumption and Width

CPU Rack and Expansion Rack current consumption and width can be displayed by selecting Current Consumption and Width from the Options
Menu in the CS/CJ/CP Table Window. (The width can be displayed for the CJ/CP Series only.) If the capacity of the Power Supply Unit is exceeded,
it will be displayed in red characters. For details, refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446).
Example:
Current
Power Supply consumption Total current
Unit model at 5 V consumption Width
Current
consumption Long-distance
at 26 V/24 V expansion
8
CJ1W-PA/PD
Dimension (Unit: mm)
CJ1W-PA205R
PA205R
POWER
L1
AC100-240V
INPUT
L2/N
90
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
65
81.6 80
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
POWER
AC100-240V
INPUT Years
L1
L2/N
TEST
90 ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
L
NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
+
NC
NC
65
81.6 80
CJ1W-PA202
PA202
POWER
L1
AC100
-240V
INPUT
L2/N
90
NC
NC
65
81.6 45
9
CJ1W-PA/PD
CJ1W-PD025
PD025
POWER
DC24V+
INPUT
90
NC
NC
65
81.6 60
CJ1W-PD022
PD022
POWER
90
65
81.6 27
Related Manuals
Cat. No. Name Contents
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P, Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation,
W393
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@ maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
10
SYSMAC CJ-series Serial Communications Units
CJ1W-SCU CSM_CJ1W-SCU_DS_E_1_1
The Serial Communications

Units That Enable High-speed
Connections with External
Devices
• Each Serial Communications Unit provides two
serial communications ports: RS-232C and
RS-422A/485, and the serial communications
mode can be set separately for each port from
Protocol Macro, Host Link, NT Link, Serial
Gateway, and No-protocol. CJ1W-SCU22 CJ1W-SCU32 CJ1W-SCU42
Features
• Mount a total of up to 16 CPU Bus Units, including these Serial Communications Units, to the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks to create systems
with up to 32 serial communications ports.
• Connect an NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-442A Link Adapter to the RS-232C port to enable 1:N communications.
• With the CJ1W-SCU2, you can use a faster baud rate (up to 230.4 kbps) and faster data transfer to the CPU Unit to enable connecting to
high-speed external devices.
System Configuration
Programing Devices Host Computer
Modbus-RTU Master
(Host computers)
or
Serial Communications Units

CPU Unit
Programmable Terminal (PT) RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter

NT-AL001
Protocol Macro
General-purpose External Device
No-protocol
General-purpose External Device
Serial Gateway
(Host Link(FINS))
CJ-series
PLC
(Host Link slave)
Serial Gateway
(Compoway/F)
Smart Sensor
Temperature Controller
1
CJ1W-SCU
Ordering Infomation
• The standards are abbreviated as follows: U: UL, U1: UL(Class I Division 2 Products for Hazardous Locations), C: CSA, UC: cULus, UC1: cULus (Class I Division
2 Products for Hazardous Locations), CU: cUL, N: NK, L: Lloyd, and CE: EC Directives.
Current
Specifications No. of unit consumption (A)
Unit type Product name numbers Model Standards
Communications allocated
Communications functions 5V 24V
Interface
CJ1 CPU Serial The following functions can be
Bus Units Communications selected for each port:
Units • Protocol macro
High-speed type • Host Link
• NT Links (1:N mode) 0.28
2 RS-232C ports —
• Serial Gateway ∗1 CJ1W-SCU22
• No-protocol
• Modbus-RTU Slave
1 UC1, CE
2 RS-422A/485 ports 0.40 —

CJ1W-SCU32
1 RS-232C port and 0.36

—
1 RS-422A/485 port ∗1 CJ1W-SCU42
CJ1 CPU Serial The following functions can be

Bus Units Communications selected for each port: 0.28
2 RS-232C ports — CJ1W-SCU21-V1
Units • Protocol macro ∗1
• Host Link
• NT Links (1:N mode)
• Serial Gateway ∗2 UC1, N,
2 RS-422A/485 ports • No-protocol ∗3 1 0.38 — CJ1W-SCU31-V1
L, CE
• Modbus-RTU Slave ∗4
1 RS-232C port and 0.38

— CJ1W-SCU41-V1
1 RS-422A/485 port ∗1
∗1. When an NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Conversion Unit is used, this value increases by 0.15 A/Unit.
∗2. The Serial Gateway function is enabled only for Serial Communications Units of unit version 1.2 and later.
∗3. The no-protocol function is enabled only for Serial Communications Units of unit version 1.2 and later (and a CPU Unit of unit version 3.0 or
later is also required).
∗4. The Modbus-RTU Slave function is enabled only for Serial Communications Units of unit version 1.3 and later.
Accessories
Model Accessories Specifications
CJ1W-SCU22 2 Serial Port (RS-232C) Connector Connector set for serial port connection (D-SUB 9-pin male connector)
CJ1W-SCU32 2 Serial Port (RS-422A/485) Connector Terminal Block Connector (FMC1.5/5-STF-3.5AU by Phoenix Contact)
1 Serial Port (RS-232C) Connector Connector set for serial port connection (D-SUB 9-pin male connector)
CJ1W-SCU42
1 Serial Port (RS-422A/485) Connector Terminal Block Connector (FMC1.5/5-STF-3.5AU by Phoenix Contact)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 2 Serial Port (RS-232C) Connector Connector set for serial port connection (D-SUB 9-pin male connector)
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Mountable Racks
Model Expansion Expansion
CPU Rack CP1H PLC NSJ Controller
Backplane Backplane
CJ1W-SCU22 Unit version 2.0
CJ1W-SCU32 Unit version 2.0
CJ1W-SCU42 Unit version 2.0 10 Units ∗2 10 Units ∗2
10 Units ∗1 (per Expansion 2 Units ∗3 Not supported (per Expansion
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 Unit version 1.3 Backplane) Backplane)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 Unit version 1.3
∗1. This is the number of Units for a CJ2H-CPU6 CJ2H CPU Unit (without EtherNet/IP) and a CJ1W-PA205 or CJ1W-PD025 Power Supply Unit.
(When not using NT-AL001)
∗2. This is the number of Units for a CJ1W-PA205 or CJ1W-PD025 Power Supply Unit.
∗3. A CP1W-EXT01 CJ Unit Adaptor is required.
2
CJ1W-SCU
Specifications
PLC CJ series
Device name Serial Communications Unit
Classification CPU Bus Unit
Model number CJ1W-SCU22 CJ1W-SCU32 CJ1W-SCU42 CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Port 1 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
Serial ports
Port 2 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C
Port 1 Host Link, protocol macro, Serial Gateway, No-protocol, NT Link, Host Link, protocol macro, NT Link, or loopback test can be
Modbus-RTU Slave, loopback test , or 1:1 Host Link can be se- selected for each port.
lected for each port. ∗1, ∗2 • Unit Ver. 1.2 or later also supports Serial Gateway, no-proto-
Protocol
Port 2 col, and 1:1 Host Link modes. (Note: The Serial Gateway can
also be executed in protocol macro mode.) ∗1
• Unit Ver. 1.3 or later also supports Modbus-RTU slave mode.
CPU Unit None
CPU Rack A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No
restrictions on the mounting location.
Number of However, if an external interrupt task is used, the Unit must be
mountable mounted in one of the following slots on the CPU Rack.
A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No
Units Expansion CJ2H-CPU6-EIP CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 3
restrictions on the mounting location.
Rack CJ2H-CPU6 or CJ1G/H-CPUH CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 4
CJ1M-CPU CPU Unit: Slots 0 to 2
External interrupt tasks will not be started if the Unit is mounted to
any other slot.
Ordinary
refreshing
of software Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (constant data exchange with the CPU Unit)
switches
Data exchange and status
with the CPU Unit Transfer Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each serial port is allocated 10 words (total 20 words).
from the Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times:
CPU Unit • Startup or restart
set by the • Ladder instruction: STUP(237)
system • Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON (Auxiliary Area)
The CPU Unit’s Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Unit to the
Simple Backup Function CPU Unit’s Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared.
(The Simple Backup Function can be used with the CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only.)
Current consumption ∗3 280mA+x 400mA 360mA+x 280mA+x 380mA 380mA+x
Weight 160g Max. 120g Max. 140g Max. 110g Max. 110g Max. 110g Max.
General specifications Conforms to general specifications for SYSMAC CJ Serise.
∗1. Serial Gateway: The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode.
∗2. No-protocol: An external interrupt task can be executed when data is received in No-protocol Mode. If a CJ2 CPU Unit with unit version 1.1 or
later is used, the high-speed communications instructions (DRXDU(261) and DTXDU(262)) can also be used.
∗3. The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Unit. When an NT-AL001 Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications
Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Unit. A current consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is
connected. In the above specifications, “x” indicates that 150 mA must be added for each port to which an NT-AL001 Link Adapter is connected
to provide the required 5-V power supply.
3
CJ1W-SCU
Protocol Specifications
Host Link Specifications
Item Description
Communications mode Half-duplex (Full-duplex for slave-initiated communications)
Synchronous mode Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous mode)
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports:
Baud rate ∗1 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps ∗2
Default setting: 9,600 bps
RS-232C port : 15 m max. ∗3
RS-422A/485 Port :
• CJ1W-SCU1-V1
Communications distance
500 m max. (total cable length: 500 m max., T-branch branch lines: 10 m max.)
∗1
• CJ1W-SCU2
1,200 m max. (total cable length: 1,200 m max., Multidrop connections are possible. However, maximum cable length is 500 m if
the NT-AL001 is used for RS-422A-485 connections.)
RS-232C port : 1:1 (1:N (N = 32 Units max.) is possible using an Converting Link Adapters.)
Connection configuration
RS-422A/485 port : 1:N (N = 32 Units max.)
Number of connected Units 32 Units max. (unit numbers 0 to 31; unit number 0 is set for 1:1 connection)
Header: @, address: (host link unit number) 0 to 31 (BCD), data: header code + text, error check
C-mode commands
code: FCS, terminator: ∗ +CR
Frame structure
Header: @, address: (host link unit number) 0 to 31 (BCD), data: header code (always “FA”) + FINS
FINS commands
header + FINS command + text, error check code: FCS, terminator: ∗ +CR
Vertical parity: Even, odd. or none
Error check codes
FCS (horizontal parity converted to ASCII)
Command flow Commands Contents
C-mode commands 1:1 or 1:N communications with directly connected PLCs ∗4
Host computer to PLC FINS commands
Command flow and support 1:1 or 1:N communications with directly connected PLCs.
(in Host Link protocol)
FINS commands Communications using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) from CPU
PLC to host computer
(in Host Link protocol) Unit. ∗5
∗1. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by connected devices.
∗2. The CJ1W-SCU2 is required for communications at 230,400 bps.
∗3. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the
manual for the device being connected to confirm support.
∗4. The specified frame format must be prepared on the host computer and then sent.
∗5. The host computer must interpret the commands and return a response in the correct format.
Connection between the host computer and PLC must be 1:1.
Protocol Macro Function Specifications

Item Description
Number of protocols 20 max.
Can be created and registered with the Protocol Support Tool (CX-Protocol).
Number of sequences 1,000 max.
Number of sequences 60 max.
Number of messages 300 max.
Per protocol
Number of reception
100 max.
matrixes
Sequence execution condition Using the CPU Unit’s PMCR (260) instruction (specifying the sequence number)
Communications mode Half-duplex or full-duplex
Synchronous mode Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous mode)
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports:
Baud rate ∗1 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps
Default setting: 9,600 bps ∗2
RS-232C port : 15 m max.
RS-422A/485 port :
• CJ1W-SCU1-V1
Communications distance ∗1 500 m max. (total cable length: 500 m max., T-branch branch lines: 10 m max.)
• CJ1W-SCU2
1,200 m max. (total cable length: 1,200 m max., Multidrop connections are possible. However, max-
imum cable length is 500 m if the NT-AL001 is used for RS-422A-485 connections.)
RS-232C port : 1:1 (1:N (N = 32 Units max.) is possible using a Converting Link Adapter.)
Connection configuration
RS-422A/485 port : 1:N (N = 32 Units max.)
Number of connected Units 32 Units max. (unit numbers 0 to 31; unit number 0 is set for 1:1 connection)
Including the word that specifies the number of
Maximum number of data Operand setting 250 words
words (1 word)
exchange words between
PLC and protocol macro Link word setting 500 words O1, O2, I1, and I2: 500 words total
function
Direct setting 500 words Maximum number of words per data attribute
4
CJ1W-SCU
Item Description
Number of steps per
16 max.
sequence
Transmission control X-on/X-off flow, RS/CS flow, delimiter control, or contention control, and modem control can be
parameters selected.
Scan notification: Writes the receive data to I/O memory during CPU Unit scanning.
Response notification Scan method (fixed) Support

Sequence contents method (operand) Interrupt notification Not support
(step common parameters)
Interrupt notification for reception case number Not suppprt
Monitoring time during Receive wait, receive completion, or send completion can be monitored.
send/receive processing Setting range: 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes
Area in which data is exchanged between the CPU Unit and the Serial Communications Unit during
Communications Unit refreshing.
Link word setting
Two areas are possible for each device: An area for storing receive data and an area for storing send
data. ∗3
Send only (SEND), receive only (RECV), send and receive (SEND&RECV), wait (WAIT), reception
Commands
buffer clear (FLUSH), ER-ON (OPEN), or ER-OFF (CLOSE)
Repeat counter 1 to 255 times
Retry count 0 to 9 (Only when the command is SEND&RECV)
0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes
Send wait time
(Only when the command is SEND or SEND&RECV)
When receive processing is completed (when the receive data is stored in the area specified in the
With or without response
4th operand of the PMCR(260) instruction), whether or not to store the received messages can be
write (operand)
selected.
When a step has ended normally, End (sequence completed), Next (proceed to the next step No.),
Step contents Next processing Goto (go to the specified step No.), or Abort (interrupt the step and terminate that sequence) can be
selected.
Error processing When a step has ended abnormally, End, Next, Goto, or Abort can be selected.
Data sent to the specified address when the
Send message
command is SEND or SEND&RECV. Consists of a header, address, length, data,
Data sent from the specified address when the error check code, and terminator.
Receive message
command is RECV or SEND&RECV.
Specifies the receive messages and the next
When the command is RECV or SEND&RECV,
processing for each of cases No. 00 to No. 15.
sets the expected receive messages (15 max.),
Reception matrix Of the maximum 16 cases, one case must be
and switches to the next processing according to
set as “Other” in the receive messages (in
the message received.
addition to the set receive messages).
Header and
Con-
terminator data ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code
stant
attributes
Con-
ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code (with an address, no control code is possible)
stant
No conversion, conversion to ASCII data, or conversion to hexadecimal data
(the read/write direction can be specified)
Designa- (X, Y)
tion X: Effective address (where read from, or where written to)
method Y: Data size (1 to 1,000) ∗4
Specify using the
3rd operand of the
PMCR(260) instruction.
Word read
(I/O memory to send Specify using a link
Message unit contents Data attributes of data) word.
addresses and data Set leading address + n
I/O memory direct
in send/receive Vari- (The linear expression
Word designation
messages able aN + b, including
designation Specify using the repeat counter N, is
4th operand of the also possible for n.)
X PMCR(260) instruction.
Word write
(receive data to I/O Specify using a link
memory) word.
I/O memory direct
designation
Any data or address can be received
Wild card ∗
(only in receive messages)
Repeat
N
counter
5
CJ1W-SCU
Item Description
Linear expres-
a: 0 to 1000; b: 1 to 1000
sion including aN+b
N: Repeat counter value
repeat counter
Can be received regardless of the length
Wild card ∗
(only in receive messages)
Data attributes of
addresses and data Vari- Specify using the
Y
in send/receive able 3rd operand of the
Set leading address + n
messages PMCR(260) instruction.
Word read (The linear expression
Word designa-
(I/O memory to send Specify using a link aN + b, including
tion
data) word. repeat counter N, is
also possible for n.)
Message unit contents I/O memory direct
designation
Error check codes LRC, LRC2, CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, SUM, SUM1, and SUM2 can be calculated.
Maximum length of
1,000 bytes. (A maximum length between 200 and 1,000 bytes can be set in the Setup Area.)
send/receive messages
Maximum number of data
attributes registered in one 96 attributes ∗5
message
Maximum number of write
data attributes registered in 30 attributes ∗6
one message
• A total of up to 1,700 bytes (characters) of time-series data can be traced in send and receive
Trace function messages.
• Changes to the step No. and control signals such as RS and CS can also be traced.
∗1. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device.
∗2. A baud rate of 57,600 bps can be selected when using Unit Ver. 1.2 or later (115,200 bps is not possible). The CJ1W-SCU2 is required for
communications at 115,200 or 230,400 bps.
∗3. Unit Ver. 1.2 or later supports continuous I/O refreshing in addition to the previous on-request I/O refreshing.
∗4. The data size is the number of bytes on the transmission path.
∗5. The CX-Protocol can be used to register up to 96 attributes per message.
∗6. A macro syntax error will occur when the protocol macro is executed if more than 31 write attributes are registered in one message.
Note: When using 2-wire RS-422A/485 communications in Protocol Macro Mode, set only modem controls for the send control parameters,
and do not use RS/CS flow controls.
Serial Gateway Specifications

Item Description
Conversion source FINS commands (received through network (including Host Link FINS) or CPU bus)
• The received FINS command sent to the Unit’s serial port is converted according to the FINS command code as follows:
2803 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Compo-Way/F command.
2804 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Modbus-RTU command.
Conversion functions 2805 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Modbus-ASCII command.
The converted command is sent to the serial port.
• When the received FINS command is sent to the Unit (user-specified FINS command code), the FINS command is enclosed
in a Host Link header and terminator.
• CompoWay/F commands
• Modbus-RTU commands
Converted format
• Modbus-ASCII commands
• Host Link FINS commands
Enabled serial
Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode
communications mode
Queuing functions Up to five FINS commands can be converted and then queued for processing.
When a FINS command is received during protocol macro execution, the Serial Gateway is executed using an interrupt between
Protocol macro execution
steps in the communications sequence. If the next step is a RECEIVE command, the Serial Gateway will not be executed until the
processing
next step. For other conditions, the interrupt is executed immediately. ∗1
The time is monitored from when the message is converted into the specified protocol using the Serial Gateway until the response is
Response timeout
received (in Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode).
monitoring
Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s) ∗2
The time is monitored from when the FINS command is received until it is converted into the specified protocol and starts to be sent
Send start timeout
(in protocol macro mode only).
monitoring
Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s) ∗3
The time can be set from when the message is converted into another protocol using Serial Gateway conversion until the data is
Send delay actually sent. (Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode)
Default: 0 s (setting range: 0.01 to 300.00 s)
∗1. The reception buffer is cleared during Serial Gateway execution.

The Serial Gateway can be prohibited in protocol macro mode by turning ON the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch in the CIO Area.
∗2. When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0205 hex: Response timeout) is returned to the source of the FINS command and a response is
received after a timeout occurs.
∗3. When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0204 hex: Remote node busy) is returned to the source of the FINS command. The send
processing will not be executed and the received FINS command will be discarded.
6
CJ1W-SCU
No-protocol Specifications
Item Description
Communications mode Full-duplex
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports: 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps ∗2
Baud rate ∗1
Default setting: 9,600 bps
RS-232C port : 15 m max.
RS-422A/485 port :
• CJ1W-SCU1-V1
Communications distance
500 m max. (total cable length: 500 m max., T-branch branch lines: 10 m max.)
∗1
• CJ1W-SCU2
1,200 m max. (total cable length: 1,200 m max., Multidrop connections are possible. However, maximum cable length is 500 m if
the NT-AL001 is used for RS-422A-485 connections.)
Set either of the following types in the Setup Area in the allocation DM Area.
1. Data only (without start code and end code)
2. Start code + data
3. Data + end code
4. Start code + data + end code
5. Data + CR + LF
6. Start code + data +CR + LF
Messages
(communications frame Set in allocated DM Area
structure) (The start code can be included by setting it to between 00 and FF hex, and the end code can be included by setting it to between
00 and FF hex. To exclude the end code, set the number of receive data bytes.)
Start code None or 00 to FF hex
End code None, 00 to FF hex, or CR + LF
Number of receive data bytes Set the number of receive data bytes between 1 and 256 bytes (according to the DM Area settings)
during reception when frame structure 1 or 2 above is used.
Sending messages TXDU(256) instruction ∗3
Receiving messages RXDU(255) instructions ∗3
Maximum message length Sending and receiving: Up to 259 bytes including the start code and end code (up to 256 bytes excluding start/end codes)
Data conversion No conversion
Communications protocol None
When the TXD (236), TXDU (256) instruction is executed, after the send delay time, the data is sent from the port. ∗3
Message delay time 0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms)
(Can be set in 10-ms units depending on the DM Area settings)
Receive counter The number of data bytes (0 to 256) received at the port can be counted.
• CJ1W-SCU1-V1
The reception buffer is cleared immediately after executing the RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instruction
Reception buffer clear
• CJ1W-SCU2
timing
With the DRXDU(261) instruction, you can specify whether the reception buffers will be cleared or not in a setting in the DM Area
words allocated to the Unit. ∗3
∗1. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the remote device.
∗2. The CJ1W-SCU2 is required for communications at 115,200 or 230,400 bps.
∗3. The DTXDU(262) and DRXDU(261) instructions can be used only when a CJ1W-SCU2 Serial Communications Unit is connected to a CJ2
CPU Unit with unit versions of 1.1 or later.
Modbus-RTU Specifications
Item Description
Mode Modbus-RTU slave mode ∗1
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps ∗2
Baud rate
Default: 19,200 bps
Data length 8 bits
Odd, even, or none
Parity
Default: Even
Odd or even parity:1 bit
Stop bits
No parity : 2 bits
Address setting range 1 to 247 (broadcasting: 0)
Slave address : 1 byte
Function code : 1 byte
Frame format
Data : 0 to 252 bytes
CRC code : 2 bytes
∗1. Modbus-ASCII mode is not supported.
7
CJ1W-SCU
Supported Commands
Function code
Function Modbus name
(hexadecimal)
01 Reads multiple bits from the CIO, Work, Holding, or Auxiliary Area of I/O memory. Read Coils
02 Reads multiple bits from the CIO Area of I/O memory. Read Discrete Inputs
03 Reads multiple words from the DM or EM Area of I/O memory. Read Holding Registers
04 Reads multiple words from the CIO, Work, Holding, or Auxiliary Area of I/O memory. Read Input Registers
05 Writes a bit in I/O memory. Write Single Coil
06 Writes a word in the DM or EM Area of I/O memory. Write Single Register
08 Executes an echoback test. Diagnostic
0F Writes multiple bits in I/O memory. Write Multiple Coils
10 Writes multiple words in the DM or EM Area of I/O memory. Write Multiple Registers
8
CJ1W-SCU
Unit Version and Manufacturing Dates/Lot Numbers
CJ1W-SCU1-V1
Classification Type Model May 2004 June 2004 November 2005
Serial Communications Per-Ver 1.2 Unit version 1.3
CPU Bus Units CJ1W-SCU41-V1 (Lot No:040617 and later)
Units
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 — — Unit version 1.3 ∗
Support CX-Programmer WS02-CXPC1-EV Ver.4.0 or earlier Ver.5.0 Ver.6.1
Software CX-Protocol WS02-PSTC1-E Ver.1.4 or earlier Ver.1.5 Ver.1.7
∗ Available April, 2006
CJ1W-SCU2
Classification Type Model September 2009
CJ1W-SCU22
Serial Communications
CPU Bus Units CJ1W-SCU32 Unit version 2.0
Units
CJ1W-SCU42
Support CX-Programmer WS02-CXPC-V Ver.8.3
Software CX-Protocol WS02-PSTC1-E Ver.1.9
Function Support by Unit Version

Function Support by Unit Version 2.0
Product Unit version 2.0
CJ1W-SCU22
CJ Series Serial Communications Units CJ1W-SCU32
CJ1W-SCU42
Serial gateway Supported
1:1 links Supported
Host Link Host Link compatible device
Supported
selection
No-protocol Supported
Functions
Link word specification data On-request I/O refreshing

exchange timing Continuous I/O refreshing
Protocol
Reception buffer processing for
macro Select to clear or hold contents.
PMCR(260) instruction execution
Baud rate (bps) 230,400 supported.
Standard system protocol additions Supported
MODBUS slave protocol added Supported
Function Support by Unit Version 1.2 and Unit Version 1.3

Earlier version
Product Unit version 1.2 Unit version 1.3
(pre-ver. 1.2)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU21 CJ1W-SCU21-V1
(Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
CJ Series Serial Communications Units — — CJ1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
CJ1W-SCU41 CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Serial gateway Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
1:1 links Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
Host Link Host Link compatible device
Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
selection
No-protocol Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
On-request I/O refreshing
Functions
Link word specification data On-request I/O refreshing

On-request I/O refreshing only Continuous I/O refreshing
exchange timing Continuous I/O refreshing
Protocol Reception buffer processing for Select to clear or hold contents.
Clearing only Select to clear or hold contents.
macro PMCR(260) instruction execution (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
38,400 max.
57,600 supported.
Baud rate (bps) (57,600 and 115,200 not 57,600 supported.
supported)
Standard system protocol additions Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
MODBUS slave protocol added — — Supported
Note: Make sure that a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later is used when using no-protocol mode.
9
CJ1W-SCU
External Interface
Serial Communications Units provide two communications ports for external interface: RS-232C and/or RS-422A/485 ports.
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/SCU22 CJ1W-SCU41-V1 CJ1W-SCU42

SCU21-V1 SCU41-V1 SCU42
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
Indicators Indicators Indicators
RDY ERH SD2 RD2 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 RDY ERH SD2 RD2
Terminating Terminating
TERM TERM
3456 UNIT OFF ON 3456 UNIT resistance switch OFF ON 3456 UNIT resistance switch
F 012
F 012
F 012
789A
789A
789A
BCDE NO. BCDE NO. BCDE NO.
WIRE WIRE
Unit number 2 4 Unit number 2 4
Unit number
switch switch switch
PORT1 PORT1 PORT1
(RS422 (RS422
/485) 2-wire/4-wire
RDA- /485) 2-wire/4-wire
switch switch
Port 1: RDA+
RS-232C Port 1: SDA-
Port1:
RS-422A/485 SDA+
RS-422A/485
FG
terminal-block
Connector
PORT2 PORT2 PORT2
Port 2: Port 2: Port 2:

RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU32
SCU31-V1 SCU32
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
Indicators Indicators
RDY ERH SD2 RD2 TER2 RDY ERH SD2 RD2 TER2
TERM
Terminating TERM
Terminating
OFF ON 3456 UNIT resistance switch OFF ON 3456 UNIT resistance switch
F 012
F 012
789A
789A
NO. NO. Magnified view of bottom-right

(for port 1) (for port 1)
BCDE BCDE
WIRE WIRE
2 4 2 4 corner<CJ1W-SCU3 (-V1) only>
PORT1 Unit number PORT1 Unit number
(RS422 switch (RS422 switch
/485) /485)
RDA-
2-wire/4-wire RDA+ 2-wire/4-wire
switch (for port 1) SDA- switch (for port 1)
SDA+
FG
Port 1: Port1:
RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
terminal-block
Connector Terminating
PORT2 PORT2 resistance switch
(RS422 (RS422
/485) (for port 2)
RDA- /485)
2-wire/4-wire switch
Port 2: RDA+ Port2: (for port 2)
RS-422A/485 SDA- RS-422A/485
TERM
SDA+
TERM
terminal-block
OFF ON FG OFF ON Connector
WIRE WIRE
2 4 2 4
10
CJ1W-SCU
Specifications of the RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 port
RS-232C Port
Protocol Host Link Protocol macro 1:N NT Links
Communications
Full-duplex Full-duplex or half-duplex Half-duplex
method
Synchronization Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps ∗1 Standard NT link or high-speed NT link ∗2
Connections 1:1 (1:N is possible using Link Adapters)
Transmission distance 15 m max. ∗3
Interface Complies with EIA RS-232C
Protocol No-protocol Serial Gateway Modbus-RTU

Communications
Full-duplex — —
method
Synchronization — — —
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps ∗1
Connections 1:1 (1:N is possible using Link Adapters)
Transmission
15 m max. ∗3
distance
Interface Complies with EIA RS-232C

∗2. High-speed NT link is only available with Serial Communications Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models,
only standard NT link is available.
∗3. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the
manual for the device being connected to confirm support.
Connector Pin Layout

Pin No. Abbreviation Signal name I/O
1 ∗1 FG Shield —
2 SD Send data Output
3 RD Receive data Input
4 ∗2 RTS (RS) Request to send Output
5 ∗2 CTS (CS) Clear to send Input
6 ∗3 5V Power supply —
7 ∗2 DSR (DR) Data set ready ∗4 Input
8 ∗2 DTR (ER) Data terminal ready Output
9 SG Signal ground —
Shell ∗1 FG Shield —
∗1. Pin No. 1 and the shell are connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply Unit inside of the Serial Communications Unit.
Therefore, the cable shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit.
∗2. The status of the RTS (RS), CTS (CS), DSR (DR), and DTR (ER) signals can be monitored in the words allocated in the CIO Area. For details,
refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations.
∗3. Pin 6 (5 V) is required when the NT-AL001 Link Adapter is connected.
∗4. The DSR signal is used to monitor the signal cable. It can also be used as a CD (carrier detect) signal. (The DSR signal does not affect system
operation, and is available for use by the user.)
Note: Do not connect the 5-V power supply of Pin 6 to any external device other than an NT-AL001 Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device
and the Serial Communications Unit may be damaged.
The following cables are provided for connection to NT-AL001 Link Adapters. We recommend that these cables be used.
NT-AL001 connecting cables: XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
Plug : XM2A-0901 (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent
Hood : XM2S-0911-E (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent
One plug and one hood are provided for each port.
Recommended Cables
UL2426 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
UL2426-SB (MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)

CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
Cable length: 15 m max.
11
CJ1W-SCU
RS-422A/485 Port
Protocol Host Link Protocol macro 1:N NT Links
Communications
Full-duplex Full-duplex or half-duplex Half-duplex
method
Synchronization Start-stop synchronous (asynchronous)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/230,400 bps ∗1 Standard NT link or high-speed NT link ∗2
Connections 1:N (N: 32 Units max.) 1:N (N: 8 Units max.)
Transmission distance 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Interface Complies with EIA RS-485
Protocol No-protocol Serial Gateway Modbus-RTU

Communications
Full-duplex — —
method
Synchronization — — —
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200/ 230,400 bps ∗1
Connections 1:N (N: 32 Units max.)
Transmission distance 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Interface Complies with EIA RS-485

∗2. High-speed NT link is only available with Serial Communications Units manufactured on or after December 20th, 1999. With earlier models,
only standard NT link is available.
Connector Pin Layout (CJ1W-SCU31-V1/SCU41-V1)

1 ∗1 SDA Send data - Output
2 ∗1 SDB Send data + Output
3 NC Not used —
4 NC Not used —
5 NC Not used —
6 ∗1 RDA Receive data - Input
7 NC Not used —
8 ∗1 RDB Receive data + Input
9 NC Not used —
Shell ∗2 FG Shield —
∗1. When 2-wire connections are used, use Pins 1 and 2, or Pins 6 and 8.
∗2. The shell is connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply Unit inside of the Serial Communications Unit. Therefore, the cable
shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit.
Note: With SDA/B or RDA/B, the signal polarity may be reversed by the remote device. Be sure to check the polarity before wiring.
Plug : XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood : XM2S-0911-E (OMRON) or equivalent
One plug and one hood are provided for each port.
Recommended Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P × 7/0.2 (manufactured by Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.)
Cable length: 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. Tbranch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
12
CJ1W-SCU
Connector Pin Layout (CJ1W-SCU32/SCU42)

1 ∗1 RDA Receive data- Input
2 ∗1 RDB Receive data+ Input
3 ∗1 SDA Send data- Output
4 ∗1 SDB Send data+ Output
5 ∗2 FG Shield —
∗1. For 2-wire connections, use either pins 1 and 2 or pins 3 and 4.
∗2. Pin 5 (the shield) is connected to the GR terminal on the Power Supply Unit though the Serial Communications Unit. The cable shield can thus
be grounded by grounding the GR terminal of the Power Supply Unit.
Note: The signal names SDA/B and RDA/B do not always have the same polarity as that shown above. Check the polarity of the external device
before making connections.
Plug: FMC 1.5/5-STF-3.5AU (by Phoenix Contact)
Recommended Cable
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 (by Hirakawa Hewtech)
Cable length: 1,200 m max. (multidrop connections)
13
CJ1W-SCU
CJ1W-SCU22
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/SCU31-V1/SCU41-V1
31 65
SCU21-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1
RDY ERH SD2 RD2
2 34 5 UNIT
6 78 9
01
AB C
NO.
PORT1
90
PORT2
Note: The appearance varies with the model.
CJ1W-SCU32
81.9
31 65
SCU32
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
RDY ERH SD2 RD2 TER2
TERM
OFF ON 3456 UNIT
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
2 4
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
RDA-
RDA+
SDA-
SDA+
90
FG
PORT2
(RS422
RDA- /485)
RDA+
SDA-
SDA+
TERM
FG OFF ON
WIRE
2 4
CJ1W-SCU42
81.9
31 65
SCU42
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
RDY ERH SD2 RD2
TERM
OFF ON 3456 UNIT
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
2 4
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
90
FG
PORT2
14
CJ1W-SCU
Related Manuals
Name Cat. No Contents
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series
CS1W-SCB-V1
CS1W-SCU-V1 Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit and Boards to perform serial
CJ1W-SCU2 W336 communications with external devices, including the usage of standard sys-
CJ1W-SCU-V1 tem protocols for OMRON products.
Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications
Units Operation Manual
Overview and features
CJ-series CJ2 CPU Basic system configuration
CJ2H-CPU6-EIP Part nomenclature and functions
W472
CJ2H-CPU6 Mounting and setting procedure
Unit Hardware User’s Manual Remedies for errors
Also refer to the Software User’s Manual
(W473).
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPUH-R
CJ1G/H-CPUH
Provides an outlines of and describes the design, installation, maintenance,
CJ1G-CPUP W393
and other basic operations for the CJ-series PLCs.
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1M-CPU
CS/CJ/NSJ-series
CJ2H-CPU6-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6
CS1G/H-CPUH
CS1G/H-CPU-V1
Describes each programming instruction in detail.
CJ1G/H-CPUH W474
Also refer to the Software User’s Manual (W473) when you do programming.
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1M-CPU
NSJ-(B)-G5D
NSJ-(B)-M3D
Instructions Reference Manual
CS1G/H-CPU-EV1
CS1G/H-CPUH
CS1D-CPUH
CS1D-CPUS
CJ1G-CPU
CJ1M-CPU
CJ1G-CPUP
CJ1G/H-CPUH
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communications commands
CS1W-SCB-V1 W342
used with CS/CJseries PLCs.
CS1W-SCU-V1
CJ1W-SCU-V1
CP1H-X-
CP1H-XA-
CP1H-Y-
NSJ-(B)-G5D
NSJ-(B)-M3D
Communications Commands
Reference Manual
CXONE-ALC-V/ALD-V
W463 Installation and overview of CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual
SYSMAC WS02-CX-V Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer for all functionality
W446
CX-Programmer Operation Manual except for function blocks.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol macros as communi-
W344
CX-Protocol Operation Manual cations sequences to communicate with external devices.
CXONE-ALC-V/
Describes operating procedures for the CX-Integrator Network Configuration
CXONE-ALD-V W464
Tool for CS-, CJ-, CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
CX-Integrator Operation Manual
15
Standard-type Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
XW2B CSM_XW2B_DS_E_2_1
Simplifies Connector and terminal

block replacement, and requires less
in-panel wiring.
• Mount to DIN Track or via screws.
• MIL Flat Cable Connectors and Multi-pole, Square
Connectors are standard.
• Terminal blocks available with either M3 or M3.5 screws.
• Connecting Cables for Programmable Controllers
available (sold separately).
Connectors
Type Terminal Block Connector No. of poles Appearance Model
20 XW2B-20G4
34 XW2B-34G4
Terminal block with
40 XW2B-40G4
M3 screws
50 XW2B-50G4
60 XW2B-60G4
Flat Cable
20 XW2B-20G5
34 XW2B-34G5
Terminal block with
40 XW2B-40G5
M3.5 screws Flat Cable Connectors
*1 50 XW2B-50G5
60 XW2B-60G5
Twin-connector 40 XW2B-40G5-T
Terminal block with

M3.5 screws
Daisy Chain 20 XW2B-20G5-D
20 XW2B-20Y4
Terminal block with
34 XW2B-34Y4
M3 screws
Multi-pole, Square Connector 50 XW2B-50Y4
Plugs
*2 20 XW2B-20Y5
Multi-pole, Square
Connector 34 XW2B-34Y5
Terminal block with 50 XW2B-50Y5
M3.5 screws
Multi-pole, Square Connector 20 XW2B-20X5
Plugs 34 XW2B-34X5
*2 XW2B-50X5
50
Multi-pole, Square Connector

Terminal block with
Board I/O Plugs 40 XW2B-40F5-P
M3.5 screws
*3
*1. Flat Cable Connectors have one polarity slot.

*2. These Plugs and Sockets are made by Honda Tsushin Kogyo.
*3. These Plugs are made by Fujitsu.
Accessories (Order Separately)

Connecting Cables for Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units
For details on the Connecting Cable used between XW2B Daisy Chain-type Connectors, refer to the XW2Z datasheet.
1
XW2B
Ratings and Specifications
Type XW2B-@@G@ XW2B-@@Y@ XW2B-40F5-P

Item Flat Cable Units Multi-pole, Square-connector Units Board I/O Unit
Rated current 1A
Rated voltage 125 VAC
Insulation resistance 100 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 500 VAC for 1 min (leakage current: 1 mA max.)
Ambient operating
0 to 55°C
temperature
Flat Cable Units with a Terminal Block with M3 Screws

XW2B-@@G4 Flat Cable Connector (MIL Plug)
3.5 A 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
5.08 Terminal Block
(45.3)
38.1
Wiring Diagram 20.5
Flat Cable 2 4 N-2 N

Connector DIN Track lock
(mating side) 1 3 N-3 N-1
Dimensions
Triangular mark
Model No. of poles Dimension A (mm) Applicable Connector models *1
XW2B-20G4 20 67.5 XG4A-2031
XW2B-34G4 34 112.5 XG4A-3431
XW2B-40G4 40 135.0 XG4A-4031
1 3 N-3 N-1
Terminal Block XW2B-50G4 50 157.5 XG4A-5031
(terminal side) XW2B-60G4 60 180.0 XG4A-6031
2 4 N-2 N
*Flat Cable Connectors have one polarity slot.
Note: All pins on the Flat Cable Connector correspond Note: Terminal block pitch is 5.08 mm.
1-to-1 to the terminal of the same number on the Use a wire size between 0.3 and 1.25 mm2 (AWG22 to AWG16).
terminal block as shown above. The wire insertion holes are 1.8 × 2.5 (H × W) mm.
Applicable Connectors (order separately)
Model Flat Cable Connectors, MIL Sockets with Discrete-wire IDC Connectors, Double-row Sockets
Strain Reliefs Connectors *1 Semi-covers *2
XG5M-2032-N
XW2B-20G4 XG4M-2030-T XG5S-1001
XG5M-2035-N
XG5M-3432-N
XW2B-34G4 XG4M-3430-T XG5S-1701
XG5M-3435-N
XG5M-4032-N
XW2B-40G4 XG4M-4030-T XG5S-2001
XG5M-4035-N
XG5M-5032-N
XW2B-50G4 XG4M-5030-T XG5S-2501
XG5M-5035-N
XG5M-6032-N
XW2B-60G4 XG4M-6030-T XG5S-3001
XG5M-6035-N
*1. Either the XG5M-@@32-N or the XG5M-@@35-N may be used.
*2. Each Connector requires two Semi-covers.
2
XW2B
Flat Cable Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws

XW2B-@@G5 Flat Cable Connector (MIL Plug)
3.5 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
7 Terminal 7
8.5 7.3 Block
43.5 (45.3)
Wiring Diagram 20.5
Flat Cable 2 4 N-2 N

Connector
DIN Track lock
(mating side) 1 3 N-3 N-1
Dimensions
Triangular mark
Model No. of poles Dimension A (mm) Applicable Connector models *
XW2B-20G5 20 112.5 XG4A-2031
XW2B-34G5 34 180.0 XG4A-3431
XW2B-40G5 40 202.5 XG4A-4031
1 3 N-3 N-1
Terminal Block XW2B-50G5 50 247.5 XG4A-5031
(terminal side)
2 4 N-2 N XW2B-60G5 60 292.5 XG4A-6031
Note: All pins on the Flat Cable Connector correspond *Flat Cable Connectors have one polarity slot.
1-to-1 to the terminal of the same number on the Note: Terminal block pitch is 8.5 mm.
terminal block as shown above.
XG5M-2032-N
XW2B-20G5 XG4M-2030-T XG5S-1001
XG5M-2035-N
XG5M-3432-N
XW2B-34G5 XG4M-3430-T XG5S-1701
XG5M-3435-N
XG5M-4032-N
XW2B-40G5 XG4M-4030-T XG5S-2001
XG5M-4035-N
XG5M-5032-N
XW2B-50G5 XG4M-5030-T XG5S-2501
XG5M-5035-N
XG5M-6032-N
XW2B-60G5 XG4M-6030-T XG5S-3001
XG5M-6035-N
3
XW2B
Twin-connector Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws

XW2B-40G5-T Flat Cable Connector (MIL Plug: XG4A-2031 × 2)
3.5 202.5 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
7 8.5 7.3 7
Terminal Block
43.8 (45.3)
2 20.5
Wiring Diagram
DIN Track lock
Flat Cable 2 4 20 22 38 40
Connector
(mating side) 1 3 19 21 37 39
Triangular mark Triangular

mark
1 3 19 21 37 39
Terminal Block
(terminal side)
2 4 20 22 38 40
Note: All pins on the Flat Cable Connector correspond 1-to-1 to the terminal of
the same number on the terminal block as shown above.

XG5M-2032-N
XW2B-40G5-T XG4M-2030-T XG5S-1001
XG5M-2035-N
4
XW2B
Daisy Chain Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws

XW2B-20G5-D Flat Cable Connector (MIL Plug: XG4A-2031 × 2)
3.5 135 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
7 7.3 7
8.5
Terminal Block
43.8 (45.3)
2 20.5
Wiring Diagram
DIN Track lock
Flat Cable 2 20 2 20
Connector
(mating side) 1 19 1 19
Triangular mark
Triangular mark
1 19
Terminal Block
(terminal side)
2 20
Note: All pins on the Flat Cable Connector correspond 1-to-1 to the terminal
of the same number on the terminal block as shown above.

XG5M-2032-N
XW2B-20G5-D XG4M-2030-T XG5S-1001
XG5M-2035-N
5
XW2B
Multi-pole, Square-connector Plug Units with a Terminal Block with M3 Screws

XW2B-@@Y4 Multi-contact Connector (Plug)
3.5 A 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
Terminal Block
5.08
Wiring Diagram (Example for Terminal

38.1
Block with 50 Poles) 2
20.5
DIN Track lock

1 2 3 16 17 18
Multi-contact, Dimensions
Square Connector 19 32
(mating side) Applicable Connector
33 34 35 48 49 50 Model No. of poles Dimension A (mm)
models *
XW2B-20Y4 20 67.5 MR-20RMD2
XW2B-34Y4 34 112.5 MR-34RMD2
XW2B-50Y4 50 157.5 MR-50RMD2
*These Connectors are made by Honda Tsushin Kogyo.
1 3 17 19 47 49 Note: Terminal block pitch is 5.08 mm.
Use a wire size between 0.3 and 1.25 mm2 (AWG22 to AWG16).
Terminal Block The wire insertion holes are 1.8 × 2.5 (H × W) mm.
(terminal side)
2 4 16 18 48 50
Note: All pins on the Multi-pole, Square Connector correspond 1-to-

1 to the terminal of the same number on the terminal block as
shown above.
Model Applicable Connectors *1 Hood *1
MR-20F (soldered)
XW2B-20Y4 MRP-20F01 (crimped) *2 MR-20L
MR-20FW (wrapped)
MR-34F (soldered)
MR-34FW (wrapped)
MR-50F (soldered)
MR-50FW (wrapped)
*1. All applicable Connector Hoods are made by Honda Tsushin Kogyo.
*2. Use MRP-F113 or MRP-F103 crimp terminals made by Honda Tsushin Kogyo.
6
XW2B
Multi-pole, Square-connector Plug Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws
XW2B-@@Y5 Multi-contact, Square Connector (Plug)
3.5 A 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
Terminal Block
8.5 7.3
43.8
Wiring Diagram (Example for Terminal 2
20.5
Block with 50 Poles)
DIN Track lock
Dimensions
1 2 3 16 17 18
Multi-contact, No. of Dimension A Applicable Connector
Model
Square Connector 19 32 poles (mm) models *
(mating side)
XW2B-20Y5 20 112.5 MR-20RMD2
33 34 35 48 49 50
XW2B-34Y5 34 180.0 MR-34RMD2
XW2B-50Y5 50 247.5 MR-50RMD2
Note: Terminal block pitch is 8.5 mm.
1 3 17 19 47 49
Terminal Block
(terminal side)
2 4 16 18 48 50
Note: All pins on the Multi-pole, Square Connector correspond

1-to-1 to the terminal of the same number on the terminal
block as shown above.
MR-20F (soldered)
MR-20FW (wrapped)
MR-34F (soldered)
MR-34FW (wrapped)
MR-50F (soldered)
MR-50FW (wrapped)
7
XW2B
Multi-pole, Square Connector Socket Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws
XW2B-@@X5 Multi-contact, Square Connector (Socket)
3.5 A 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
Terminal Block
8.5 7.3
43.8
Wiring Diagram (Example for 2
20.5
Terminal Block with 50 Poles)
DIN Track lock
Dimensions
33 34 35 48 49 50
Multi-contact, Model No. of poles Dimension A (mm) Applicable Connector models *
Square Connector 19 32
(mating side) XW2B-20X5 20 112.5 MR-20RFD2
1 2 3 16 17 18
XW2B-34X5 34 180.0 MR-34RFD2
XW2B-50X5 50 247.5 MR-50RFD2
1 3 17 19 47 49
Terminal Block
(terminal side)
2 4 16 18 48 50
Note: All pins on the Multi-pole, Square Connector correspond 1-

to-1 to the terminal of the same number on the terminal
block as shown above.
MR-20M (soldered)
XW2B-20X5 MRP-20M01 (crimped) *2 MR-20L
MR-20MW (wrapped)
MR-34M (soldered)
MR-34MW (wrapped)
MR-50M (soldered)
MR-50MW (wrapped)
8
XW2B
Board I/O Units with a Terminal Block with M3.5 Screws

XW2B-40F5-P M2.6 I/O Board Connectors (40-pin Plug)
3.5 202.5 3.5
15.5
29.5
45
Two,
3.5 dia.
7 7.3 7
8.5
Terminal Block
43.8
2
20.5
DIN Track lock

Wiring Diagram Dimensions
FCN-364P040-AU Plug B 1 2 19 20 Model No. of poles Applicable Connectors and Circuits *

(mating side)
A 1 2 19 20 FCN-364P40-AU (Connector)
XW2B-40F5-P 40
FCN-360A1 (Anchor)
*These Connectors and circuits are made by Fujitsu.
1 3 37 39
Terminal Block
(terminal side)
2 4 38 40
FCN361J040-AU (soldered) FCN360C040-
XW2B-40F5-P
FCN363J040-AAU (crimped) B
*1. All applicable Connectors and Covers are made by Fujitsu.
*2. Refer to the OMNUC U Series user's manual for details on the Connecting Cable used between the XW2B-40F5-P and the U-series AC Servo Driver.
9
XW2B
Safety Precautions
Precautions for Correct Use

● Wiring ● Terminal Screw Tightening Torque
• Always turn OFF the power supply before wiring. • Select a tightening torque from the following table when
Otherwise, cables or other conductors can short the connecting wires or crimp terminals to the terminal block.
terminals and cause the Unit to fail.
Tightening torque
• Do not connect or disconnect Connectors with the power Terminal Block
N⋅m
turned ON. Otherwise, it may cause malfunctions. With M3 screws 0.40
● Wiring Terminal Blocks With M3.5 screws 0.59
• Direct Wire Connections with a Terminal Block with M3 ● Mounting Units to and Removing Units from DIN Track
Screws • For terminal blocks with M3 screws, use a flat-heat
1. Use a wire size between 0.3 and 1.25 mm2 (AWG22 to screwdriver like the one shown in the following diagram.
AWG16).
2. Prepare the end of each wire as shown in the following
2.9- to 3.5-mm blade
diagram.
6 mm
Screw slot width: 0.7

3. The wire insertion holes are 1.8 × 2.5 (H × W) mm on the
terminal block with M3 screws. • XW2B Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units can be
• Direct Wire Connections with a Terminal Block with M3.5 mounted side-to-side on DIN Track. The flanges for
Screws mounting screws are located on each side at the bottom of
Round Forked
the XW2B.
3.7 mm dia. • Secure both ends of the XW2B with End Plates.
• When removing the Unit from a DIN Track, insert a flat-head
6.8 mm max. 3.7 mm 6.8 mm max.
screwdriver into the slider and pull the lock out.
Applicable crimp terminals Applicable wires

AWG22 to AWG16
1.25-3.5
(0.30 to 1.25 mm2)
Round
AWG16 to AWG14
2-3.5
(1.25 to 2.0 mm2)
AWG22 to AWG16
1.25Y-3.5
(0.30 to 1.25 mm2)
Forked
AWG16 to AWG14
2Y-3.5
(1.25 to 2.0 mm2)
(With a Terminal Block with M3 Screws)
Round rod Blade
Dia.
t = 0.75
Applicable crimp terminals Applicable wires

TC-05 AWG22 to AWG18
Dia. = 1 (0.30 to 0.75 mm2)
Rod
TC-1.25S AWG22 to AWG16
Dia. = 1.5 (0.30 to 1.25 mm2)
BT1.25-9-1
AWG22 to AWG16
Blade BT1.25-10-1
(0.30 to 1.25 mm2)
W = 2.2
Note: Round rod and blade crimp terminals are made by Nichifu.
10

4 Tech Spec Work 1 and 3 Part El Annex

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 Tech Spec Work 1 and 3 Part El Annex

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tender Documents – Volume 3

Velipoje Sewerage Collection System and Waste Water Treatment Plant

MINISTRY OF PUBLIC WORKS TRANSPORT & TELECOMMUNICATION

GENERAL DIRECTORY OF WATER SUPPLY AND SEWERAGE

Velipoje Sewerage Collection System and Waste Water Treatment Plant

ELECTRICAL AND ELECTROMECHANICAL WORKS

Particular Specifications Rev. 01 2010

Particular Specifications for Electrical Works

Particular Specifications Rev. 01 2010

- Basin Diameter 2000 mm;

EQUALIZATION TANK EQUIPMENT

Particular Specifications Rev. 01 2010

Ultrasonic Level Measurement

FMU40 FMU41 FMU42 FMU43 FMU44

Application Features and benefits

Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Function and system design

Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials

FMU40 9.8" (0.25 m) 16 ft (5 m) 6.5 ft (2 m)

FMU41 13.8" (0.35 m) 26 ft (8 m) 11.5 ft (3.5 m)

FMU42 15.7" (0.4 m) 33 ft (10 m) 16 ft (5 m)

FMU43 23.6" (0.6 m) 50 ft (15 m) 23 ft (7 m)

FMU44 19.7" (0.5 m) 65 ft (20 m) 33 ft (10 m)

Interference echo suppression

Equipment architecture 4 to 20 mA output with HART protocol

Commubox Power supply service adapter

or RN221N display module %

(communication resistor VU331

RMA 422 Bksp Delete

#%& ABC DEF

GHI JKL MNO

System integration using PROFIBUS PA

personal computer e.g. with

System integration using Foundation Fieldbus (FF)

Micropilot M Prosonic M FieldCare

System integration using Rackbus

personal computer PLC

4…20 mA with HART

System integration via Fieldgate

Vendor Managed Inventory

Remote maintenance of measuring equipment

Remote configuration/diagnostics Remote monitoring

Fluid surface Attenuation

Strong turbulence (e.g. stirrers) 10 to 20 dB

Bulk material surface Attenuation

Hard, rough (e.g. rubble) 40 dB

Soft (e.g. peat, dust-covered clinker) 40 to 60 dB

Little dust formation 5 dB

Heavy dust formation 5 to 20 dB

Filling curtain in detection range Attenuation

Temperature difference between Attenuation

range in feet (m)

Example (for FMU 43)

• Dust-covered rubble approx. 50 dB

Operating frequency Sensor Operating frequency

FMU40 approx. 70 kHz

FMU41 approx. 50 kHz

FMU42 approx. 42 kHz

FMU43 approx. 35 kHz

FMU44 approx. 30 kHz

Load HART Minimum load for HART communication: 250 Ω

Output damping Freely selectable, 0 to 255 s